v % NEW PRACTICAL 
 
 HEBREW GRAMMAR 
 
 WITH 
 
 HEBREW-ENGLISH AND ENGLISH-HEBREW 
 EXERCISES 
 
 AND 
 
 A HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY 
 
 BY 
 
 Solomon Doutsch, A. M., Ph. D. 
 
 NEW YORK, 
 LEYPOLDT & HOLT. 
 
 1868 
 

 Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 186.8 by 
 
 SOLOMON DEUTSCH, A. M., Ph. Dr. 
 
 in the Clerk s Office of the District Court of the United States, 
 for the District of Maryland. 
 
 / 
 
 C. W. Schneider cith, Pr., Baltimore, MA. 
 
I S / 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 Although many and valuable Hebrew Grammars have appeared 
 in this country, which in completeness and critical ability have left 
 little to be desired, I yet venture to offer this work to the public, 
 with the expectation that this result of my labors will still be found 
 useful to the Hebrew student. 
 
 jjjfi has been my aim, divesting the Grammar of all extraneous 
 detail, to present it full and complete in every necessary particular. 
 I have especially had in view the wants of those instructing them 
 selves, for whom, as well as for schools, I have endeavored to 
 make this volume a practical introduction to the language of the 
 Old Testament. 
 
 I shall briefly recapitulate the distinctive features of this man 
 ual. 
 
 1. To facilitate the commission of the rules to memory, they 
 have been expressed with all the conciseness consistent with per 
 spicuity. ^ 
 
 2. Believing that exceptions are more properly to be sought 
 in the Lexicon and Critical Commentary, I have noted such irregu 
 larities only as, by their frequency, can claim to be held integral 
 parts of the language. 
 
 3. The illustration of the abstract by the concrete being ne 
 cessary to the clear understanding of the former, the rules have 
 been explained and confirmed by examples, and further elucidated 
 by exercises. 
 
 4. In elaborating these exercises, I have taken great care to se 
 lect valuable sentences, containing either an. interesting historical fact 
 or a sententious moral. The internal character of the passage has 
 been considered as well as its external grammatical form. The 
 Syntactical part is without exercises, the rules being illustrated by 
 examples only. Nevertheless the student will become fully familiar 
 with them by the constant reference made to them in the Etymo 
 logical part. 
 
 5. In the acquisition of a language, the learner, in order to fa 
 miliarize himself with the grammatical forms, should make frequent 
 translations into it from his mother-tongue. To this end English- 
 Hebrew exercises have been prepared, particularly illustrating the 
 rules which they immediately follow, anticipating nothing, but ex- 
 
IV 
 
 actly keeping pace with the student s progress. I have intentionally 
 made the construction of the English sentences conformable to the 
 verbal arrangement of the Hebrew* Where the English construction 
 admits of no change, I have endeavored to aid the student by help 
 of numerals irregularly placed. 
 
 6. The approved results of continental research have been 
 concisely embodied in this volume. Gesenius, Ewald, Fuerst (Lex 
 icon), L. D. Luzzatto (Grammatica della Lingua Ebraica), Naegels- 
 bach, being followed in important points; the latter s arrangement 
 of the declensions has been preserved with slight alterations. ^ 
 
 7. In the Paradigms, presented at the end of the Granmmr, 
 the groundforms are distinguished by asterisks. 
 
 8. Although the words in the Hebrew exercises are transla 
 ted as they occur, a vocabulary is added ; first, to save the stu 
 dent s time and labor in seeking a forgotten word, secondly, that 
 he may refer to it, should he be in doubt as to the form of the 
 word when uninflected. 
 
 To economize space, however, and to refresh the learner s 
 memory with regard to the original sentence, no translations are 
 given, but the student is directed to the number of the exercise* 
 
 9. A Chrestomathy composed of various selections in prose 
 and poetry from the Old Testament is given with a vocabulary 
 consisting of all the words not found in the exercises. 
 
 10. The two vocabularies contain about two thousand different 
 Hebrew words in general use. How large a proportion this is, 
 one can easily perceive, when one considers that the whole number 
 of radical words in the language does not exceed 1867, It is 
 therefore expected that the diligent student in a few months, will be 
 enabled by mastering the Hebrew exercises and the Chrestomathy 
 to read understandingly the less difficult portions of the Old Tes 
 tament. 
 
 By this enumeration it will be readily seen, that the plan in 
 some respects possesses the character of novelty, and it is hoped 
 that this fruit of earnest and zealous exertion will be found accepta 
 ble and useful. 
 
 Baltimore, July 15, 1868. 
 
PART I. 
 
 OF THE ELEMENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER L 
 
 LETTEKS, SOUNDS AND SIGNS. 
 
 1. ALPHABET. 
 
 df 
 1. Twenty-two consonants compose the Hebrew Alphabet. 
 
 FORM. 
 
 NAMK. 
 
 POWER. 
 
 D 
 
 Aleph 
 (3) Beth 
 
 JV3 (* fVjl house) 
 
 a, scarcely audible 
 breathing. 
 
 bh, b 
 
 y 
 
 Q) Giinel 
 
 7DJ ( s 7p| camel) 
 
 g in go 
 
 n 
 
 (1) Daleth 
 
 H/H ( s HTI door ) 
 
 d 
 
 n 
 
 He 
 
 *j"| (the meaning doubtful) 
 
 h in he 
 
 i 
 
 Vav 
 
 ^ (a nail, hook) 
 
 w or v 
 
 r 
 
 Zain 
 
 pf (a weapon) 
 
 z 
 
 n 
 
 Cheth 
 
 J"pn (a fence) 
 
 ch in the German 
 word nach 
 
 B 
 
 Teth 
 
 ]1^D ( a basket) 
 
 t 
 
 t 
 
 Yod 
 
 *i^ (* 1^ hand) 
 
 J in ye 
 
 D 
 
 Final. 
 
 Q) "I Caph 
 
 13 (the hollow of the 
 
 ch or k 
 
 7 Lamed 
 
 D Mem 
 
 3 " ? Nun 
 
 D Samcch 
 
 ox-goad) 1 
 
 ( s D P water) 
 (a fish) 
 
 m 
 ri 
 
 s in sons: 
 
PAIIT I. ELEMENTS. 
 
 FORM. NAME. POWER. 
 
 Ayin ]*y (eye) not pronounced 
 
 Final. 
 
 :)) *] Pe N*2 ( = ,15 mouth) ph, p 
 
 Y Tsade H (a fish hook) ts 
 
 Koph v"]1p (the eye of a needle or k 
 
 1 the back of the head) 
 Resh >H ( * >X 1 = \sn head ) r 
 
 ^ Sllin V*(- WJ tootl^ sh 
 
 / x I iff \ (^ lOOtll) 
 
 C^ Sin s 
 
 D (fl) Tav }fi (a cross mart) th t 
 
 NOTE I. ^ and ,*"] may be respectively compared with the Greek 
 spiritus lenis and asper; H is a deep guttural sound (the German 
 ch); y like X is commonly omitted in reading. The nasal (ng) pro 
 nunciation ofy is incorrect. In the Septuagmt it is sometimes represen 
 ted by the spiritus asper or lenis, sometimes by the Greek Gamma s g. 
 In the Arabic the corresponding letter is a deep rolling guttural 
 (rg), probably the true pronunciation. 
 
 NOTE II. These characters are not the original forms, the pre 
 sent letters not having been adopted, until long after the Babylo 
 nian captivity or according to some a century before Christ, hence 
 this alphabet has been termed, the Assyrian (properly Babylonian) 
 square letter : ^IISTX DfiD and V5^*3 DDD The coins struck 
 
 -: T : * T \: T : 
 
 at the time of the Maccabees and the Samaritan Pentateuch present 
 the ancient Hebrew Characters which are similar to the Phoenician. 
 
 NOTE III. The names of the letters have probably been selected 
 for the sake of the initial sounds. In old Hebrew, Samaritan and 
 Phoenician writing, the forms of the letters resembled the things ex 
 pressed by their names : this resemblance is still partly seen in tin- 
 present alphabet : as ^ a nail, f a weapon, Q il basket, ^ the hol 
 low of the bent hand etc. 
 2. Hebrew is read from the right hand to the left. 
 
 Write the Roman characters corresponding to the fol 
 lowin Hebrew letters : 
 
 --DD nr .] 
 
 DO ,n3t .H313 
 
 ann ^DD nnpTi muy -nSa --i!2D -pn c-n -p 
 
2. DIVISION OF LETTERS. 3 
 
 EXERCISE 2. 
 
 Write the Hebrew letters corresponding to the follow 
 ing Roman characters : 
 
 1, ch, h, k, t, th, s, sh, r, d, p, y, w, g, f, z, tz, n, g, 
 b, ch, Ichn, km, rtz, zr, ytlim, chl, kl, shb, dbktm, 
 hnshrm, bmdbr, gdl, ktn, zvch,,sw, dfalwt, gy, tw, gbth, 
 li/t, nthn. 
 
 2. DIVISION OF LETTERS. 
 
 The letters are divided according to the organs with 
 which they are pronounced into : 
 
 Gutturals 
 
 Palatals 
 
 Linguals 
 
 Dentals or Sibilants, 
 
 Labials 
 
 The letter 1 partakes of both a guttural and dental cha 
 racter. 
 
 EXERCISE 3. 
 
 Give in the following words the names of the letters 
 and the classes to which they belong : 
 
 ICT Vw iWm n-iyi oa^ o i&y nin* nox HD 
 
 SN* i^n Sx maSxi Din 
 
 :nrnoipon 
 
 ^ : astro xn D"i pno 
 
 3. VOWEL - LETTERS AND VOWEL -SIGNS. 
 
 1. The letters ^HN Elievi (a word used to assist the me 
 mory) form a separate class, being called vowel letters, 
 they sometimes representing not consonantal but vowel 
 sounds. , 
 
 "2. Besides these vowel -letters, which generally indicate 
 long vowels, in the 6th century nine vowel signs (nliftJfl 
 or nnipj), were introduced, points and strokes placed, 
 with two exceptions, under the letter, after which they are 
 to be pronounced. Of these nine signs, three represent long 
 vowels, three short and three doubtful. 
 
PART I. ELEMENTS. 
 
 Name. ] 
 
 Kamets H3p 
 
 Voi 
 form. 
 
 T 
 
 eels. 
 
 Power. 
 
 a in father 
 
 Tsere HV 
 
 
 e in there 
 
 Cholem D7in 
 
 
 
 6 in note 
 
 _Skort Vou-els. 
 
 Name. Form. Power. 
 
 Patach 
 
 Seghol 
 
 WTO 
 
 a in sharp 
 e in met 
 
 NAME. 
 
 Doubtful Vowels. 
 
 o in not 
 
 or rather 
 
 u in dull 
 
 Chirek 
 Shurek 
 Kubbuts 
 
 p*Yn 
 
 (ni --p : 
 
 tful Vowel 
 
 FORM. POWER. 
 
 i in machine or i in pin 
 
 u in rule 
 
 u in rule or u in full. 
 
 NOTE I. Cholem is a dot over the ^ as 1 or the *) is omitted 
 and the dot placed above on the left of the consonant : as J| = go, 
 "J * do. Shurek is always placed in the bosom of 1 as J| , The 
 Chirek-point is placed under the letter : as 5 j if * follows it is 
 long, if not, doubtful : O l n g * 3 either long or short i. 
 
 3. The classification of the vowels, according to the three 
 primary vowel sounds, from which they have originated, is 
 also of importance. These are the vowels A (in father) I 
 (in machine) U (in rule), for E and are properly diph 
 thongs : E arising from a + i, from a -[- u. 
 
 = a in father 
 
 or = I in machine 
 
 = a in sharp ! = i in pin 
 
 = e in there 
 
 ^= a in fate 
 
 . = e in met 
 
 1 = u in rule 
 = u or u in full 
 1 or -_^ = o in note 
 = u in dull. 
 
 r 
 
 NOTE II. The above pronunciation is that of the exiled Portu 
 guese and Spanish Jews and their descendants (the Sefaradic); the 
 German Jews pronounce ( T ) like 6 jn home and _ or 1 like o in 
 home or ow in vow; the Polish pronounce () like i in bind, ( 1) 
 almost like oi in spoil, *) almost as the French u, the other vowels 
 like their German brethren. The Sefaradic is considered the pro 
 nunciation most nearly correct. The proper names in the Septua- 
 gint and Josephus and the Hebrew phrases occurring in the New Test 
 ament, are written in accordance with this mode, which is also con 
 firmed by the present usage of the Jews of Palestine and the anal 
 ogy of the Arabic. 
 
3. VOWEL LETTERS & VOWEL SIGNS. 5 
 
 4. These three classes respectively correspond to the vow 
 el-letters 1HN which latter may be considered as their re 
 presentatives : N and H represent the A class, or as it is 
 usually expressed, are homogeneous with this class, is homo 
 geneous with the I class, ) is homogeneous with the U 
 class, 
 
 5, The long vowels of the I and U class, are most fre 
 quently accompanied by their correspondent Vowel-letters. 
 At the end of a word the long vowel, of the A class is 
 usually written with K or H : as NQ , H^ ; in the middle 
 but rarely with N : as HNtfD, and "never with fityrft&Z. 
 *"Y) HIS are compound words and H considered as quies- 
 cing at the end of the first.) Therefore the ^HN are vocal 
 ized, or to use the common expression rest (quiesce) in the 
 following cases : 
 
 in < , * T , i 
 1 in J|, V as 
 
 The consonantal power of K and U is so feeble, that X 
 without the vowel-sign is mute after all the long vowels 
 and final ft without the vowel is mute after Kamets, 
 Tsere, Cholera and Seghol: as 
 
 6. ^ and * when preceded by a heterogeneous vowel-sign, 
 or followed by a vowel or Sh va ( 4) or when having a 
 Dagesh ( 7) retain their consonantal sound: as 11 read vav, 
 U * gev, *fi * chay, Ijj # goy. In the termination V~ the 
 * is silent: as V33 read panav. 
 
 T T 
 
 NOTE 3. 1 preceded by a vowel-sign or Sh va [ 4] or fol 
 lowed by a vowel must be read as i; : as fyy read avon, H1VP 
 mitsvoth, nib read love, 
 
 NOTE 4. When the ^j-jj$ especially ^ arid * accompany their 
 homogeneous vowels, the latter are said to be written fully (JOD) > 
 without the quiescent letters they are said to be written defectively 
 
 (ipn) : niSi nv > Sinr ftiiy , h^ > 
 
 r 
 
 
ft PART I. ELEMENTS. 
 
 NOTE 5. The Cholem-point without ^ is omitted when ty pro 
 ceeds: as in XJlfi? or when > follows: as in 
 
 EXERCISE 4. 
 
 Read the following syllables and words according to 
 the pronunciation of the Portuguese Jews : 
 
 % r n ,n ,b .p o ,p_ ,N* ,K ,K .ij; ^a ^* ^ /^* tp 
 
 EXERCISE 5. 
 
 in *n 7 n Jii n NJ in ^n n n w NJ ID ^ ^ NX 
 
 ND ^D X: VO J|S iS tfS 3 N3 V- V ^ ItO 1 L5 ND 
 
 T. , . T T T ... T 
 
 t n n i >p.- 1^ NV ^ ^ K9 iy NI; 
 
 ,in *n xn ^ 
 
 EXERCISE 6. 
 
 33 3N 3N* 
 
 .nil 11 n n? pS Tjin t\)y D.I D^ DU 
 
 . EXERCISE 7. 
 
 vS iji vS vS ^S nS ^n s S ^ ^ ^ "o nj ^ 
 
 D 1 ?^ 33# S^2D Tj^h n?t? H^ O V V ^D H 
 
 n ptrrr f^ n 1^7 p^y n^ p ng^ p ij;j? S^i^ 
 
 IB no ^TD nb f cn n Ti 
 
 - T - T - T V 
 
 EXERCISE 8. 
 
 17*17x91 vnxpi irni iip ^ip np ip vj; pj; 
 .rte Xi ir w ^n iS^ 01:01 nin rvn m HI 
 
 * - 
 
4. KH VA. 7 
 
 EXERCISE 9. 
 
 Write the following syllables and words in Hebrew 
 characters: ye, ya, bo, ki f ztl, wu, til, to, ra, ril, bin, pi v, 
 gav, bechi, gau, clodi, vav, zodu, bara, paninu, tuvecha. 
 gorolenu, yagllil, yosher, moshel, bosem, shalosh, love, 
 kol [defectively] kol [fully] sbomer [fully] choshev [de 
 fectively] slil [fully] pe [defectively] nazid [fully]. 
 
 4. SH VA. 
 
 1. At the beginning or in the middle of a word the 
 vowelless consonant also receives a sign, two dots (:) de 
 nominated: Sh va tfW (for $}& emptiness) or $3$ (for 
 
 N^p* fissure, gap, i. e. bare of vowel): as ^bj^ , Jlbyp Final 
 *J ftid two vowelless consonants at the end of a word re 
 ceive the 8h va: as *lh , ip p J hence also a letter with 
 Dagesh-forte ( 7): as 
 
 2. The Sh va under the initial consonant of a word or 
 syllable is called y% KV? vocal Sh va, because it indicates 
 
 a slight vowel sound, like an obscure or .half e ; as 7tOp 
 read K tol. Sh va under the final consonant of a sylable is 
 silent and termed therefore Sl,1 fcOtJ* silent Sh va. 
 
 3. Sh va is only given to a consonant and never to the 
 when they represent vowels or quiesce: as n ^n 
 
 NOTE I. Vocal Sh va for the most part originating from the 
 dropping of a vowel [ 14, II. Rejection] retained in pronunciation 
 
 an aftersonnd [Nacnklang] of that original vowel, which was indi 
 cated by the addition of this vowel to the Sh va : as D*JJ* "Tp for 
 D CHp from & *-jp ; 3H_n for ^Htl from ^Hj ; thus always with 
 gutturals: Jl^DN from |- CN D uHH from V^n, Seethe next 
 
 T v: T T: 
 
 and Note. 
 
 NOTE II. On the distinction of vocal and silent Sh va see 11. 
 
 EXERCISE 10. 
 
 rnirrr r\m rin^;. yi3 niS? nir ny D ID 
 
PART I. ELEMENTS, 
 
 5. COMPOSITE SH VA. 
 
 When the vowelless initial consonant of a word or sylla 
 ble is one of the gutturals ^hPTX ( 2) a short vowel (-), 
 (-) or ( T ) is added to the Sh va, to indicate a more dis 
 tinct sound, as a half a, e or o. This Sh va is called 
 composite Sh va (compounded with a vowel) or iltDPf Cha- 
 tbeph (rapid) from its rapid utterance. 
 These are: -= Chateph-Pattach 
 w Chateph-Seghol 
 T= Chateph-Kamets Hf"j 
 
 NOTE, In a few instances the compound Sh vas are also written 
 under other consonants : as 
 
 EXERCISE 11. 
 
 ro? i\ 
 n nn 
 
 n^is ori 
 nran 
 
 6. PATACH FURTIVE. 
 
 The Patach (-) under the gutturals H y and H [H 
 with a dot called Mappik 7] at the end of a word is 
 not read after the letter as usual, hut before it : as (TH 
 read ruach, (1H read reach, JlllJ roa( l gahoahh. This 
 Patach does not helong to the form of the word, therefore 
 it falls away when the word is lengthened: as (TH* ITn. 
 It is called Patach furtive HDI^ (1113 * because its position 
 and pronunciation are, as it were, illegitimate. 
 EXERCISE 12. 
 
 yh rb 
 
7. DAGESII AND MAPPIK. 9 
 
 nin rr& rnV n in jn jn 
 
 7. DAGESH AND MAPPIK. 
 
 1. The six letters nMIJD (HS^D) as initial or me 
 dial letters after a consonant entirely vowelless, [a conso 
 nant with a silent Sh va] represent the hard sound of each 
 letter : b, g, d, k, p, t, which is indicated by a point 
 within, called Dagesh Lene 7p ^"1 R#jn puncture, from 
 the Chald. verb 0*1 to pierce with appoint] as: JJ, npl^V 
 
 2. If a vowel sound [a vowel with or without a quies 
 cent letter] or a vocal Sh va precede them, their pronun 
 ciation is softened or aspirated, like bh or v, gh, dh, kh 
 or the German ch, ph or f, th ; the Dagesh is then omitted : 
 
 as * nyr, Tjnrp TT?- 
 
 3. When the word ending with a vowel is separated by 
 one of the distinctive accents ( 9) from a following word, 
 commencing with one of the DMI^!} > the vowel cannot 
 affect the pronunciation, so that the nD1JQ retain their 
 original hard sounds and have the Dagesh : as 
 
 The Dagesh also remains after a vowel sound, if the word 
 * precedes : as D D^3 Hi IT or when two of the letters 
 come together: as J*TJ ^3, 
 
 4. A point in any medial letter / except "IJNinNj that is im 
 mediately preceded by a vowel, indicates the doubling of this 
 letter : as 13N = *P9^ This point is called Dagesh forte, 
 
 
 
 NOTE. Dagesh forte in the fifiD*T!Q at the same time doubles and 
 hardens the letter : as 0*3*} = rabbim. 
 
 5. A point in final Jl serves to determine its consonant 
 al power and is called D iDD Mappik, (i. e. causing to be 
 pronounced) : as IT? = lohh. 
 
 6. H and the rest of 1HN never receive a Dagesh or 
 
 Mappik, when quiescent. 2 
 
 S ub?n ^ Avti^ta \H^c^^^>^K C tfeU iMy ft 
 
 
 f 
 
 A -J* J* .t-/ I 
 
10 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 NOTE. The dot in ?| represents Dagesh, when the preceding con 
 sonant has a vowel, otherwise the Shurek-point : as Jl^V > Dip rea( l 
 tsivva, kavvam. TltJV. 1U read shur, gur. 
 
 NOTE V. On Dagesh forte conjunctive see 9, I. Note. 
 
 EXERCISE 13. 
 Distinguish Dagesh forte from Dagesh lene. 
 
 TBD 
 
 JJ3 
 
 EXERCISE 14. 
 Place Dagesh lene in the nM^JJQ where required. 
 
 1 .DID ru *V5 nn$*i .m^p nnn) liw nr?n 
 
 .13331^530? 
 
 onehn .bnir 
 
 NOTE. The Sh vas under the letters distinguished by asterisks 
 are silent. 
 
 8. SYLLABLES. 
 
 1. The numher of syllables in a word is determined by 
 the number of its vowels: as rWfrT)3 = two Syllables, 
 == three S. 
 
 NOTE. Composite Sh va is considered as a vocal Sh va and not 
 as a vowel. On vocal Sh va with regard to Metheg see 9, 7. 
 
 2. Every syllable begins with one or two consonants, 
 but in the latter case the first consonant must have vocal 
 Sh va: as 
 
8. SYLLABLE?. 11 
 
 NOTE. The single exception is *\ a u for ) ,,and" (see 12, 7, b): 
 
 3. Syllables are either open, dosed, double closed or 
 sharpened. 
 
 a. Open syllables end with a vowel : as 
 
 b. Closed syllables end with a consoant : as 
 
 c. Double closed syllables end with two consonants: 
 
 d. Sharpened syllables end with a consonant, with which 
 the following syllable begins: as 7tpp = kit-tcl. 
 
 4. The vowel of unaccented ( 9) closed syllables is al- 
 
 > 
 
 ways short : as DJT1 read, wayyakom. 
 
 The vowel of unaccented open syllables is always long : 
 as K*13 read: bara. 
 
 TT 
 
 But both if accented may contain indifferently, long or 
 
 >l " t> 
 
 short vowels : as D?1J^ read : olam, T| 7p 
 
 The double closed and sharpened syllables have most 
 frequently, even when accented, short vowels : as JT7tbp > ^.Pr* 
 NOTE. The Pause ( 9, 11.) forms an exception to this rule* 
 
 EXERCISE 15. 
 
 Determine the different syllables in the following words 
 and whether they require long or short vowels: 
 
 -arao arm nstr avh rn ip naftn yyn xrmn 
 
 *r : : T T T T | ; " T T 
 
 nn btf nn vSk n^ n5 w ft 3 
 
 -bgi Dip hy_ n^pprr ninn n^ K5 fah] p^n-^j; xv 
 n ro nin^ nxo tr Ni nha;i nnoy 
 
 T "" I T ; * * T I T T -; 
 
 NOTE. The Sh vas under the asterisked letters are vocal. The 
 sign > is used to represent the position of the accent. 
 
 t>. ACCENTS, MKTHEG, MAKKEF. 
 1. Two or even more words having hotwcen them a hor- 
 
12 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 izontal stroke : as DID" ? > VIST 7J7 are read in connection 
 and considered as one word. The horizontal stroke is called 
 D Makkef (conjunction). 
 
 NOTE. Makkef, to connect words more closely, is wont to im 
 press a dagesh, called p^fT 1 ! Condenser, on the word following after 
 rVpH iTp as: Dlt-rnO srVITTl?- Dagesh without Makkef 
 after a word accented on the penult ending in H , ft , J"| or ff 
 
 is called DlPTO JinX coming from afar : as Tl7 i"lty Tne 
 
 | T T IT v * 
 
 modern grammarians call it Dagesh-forte conjunctive. 
 
 2. Every word, except when connected with the following 
 by Makkef, receives an accent, which marks the tone-syl 
 lable in the word; as DTiStf aO3 n^ JOS, 
 
 3. Most of the words have the accent on the last sylla 
 ble and are termed IH/D (from below) ; words with the 
 accent on the one before the last (penult) are termed 7 #?D 
 (from above.) 
 
 4. The principal tone can only rest on one of the two 
 last syllables, therefore, if the word is lengthened at the 
 end, the tone is thrown forward according to the length 
 of the addition: as ifn. DHIH. 
 
 5. Besides the principal accent there is a secondary ac 
 cent, a small perpendicular stroke (i) on the left of a vowel, 
 denominated JflD Metheg (bridle). The design of iihe Me- 
 theg is embodied in its name : it is intended to restrain the 
 voice, to prevent too hasty a passage over the vowel or its 
 connection with the following vowelless consonant: as ^ "UT 
 
 & :|T 
 
 read: sha-r tsu. Hence Sh va following Metheg is always 
 vocal. 
 
 6. Metheg regularly stands in the second open syllable 
 before the tone, provided its vowel is original and not changed 
 from a Sh va, and again in the fourth, if the word have 
 so many: as J^**fl , JTiiiDfinDI A closed syllable or one 
 
 : 
 
 XTm fk> *it*/ifc* *; 
 
 .... 
 
9. ACCENTS, METHEG, MAKKES. 13 
 
 with a vowel not original, is always without a Metheg : as 
 B^?^ ; ngtol Uor 1 cf. 12. 7, b. 
 
 7. With regard to Metheg vocal Sh va is considered as 
 a vowel and forms a syllable, therefore npj#|^ &V* * 
 
 8. The accents, [D O^t? tastes, i. e. criteria of the sense, 
 or ttto JP modulations, i. e. musical notes, from JjQ to play 
 on a stringed instrument, to sing] 26 in number, are a 
 species of musical notes or signs for regulating a sort of 
 cantillation with which the Jews, since the oldest times, 
 were accustomed to accompany the public reading of the 
 Law and Sections from the Prophets (Haphtaroth) . 
 
 This cantillation being strictly subordinate to the sense 
 of the proposition and to its logical connection, the accents 
 also serve to show the mutual relation of words and to in 
 dicate the connections and pauses to be made in reading, 
 hence their general division into : D jTp^D Distinctives 
 and DHSntp Conjunctives. 
 
 9. The distinctive^ are divided according to the longer 
 or shorter pauses marked or governed by them into : Em 
 perors, Class I. Kings, Class II. Dukes, Class III, Counts, 
 
 Class IF. 
 
 u |- CLASS I. 
 
 1) Silluk pY?p or. p1D3 f]lD end of the verse : as J 
 (* i) two perpendicular points between two verses and the 
 sign of Metheg at the tonesyllable. 2) Athnach ("QfiN as 
 D"Jtf Athnach divides the verse into two parts either sen r 
 
 A T T 
 
 tences or clauses. In the latter case the clauses respectively 
 consist of those words, which are more intimately related: as 
 pfcO riXlD^H HK DTiS^ 105 n>:?>03 In. the be 
 ginning God created the heaven and the eartn: the heaven 
 and the earth, as the object, being divided by Athnach from 
 the antecedent, containing the subject and predicate. A 
 simple sentence never takes A. Of. Gen. 1, 3, 6, 8. 
 
 CLASS II. 
 
 3) Seghol Tttp : as CHK divides the first member of the 
 sentence into two parts, standing between the first word 
 
14 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 and the word with Athnach. Its position is always over the 
 last letter. Of. Gen. I, 7. 
 
 4) Zakeph Katon JltDf) *]J2J ) as 
 
 5) Zakeph Gadhol Sll| f|j2J ) as 
 
 form smaller divisions either before or after Athnach. Of. 
 Gen. 1, 44. 
 
 6) Tiphcha NTOp: as D"1X possessing less separating 
 power than the preceding: always placed under the last 
 word before Silluk or Athnach or before the last but one. 
 Of. Gen. 1, 6. 
 
 CLASS. III. 
 
 *7) R bhia J*!n as : D"1K a point over the middle of a 
 letter, distinguished by this position from Cholem over its 
 end. R bhia halves the semi-clause terminating in Seghol, 
 
 Zakeph and Tiphcha : as Vj-fl >3 "1.9K*! ITTliT vStf #n 
 And Judah stepped near unto him, and said, Oh my Lord ! 
 
 Gen. 44, 18, vfy DO2f4Pr Sb 1 ? pgKO^ *]& VlT^ And 
 Joseph could not refrain himself before all them that stood 
 
 by him. JJJ Jfp ^ *pl3 - H3 njpK n^ 1^|W3 And he 
 gave him (to wife) Asenath the daughter of Potiphera 
 priest of On. Gen. 41, 45. 
 
 8) Zarka ND^It as 3"]^ ) ^ >0 ^ 1 over tn 
 
 The latter 
 
 9) 
 
 distinguished from Kadma the 
 
 same in form. If the word is TO two Pashtas are used : 
 
 Kadma is always placed on the tonesyllable. 
 10) T blr ^3J1 as D1X ) These two and Zarka and Pashta 
 
 11) Geresh tfih]| as D divide th 
 
 T T terminating with any of the tour 
 
 preceding accents: 
 
 Zarka precedes -Seghdl: B^3^ft^ .*^C* H^- 
 And Joseph took them both. Gen. 48, 13. 
 
 Pashta precedes Zakeph : 7^f H Dl* 1 ? HS^l 
 
 And he rested on the seventh day. Gen. 2,2. 
 
9. ACCENTS, METIIEG, MAKKEF. 15 
 
 T blr precedes Tiphcha : 
 
 He and the men that were with him. Gen. 24, 54. 
 Geresh precedes K bhia : rTTin? V^N BW\ 
 
 Then Judah stepped near unto him. Gen, 44, 18. 
 
 12) Y thibhDTV as: D"JN stands a little before the first 
 letter and is distinguishable by this position from Mahp- 
 ach, the latter standing immediately beneath the letter to 
 
 which it belongs. 
 
 CLASS IV. 
 
 13) T lisha Gh dhola nSlI^ W$fa as DIN always over 
 the first letter. The other distinctives, the separating power 
 of which is of no perceivable consequence to the sense are : 
 
 14) Shalsheleth t^ffih& as D1K over the tonesyllable. 
 
 p 
 
 15) Paser *"\[|) as D"JN over the tonesyllable. 
 
 QP 
 
 16) Karne Phara rn$ ^"jp as D"1K over the last letter. 
 
 ,* 
 1*7) G rashayim D^H^l as D"JNt over the tonesyllable. 
 
 18) P sik ) p^DS 
 
 L ganneh , J^L" D ^ ? P cl Tendicular stroke 
 ^ 01 iTan;7 between two words. 
 
 The Conjunctive accents are: 
 
 19) Merka ND")5 20) Munach TtflD 21) Merka Kh phula 
 
 ilSlsD? N5"|9 22) Mahpach T]3fl5 23) Darga XjTF\ 24) 
 Kadma NDljJ 25) Yerach ben YomO lOV j? rh* 26) T lisha 
 K tanna^Dp Ntt ^Sp over the end of the last letter. 
 
 10. The distinctives of Class I. denote the longest pauses, 
 which may be compared to our period and colon ; Class II. 
 to Colon and Semicolon ; Class III. to Semicolon and 
 Comma ; Class IV. to Comma and half Comma. 
 
 11. The distinctives of Class I. and some of Class II. 
 by their strong accentuation change short vowels into long and 
 very frequently Sli va into a vowel : as */*]^ earth **)# 
 
 riT thy hand -- HT 
 
 I :T IAVT 
 
 A word so accented is said to stand in Pause. 
 
16 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 12. For the sake of completeness, we here give the rules 
 for the position of the accent, though they will not yet he 
 fully understood hy the beginner and must therefore he 
 passed over for the present. 
 
 I. Nouns have the tone on the last syllable : 
 
 a. When ending with a long vowel both in open and closed 
 
 > > > 
 
 syllables: as *O*1 ^^? coming, but HN3 she came. 
 
 NOTE. The participle is in this respect considered as a noun. 
 
 b. When ending with a short vowel, that stands for a long 
 one: as ylf\ for JWh- 
 
 c. Feminine nouns, that change their long vowel in the 
 
 > > 
 
 st. const, into a short one : as fTl^D from JTTJJp 
 
 d. Nouns of which the two last syllables are closed: as 7H3- 
 
 e. Nouns which end with Jl preceded by a long vowel: 
 
 as rnro- 
 
 /. Nouns with the following Suffixes : as 
 
 . Fer&s in the Pret. form with the afformatives DI1> ff): as 
 
 DJ&eR 1P^|? 
 . Verbs in the Pret. form with Vav. Conv. : as m\) but 
 
 n^pp r v w^J ^t %n?^v 
 
 NOTE. The verbs N"? and JT7 form exceptions to A.: as 
 
 II. The following have the tone on the penult : 
 i. All the nouns, of which the last vowel is a helping 
 Seghol or Patach (a class of words called Segholates) : 
 
 . Words ending with Patach furtive: as |Tn J?| 
 . Words ending with D r~ (d^al form): as D?6 
 
( J. ACCENT?, METIIEG, MAKKEF. 17 
 
 . Verbs in the Pret. form with the affirmatives fl, Tl> 13 : 
 
 m 
 as 
 
 ft. The regular verbs in Hif. and those of V J? and J?"^ in 
 Kal, Nif. and Hif. with the affirmatives j"T 1> V : 
 
 as nap, m 
 
 o. Verbs with the surf. H- in, 11 1 ?]. 
 
 p. Paragogic H or il attached to nouns, pronouns and 
 
 adverbs: as iT^A, TOH , H^V, HjS- 
 
 NOTE 1. Paragogic *> most frequently has the tone : as *JTJ4 ?^ 
 
 ^?w*5H 
 
 q. Verbs with the Vav coiiv. of the future, provided the 
 penult is an open, syllable ; (cf. the following under r) 
 as nDX ljut "ti?*n. N^j?-?l and not R 1 ^.: 
 
 r. When the tonesyllables of two words immediately follow : 
 as in 1^ njEV p"^V* *9^j ^ ie tone ^ tne f rmer recedes: 
 as I 1 ? nt^^ > p"J.V *"|^ (")1HN ^IDJ ) Such a receding ac 
 cent being considered as a Metheg and having its posi 
 tion, cannot recede to a dosed syllable (cf. 6. of this ). 
 In this and a few other cases it drops entirely, its word being 
 connected by Makkef with the following: as^Tfcnj??! 
 
 or rfc Nip* 1 !; nSrrpn for nS^pn- 
 
 T .T I : T I. ~ 
 
 NOTE II. Both the vowel-signs and accents were added to the 
 Biblical Text between the 6th and llth Centuries by eminent Jew 
 ish scholars. Critical and linguistic notes were also added, the most im 
 portant of which are called Hp and HTO ^^3 ^S^fy^o written, 
 
 U 
 
 that is the M. S. reading and *^H : recul i. e. the expression con 
 sidered by the Jewish critics to be preferable. 
 
 This body of notes is called tlie Masora (iTTlDQ i- e - Tradition) 
 and the compilers themselves the Masoritcs. (JlllDO ^/J/5^ 
 
 EXERCISE 16. 
 
 Place Metheg where required ! Metheg cannot precede 
 silent Sli va or Dagesh. 
 
18 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 pron .DIKH .jx .rop&pi -nnnp -n>j . 
 
 NOTE. The Sh vas under the letters marked with an asterisk 
 are silent. 
 
 EXERCISE 17." 
 
 Give the names of the accents and the classes to which 
 they helong: 
 
 rxS iS noxn imvn lax rran ipy-Sx PTO Nnp-n 
 
 ->- ""I A I VJT:- |V*rj~ I -IT : ;-r):-- 
 
 N) :?]9X *nx fjS niJSD n^ N* o^p ^~np) ^K 
 
 T : - j- 
 
 prry? 
 
 EXERCISE 18. 
 t out the tone-s 
 
 nrn . 
 
 Point out the tone-syllable in the following words : 
 
 10. DISTINCTION OF KAMETS AND KAMETS-CHATUPH. 
 
 1. The sign (T) serves at once to represent the long a 
 and the short 6. 
 
10. DrsTrxt Trox OF KAMETS AXD KAMETS-CHATUPH. 19 
 
 2. // /* a: * 
 
 1) in an open syllable: as J/TO , read sh&marta : hence 
 
 2) when Meth eg stands on the left of it : as iTTD^ : , read 
 sham ra. 
 
 3) the (IT) in final T : as M> rea ^ becha. 
 
 4) in an accented syllable : as 1HX, read e en ad. 
 
 3. It i s o: 
 
 > > 
 
 a. in an unaccented closed syllable: as rtDJlT Thread 
 chochma, omdi : hence 
 
 b. in a closed sellable before Makkef : as J^TKfT"73i read 
 
 I . T T T 
 
 kol : and 
 
 c. in the final close! syllable of a word beginning with Vav 
 
 > 
 conv. ( 33) : as Dp^ read vay-ya-kom : 
 
 d. before Chateph-Kamets : as "JDJ^ read y5mad. 
 
 EXERCISE 19. 
 
 .rrvoj oirpn /^p .lpip T .o?w -Hiro 
 so , nprn ,nprn .^fn . niDt . nor onnv 
 
 T )T:|T JT:T " T : T : |T - T:T - T: T 
 
 .on) .Dinn -D^no .nnw . 
 
 - 
 
 T T 
 
 11. DISTIXCTIOX OF VOCAL AND SILEXT SHTA. 
 The Sh va is vocal: *)$ .WIV^ 
 
 1) at the beginning of a word: as 7tOp == k tol. 
 
 2) in the middle of a word after another Sh va: as 
 ^tppn tlk - t ll. 
 
 3) after every unaccented long vowel : as fapp = ka-t hl, 
 but *FT\3&, read sha-mar-tl, tlie vowel before the Sh va 
 bein accented. 
 
 4) after a Metheg: as !)N*V = ye-r u, but Wl = yir-u. 
 
 5) under a letter having D.i^esh : as *7lD^ = kat-t ll, 
 
20 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 6) under the first of two similar letters: as ?)S^n= ha-l lil. 
 
 7) in most cases under a letter, which is followed by any 
 one of the fiiOTQ without Dagesh: as 
 
 EXERCISE 20. 
 
 ^ UfV 
 *nny?n .DT .11 n 
 
 i .ya .ratr . 
 
 CHAPTER II.* 
 
 PECULIARITIES AND CHANGES OF LETTERS & VOWELS. 
 12. CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 1. The formation and inflection of Hebrew words are ef 
 fected by changes, partly vocal, partly consonantal. 
 
 2. Changes are also made for the sake of euphony, to 
 prevent the concurrence of vowels or consonants of difficult 
 pronunciation. 
 
 3. The diiit-rent changes of which consonants are sus 
 ceptible are: AssimUcdwn,^ Transposition, Rejection, Com 
 mutation. 
 
 4. Assimilation, Yowelless 3 in the middle. of a word, 
 when the syllable is unaccented, is assimilated (made sim 
 ilar) to the following letter,, 3 being dropped and the fol 
 lowing letter taking Dagesh. The Dagesh doubles it, thus 
 indicating the assimilation: as *J* = Vf^y for u JG*- In 
 an accented syllable, assimilation does not take place; rObu*> 
 
 T : - T 
 
 > > 
 
 with the exception of the verb rU to give: jTlJlJ for 
 
 * This chapter being 1 placed here fur reference, will he passed over 
 for the present, as many of the rules can only be understood by the more 
 advanced student. 
 
12. CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 21 
 
 If the following, letter be one of the ynnN> either 3 is not 
 assimilated: as ^H^, *]$}& or tne dropping of 3 is indi 
 cated by the lengthening of the preceding vowel : as HIT 
 
 for nrov 
 
 The assimilation of other consonants occurs only in the 
 
 following cases : 
 
 . . > 
 
 7 in the verb flp7 to take: as njT for rip7.- 
 
 H in the syllable fin of HithpaeL before 1, tO and in a 
 
 few instances before sibilants : as HS in for 
 
 for irronn , orn for iDirn , a&jffi for 
 
 1 in the relative ,# for n&T*. 
 
 *T at the end of a few words before JT as H? for PH? 
 
 nnx for fnru* . 
 
 in^a few verbs *" before ^: as py for py.% 
 
 5. Transposition. In grammar, transposition occurs only 
 in the case of H in the syllable HH of Hi thpael before sibi 
 lants, it being easier to pronounce st than ts, thus : Iftfi^ n 
 for 15^ nn Before it is even changed into : as p*li3V} 
 for pT^-lj , 
 
 6. Rejection. Rejection may take place at the beginning, 
 in the middle or at the end of a word. 
 
 The following are regularly rejected: 
 
 A. At the beginning. 
 
 Yowelless V } (or *7 in the verb Hp 1 ?) in the Infinitive 
 and Imperative of the verbs *"5 and TsD : as I 1 ? , ftfj 
 
 nS^ iM from ?ro np , nnp from npS , 
 
 -T!-- I * T .}- ~1~ " T 
 
 * as a silent consonant after a vocalized : as 0*1-3 for 
 from ^1J . 
 
 K is dro])]KHl in l^hj for UrU^.- in C V from liT S 
 
 7?. /??. ///^ middle. 
 
 1 . The first of two similar consonants, when vowelless, 
 is not written, but represented by Dagesh forte: as 
 
 for iijrn ; ni? for n^-iD . 
 
 2. In the verbs the first of the two similar letters is 
 
22 
 
 dropped, even when possessing a vowel, if a vowelloss letter 
 precedes : as 3D for Jp < top for 1^5p , 
 
 3. The weak letters ^JIN (especially |f) are dropped or 
 quiesce, though having vowels, after a letter with Sh va: as 
 for D!D#n?, Dp for Dlp,.^ for ^|, t]nS^ for 
 
 p*wr? for pin*?. 
 
 N often quiesces in the long vowel, resulting from the con 
 traction of its own vowel or half vowel (Composite Sh va) 
 with, the preceding vowel: as nNVD for riNVb "OxS for 
 
 ips;?, D rfttfS for DW?^ nnx for rma* . r 
 
 <f7. ^ #//.e JSfoc?. 
 
 At the end of a word f and D are rejected in a few ca 
 ses. The | of the verbal ending p and p . This original 
 f has heen very rarely retained : as pJTV> pj^j/n . D is regu 
 larly dropped in the st. const. Plural : 
 
 as nn f. onn, *m f. 0^5, 
 
 7. Commutation. Commutation comprises a) interchanges 
 of consonants with other consonants ; h) Interchanges of 
 consonants with vowels. 
 a. r\ interchanges with D see above 12, , r >. 
 
 Initial ^ interchanges with *, especially in verbs v/ ^! : as 
 -]V for -|S}> yT for J.HV S Dp* for SbpV 
 Medial 1 interchanges with * on account of homogeneous 
 vowels preceding it: as D D for D-1H - DTf for ^H . 
 
 "j "I I " 4 , 
 
 Final 1 and * interchange with j"f: as H/jl for ^Sjj, n^J!- 
 
 T T - T T T 
 
 for ng?. When the word is leno thened, the original 
 consonant reappears: as j]V?ji. ^H^w . 
 
 /;. 1) The conjunction 1 "and", preceding a vowelless letter 
 or one of the labials (JpD), is converted into its homo 
 geneous vowel 1 : as v ^ for "Crn H DI for 
 
 In the same manner * following a vowelless letter is 
 softened to I : as rniTO for HIIH^ , 
 
 T T : ; 
 
 2) In the middle of a word 1 arid \ are often contracted 
 into a diphthong or a long vowel: as T7J for TSv 
 (a + u), D LT lor yw (a + i) iSn for iSlH (o + u" 
 
18. PECULIARITIES OE THE GUTTUKALS. 23 
 
 contracted into u). *) after Ohirek becomes 1 , the 1 resting 
 in its homogeneous vowel : as Dt#\D for 2&}), 2 tTin 
 
 for a cnn . 
 
 3. 1 and final after a vowelless letter are softened to 
 1 and *> : as )fif\ for inn ; ng for n), Tin for VT1, 
 
 - 13. PECULIARITIES OF THE GUTTURALS. 
 
 1. The gutturals instead of the usual (simple) Sh va, 
 receive the composite Sh va, (see 5). 
 
 2. They do not admit of Dagesh forte, i. e. they cannot 
 he doubled, (see 7. 4). The half-guttural 1 partakes of 
 this peculiarity. The omission of Dagesh causes the length 
 ening of the preceding short vowel : as D1N!"T for D~Th*n , 
 
 for Tp3, 
 
 -and H> being harder gutturals, in most cases retain 
 the preceding short vowel : as JOnn . D**Hn 
 
 3. The gutturals n> Jf> and n (with Mappik) when final, 
 require the a sound before them. Therefore they change 
 mutable vowels ( 14, 1 e) into Patach : as nStT for PTHS^S 
 if the vowel be immutable, a helping Patach, called Patach 
 furtive ( 6), is written under them and pronounced before 
 them. 
 
 NOTE. On the gutturals sec further Chapter: VII. 40, 41, 42. 
 
 14. VOWEL CHANGES. 
 I. The vowels are immutable or mutable. 
 Immutable : 
 
 a. Vowels regularly written with their homogeneous vowel- 
 letters : as K , > , > , J), 1. 
 
 b. The long vowels defectively written, ( 3. Note 4.) as 
 
 Sp = Sip , D1 = D*O . 
 
 I T T 
 
 c. Vowels after which a Dagesh forte has bevn omitted 
 on account of a guttural : as CHfl for D**in> D 1 I1X for 
 
 d. The short vowel iri an unaccented closed sllable : as 
 
 Mutable : t % n H 
 
 e. All the long vowels, without vowel-letters and not in- 
 
24 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 eluded in the cases specified under b) and c), both in 
 open and closed syllables : as l^pp from ^tOD* "p~J 
 from "HI , 
 
 T T 
 
 /. All the short vowels in open and in accented closed 
 syllables : as n^pDfrom ?6p 
 
 II. The changes which the mutable vowels can undergo, 
 are : Lengthening^ Shortening, Rejection and Rising of new 
 vow eh . 
 
 Lengthening: The short vowels are made long: 
 ( ) becomes ( ) 
 
 T 
 
 ( ) becomes ( ) 
 
 ( or ) become (_) or (1). 
 
 1. When a closed syllable is made an open one : as 
 iSpp for SB > 19P for n?p , DpjH for DpH , properly DIpH . 
 
 2. Hence when a required doubling of the following letter 
 does not take place : as 11NJ1 for TiKH, rflfT for rP,F? ; 
 
 3. When one of the vowel-letters quiesces in the vowel : 
 as NVPJ for Ktfpj , 
 
 4. When the final word of a sentence or clause has the 
 pause accent : as D/iDp for JlSfcDp > K*1N for T*1K 
 
 T :A T| T T : -)T | -.-AT ) 
 
 Shortening : The long vowels are shortened : 
 ( ) becomes ( ) 
 
 ( ) becomes ( ) or with the strong shortening ( ). 
 (_) becomes ( ) or stronger (). 
 
 This takes place : 
 
 a. When an open syllable becomes a closed one : 
 for 
 
 b. When a syllable with Dagesh or a sharpened syllable 
 arises; in this case the strong shortening is used: as 
 D pH from ph > >N from DN ; 
 
 c. When a closed svllable loses the tone ; as D""TN~7-3 from 
 
 T T J V 
 
 > rnrr-T fro^i c f \\*"S irom S^. 
 
14. VOWEL CHANGES. 25 
 
 Rejection: The vowel falls away entirely. It occurs, 
 when the word is lengthened at the end, so that the ac 
 cent must be thrown forward. This is particularly the 
 case : 
 
 1. With pretonic Kamets and Tsere, (the latter gener 
 ally when followed by Kamets : as M/)- Kamets and *? 
 Tsere in an open syllable preceding the tonesyllable, are 
 called pretonic: i. e. they are pronounced only before the 
 tone and are dropped upon its being moved forward : as 
 
 nStb but ) *n but cr n but 
 
 2. With Tsere in a monosyllable: as DC? or in the last 
 syllable of a polysyllable, when all the preceding vowels 
 are immutable : as *n#, thus W, DHyN *\ti& > DniJtP . 
 
 3. With (-), (), (_) in the last syllable of verbs, when 
 the word is lengthened by an addition commencing with a 
 vowel: as nSpfJ from Sc?j% jfapj^ from VtDj3. 
 
 The following rule regarding the rejection of vowels 
 deserves attention : 
 
 When the accent is thrown forward, in nouns, the 
 vowel of the penult drops, in verbs, of the ultima. Com 
 pare: HDI my word, from HDI word, J17DD she has killed, 
 
 4 T : T T T : | T 
 
 from 7cOp he has killed. 
 
 Rising of new vowels: Instead of Sh va a new short 
 vowel arises : 
 
 I. No word can commence with two vowelless consonants 
 or with two Sh vas, therefore the first Sli va is changed in 
 to Chirek: 
 
 A. When one of the prefixes S^ ( 18. II, b,) or of the 
 preformatives JJTN ( 31, 1.) which regularly take Sh va, 
 is connected with a word beginning with Sh va: as ^t^p^ 
 
 for S^ pS , Sbj"V for Sb|T , Sbf^ for Sbf^JSI . 
 NOTE. Respecting "j before a letter with Sh va see 12, 7, b. 
 
 B. /^p^ for ADpJSt can serve as a memorial word for the 
 following rules : 
 
26 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 a. When the first of two vowelless letters has comp. 
 ShVa, the helping vowel is that of the comp. Sh va : as 
 >#JN for *Ufy$ from &&M, Bhn for gnn from D BnP?. 
 
 b. When the second of two vowelless letters has comp. 
 Sh va, the helping vowel under the first is again the 
 vowel of comp. Sh va: as "l^D for ^fiftp, fniT for 
 
 rnr?>. 40, e. 
 
 II. With a pause accent. When Sh va is heightened in 
 pronunciation by the tone,, either Seghol arises from it, or 
 the correspondent long vowel of Comp. Sh va, or the origi 
 nal vowel which has been dropped by the lengthening of 
 
 the word : as TlS from TfS; ^H from >Sm HS70 f. 
 
 i A . : A T : Trt-r 
 
 from K70; n DC* f. WDB* from l D^ 
 
 ** T : : ; 
 
 NOTE. In all the cases given under II. the word is 
 
 III. When one of two similar letters or of the weak 
 letters ^HN drops, (12, 6 B. 3.) its vowel recedes and 
 takes the place of the preceding Sh va : as JTJ? for 7V3PP > 
 
 StOp;. for htoftW , lS| for vSj, 9^!D for U)SNE, DD for Mp, 
 !lp for 23p_> . 
 
 IV. The meeting of two vowelless final consonants is 
 generally avoided : most commonly by the insertion of 
 Seghol between the concurring consonants, Patachj if one 
 of them is a guttural, Chirek, if one of them is a ^ Shurek, 
 if the last one is 1 : as T^J for i;Q, jnj for j;-jj, ^4fl for 
 
 for 
 
 CHAPTER IIL 
 
 15. SERVILE LETTERS. 
 
 1. Letters added to words for the purposes of formation 
 or inflection (serving) are called Serviles, while those three 
 letters which constitute most frequently the root or the 
 radical idea of the word are termed Radicals. 
 
 2. All the 22 letters of the alphabet can be used as 
 radicals; the 11 following only as serviles : 
 
 N> D- n- % *. r>> S> o< i tr. n 
 
15. SERVILE LETTERS. 27 
 
 They are called prefixes (preformatives) when placed at 
 the beginning of a word, suffixes (afformatives) when added 
 at the end, 
 
 NOTE, When the letters added are used to convey the acci 
 dents of tense, gender, number, person (in the nominative case) and 
 to form derivatives, they are respectively called according to po 
 sition preformatives and ajformative** 
 
 16. THE PREFIXES 
 
 1. D as a prefix has Chirek and in the following letter 
 Dagesh, It is the abbreviation of fp from, away from , out 
 of, by, of which the .3 is assimilated, as HID? from below, in 
 stead of nfir) fp Before gutturals the ( ) is lengthened 
 to (") (14, II. 2): as Sj;p from above, instead of: ^ |Q, 
 
 Before H the lengthening is sometimes omitted : as 
 from without ( 13, 2.), D before * becomes >p as 
 from Jerusalem, for D^CTTD ( 12, 7, b.) 
 
 2. $ as a prefix, see 23, 2. 
 
 3. II as a prefix, an interrogative particle, see 24, 5. 
 
 4. H as a prefix, the article, see 17. 
 
 EXERCISE 21. 
 
 wayi enemy 2 fire 3 hero 4 house, within 5 pit 6 brother 7 loveS Gods 
 covenant 10 man 11 generation, age* 2 palace* 3 they 14 n. p. of a city 15 
 month 16 thread 17 sandl" milk clay^o dew2i hand22 n . p. m. 23 day^t 
 n. p. of a city 95 a time unlimited, eternity 26 a maiden^ 7 head, beginning- 3 
 n. p. m.^ 
 
 EXERCISE 22.* 
 
 From a father 1 * from Abraham 2 * from destruction 3 * from 
 a cistern 4 , from a lands, from blood 6 , out of a house", 
 
 * The learner is advised to form for himself an English-Hebrew vocabu 
 lary, by whioh his memory may be assisted and a tedious search through 
 the exercises avoided. 
 
28 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 from a mountains, from Edom^, from Raman- from 
 from to-morrowi2, from a rivei-is, from Jeberechjahui*, from 
 Jedidja^, from a Jewis, from a panther^, from Nimrod^, 
 
 from the Most High^, from a plantzo, from Eden^i, fromdust 2 2. 
 
 * 
 HD T) 10 pn &DTK 8-n vjra eoi spK 4-1x3 sp iax somax ISK 
 
 1 vv --: T T : - T 
 
 aonpv isp -Stf is TIB j i7ipj len^rr ISJTTT mrriny MINT 12 mm 
 
 17. THE ARTICLE. 
 
 1. The definite article is represented by the prefix PT 
 with Patach and Dagesh in the following letter : as D*9^ 
 heaven, D Dfc n the heaven. Before the gutturals, especially 
 the Patach is changed into Kamets (13, 2.): as 
 the master, 7JTH the foot, "l^fl the servant. Be 
 
 fore the unaccented JNn,n into Seghol ; as D^n the 
 
 clouds, DHJIPI the mountains, DDHJl the wise man, but 
 
 > 
 DJ/H the cloud, Ilirr the mountain, cf. 5. 
 
 Before H and H the Patach is commonly retained : as 
 D w nn the life, SjnH the vanity. 13, 2. 
 
 2: A noun without the ,!lis to be translated with the 
 indefinite article, except the noun in the st. const. ( 19, 5): 
 as TV a house. 
 
 3. When the noun is preceded by the prefixes ^D , the 
 article is only represented by its appropriate vowel under 
 the prefix and the Dagesh in the following letter (12, 
 6. B. 3.): as "Vm in the word = nmrQ, V*\tib to the 
 
 - 
 
 land = 
 
 4. The Dagesh after the article is often omitted in let 
 ters with Sh va: as D KT)9VD tfte frogs, especially in 
 nouns with initial * : as ^INTT the river, and in participles 
 of Piel and Pual (25, 7.)- as *O"TQn the speaking man. 
 
 5. Some words lengthen the accented vowel, when the 
 article is prefixed, e. g. DJftl from DJN plNH from 
 
 inn from in > n^pn from 
 
18. THE PREFIXES SQl. 29 
 
 EXERCISE 23. 
 
 .Prefix the article to the following words, 
 sr-tw^v 7pvinn G*VW DQ^ 4 *VJN 3 H^n 2 {^N 1 D^DC* 
 
 I3 rrn ia jnr n np!> 10 o5n n ^ ;4 "* 
 
 T ~ " I V T T 
 
 
 22 no 21 Mi3 2 n 19 8n 17 
 
 rrn 
 
 heaven 1 earth, Iand2 darkness 3 light-i water^ evening^ place? dry 
 lands herb 9 wise 10 morning 11 seed 1 2 animal 13 cord, rope 1 * grass 15 new^ 
 rich man 17 fat 1 ^ weary 19 pipe 20 star^i ground, soi}22 foot 23 life 2 ^ spirit^ 
 ornament 26 thought 27 cloud- 8 majesty 29 riddle 30 joy 31 vision 32 intuition, 
 vision 33 . 
 
 18. THE PREFIXES D7D 1 ) . 
 
 I. 1 called the conjunctive Vav denotes: and, as 
 bread DfTT) and bread. It is changed as follows: 
 
 a. Into } before a consonant with simple Sh va : /b/V and 
 to all, 14, Rising I ; or before the labials 3 > D> 3 > to 
 avoid the recurrence of two sounds of the same organic 
 class: as ]*y\ and between, J01 and from, "^ and a bul- 
 lock ( 12, 7, b,). 
 
 6. Into 1 before * becoming quiescent : as *n*) ind it may 
 be (12, 1, IK). 
 
 c. Into V J, 1 before comp. Sh va, taking the correspon 
 ding short vowel : as \JfcO and I, 7bN|! and eat, 7HJ 
 and sickness (14, Rising I, B. b.) 
 
 d. Into ) before DwJJ: as D ij^ and God ( 12, 6. B. 3.). 
 
 NOTE. Before HUT into *| : as niiT! This most sacred name 
 
 T : T |- 
 
 of God was believed to be incommunicable and the word U*1J$ 
 my Lord substituted for it, according to which latter word the 
 vowels of 1 and the prefixes Q733 were adapted, as HilT!;} 
 
 nin^ nin;p corresponding to 71x3, >$i*h> ^89- Tw ^ en 
 
 IWwever, nlH* is already preceded by ^"|^ > to avoid repetition, 
 it was written with the vowels of D^rtS^ > so tliat HlJl^ ^1^ 
 is to be read DTlSiS! ^ l{< , 
 6. Into 1 immediately before the tone-syllable, especially 
 
30 FART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 when the latter has a distinctive accent and short words 
 are connected in pairs : as Jirfctf !)iifl desolate and void, 
 cold and heat, rm " summer and winter. 
 
 NOTE. iriDI shows that 1 before pD (a) in case of (e) has 
 and is not } , 
 
 T , 
 
 II. a. 3 7* 3 3 preposition of place ani time: in, on, 
 among: as h &?iO3 in the beginning, ^113 on a mount 
 ain, 7N"li^*3 amongst Israel, or it has the force of the 
 prepositions: with, by, through: as [3J*3 with a stone, 
 "%n3 with or by a ^word. 
 
 3 adv. and prep., generally expressing comparison and 
 proportion answers to the words : as, like, so, about, nearly, 
 almost: fHfcjp as a land, iTp N3 about an ephah, *lb>#3 
 D\3> about ten years. As prep.: according to, after, 
 when, (comparing the time of two actions) ^OfWJTp after 
 our likeness, 7lp OH53 when I lifted up my voice, 
 Tj^,t?n T3 according to the bounty of the king. 
 I. "Kings" 10, 13. 
 
 7 prep., denoting motion or direction toward any ob 
 ject, to, unto, towards, for, hence it is the sign of the 
 dative ( 19, 2.): p^ to a land, Tj^S to or for a king. 
 
 b. 3 7 > 3 always with Sh va except in the following cases : 
 1. With Chirek = 3, 7 3 before a word which has 
 
 Sh va under the first letter : as "O"13 by the word of, 
 
 "DID- (14. Rising I. a.) 
 
 Before the * becomes quiescent .( 12. 7. b.): as 
 
 in the days of ? rniHv to I. H 3 as tne hands of. 
 2. With (-), (-), (-) before composite Sh va : 
 
 in truth; "10J77 to stand, ^HD as a sickness; or when dis 
 
 placing the article H (19, 3/) : as Di*3 = DlTO in the day, 
 
 DDn 1 ; == Dpnri 1 ? to tn ^ wise, fjn = ^ri3 on the tree, *but 
 
 DV3 in a day, W3 on a ^ ree - 
 
 3. With Kamets rr^ a, often before the tonesyllable, 
 
 > > 
 
 especially before monosyllabic particles : DPO in them 
 
18. PREFIXES DDI* 31 
 
 as this, t^ iD,)/ to a soul, person. 7 before several forms of 
 the pronouns and the infinitives of verbs : as HP to this, 
 ri7N7 to these, rO?7 to go. Before nouns with a distinct 
 ive accent, especially when short words are connected in pairs : 
 as: D?oS D?0 |>3 between water and water, yb JttJ } ? 
 between stroke and stroke. 
 
 EXERCISE 24. 
 Exactly translate the following words. 
 
 nightl image- dry land 3 bird 4 field 5 man 6 river? rain 8 king 9 - 
 
 EXERCISE 25. 
 Translate into Hebrew. 
 
 And light, 1 and the light, and in the light, to the earth 
 and to the heaven, and the fruit, 2 and fruit., and from the 
 fruit, evening and morning, day and night, I and he, 3 
 and Jacob s hands, 4 and to an animal, and in a land, and 
 in the land, and a river, and Jonathan, 5 and Jerusalem, 
 in Jerusalem, to a man, 6 to the man, from a tree, from 
 the tree, from morning, from the morning, in a cloud, 7 in 
 the cloud, as an image, as the image, to a bird, to the 
 bird, from the bird, from a man. 
 
 EXERCISE 26. 
 
 * 8 was rich. In sentences with a noun, pronoun or adjective in the 
 predicate, the copula "7o />e" must always be supplied. See 77, 1. 
 
 
32 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 82 mini 2l nwo 2 -u :jn 19 aw 18 jn : 17 nw 16 ninvj 
 
 T: T:- T TT ^ - r; T:-- 
 
 34 . 33 32^ 31 
 
 38 rrn 
 
 47 mriso : 46 ii 
 :rnrv 
 
 notl arose 2 prophet 3 since^ Moseso Israel^ Abraham7 rich 8 very 9 
 cattle 10 silver" gdtf-Z foolis darknessl4 walks 1 ^ 18. I. Noteis deliverancel? 
 evil 18 goes out 19 lamp 20 commandment 21 law 22 lights eternity 24 to 23 thoti 
 (art) 26 God 27 says 28 slothful one 29 lion 30 withoutSl roarer 32 way 33 also, 
 even 34 laughter 35 may ache 36 heart 37 he was 38 thief 39 abroad 40 destroys, 
 makes childless 41 sword 42 deaths n. p. m. 44 chosen 4 ^ good, beautiful 46 east 47 
 west48 north 49 sea^ (in general the Mediterranean Sea, lying west of Pales 
 tine, hence: the west, but sometimes the Dead Sea or as here the South 
 Sea, therefore here: the South.) is praised 51 name of 52 . 
 
 19. CASES OF NOUNS AND PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. To express the relations between the different nouns 
 and pronouns in a sentence, Prepositions or the correspon 
 ding Prefixes D^DD are chiefly used. 
 
 2. The Dative is formed by the prep. 7N or its abbrevi 
 ation the prefix h ( 18, II). 
 
 3. The Ablative is formed by the prep, fp or its abbrevi 
 ation, the prefix 9, D or by 2 and D ( 16, 1. 18, 11). 
 
 4. The Accusative is denoted by the particle HX or T!^ 
 (i. e. before Makkef) when the noun is definite, i. e. defined 
 by the article, a possessive pronoun (Suf. 21), a follow 
 ing genitive or by itself as a proper noun, otherwise it has 
 no designation, being entirely similar to the nominative: 
 as pKH n?O DW"n n^ the heaven and earth, ^VUV my 
 son, nDNH f? nx the son of fhe servant, DrTpX h$ Abra 
 ham, but Gen. 2, 4: In the day that God made D 
 
 earth and heaven. 
 
 5. The Genitive or possessive case remains entirely un 
 changed, with which the preceding noun, (which is limited 
 and more nearly defined by the Gen.) is most closely con- 
 
19. CASES OF NOUNS AND PRONOUNS. 33 
 
 nccted. For this reason the latter is said to stand in tlie 
 Construct State, or simply in the Construct. 
 
 The better to effect this connection the article of the Con 
 struct is thrown off and its mutable vowels are shortened : as 
 D1DH the horse, but TlStDn DID the horse of the king (not 
 D1DH); *]iyPT the fowl, but D^ n^iy the fowl of the heaven 
 
 (not ^iyn). T 
 
 Regarding the shortening of the vowels and other 
 changes, which the word in the st. const, undergoes, see 59. 
 
 6. The direction towards a place or the time is indicated 
 by the unaccented syllable H appended to the noun, called 
 
 local il as D* sea, HD* towards the sea, f-itJ^ the north, 
 
 > > 
 
 i"0i) northward, towards the north. D D* year, j"O*P* to 
 
 year, jlD D* D*D*ID from year to year. 
 
 NOTE I. Local j"J is the remnant of an old accusative Q , 
 
 T T 
 
 yet appearing in many adverbs : as DJ9V by day, in the day time, 
 DfTjn/p to-morrow, (cf. 85. 4, "JB, B.) 
 NOTE II. On the Segholates with local H see 66, Note I. 
 
 EXERCISE 27. 
 
 "r-oa mrr **toh 4 riSn TH : 3 n:raS 
 
 v v: v 
 
 nin j 
 
 29 
 
 pinp N>^ 
 
 8 : 31 n^-isn ?n 
 
 nSj; ^^ 
 
 memory 1 just 2 blessing-^ walked 4 before 5 truth righteousness offer 8 God9 
 thanksgiving 10 good 11 all 12 to wrap, to put on 13 garment 14 stretches 15 
 curtain 16 was 17 shepherd 18 small cattle 19 came 20 bear 21 took 22 lamb 2 ^ flock 24 
 eater 25 came forth 26 food 27 strong 28 sweetness 29 moved on 30 desert 31 sitting 32 
 
 5 
 
34 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 on, in, over 33 throne 34 judgment 35 who ? 36 ascended 37 snovvSS summer 39 
 harvest 4 ** thus 41 becoming, suitable42 honor 43 a whip 44 horse 4 ^ bridle 46 ass 47 
 a stick^ the back 4 9. 
 
 EXERCISE 28. 
 Translate into Hebrew: 
 
 The evening (accus.), to the evening, to an evening, a 
 man (nom.), a man (accus.), the man (accus.), from a 
 man, from the man, the head 1 of the man, the head of a 
 man, from the heaven, the grass of the earth, the land 
 (accus.), the land (nom.), a land (accus.), a land (nom.), 
 the light of the heaven, to the judge 2 , to the judge of the 
 land, to a judge of the land, the fruit (accus.) of the tree 3 . 
 God created 4 earth and heaven. God created the earth and 
 the heaven, the voice 5 (accus.) of God, a voice (accus.) of 
 God, a voice (nom.) of God, the sign 6 (accus.), a sign 
 (accus.), by a sin?, by the sin, towards the east^ towards 
 the souths, to the mountain, towards Samaria 1 *). 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 20. THE PERSONAL PRONOUN. 
 
 1. The personal pronouns are either separate words or 
 syllables, contractions of the first and appended to nouns, 
 verbs or particles, thence receiving the name of Suffixes. 
 The separate pronouns represent the nominative, (see ex 
 ception to this 93, 2.). The suffixes appended to the verb 
 stand for the accusative and for the dative in rare instances. 
 The suffixes appended to the noun properly stand for the 
 genitive or possessive cases and then serve the purpose of 
 possessive pronouns : as D lD the horse of me = my horse. 
 The suffixes appended to particles either represent the nomi 
 native or the accusative cases: as 31DD as I, WIN me. 
 
20. THE PERSONAL PRONOUN. 
 2. The separate personal pronouns are : 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 P?itf in pause O^tf ] 
 l.com. <* ^^ (| f| ny ( I l,com. <j 
 
 I ; i 
 
 2 - 
 
 nnx 
 
 f. UK. (P>P. 
 
 m. 
 
 thou 2. 
 
 he fm. DH 
 
 3 - if. KH she 3 if. 
 
 
 
 3. Remarks. ^J< is the ancient form .and more used in 
 the Pentateuch than 0$, while the latter occurs often in the 
 later books. ,ir)K> compounded of HJp^, as the kindred 
 dialects have : Chald. HH^ > /l-DK Arab. anta. 
 
 T ; "" : ; *" 
 
 The fern, form T\& occurs only in k thibh (7 times), 
 but it is the foundation of some verbal inflections, (so the 
 form 717LDD before suffixes, 43, 1.) fcOJl is of common gen 
 der in the Pentateuch and also signifies she. But whenever 
 NtH stands in the text for K^n> it has the pointing JOf"! 
 and must be read tfTl* 
 
 GfTDN? is formed from the pronominal stem JJSt found, in 
 ^Nt/nnX and UH the harder form of ^ we; D^N* and 
 JJ-1K are blunted forms ofD^fiN* properly Dlflp^ (Chald. 
 pr^JK Arab, antum). Before verb. suif. this original form 
 is retained ( 43, 1.). DH> [H from D1H. p,1 hence not 
 seldom the 2. and 3. masc. plur. inp. as py3^ pSl T (l.V 
 D^W* Is. 35, 1. nSH H^n have a demonstrative character. 
 
 4. The separate pronouns, when connected with a noun 
 as predicate of a sentence, always include the copula or 
 the verb to be: as tjpi ^^T am Joseph, ^NH nJlX thou 
 roV the man. t^V 
 
 EXERCISE 29. 
 
 n 
 nnx 
 
36 P^RT 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 : 12 onto -in nan : K 6 ni:p : u :wn "toj; *o nrus* 
 mrr nriN 
 
 : | 
 
 - >8 nnD 
 
 blessed 1 holy 2 woman 3 the first* the Iast5 honest, upright (|3 ; pi. m. D ,33 , 
 pi. f. m J3 58, l.) c idols? vanity., foolish 8 stranger 9 dust 10 thou shalt return 11 
 Ontoi pl.fr. "13J cf.6- 12 the only child (girl) 13 twelve 14 brothers 15 forgiving 
 my sister 17 younger 18 bare 19 son 20 beside me 21 Saviour 22 filling 23 declaration 24 
 guilty 25 old 20 came 27 mountain 28 n. p. m. 29 dwelled 30 n. p. of a city 31 . 
 
 EXERCISE 30. 
 
 Ye are strangers! with me 2 - Lord, thou art a refuge 3 
 to us from generation 4 to generation. From eternity 5 
 to eternity thou art God. Not a God deligHting 6 (in) wicked 
 ness 1 ? thou art. I am dust and ashes. God is in heaven and 
 we-are on the earth. Justs art thou Lord ! Thou art neario 
 Lord ! Ye are a 11 seed of falsehood 12 . 
 
 -nn 
 
 (in pause!) 19 
 
 21. NOMINAL SUFFIXES. 
 
 1. The nominal suffixes appended to Novns in the Singu 
 lar are : 
 
 SING. PI.UR.VL. 
 
 1. com. * , ^p^lD my horse. 
 m . ?|,(in pause rj 
 
 f: r|/Tj- 
 
 m. in , 1 . 1D1D his li. DD- D~^ OD1D ) (poetical) 
 
 * f. H , n < (H-) MOID her h. p ? , [DID V 4 > v 
 
 T T T .- r. I T i T ) their horse 
 
21. NOMINAL SUFFIXES, 
 Appended to Nouns in Plural : 
 
 SING. PLUR. 
 
 1. com. i, ^pID my horses W~ > ^DID our horses 
 
 m. ?]-, ?pp!|D ) D3 -, 03 plD ) 
 
 horses your horses 
 
 m. V > VD1D his horses DiT DITDID ) (poetical) 
 
 T V V (-Spy _ 
 
 f. IT, JTD-1D her horses TIT, ffTDID \ ,, . r 
 
 T T . 3 their horses 
 
 2. Remarks. The suffixes of the noun are divided into 
 two classes : of Singular and of Plural nouns ; the forms 
 of the latter are longer and may be recognized by the 
 plural t ; as -IJDID our horse, but ^D lD our horses. 
 
 3. The suffixes Dp |?> and D)l> fr7> they invariably 
 having the tone, the better to distinguish between the D 
 arid the pare called grave, the others are light suffixes. 
 
 4. Ill is a favorite longer suffix for I* particularly 
 in monosyllabic words and in nouns with the ending J"J : 
 pO species, jyp and ^H^P his, its species ; Jl^^/? appear- 
 ance ; ^nN^p his appearance. 
 
 5. The suffixes denote the genitive of the pronoun ( 20, 1). 
 The other cases are represented by attaching prepositions 
 or prefixes and particles to the suffixes. The dative by 
 ^ or *7; the accusative by fijtf OjTlN) ; the ablative by jp , 
 3 hX OJ-JN) etc. See Paradigm A. 
 
 6. The possessive pronoun is also represented by.D* 
 (23, 2.) followed by S with the suffix, thus : ^ = 
 **? "H^K which is (belongs) to me = my. See Paradigm A. 
 
 NOTE, On the suffixes of the vero see 42. 
 EXERCISE 31. 
 
PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 nirr j 
 
 :rrrojn HD ^701 35 ^iD nnx : 29 ninn) ^mu 
 
 vineyard^ strengths withs might* will forsakes people, nations 
 safety, protection? perished, was losts refugeQ peace, welfare 1 *) intelli- 
 gentH who digs 12 pitl3 shall fall 14 good man, pious 1 ** upright 1 ^ man, 
 here collect, men 1 ? there is noneis heart, understanding 19 drink20 cistern 1-a - 
 also22 rock23 shelter24 strength25 greatness26 glory27 victory28 majesty29 
 rulingso n ow3i thanking^. c f. to 32, 33, 107, 3. 
 
 EXERCISE 32. 
 
 His light, our light, my tree, their tree, her tree, thy 
 tree, thy trees, his dayi> thy (fern.) day, my stars, our 
 star, our stars, to the fruit of his tree, thy voice, my be 
 ginning, thy (fern.) beginning^ your beginning, thy (ac- 
 cus.) voice, the voice of God. lam giving^ from the fruit 
 of your trees to the ruler 4 of the citys. The strength^ of 
 my arm"?. The liglit of our torches 8 J the sand 9 of their 
 shores 10 . 
 
 .iocyin 9 Sin 8T)S 7;rht erjs STJT ^BfD sjn j sri^wi inr 
 
 EXERCISE 33. 
 
 God created him, us, me, them (fern.), her, I gave 1 thee 
 from it, from them, I come 2 to thee (m) (f.), and she came* 
 to him, to them, to us, I (am) with thee, in it, by us, as 
 we, as I. God took 4 him, thee, thee (in pause), thee (f.), 
 I shall establishs my covenants with 7 you, with them, with 
 him, with her, with th (f.). 
 
 -2 2. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 i. M. nn 
 
 \ this 
 
 nxr ) (rarely fit) 
 Com. tf (without distinction of gender or number.) 
 
 Plur. JlW (S$ rarely) these. 
 
 NOTE. In nt7il or apocopated 1 7H / ", the demonst. has the 
 
 V T ~ T 
 
22. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 39 
 
 original article with 7: (Sjl) before it; IrpJl f. occurs only 
 once Ez. 36, 35. 
 
 2. The demonstrative referring to a remoter object is repre 
 sented by jonn* x nn onn jnrp as onn 0*0*3 
 
 T I T " T -i - 
 
 in those days, while rr?tf H D P*3 in these days ; or they ex 
 press: the same: as K^inn ^NH the same man. 
 
 3. The demonstratives are thus declined: 
 Nom. rtf> JIN* this, ^7N these. 
 Dat. H!I/ Vtf/ to this, H^N/ to these. 
 
 ACC. nrn^ n^rn^ this, nWrw* these. 
 
 n-ro 
 
 Ab i 
 
 * 
 
 HD 
 
 4. Syntactical rules. 94.* 
 
 EXERCISE 34. 
 
 :TJ?n rir^S) rj^n nrxS J 11 ^!??^ Sv? n^ lo np5nn 
 
 a D rtSg 12 nnn k vS 
 r : 17 nSin 16 rn rir 
 
 21 
 
 1 Dm 
 
 on 
 
 n ^x 
 
 * The learner must refer to the. respective paragraph before translating 
 the exercise following, and in all cases when his attention is called to the 
 Syntax. 
 
40 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 city 1 words -^ I have redeemed 3 thou hast made, performed* 
 sepulchre 6 unto 7 lo! behold! 8 shadow, shelter, 9 wisdom 10 money 11 
 chosen 12 while yet 13 (was) speaking 14 came 15 evil 16 sore 17 strength 18 
 three 19 sons of 20 n. p. 21 was overspread22 I formed 23 chariot- 4 we will re 
 member 25 his name26 plain 27 fearing 28 departing 29 . 
 
 EXERCISE 35. 
 
 This man 1 , that man, that woman2, this woman, these 
 men 3 , these women 4 , those men, those women, this is the 
 man, that is the woman, these are the men, that is the 
 words, from that man, to this woman, this is my God, 
 this boy 6 , this is the law?, this pillar 8 , these are the 
 names 9 of the sons 10 , those brothers 11 (ace.), these are thy 
 uncles 12 . 
 
 . 12 DHn 11 D PIX 10 D JS 9 mD# the names of 
 
 23. THE RELATIVE. 
 
 1. The relative pronoun for both genders and numbers 
 is *")^K ivho, which; often including the pers. pronoun: he 
 who, she who, that which : *)Xfi 1^ he whom thou 
 cursest. 
 
 2. In the later biblical books and the modern Hebrew 
 writers, the abbreviated form . $ or t $ (with following 
 Dag., omitted before gutt.) is most frequently used. 
 
 3. n&TiK (or ,g?) gives to every word to which it refers 
 relative signification: as D^ there, D^ *")& X where, 
 
 whence. 
 
 4. It is declined as follows : 
 
 Gen. (1D1D his horse) ID^D "It^jSt whose horse 
 
 Dat. ClS to him) iS *\$$ to whom 
 
 Ace. (WIN him) IHlK H^ JJ whom 
 
 Abl. (^5P from him) Jtfjjp *) from whom. 
 
 5. Before participles the article H i requciitly represents 
 the relative : us T^inn he wlio goes. 
 

 24. THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN,. 41 
 
 EXERCISE 36. 
 
 ntrr 12 
 19 - 18 " 17 
 
 33& oyjn n^ 
 
 :| V 
 
 spiritl with2 may speaks fishes* are taken& net^ wishing, desiring? he did 8 
 how 9 great 10 goodness 11 has laid up 12 confide, trust 13 woe 14 the king 15 a boy, 
 a youths cursed 1 trustsis departs zh^sh) heart20 hail! happy . 21 makes22 
 trust23 said 24 mother in law 2 ^ thou goest 2 ^ I will go 2 ? thou lodgest 2 ^ I will 
 lodge 29 thusso. t 
 
 EXERCISE 37. 
 
 The field which Abraham boughti. The horse 2 upon 4 
 which the king 5 rode 3 . Daniel 6 whose name 8 was called? 
 Belteshazzar9. Not goodio (i s ) the counsel 1 ! that he has 
 given 12 . Nigh 13 is the Lord 14 to all 15 that call upon him 16 
 in truth 1 ?. Andis God^ sawis all that he had rnade 2 <>, and, 
 behold 21 , (it was) very 22 good. 
 
 (his name ID V) 8 LD# 7 I^lpJ e^N H 5 ^S^ 4 rSl 3331 2 D^Q 1 HJD 
 : T| : - T >:: T^T - T T| T 
 
 15 Va wrnrr i33np T 12]^ nnjj; 
 
 24: THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 1. The interrogative pronoun is >0 who? usually applying 
 to persons, np i10 nD what? applying to things. 
 
 ilO before tf and *1 and always in pause: n^N nO what 
 (are) these, DTV5O no what did you see ? 
 
 Commonly it is written no or ,nO (followed by Dag.): as 
 iOC ~nO what is his name ? or with a small word, it is con 
 tracted into one word: as ntO what is this? ( 9. 1. Note.) 
 
 n.O before Jl. n JJ : as rptyy >10 what hast thou done? 
 
 6 
 
 / 
 
42 PART I. EXERCISES* 
 
 At the beginning of a sentence np also frequently stands 
 before letters not guttural : as /Ip j"|p what voice ? 
 
 2, The cases are indicated by the prefixes and the par 
 ticle nx- 
 
 Dat. p ^ to whom ? 
 
 Ace. p MX whom ? 
 
 J30 from whom? 
 
 * with or throuh whom ? 
 
 The Gen. by *pyE? whose? but more frequently it is 
 indicated by putting the interrogative immediately after the 
 noun: as ,^P~n3 whose daughter? *p~T3 through whose 
 hand? DftS Hp TOpH Jer. S, 9. the intelligence of what 
 remains to them? 
 
 3. Up is also used adverbially; as D^TIPI D1D"HD how 
 good and how pleasant ! 
 
 4. Interrogative particles: *>$ or JTN where? with suiF. 
 rO*N where art thou? 1"N where is he? D 51 ^ where are 
 they ? 
 
 With adverbs and pronouns, HJ *N which ? what ? 
 where ? whither ? HTO >N whence ? from what ? HXtS ^ 
 
 V " ** T * 
 
 on what account ? wherefore ? J"D ^ now ? ^^^ where ? 
 
 5. Interrogative prefix: Jl (H with comp. Sh va) fre 
 quently before non-gutturals : as 17 Dl7^*!l is he well ? H 
 before a letter with Sh va or a guttural : as JD^TIN Dr)JJ"l^n 
 know ye Laban ? TDK!! shall I go ? H before gutturals 
 having Kamets : as jiNH have (or am) I ? NIH pjnn is he 
 strong ? 
 
 In negative sentences this H is always connected with 
 the negative particle: as fl#t^ xS*l hast thou not heard? 
 Nrl is not tlie Lord in our midst ? 
 
 EXERCISE 38. 
 
 jnNt 2 nnb*j 
 n \x ^ 
 
24. THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 43 
 
 no :nin 
 
 npjnn 
 2 >iK rt? 1 ? 
 7i?. 28 rnSS:?n ^p 1 ? 27 D 
 
 jw nin? 
 34 
 
 np nin 42 niD? : 41 pj; 
 
 knows 1 has wrought 2 * the feminine is used for the neuter 81, 1. made 
 thee 3 chief 4 judge 5 over 6 youth 7 or 8 enemy 9 the planter 10 ear 11 he shall 
 hear 12 the former 13 eye 14 he shall see 15 where (is) 1 ^ depth 1 ? says 18 sea 
 (it is) not 2 ^ with 21 woe 22 misery 23 contentions 24 sorrow 25 wounds 2 ^ without 
 cause 27 darkening of 28 eyes 29 that tarry long 30 wine 31 knows (prop, (is) 
 knowing) 32 besides, except me 33 there is, it is 34 father 35 ice 37 gave, 
 
 put 38 the insight, mind 39 understanding 40 toiling, labouring 41 remember 4 - 
 in stead of 43 . 
 
 EXERCISE 39. 
 
 Who art tliou my soni? Who art thou my daughter 2 ? 
 Who is this man? What is his name 3 ? Who are these? 
 Whose daughter is this maiden 4 ? What has he done 5 ? 
 Who is this that cometh 6 from Edom*? For whose son do I 
 labours? Whom wilt thou sends with meio ? What is that 
 in thine hand 1 * ? Is 1 * in a dream 13 truth ? Whose ox 14 have 
 I taken 15 ? or 1 ^ whose ass^ have I taken ? or 1 ^ whom have 
 I defrauded 19 ? or 18 of whose hand have I received 2 (any) 
 bribe^ ? Is he strong22 or2S weak 24 ? What is the land* that 
 he dwells 25 in, is it good 2 ^ or bad 2 ^ ? is it fat 2 - or Iean28 ? 
 Is not one 29 father 3 *) to us al! 31 > has not one God created us 32 ? 
 What did this people do unto thee? Who has done this ? 
 
 : |-T 
 
 is frm. inX*24ni) l interrogative H 23 22pm 21 ^33 20 PnpS 
 I ; : i | TT : f-t 
 
44 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 ,$. 90, 2. so ix 29 inx as nn 2rn:OT 26pjn ,p3io fm. 310 
 
 T TV TT T-- : -S-T T 
 
 ,,V?3 ,193 withsuff. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 25. GENERAL VIEW. 
 
 1. The verbs classified with respect to their origin are : 
 a. Primitives : as TI7D to govern ; 6. Derivatives, which 
 
 are either derived from other verbs : Verbal Deriva 
 tives , as p*!^ to justify, from pT^ to be just, or are de 
 rived from nouns : Denominatives : as Jtt^T to remove the 
 ashes, from |&**1[ ashes. 
 
 2. The groundform or stem of the verb is the third per 
 son singular of the preterite: ^Dp he has killed. It regu 
 larly consists of three consonants (radicals), the most import 
 ant vowel of which follows the second radical ; in transitive 
 
 verbs it is Patach : as vtDp > in intransitives, Tsere or Cho- 
 
 . t 
 lem: as"tJ3 he was heavy, fbp he was little. The Kamets 
 
 after the first radical is pretonic and drops when the tone 
 or accent is thrown forward : as Dfl^Dp you have killed. 
 
 3. The infinitive construct, ^bp to kill, is another ground- 
 form and was so considered by the earlier Jewish Gram 
 marians, being called by them Un$ root. It consists of 
 the three radicals with only one vowel, after the second. 
 
 4. These groundforms are both of great importance, 
 controlling the other forms of the verb derived from them. 
 
 NOTE. From the infinitive as the second groundform are deriv 
 ed the imperative and future. In some guttural and irregular 
 verbs, where the infinitive is differently vocalized from the impera 
 tive or takes a nominal ending, the future is derived from the 
 latter. 
 
 5. The modifications of the simple and primary idea of 
 the root are effected by external variations of the ground- 
 form. These variations are threefold:. 
 
25. GENERAL VIEW. 45 
 
 a. Vocalization^ or the alteration of the vowels : as 
 he sends, n!j& he dismisses. 
 
 b. Reduplication, or the doubling of one, and in rare in 
 stances of two* of the radical sounds: as 7~t?p = 7i?tpp 
 
 fr - 
 
 c. Augmentation, or the prefixing of one or two formative 
 consonants : as h&$}> ^tPj?fct ^pO %(2Wl 
 
 6. These new forms, more properly called derivations, 
 having altered not only their external form but also their 
 internal sense, are now generally termed Conjugations, in 
 the language of the ancient grammarians D^\53 buildings, 
 forms. 
 
 7. The ancient grammarians, who employed the verb 
 7J7 j3 to do, as a paradigm, named the conjugations, accor 
 ding to the various forms derived from this verb, thus : 
 
 1. 7J7JD Paal, he acted, (now generally 7p) 
 
 2. ^92 ~ Niphal, he was acted upon. 
 
 3. 7j)$ Piel, he acted vigorously. 
 
 4. 7^ ~ Pual, he was vigorously acted upon. 
 
 5. 7*J/*On Hiphil, he caused to act. 
 
 6. 7J/*5H Hophal, he was caused to act. 
 
 T. T^Sfl/l Hithpael, he acted upon himself. 
 
 The.se terms have been retained with the exception of 
 the first, which has been supplanted by the equally an 
 cient: ^p light, intimating, that it is the simple original 
 form, without external or internal change, while the other 
 six are DHD? grave or heavy i. e. freighted with a weight 
 ier meaning, which brings with it a corresponding exter 
 nal change. 
 
 $ 26. SIGNIFICATION AND CHARACTERISTICS OF THE 
 .CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 The Characteristics and the signification of the derived 
 conjugations are: 
 
 1. 7^53 Niplial is the passive, or often the reflexive or 
 
PART I. EXERCISE. 
 
 reciprocal of Kal : as TOtf to keep, Niphal : to be kept, 
 or to keep one s self from. 
 
 2. /yS, Piel signifies in general intense action, energy, 
 frequency : -Q# to break, "QLT to shatter, nStT to send, 
 rhti? to dismiss. It is often the transitive or causative 
 of Kal, when the latter is intransitive : as S"U to be great, 
 to grow, hnj to cause to grow : Hp to be holy, B*JT) 
 to make holy. 
 
 3. 7#iD, Pual is the passive of Piel. The characteristic 
 of both is the doubling of the second radical by Dagesh 
 forte. 
 
 4. yy^n, HipUl signifies causation: to cause another 
 person or tiling to do that, which is indicated by the 
 primitive Kal : as 3HD to write, D^-pr? to cause to write. 
 If Kal is intransitive, Hiphil signifies only the transitive 
 of Kal : as pfll to be strong, Hiphil : to make strong, to 
 strengthen. 
 
 5. /JS)Tf> Hoplial is the passive of Hiphil. The charac 
 teristic of both is the prefixed H and the proper vocali 
 zation. 
 
 $3nrT 4 Hitlipael is generally reflexive, sometimes re 
 ciprocal: as *7C3j2Jirr to kill one s self, i"r#"Vin to look at 
 each other. Barely has it a passive signification : as f"DJl^7T 
 to be forgotten, EC. 8, 10. pETtfin to be embittered", pro 
 voked to anger, Ps. 73, 21. 
 
 Occasionally it denotes to pretend, to feign to be 
 or to do what is denoted by the root, hence it has 
 been called by some the hypocritical conjugation: as "Ite jyin 
 to pretend to be rich, Pr, 13, 7. DDrtfVl to show ones self 
 wise EC. 7, 16. Its characteristic is the prefixed syllable 
 ^in and the doubling of the second radical by Dag. forte. 
 
 NOTE. There are also unusual conjugations: 1. Pod as 
 reflexive TgBpJjTl fut. S$ip> , part, SpIpP , fut. pass, 
 In the regular verbs it occurs very seldom : ^5^ P my judge, 
 Job 9, 15. ^0 to take root Is. 40, 24, In verbs it is 
 
27. INFLECTION. 47 
 
 frequent: as M?tt1 MID. pill. 2 - Pile1 Pulal > Hithpalcl, es 
 
 pecially when the second radical is a guttural : as pfr^ to be at 
 rest, pjn to be green. 3. Pealal (the two last letters being re 
 peated) as irnflD to beat quick, to palpitate, from ^HD to go 
 about. 4. Pilpel, formed from a Mliteral root by doubling both 
 radical letters: as ^37? to sustain, nourish. ^Jf/V to tinkle, 
 
 t]y%y. to flutter. 
 
 27. INFLECTION. 
 
 The different derivative forms or conjugations are in 
 flected, to indicate the various grammatical conditions of 
 Tense, Mood 7 Gender, Number and Person. 
 
 a. The Tenses (D^Of) are two: Preterite (*Q)) and 
 
 Future (TflJJ) 
 
 b. Moods: Two forms of the Infinitive OlpD fountain), 
 an absolute and a construct; an Imperative *W{ (com 
 mand), excepting in Pual and Hophal as pure passives ; 
 two Participles, [W3 (middle) or HIH (,,66%,") Part of 
 the verb jTH to be], a Part, active (7J1)), a Part, passive 
 (7^3), as derived nominal forms. 
 
 c. Two Numbers: Singular (TfT alone, single), Plural 
 (D !TI many). 
 
 cZ. Three Persons : I. P. (i"IJ?3^319 speaking for himself), 
 II. P. (NX9J present), III. P. O-OW concealed, hidden). 
 
 e. Two Genders : Masculine (*)Df a male), Feminine (HDp.4 
 a female). 
 
 28. CLASSES. 
 
 1. The verbs are divided into regular or perfect and. irregu 
 lar or imperfect verbs. Regular D^/C* (perfect) are those, 
 of which the three radicals undergo no change and always 
 remain audible. 
 
 The regular verbs include the gutturals : i.e. verbs of 
 which one or more radicals are of the *")J?nnK > the changes 
 which they suffer affecting the vowels only, not the radicals. 
 
 2. The irregular^ are divided into DHpPj Defective, D flJ 
 Quiescent and Q^SD Reduplicate. 
 
 jn Defective verbs in some forms drop one or more of their 
 
48 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 radical letters. Quiescents have one of Hie 
 *li"TN aw radicals, which in some forms either drop or quiesce. 
 Reduplicates have for the two last radicals similar letters. 
 3. From the old example ^]73 , of which the first letter 
 is t3 , the second y , the tldrd 7 , those, the first letter of 
 which quiesces or drops, were called Hpn or ^ i. e. 
 defective or" quiescent in , those, the second letter of 
 which quiesces, y ^PlJ i. e. quiescent in J/, and those in 
 which the third is quiescent, 7 ^tU i. e. quiescent in 7* 
 Thus t^J is called }"& i. e. the 5 or the first radical is 3 ; 
 TlD = Y J? i- e. the J? or the second radical is 1; ft^J = n"S 
 i. e. the 7 or the third radical is Jl > DDD is called y"y i.e. 
 double y , its second and third radicals being the same. 
 
 CHAPTER VL 
 
 i 
 
 THE REGULAR VERB. 
 EXPLANATION OF THE SECOND PARADIGM. 
 
 29. THE PRETERITE CQJ?). 
 
 1. The principal vowel stands after the second radical. 
 In the transitive verb it is Patach, in the intransitive 
 Tsere or Cholem. For the sake of brevity the former are 
 called: Verbs middle A, as 7fcDp the latter: Verbs middle E, 
 as T^ fl to incline_, to delight in, and middle ^ 0, as 7^ to 
 be able, can. 
 
 2. The Kamets in the first syllable is pretonic ( 14 Re 
 jection 1) and drops when the tone or accent is thrown for 
 ward: as DrV7fc?p ; ye have killed. 
 
 3. The conditions of Person, Number and Gender are in 
 dicated in the preterite by attaching at the end fragments 
 of the personal pronouns, which are called : Affirmatives. 
 ( 15, 2. Note). 
 
I 
 
 29. THE PRETERITE O?J/*). 49 
 
 4. The afformatives of the preterite are : 
 
 Person: 1. 2. 3. 
 
 m. jl 
 Singular. TJ com. ^ ^ ^ ^_ 
 
 : T 
 
 m. Dfl 
 Plural - f . com. 1 
 
 5. The vowel in the second syllable: ,_,_ drops in 
 the third person fern, and plur.: as fl7Dp T > } 7Dp T ( 14 Re 
 jection 3). 
 
 With a pause accent it is restored: as H/tDp > nV)n> H/b* 
 (14 Rising II). 
 
 6. The verbs middle E. generally lose the sound r in 
 their inflection : as fn F)0 
 
 The verbs of middle retain the Cholem in the second 
 sing, and first persons: as fi?b*> *p /b 1 * 
 
 In those cases, however, where the tone is shifted, Cho- 
 
 > t 
 lem changes into Kamets-Chatuph : as DJl/O 
 
 7. Verbs ending with fi suffer a rejection of the fi before 
 the afformatives beginning with TV as JT"O for nni^ from 
 HID. W3, DP13 ( 12, 6. B. 1.) 
 
 8. In combinations with the afformatives fl* p> ^J the 
 
 > > f > 
 
 word is Milel, otherwise Milra: as fl7tDp> il/DD DH/DD 
 
 T : - | T T : I |T v : - ) : 
 
 ( 9, 12. II. m.). 
 
 9. Syntactical rules 100. 
 
 EXERCISE 40. 
 
 nirr 2 - 
 
50 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 30 - 
 
 nr 
 
 to be great 1 work 2 very 3 to be deep* thought 5 voice 6 to flee 7 i$ to be or 
 become wise 9 ant 10 to gather 11 harvest 12 food 13 to remember 14 fish 15 to eat 
 Tyre 17 to sayiS the perfection of beauty 19 to work 2 <> iniquity 21 to fal}22 
 street^ to keep 24 precept 25 to send 26 hither 27 but 2 Saul 29 to take 3 <> role, 
 dominion 31 to be too little 32 mercy 33 to give 34 the produce 35 to seek 36 to be 
 able 37 to endure 38 to enter 39 the tent of the congregation 4 ^ because 41 to rest 42 
 cloud 43 the glory ot 44 to fill 45 dwelling, Tabernacle 46 to counsel, to advice 47 
 n. p. m. 48 - 
 
 EXERCISE 41. 
 
 Kacheli S tole2 the images^. Why 4 hast thou soldo thy 
 horse? Jacob 6 rent 7 his clothes 8 - A dream^ I dreamed 10 - 
 Why have you not sentu a messenger^ to our father^? The 
 woman dipped** the bread 15 in 16 vinegar 1 ?. Ruth 18 gleaned 1 ^ 
 ears 20 in the field. Our enemies 21 took 22 our city (f.) and all its 
 men they killed 2 ^ with 16 the sword 2 *. Why did you laugh 25 ? 
 (fern.) They have not kept 26 the covenant of God. We 
 loved 27 ? I loved. Thou wast able 28 ? you were able. I slept 2 ^ 
 Ye slept (fern.), thou hast cutso, I have cut, Ye have cut. 
 The Hebrews 31 went over 32 Jordan 33 . Jacob gave 3 * Esau 35 
 bread and pottage 36 of lentils 37 - Sacrifice 38 and offering^ 
 thou didst not desire-to, burnt offering 41 and sin offer in g*2 
 hast thou not required**. 
 
 n 163 15 DnS w Spa wix with 8U ff. ,3 
 
 (in Pause ! $. 14 24 3^11 23 J^H 2213^ 21 D^K (pi-) 20 0^31^ 
 
 3213J? (Pl.)310n3^ 3 0n^_3 29 jtfT 2S^y 2^3HN 26^73^ 25 pHV Lengthening 4) 
 
 o van sanmo ssn^i (ii.) 37 D ^n^ sirn skr^ 34rnj 33 ni 
 
 I T T : T. : T I - T It* f 
 
 : (in pause) 43 *7K# ^ 
 
30, THE INFINITIVE. 51 
 
 80. THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 1. The second groundform is the Infinitive /Dp to kill. 
 It is called construct, because it is always connected with 
 the Prefixes D ADD > or with a following noun : as D*l 2^X 
 to-lie-in- waitrfor blood. With the prefixes: as 7t3p3 in 
 
 killing, Sbp? as killing, ViOpS to kill, VtDj3!9 from 
 killing. 
 
 2. The /"DD are regularly vowelless ; the Chirek here 
 is a helping vowel. The Dagesh after the ft is for the 
 assimilated J-, Sb[?0 for VtDp JD Of S"M the h is most 
 closely connected, so that the following Sh va is silent, 
 while the Sh va after 3 and 3 are vocal : as 790^ but 
 
 Sb4-3. Sbj-3. (11, 7.) 
 
 3. The Cholem is shortened before Makkef : as 
 
 4. The Infinitive has a form with Patach of but rare 
 occurrence: as 22$ to lie down, ^^ to be humiliated. 
 Sometimes it is lengthened by Jl : as rQ"lp7 to approach. 
 
 5. The second form of the Infinitive is the Inf. absolute 
 * with immutable Cholem. It is used before or after 
 
 finite verbs to indicate continued action, energy, intensity: 
 1J?Tl TjlSn O^Jl they went, going on and lowing, 
 ye shall diligently keep. 
 
 6. Syntactical rules 105, 106. 
 
 EXERCISE 42. 
 
 2v in 
 
 njn 13 ntop 12 nj; : u 
 18 
 
52 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 shear^ ho! wo2! mix 3 strong drink 4 to think of 5 sabbath 6 to taste 7 with 
 the end otB rod 9 a little 10 honey 11 time 12 to lament 13 to leap 14 to fall 15 sons 
 of 16 ah! alas 17 ! Lord 18 to reject 19 to break assunder20 a hungry one 21 thy 
 bread 2 2 to go down 23 garden 24 to gather 25 lilies 26 the days ot"2 7 to judge 28 
 judges 29 he that shaketh 3 <> hand 31 to hold 32 D here includes negation 106. 2. 
 bribe 33 good cheer, delight 34 much less 35 slave, servant 36 to rule 37 - 
 
 EXERCISE 43. 
 
 God made 1 the sun 2 and the moon 3 to rule^ over 5 the 
 day and over the night, I hired 6 a reaper f to reaps the 
 wheats and a builder 10 to repair* 1 the house. They have 
 slaughtered 12 an ox to sell its meat 1 3. He gave me rai 
 ment 14 to put on 15 - I have rejected 1 * thee that thou 
 shouldst not reign 1 (from reigning) ( 106, 2.) over ] 8 them. 
 The Lord said^ that He would dwells (tr. to dwell) in the 
 thick2i cloud 21 - The man went out 22 to lie 23 on24 his 
 couch 25 - 
 
 ionj3 9 n^n 8m> 712fl p 6-o# 53 4 #D 3 FIT 2 
 
 v T -IT -I -T - -T - -T :: 
 
 (with plur. sufl.) 18 S^ 17 ^D iCDNH IS^aS U1J3 1311^3 
 
 -T -T -T VV T : 
 
 C2533^a 243 23^3^ 22 r 21^31^ 20 \y& 
 T : - T T T v T -: I - T 
 
 31. THE FUTURE. 
 
 1. The future is formed from the second groundform 
 7bp by prefixing the preformatives fjTN which are origi 
 nally vowelless, and receive the helping vowel Chirek. K 
 receives Seghol. ( 14. Rising I. a.) 
 
 2. The preformatives jrVN indicate the personal relation, 
 while the afformatives determine the relations of Gender 
 and Number. / // , 
 
 ft^i^aut^ StAsUwfjLJ 
 
 3. The preformatives and the anormatives of the future are : 
 Person: 1. 2. 3. 
 
 m. H m. ^ 
 
 bmg. com. ft f ,_^ f . n 
 
 m. 1 n m. 1 
 
 rilir - eow - 3 f. rum r. ra-n 
 
31. THE FUTURE. 53 
 
 4. The Cholera in the second syllable generally is only 
 to be found in the transitive verbs (middle A), whilst the 
 verbs middle E^~and regularly have Patach : as TJ^* 
 from 7"! 3 to be or become great, "135! fr m "Q? to- be 
 honored, JDp* from fjop to be little, small. Before Mak- 
 kef, Cholem is changed into Kamets-Chatuph : as D^ Dftp l 
 and he wrote there. 
 
 5. The vowel of the last syllable which drops before the 
 afformatives commencing with a vowel ( 14, Rejection 3.) 7 
 is regularly restored in pause. The restored vowel re 
 quires the tone and lengthens its restored A vowel (Patach) 
 into Karnets: ftff ^QpA but >Sbpfi> *MfoV but WW the y 
 
 : I : A I : : i" T 
 
 will be great. 
 
 6. The forms ending in 1 or > have occasionally, especially 
 at the end of a period, a paragogic f . ( 12. 6. C.) In this 
 last case the vowel of the second syllable is restored : as 
 
 p3"]fi> but ppsnn, ir;ry> but pm\ 
 
 7. The form H^bfl often appears without the H 5 as 
 
 8. Syntactical rules, see 101. 
 
 EXERCISE 44. 
 
 nin 
 
 37 
 
54 PART 1. EXERCISES 
 
 i 40 Drn 
 
 withouti tattler 2 to cease 3 strife 4 to counts how long 6 injustice 7 
 to lie down, to sleeps i n vain9 to wake, to watchio the keeper, watch- 
 manii to rule 12 to be Justus manH with 15 rich 16 poor 17 to cleave 18 to steal 1 ^ 
 not 2 o to rob2i poor 22 he that soweth23 to reap24 vanity 25 the diligent 26 
 upright 27 to dwell 28 young men29 to keep fast 30 commandments 31 to be joy 
 ful 32 daughter 33 Edom 34 unrighteous, a sinner 35 to decay or perish 
 quicklyss to spread out, to extend 3 ? folly 38 cold 39 warmth, heat*o autumn, 
 harvest, frequently including (as here) the winter 41 to cease 42 - 
 
 EXERCISE 45. 
 
 In that day shall be greati the mourning2 in Jerusalem-^- 
 The Lord shall judgp 4 the world 5 in righteousness^. In those 
 days * I will pour out 8 rny spirits upon 1( > all flesh 11 - Do ye 
 thus 12 requite 13 the Lord 14 ? The work shall be heavy is 
 upon 16 the men. Of thee 17 she will require^ the blood 1 ** 
 of her brother2Q, fbi-2i thou hast killed22 him. I shall make23 
 a covenant with.24 you, for you are my people 2 5, that I have 
 chosen 26 - 
 why ann 8ip# TW epiy 5 San 4Batf sD^Sic- n" 21300 iSn-i 
 
 i - T T I vv ~ T - - T : : -T 
 
 16 Sir 15133 fern. 14ni3y seldom as here with S 13 SDJ 1 2nNT 1111^3 
 T T <: -T TT 
 
 23H13 22SDD 21 3 CHK with suff.) 20 HX !9D1 18^11 trasl. at thy hand 17 
 
 -T ~|T T T - - T 
 
 .261H3 ("3y with suff.) 25 Qy 24(*p) ,n 
 
 32. THE LENGTHENED FUTURE OR OPTATIVE. 
 
 I. The first persons in Sing, and Plur. of all the active 
 future tenses are frequently lengthened by the syllable 
 H seldom H > which has the tone and affects the final 
 vowel of the future, in the same manner as the aiformatives 
 1 and >: as 
 
 2. The lengthened form has the signification of the 
 optative and expresses self excitation, purpose, direction of 
 the will: as nnptW let us be joyful! - 
 
 NOTE. In a few instances it is found attached to other per- 
 Kns: Is. 5, 19. Ez. 23, 20, Ps. 20, 4. (with JT~ ) . 
 
32. THE LENGTHENED FLTURE OR OPTATIVE. 55 
 
 EXERCISE 46. 
 
 :niir rpn 
 
 to learn 1 to bury 2 a dead person 3 thither 4 to seek 5 come near, approach 6 
 hither 7 to gathpr 8 heads, chiefs 9 here 10 prophet 11 further, besides 12 to ask. 
 inquire 13 mouth 14 a muzzle 15 therefore 16 to wail 17 come 18 to bend the 
 kneel* 
 
 EXERCISE 47. 
 
 Let us keep the testimony 1 of thy mouths. I may keep 
 thy precepts 3 - Let us make a covenant, I and tliou. I 
 will pursue 4 after^ David 6 - I will forget 7 - my complaints. 
 Let us sends a letter unto the king of Israel. I will 
 remember 11 these things 12 and I will pour out my soul 1 ^ 
 in me 14 - I will make 15 with 1 ** you an everlasting cove 
 nant 1 ?. Atis thy hand I will require^ the flock2o o f my 
 father. 
 
 6-in 5^n 4ti-n son-ips (with sum ^ > 2na 
 
 (with pi. suff.) n^ is -Bra: 12 n HIDT ioiap 
 
 : 20 jNJf 19 ^nrr (prefix) 18 jp 17 oSlj? 
 
 33. VAV CONVERSIVE. 
 
 1. The preterite when connected by 1 with a preceding 
 verb in the future or imperative is made dependant upon 
 this verb, and its time is thereby seemingly changed it 
 receiving a future meaning. 
 
 Vice versa the future when connected by *) with a past 
 tense either expressed or understood, receives the significa 
 tion of the preterite. See 102, 1. 2. 3. 4. 
 
 2. This 1 ) is called Vav Conversive CMQflfl YJ). Pre 
 fixed to the preterite it is the simple ^ % or } conjunctive: as 
 ION he said, *Ott and he will say, S#) he made, ^J/^n 
 and he will make. Prefixed to the ftit. it has Patach 
 
56 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 and following Dagesh, before N Karnets ( 14, II. 2.); 
 as -iOlf* be will keep, *JD^1 and lie kept, ^?>X1 and 
 I kept. 
 
 3. The prct. with Vav eonv. removes the accent in the 
 first and second person sing, to the ultimate syllable: as 
 
 4. The fut. with vav conv. suffers the removal of its 
 accent from the ultima to the penult, and consequently 
 the last long vowel is changed into a short one. This 
 rule, how r ever, can never be applied to the fut. Kal of 
 the regular verbs, because the penult here is always a 
 closed syllable, 9, 12, r. General exception to this rule : 
 When the third radical is N, or the accent is a principal 
 distinctive. 
 
 5. Syntactical rules, 102. 
 
 EXERCISE 48. 
 
 N nan) 
 
 IT 
 
 nin 
 
 inter), denoting- respectful entreaty 2 and see 3 from US 1 n. p. m. 5 
 the bearer ul 6 arms 7 to put forth the end uft to dip 10 (honey) twig, honey- 
 
33. VAV COXVEIISIVE. 57 
 
 coinl) n because 12 judgments 13 to cut li > rr"i3 rH3 to make a covenant (from 
 the ancient custom of cutting up victims on such occasions.) justice, right 
 eousness 5 to pursue 16 to inherit 17 to drawl 8 n. p. m. 19 coat 90 blood 21 eyes-2 
 after 23 to blow 24 n. p. m. 25 trumpet 2 ^ to wrap around, to muffleS? face- 8 
 to cry, to lament 29 great, Ioud 3 n. p. m. 31 3 into, upon ; n. p. m. 32 to fall 33 
 shall be 34 strength, support 35 capture, noose 3 ^ to be in dread 37 to be sweet 38 
 thy sleep-" 9 - * 96, 3. 2. 
 
 EXERCISES 48. 
 
 And 1 God remembered his covenant with 2 Abraham. 
 And 1 Abraham weighed 3 to Ephron 4 the silver^- And I 
 hewed<> two 7 tables 8 of stone 9 , and he wrote 1 ** on 11 the 
 tables the 13 ten 12 commandments 13 - And* a mighty^ king 
 shall stand up*-* and he shall rule (with) great^ domin 
 ion 17 - Arid 1 Moses 18 wrote this law. And 1 Eachel stole 
 the images 19 that (belonged) to her father. Hear 2 <>, Is 
 rael, the Lord, our God 21 , the Lord is one 22 - And 1 thou 
 shalt Iove 2 3 the Lord thy God. If 2 * God will be 2 5 with 
 me 2 <>, and 1 will keep 27 me in this way 28 , and 1 will 
 give 29 me bread^o, then 31 will I serve 32 him forever 33 - 
 God shall send 34 his angel 35 before 36 thee, and thou shalt 
 take 37 a wife 38 to my son 39 from thence 4 **- 
 
 inS 1~*y& 6 SD3 5r ]p3 4 p"l? 3l ?pt? 2r\X 1 Connect ,,and" with the verb ! 
 13J, connect the article! : 13 D HS l 12rnjpj H hy 103fi3 (stone s) 9 Q JJK 
 cf. . 90, 2- ITV^DD 163*^ 14 stand up l3j, after the noun ! cf. . 90, 2. 
 6H?3y 25n^n s 24 DN 232HN 221HX 21 D riSx 20]!VV 19 D J^n 
 
 35-TxSD [fut. A.] 34 nW 33DSl> ( ? 32n3j (vav Conv.) 311 30DHS 29 mj 28 TH 
 I T : - - T T f : - T v v I - T I v V 
 
 ;40Dt^ [with suff. "J3 etc.] 39 |3 38DKWI 37HpS [with plur. suff. ^3*7 etc.] 36 JfjS 
 
 34. THE IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1. The imperative belongs to the second groundform: the 
 infin. const., and in most instances is identical with it in 
 form; as 7Dp Inf. const, and 7tOp Imp. 
 
 2. The verbs with A in the fut. retain the same in the 
 imp.: as fut. 2?^ he, will lie down, ^V he will be 
 clothed, Imp. M^ , CoS. 
 
 3. The Cliirck in the f. sing, and ni. plur. is called by 
 
58 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 the ancient grammarians H/p nj^Jl light vowel, its sound, 
 originated from Sh va, being so lightly passed over, that it 
 cannot form a closed syllable with the following Sh va, 
 hence ^T")? read: ri-d fu and not rid-fu, ^O^VJ? ( 11, 7.)- 
 
 4. To the imp. is annexed very often the paragogic 
 j"T * expressive of wisli and entreaty, emphasis. With 
 
 paragogic p the form 7CDD becomes Jl/Cpp the form ADD 
 becomes rh - as 
 
 5. Before Makkef the Cholem is changed into Kamets- 
 Chatuph: as fcO CH^ enquire, I pray thee. pT^ tO^^ 
 judge righteously. 
 
 6- In pause the dropped vowels or A in the forms 
 p return : as VOtD^ nN BStP p execute true 
 judgment. 
 
 7. After the imp. and fut. if the latter be lengthened 
 (op tat.), JO is often put, as a particle of incitement and 
 entreaty: I pray thee! (the German : bod)! the Latin: duni 
 with the imp. or quaeso, age.): as ^"V fcOTl 1 ?^ put forth 
 thy hand. n^TTl l^ I will go down. 
 
 8. Syntactical rules. 104, 
 
 EXERCISE 50. 
 
 npn : 3 Dinn hi itoptr : 2 f??n 
 : 6 oSi^ nw nnp^ pnyxf? nin? 
 
 ^rrniV ^nnnp 32 n3i? nppn ij; 
 
34. THE IMPERATIVE. 59 
 
 H :nrr"# ^1 
 
 morsel, sc. of bread 1 vinegar 2 orphan 3 mercy 4 for good 5 tor ever 6 great 7 
 terrible 8 stones 9 keep 10 tonguu 11 evil 12 to write 13 song 14 to hear 15 the 
 word of 16 women 17 the commandment of 18 mother 19 to hew 20 tree 21 to cast 22 
 against 23 a mound, rampart 24 to be strong 25 to be courageous 26 boy, youth 27 
 to mark 28 the perfect (man) 29 behold 30 the end 31 to pass over 32 quickly, 
 hastily 33 to advise, with 7# against one 31 n. p. in. 35 then cried 36 wise 37 -(t.) 
 
 EXERCISE 51. 
 
 Flee 1 (pi. m.) from this place. Write (pi. f.) a letter 
 to the king. Keep (sing, f.) the word of 2 the Lord. Seek 3 
 (pi. m.) the Lord. Seek (sing. f.). Seek (pi. f.). Seize 4 
 (pi. m.) the prophets of 5 BaaK Shut* (pi. f.) the doors. 
 Keep (paragog.) this (f.) forever^- Preserve 1 *) (paragog.) 
 my soul 11 , for pious 12 I (arn). Remember (parag.) this 
 (f.) my God! Stretch^ outis thy hand towards* Him. 
 Send (parag. fut. A.) me, I pray tliee, oneU of the young 
 men 15 - Offer 16 unto God thanksgiving 17 - Sacrifice 18 
 (pi. m.) to your God in the land ! Trusts in2o the Lord 
 with 21 all thine heart22. Remember (following Makkef !) 
 I pray thee, the word 23 of thy father. 
 
 ffut. A.] 16H3? 15Q"1]?J l-nn,S % *vvith pi. suif. . 
 
 -T T. TV v -T 
 
 [with suff. ^S] 22-aS 213 so 1 ?^ [fut. A.] i9na3 
 
 - 
 
 35. THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 1. The participles are formed from the first ground-form 
 (the preterite). Kal has two participles, one active and one 
 passive. In the act., the first radical takes 1 or , the 
 second ; in the pass., the pretonic Kamets remains (in 
 sing, masc.), and } (or sometimes, in order to form pass. 
 substantives * 56, 3.) is inserted between the two last 
 radicals: ^ItDD killed ; *)1DX fettered, TD$< a prisoner. 
 
 2. The participle involves in its signification the person 
 or thing to which the action is attributed : as ""IQ^ keeping, 
 properly one that keeps, or a keeper, DHtf a loving person, 
 
60 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 friend, D^ltf a beloved person. The participle thus having 
 the character of a noun is treated as such : receiving the 
 article : as 3riNn and possessing the same terminations of 
 gender and number. ( 57, 58). 
 
 3. The part, preceded by the personal pronoun expresses 
 
 present time: as TPJl *?3K I go. 
 
 4. 7Dp (or ^CDlp) is the regular participle of the verbs 
 middle A, like ^Dp5 the participles of the verbs middle E 
 and are identical in form with the pret.: as jpf (to be 
 or grow old) pret., jpj part. ""0* (to fear) pret.,, *"ljp or *YiJ* 
 part. 
 
 5. Sometimes poetically, the old union-syllable is ap 
 pended to the st. const, m. and f. of the part. act. : as 
 
 }$ the inhabitant of the thorn-bush. 5. Mos. 33, 16. 
 who changes the rock; Ps. 114, 8. *5&?" P S - 
 123, 1. nt?K 1. Mos. 49, 11. fqrtK Hos. 10, 11. Some 
 times the * is not read: as ^fOtyVfODtP ^ er j 22, 23. 51, 13. 
 
 6. The inflection of the participles active and passive are: 
 Part. act. Part. pass. 
 
 S. P. S. P. 
 
 m. 7tOln m. DvLDlD m. TlDD m. i 
 
 nStoip 
 f. r f. mSoip f. n^iDp f. 
 
 7. Syntactical rules. 107. 
 
 EXERCISE 52. 
 
 -as* on Dnrtr : :DHV ^HN nin :Sb Ste D r 
 
 nin t 
 
 ip J l8 nw p t^\ 
 ^ :o w n M 
 
35. THE PARTICIPLE. f>l 
 
 rnrv 29 rpio : 28 ni?S 27 rr!??y nirr 26 np_-iv 
 ion 31 D<pS 
 
 iiT :jnp ^ nn -wpy :f]p3 ^yzty-si tjp? DDK :T|in 
 :rnpy 
 
 to love 1 as 2 their fathers 3 between 4 tear 5 joy 6 to totter? to help 8 book 9 
 there is, are 10 riches 1 ! evil, harm 12 his father 13 his mother 14 (it is) not 1 ^ 
 transgression 16 companion 17 destruction, corruption 18 sound 19 words 20 de 
 sire 21 to be sweet 22 to lie down 23 under 24 thy burden 25 righteousness o$ 6 
 to stand, endure 27 for ever 28 to uphold 29 men 30 peaceable 31 to have abund 
 ance oft 2 faint 33 - 
 
 EXERCISE 53. 
 
 The Lord raiseth upi (those that are) bowed down2. 
 Threes kings 4 are standing up 5 - Wherefore^ do ye trans 
 gress? the commandments of the Lord? The wealth of9 
 the sinner 10 is laid up 11 for the just. The iniquity of 12 
 Ephraim 1 ^ is hound up 14 , his sin 15 is hidie. She dwells*? 
 in the midstis of my people. Ye (fern,) go 19 the way 20 of 
 all the earth. The beasts 2 ! of the field flee 2 ! from 22 the 
 lion 2 -"*- The door 24 is opened 2 ^. Wherefore liest thou 26 
 upon 2 ? thy face 2 8? The ant 29 gatherethso her foods 1 i n 
 the harvest32. The fool foldethss his hands^ 4 togetherss. 
 a st. const, a na 713^ 6 rn-rij3S snoy 4D pSp 3 n^S^ 2^33 i^ 
 -p;i. st - const - 12 p^ n |3y lOKBin ,Vn st. const. eVn 
 20^1 wa^Sn is^ifria ivnur lerav (fem.) 
 
 P V - T I- T I-T 
 
 [fem.]29nSnj 28 rrj3 27 S^ 26 Ssj 25HH3 (fern.) 24;^ 23 n 22 
 T T : I VT - -T - T v v -: 
 
 36. NIPIIAL. 
 
 1. The two principal forms again pointed out in the 
 paradigm by larger type, are the preterite 7^(7^ and 
 the inf. const. SppJl To the first corresponds the 
 participle 7pp} with the exception of having like all the 
 other participles of the passive conjugations Kamets under 
 
62 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 the second radical. The rest of the forms coincide with the 
 
 
 second principal form A?pn> for yLDp^n , 
 
 2. From the original StDj^jT ( 31, 1.) arises Sftp^ 
 ( 12. 6, B. 3.), from this, StDjT (12, 4), the future NiphaL 
 The first person of the fut. is sometimes found with Chi- 
 rek under tf: as Dgt^N I shall judge. The optative al 
 ways has Chirek: as Hp/ftN I will escape. 
 
 3. The 3 pers. fern, of the pret. H App} is in pause 
 PT7Cpp3 ( 14. Rising II), identical with the feminine of 
 the participle H 7tpp3 They, are distinguished by the po 
 sition of the accent : PHS^ W^ (Milra) part. , H*D^ IjnH 
 (Milel) is preterite. ( 9, 12, I. Note.) 
 
 4. In the Infin. after % and 7, the fl occasionally drops 
 and its vowel recedes ( 12, 6. B. 3.) : as iS^ DD for 
 
 "bu?3ri$. 
 
 5. The infin., imp. and fut., when followed by a mono 
 syllabic word, throw back the tone, shortening the final 
 
 Tsere into Seghol ( 9, 12, r., 14, Shortening c.) : as 
 
 > j> > 
 
 PD "O?! ne sna U ^ e taken by her, fiXf ^HDII this shall 
 
 be written. 
 
 6. With distinctive accents Patach is sometimes put for 
 Tsere : as W&] and he was refreshed, 7DJH and he was 
 weaned. 
 
 7. The second and third persons plur. f. regularly have 
 Patach, but once with Tsere : (1151^) Ruth 1, 13. 
 
 8. The imper. of Nif. is reflexive or reciprocal in mean 
 ing, for no passive verb would allow an imperative. 
 
 9. The participle passive of Kal and the part. Nif. thus 
 differ in meaning: the part. Nif. representing the noun 
 to which it belongs as being acted upon in present lime, 
 whilst the part. pass, of Kal does not take the time into 
 consideration: as fifing A/HD the door opened now, H 7*111 
 nPTin? the door opened, *O^n n^pn the cane broken 
 now, "i*O*n rOpil the broken cane. 
 
36. NIPIIAL. 63 
 
 10. The Inflection of the participle is: 
 S, m. Stpp4 P. m. 
 
 f. n: (nbt) f. 
 
 EXERCISE 54. 
 
 S 
 
 27 
 
 nt? 34? in?^n- 33 f3 D^ rup^ n j^jx no f5PP 
 
 34 :D3sj? nns n^ DpTiSjf nin^ nn? 
 
 39 
 
 HIPP ; 
 
 wicked 1 mischief 2 darkness 3 at what 4 stumble 5 (the Tsere in Pause! 14 
 Rising II.) poor 6 to meet each other 7 to deliver 8 to break 9 wickedness 10 net 11 
 to hide 12 to take, catch 1 ^ their foot 14 our soul 1 ^ bird 16 snare 17 fowlers 
 arms 19 neighbour, friend 20 to separate 21 to shed 22 Zion 23 prosperity 24 to be 
 grieved 25 enemy 26 adversity 27 friend 28 to take heed 29 before 30 to long 31 
 courts 32 that not, lest 33 to neglect, forget 34 to be delivered 35 multitude 36 
 shadow of death 37 to hide one s sell 38 there 39 the worker of 40 to trust 41 
 youth 42 to be delivered 4 * the transgressor 44 to be destroyed 45 together 46 the 
 end, future 47 - 
 
 EXERCISE 55. 
 
 The soul 1 of Jonathan 2 was knits with* the soul of Da 
 vid. And 5 the riumher^ of 6 the children 7 of 7 Israel shall 
 be as8 the sancl*> of the sea, which will not be numberecUo. 
 
64 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 Is not 11 the whole 12 land before thee 13 ? separate^ thy 
 self, I pray thee, from me 1 ^- And 5 they separated them 
 selves the one 16 from the other 17. Suddenly is Babylon 
 is fallen and destroyed2o. Were ye also 21 sold for 22 
 slaves 23 ? Thus 2 * saith the Lord : Behold 2 ^ I 2 * will give 2 ** 
 this city into the hand of 27 the king of Babylon, and 
 thou shalt not escape 28 out of his hand 2 9 but 3 <> shalt 
 be caught 3 1 and given into his hand. We are sold, ye 
 (fern.) are sold, thou (fern.) art sold, ye will be deliv 
 ered 32 - And in all 33 things 33 that I have said to you, be 
 circumspect 34 - 
 
 5 connect ..and" with the verb : and shall be 7TH1 43 31#D 2rU1 JT f. 
 
 T T : 
 
 15 Sj?D 14T13 13TJ3S 12 -S3 H H Sil 10*120 
 T"*r" -T VT : T -: -T 
 
 24713 23DH3J? 22S 21D: 20n3tf (fem.)19S33 
 T-: - T VT 
 
 Ni 31 W)n 30 3 29JT3 Ki. 28 aS?3 27 T3 26 Part. act. 25 behold I 
 
 -T % T- -T -: 
 
 . Ni. 34 tour 33 S*3 Ni. 
 
 37. PIEL AND PUAL. 
 
 TT 
 
 1. The first principal form is Dp> the second 
 With the second are allied: the imp. *?Dp> the fut. 
 
 the part. 7i?TO I n Pual the two principal forms are 
 identical. 
 
 2. Under the second radical the pret. Piel has Tsere, 
 which changes in the inflection into Patach ; as ^t3p> 
 ll^Dp > ^ri^Dp . Occasionally even the principal form is 
 found with Patach : as ""GBH 13^ he destroyed and broke 
 in pieces, especially before Makkef : flJTr*!^ he teaches 
 wisdom. Seghol in the following three verbs : "D*! * 
 speak, D35 to wash, *\3 to atone. 
 
 3. As the first radical in Piel arid Pual must be vocal 
 ized for the following Dag., the preformatives of f these 
 conjugations can retain their original Sh va : as bD*> 
 
 4. The participle in these and all the other conjugations 
 (except Kal arid Nif.) has a prefixed , 
 
37. PlEL AND PUAL. 65 
 
 5. The inflection of the participles in Piel and Pual is 
 as follows : 
 
 Part. Piel Port. Pual. 
 
 S. P. 8. P. 
 
 m. Sttpp m. D SippP m. ^D{?5 m. D SttpP 
 
 f. n^pp f. niStppp f. n^pp f. niStppp 
 
 NOTE I. Without the participle seldom occurs : as *Jtf tQ^ 
 I praise, EC. 4, 2. HpS taken, 2 Ki. 2, 10. 
 
 NOTE II. The feminine in Piel is usually fi , the ending 
 p| indicating a nominal signification : as HlDtrDp a sorceress, 
 witclu In Pual the fern, in ,*J is rarely found: npfc j?P Is - 23 > 12 > 
 
 6. In those forms of Piel and Pual, which have ShVa 
 under the second radical, the characteristic Dag. is often 
 dropped : as UnSt^ for HH 1 ?^ s ^ ie dismissed. 
 
 T. The part. Pual like that of Nif. is distinguished by 
 Kamets in the last syllable : as 7DpP 
 
 8. The infin., imp. and fut., when followed by Makkef, 
 or a word having the tone on the penult, generally take 
 Seghol in the final syllable: as ^"CHp sanctify unto me; 
 he seeks him. 
 
 EXERCISE 5G. 
 
 - 19 
 
 n-jin : 
 nnn 
 
 rrirv : 29 v:n i%y. vaN ima :njn nnronnn 
 
 T: T T ": " T -; TT T 
 
 9 
 

 66 PAKT 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 33 
 
 prn itfp 
 
 nxo 53 S: rrtormx 
 
 Babylon 1 to destroy - to reward * 7^1 any act done, g-ood or eviJJ to do, 
 show good or evil to an} one^ entreatiesG to speak? ^ "^"] to speak entreat- 
 ing-ly, glorious things^ to honorfl wealth, plentylO interj. of entreaty, I prayll 
 hopel^ to defer!3 sicknessll the heartlS sinnerstG to pnrsuel? wickednessl^ 
 to seelil9 a scornerSU j N n ot21 (including the verb to be,) to make great ^2 to 
 give strength23 to regard^ reproof^ rneekness ^6 priest^? to wash 28 D J| sons, 
 children ^ to raise^O poor, indigent^l afflictions^ a vision33 counse!34 an- 
 cients35 ship3G to be about37 to be mercifu!38 (const, with ace.,) the Most 
 High39 toil, trouble^ to bear, bring forth41 to praise-12 a report^ to make 
 fat44 bone, body45 to blind46 seeing, having the eyes open47 to pervert48 
 the words of40 his wifeSO one of^l foolish women52 to receivers to ibnTive r >4 
 
 O 
 
 sin r >5 to sing hymns, praisesi>6- 
 
 EXERCISE 57. 
 
 Haman 1 stood up to make request 2 for 3 his life-*- BL*- 
 liolds, the righteous^ shall hp recompensed^ on the earth. 
 The Lord rewards? the man of violence 8 - I taught 9 ye 
 (the) lawio- Miriam 11 sung 12 praises 12 to the Lord, with 13 
 the harp 14 - I have preached 1 ^ righteousness in a great 17 
 congregation 16 - Did ye hope 18 in 19 the Lord? Why20 
 have ye (f.) not met 21 the traveller 22 ^ with bread and wa 
 ter? I shall not lie 23 ; thou (f.) wilt not lie, ye will not 
 lie, they (f.) will not lie. Do (pi. fern.) not profane 24 the 
 name 25 of our God. This (is) the law, (which) the Lord 
 commanded 26 to teach you. Thou (f.) art gathering 2 ? ears. 
 Five 28 cities 29 in the land of Egypt 3 are speaking 31 the 
 tongue of 32 Canaan 33 - The poor 34 (women) are seeking 35 
 
38. HIPHIL AXD HOPIIAL. 07 
 
 bread. The ears are gathered by the poor. The tongue 
 (f.) of Canaan is spoken in Egypt. 
 
 Pi- 91oS SDDn [Pi. ,-un.]7DW 6 p"? 5 |H 4i#33 3 ^ P-2tfp| 1 JDH 
 
 17 an in. leSnp PI. is 1^3 14-11:3 is a PI. 12 nor HD*IO lomto 
 
 T|T -T -T T: T 
 
 25 Q# Pi. 24V?n Pi. 23* 22 mfc Pi. 21 Dip 20;HD 19^ Pi. 18 13 jp 
 
 - T I -T -|T V - T 
 
 Pi. 31 131 30D 12fO [f.] 29D 1 
 
 38. HIPHIL AND HOPHAL. 
 
 1. The first principal form is THpbfT* the second 
 
 From the second are drawn all the other forms : imp. 
 f?CpJi to. S^^ part. S^pD ? for S^H^ S^HD 
 ( 12. 6. B. 3.). In Hophal, even tlie two principal forms 
 are the same. 
 
 2. Besides the lengthened fut. ( 32) a shortened, or 
 apocopated future exists, which in the regular verb is re 
 cognized only in Hiphil by a shortened form in Tsere : as 
 TLOplfut., 7ippl apocopated fut. 
 
 3. The aposop. fut. is especially found : 
 
 a. In expressions of command and wish, more usually in 
 prohibitions with ^X : as fTO* he may cut off, Ps. 12, 4. 
 
 ,NVin let lier brin s fortll j ! Mos - 1 24 - ^PP"^8 
 
 hide not, Ps. 27, 9. nntriT^N destroy not, Ps. 57, 1. 
 Hence called: Jussive. 
 
 I. After Yav. Conv. excepting in the first person, which 
 generally retains > : as ^Dp^_> but TO^W and I de 
 stroyed, Am. 2, 9. T]^ >O and I cast, Zee. 11, 13. 
 Tj^ONJand I made kingj iJSam. 12, 1. 
 
 4. Before Makkef the Tsere of the imp. and apoc. fut. 
 \ becomes Seghol: as N^"f5?n become familiar! Job 22, 21, 
 
 13"ptD ll an( ^ ne laid hold upon him. 
 
 5. The tone in Hi. differs from that of the other con 
 jugations. in not resting upon the afForm. J"T * and ^ 
 
68 P.ART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 as nS bpil, ^bH, hvn. With Vav Conv., however, 
 
 they receive in the prefc. the tone: as n^HI an ^ she 
 shall divide, Ex. 26, 33. 
 
 6. In the inf. after 733 generally no contraction takes 
 place, and the form remains Vcppil^); occasionally, how 
 ever, the H drops and its vowel recedes : as "Vftlffo to de 
 stroy, Is. 23, 11. rV?0 to put an end to, Am. 8, 4. 
 to cause to languish, 1. Sam. 2, 33. 
 
 t 7. In Hophal there is a second form with Kubbuts: as 
 Tl^v^n ne is cast ? Da. ^ 11- I* 1 the part, this form occurs 
 more frequently, than the reg. one. Itpj^p., Mai. 1, 11 
 , Ps. 22, 16. 
 
 8. The inflection of the participles in Hiphil and Hophal 
 
 are : 
 
 Part. Hiphil Part. Hophal. 
 
 8. P. 8. P. 
 
 m. in. m. p?0 m. 
 
 f. n^tppo f. niS^pp? f. nSt?p f. 
 
 EXKRCISE 58. 
 
 :n-ira oon 4 n : 
 
 20 
 
 jr 
 
 in 
 31 30 
 
 rrr) 
 
38. HlPHIL AND HOPHAL. f>9 
 
 TVS D^D :nir Dtr 
 
 run 
 
 
 holyl profane2 to divide, to show differences cause to stumble* saido 
 n. p. m.6 to make a king7 to slanderS master, 82, 4. b.9 to castlO a piecell 
 the upper millstonel2 upon!3 fundament, foundations of 14 to sink in, to fasten 
 in!5 to commitlG perversenessl7 lipslS to put far!9 slowness20 anger21 to 
 give rest, to stil!22 contention, quarre!23 an offering to God24 (especially a 
 bloodless offering) wholly, entirely25 to burn sacrifices26 Solomon27 his 
 son28 to be wise, pious29 to shine^O brightness^l firmament32 to humble33 
 worm, collect. worms^ 4 al!35 (they all, 98, 2.) to hearken3G hight37 to 
 lift up, exalt38 words39 to be far ofBO to mention with praise, i. e. to praise 4 * 
 over 4 ? wall 43 lot, fate 44 - 
 
 EXERCISE 59. 
 
 Do not cause 1 a strangers to dwell* in 3 thy house 4 - This 
 woman lay 5 upon her son^ and he died? and she took 8 my 
 living^ son from my bosom 10 and laid 11 her dead 1 2 son 
 beside me 13 while 14 I slept 15 - And they stript 1 ^ Joseph 1 ? 
 of his coat 18 and they cast 1 ^ him into 20 the pit2i. 
 The wife22 of Potiphar23 slandered 24 Joseph. Ye shall 
 not deliver 25 the servant 2 ^ to 27 his master 28 who is es- 
 caped 2 ^ from 30 his master unto ye. My sons 31 strip 0ff 32 
 your garments 33 , my daughters^ clothe 35 the naked 3 ^. 
 This woman is clothing the poor. Hide 3 ? (sing, f.) the 
 child 38 - Hide (pi. f.) this money. This girl 3 ^ is hiding 
 her brother. Darius 40 was made king 4 ! over the realm 42 
 of the Chaldeans 43 - The girls 44 are warned 45 - If 46 your 
 father 47 taught you wisdom 48 and knowledge 49 ? then 50 a 
 good property 51 was given 52 you as a possession 52 - 
 snprti 7r\D") 6 ^J3 533^ 4njv3 3 Tiro 2*1? m. jussiv^ot: 1 ?^, HOB ipi^ 
 
 |_.- TT- T: - T i ; : r - I-T 
 
 15 t^ 141 13-S2fN 12 r\D Hi .1133^ 10 pH (with the Article 80, 2. g 90, 2.) 9 PI 
 I T : v - T I 
 
 20 S S 19, 6- Hi 191ll^ 18ir>JP3 17^or Hi. (with two ace. 85, 2. b.) 
 - T : T -. 
 
 28VJHN 27 Sx 26^3y Hi. Juss. 25 1JD Hi. 24 mS 2313*013 22n#X 
 T -: v .* ^ -T I~T 
 
 Hi. 355T3 1 ? 34-ni 33 33DT1J3 Hi. 32^3 31 J3 30 D>O fut. Niph. 
 
 - T _ . .-: - T -T -T 
 
 43Q^t73 42noSfl Ho. 411lSrD 40 ^Vll 39 mV 38 iS" Hi. 37 J3V 36 Q D^l* 
 : - : - I-T YT : - T : - v V I-T 
 
 HO. 5-aSnj 51 [fein. ] nSnj 50 ?x 49 mn 4snD3n ^7D3 3x 40 DK 110.45 in* 
 
 - T T : - T - ~ T : T .-: ~ T 
 
7 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 30. HITHPAEL. 
 
 1. In Hithpael the two principal forms coincide. 
 
 2. The rules given above ( 12; 5.) apply to Hithpael. 
 In Verbs commencing with a sibilant, transposition occurs : 
 as "V!pJlB>n, for "Mpg>JVT, Before tf, the fi is clianged into 
 ID- as jTTCDyj for p^Hj ( ibid.).. 
 
 3. Verbs commencing with "1, tO M> sometimes also 
 with 3 , ^ and the sibilants, assimilate the fi of Hithp, : 
 
 as n^rMbr n^n ( 12, 4.). 
 
 ^4. The pret. has usually Patach in the final syllable: 
 as ptnnn to show one s self courageous, 2. Ch, 13, 7, 
 Patach occurs also in the fut, and imp., especially in 
 pause, and in the future, when expressing command or- 
 wish: as tiyr\fl delight thyself, Ps. 37, 4; S^p/in sanc 
 tify thyself, Jos. 3, 5. D^nn ^X hide not thyself, 
 Ps. 55, 2. lDp> ?p?rV His name be blessed ! In pause the 
 Patach oftentimes is lengthened into Kamets: "ITNnn he 
 girded himself, Ps. 93, 1. ^NI^ he mourns, Ez! 7 , 12. 
 
 5. When the accent is thrown forward by Vav Conv. 
 ( 33, 3.), the Tsere in the pret. sometimes is sliortened 
 in^> Cliirek: *mHpnn) T^inm I will .show myself 
 great and holy, Ez. 28, 23. DJI^j^fTyaiid ye shall 
 show yourself holy, Le. 11, 44. 
 
 NOTE I. A form of very seldom occurrence is Hutlipacl (with 
 Kameth-Chatuph or Kubbuts under the preform. n)> the sense 
 of which is purely passive , as riMHn they were mustered, num 
 bered, Num. 1, 47. D33J1 (arising from DSSJin) to be puri 
 fied, Lev. 13, 55. N^?7 to be defiled, Deut/i>4, 4. iDH/ 1 ! 
 to be made fut, Is. 34, 6. 
 
 NOTE II. In later Hebrew (Mishna and Talmund) a pret. form 
 Nithpael is very frequently used in a purely passive sense : as 
 n^ wIXrO she became a widow, TTVMin} she was made a prose 
 lyte, n&*"UnJ sae was divorced, ^s5 t V^^ n e was cured, etc. 
 In Biblical Hebrew this form three times only occurs: ^35^1 
 to be forgiven, Deut. 21, 8. IHplJI to be instructed, corrected, 
 Ez. 23, -is. mfijr j to be alike/ Prov. 27, 15. 
 
o9. IliTlIPAEL. 71 
 
 6, -Forms followed by Makkef, takeSeghol: as JQJtf)* 
 the snow hides itself, Job, 6, 16 
 
 7. The inflection of the participle is : 
 
 8. m. Stsprp f. n|?$p_jio p. in. D Stppjpo f. 
 
 EXERCISE 60. 
 
 nn SN nr r n ^S DK : 6 S 3 7 
 
 : 10 mS 9 n" 
 
 :n j^. 
 19 
 
 . 
 
 to glory* to understand 2 to know 3 to feign one s self rich 4 not& (including 
 the verb ,,to have") anything 6 part 7 to think one s self wise 8 thou becomest 9 
 contempt 10 to justify one s self 11 to earn wages 12 bag 13 to bore, pierce 14 to 
 obtain 15 to delight one s self 16 surely, truly 17 to hide one s self 18 distress, 
 adversity 19 to purify 20 to cleanse one s self 21 works, deeds 22 to be recog 
 nised 23 to decorate one s self 24 cloak, mantle 25 strange 26 to show one s self 
 honorable 27 honor of28 He, falsehood 2 !) to grieve one s sell 30 joy 31 to make 
 great 32 sorrow 33 to multiply 34 folly 35 - 
 
 EXERCISE 61. 
 
 Behold men beat* at 2 the door. Amis Jonathan stripped 3 
 himself of the robe 4 ? that (was) upon^ him, and gave it 6 to 
 David. Little 8 children came forth^ out of the city and 
 mocked 10 Elisha 11 - David is hiding himself 12 in the des 
 ert 13 - Joseph made himself strange 14 unto his brethren 15 - 
 Before Thee 16 . Lord ! we shall not be justified 1 . Wo 
 men disguising themselves 18 and putting on 1 ^ other 21 gar 
 ments 20 - Always 22 we shall purify ourselves 23 and walk 24 
 with25 the Lord. Do not hide thyself^ from thine own ^ 
 flesh 2 *- Consider 28 (pi f.) the deeds -^ of the wicked 30 and 
 
f 2 ,PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 turn awaysi from them. Do not feign yourselves ricli32 
 if in truth the Lord has not given 33 you wealth 3 *. 
 
 ( S^with plur. suff.) 5S# 4V t #n Hith. (with ace.) 3 D^3 2 1 ?; Part. Hith. 
 
 11 y&hx Huh. (with foil. 3) 10 oSp T 9K2T T d 90, 2) s D-sop 7on;*3 
 20DHJ319 i^aS Hith. is aran. 17 pTjf le^paS isrnx 14133 131210 
 
 27?pfr3 Hith. 260^ 25 n Hith. 24 ^H 23^^ 22TDB ( 90, 2-) 21 
 :341fc;ty 33jrn 32-l&>J[? Hith. 31 ppp 300^^1 29^?3 S^ with Hith. 
 
 CHAPTER VIL 
 
 THE GUTTURALS. 
 40. VERBS PE GUTTURAL. 
 1 . When the first radical is one of the gutturals 
 in all the forms requiring simple Sh va, it receives Sh va 
 comp. as prnQJ7 ; to stand (5.). 
 
 2. When standing for vocal Sh va, it is generally Cha- 
 teph Patach: as 10JJ. for 10; 1D_ from the Inf. const. 
 
 3. The helping vowel under the serviles Tjl^ is always 
 that of the Chateph: as 1DJ2_( 14, Rising I B.). 
 
 4. If the Sh va be silent, the vowel added to it must be 
 either identical or homogeneous with the preceding : as 
 nOJ&for ngjft (Pret. Niph.), Seghol and Chirek being 
 homogeneous ( 3, 3.) 1j;n,for nJDJfll (Pret. Hof.],TDJ^, 
 for TOj;^- 
 
 5. In forms with the afformatives T\ > 1^ , before 
 
 T 
 
 which the vowel of the second radical drops, the comp. 
 Sh va loses its Sh va points: as npJMrom 10J; HD^n. 
 from TOJjn; n-fOJJJ. from 13DJ?.i. 
 
 6. The future of the verbs Fut. 0. in most cases has 
 Chateph-Patach : as *lDl? _to serve. The verbs Fut. A. take 
 Chateph-Seghol : as ptfT to be strong. 
 
 NOTE. Sometimes verbs with Chateph-Seghol take Patach, when 
 the form is augmented by afformatives: as "1DN* to bind, with 
 
 to collect, 
 
40. VERBS PE GUTTURAL. 73 
 
 7. Some verbs retain simple Sh va under the guttural. 
 This is most frequently the case with |1 : as lOfT to covet, 
 "IpfT to want, lack. 
 
 8. The Inf., Imp. and Fut. Nif., which require a Dag. 
 for the assimilated } Nif. ( 12, 4.), \\jill lengthen the 
 vowel under JJVN to compensate for the Dag. : as 
 
 to cut in, engrave, for JTTJV "JQJJ*;for *M? 1J! ^ ^ 
 characteristic is associated with the gutturals : as "|TT to 
 pursue. 
 
 EXERCISE 62. 
 
 S 5 sn! N*S : 4 fnj; 
 
 n 
 ny :miD^cnDi I2 nn 
 
 orro 
 
 njn nxn S9 anj; : 38 vnirn>x 
 
 sleep 1 to change 2 Ethiopian 3 skin 4 to have delight 5 understanding- 6 to de 
 vise 7 to dwell 8 securely 9 prosperity 10 to rejoice 11 cit}- 12 to draw, deliver 13 
 intelligence 14 a fool 15 to keep silent 16 to count 17 oil 18 to become rich 19 to lay 
 hold 20 to examine 21 to condemn, punish 22 to explore 23 after, then 24 to hold 
 back, restrain 25 help 26 to leave, miss 27 the words of 28 to learn 29 to mourn 30 
 the fool, simple 31 to believe 32 to be wanting 33 trespass 34 to seize 35 pitch 36 
 to join one s self 37 way 38 prudent man 39 simple 40 to pass on 41 to punish 42 
 to ha(e 43 unjust gain 44 to lengthen 45 fierceness, cruelty 46 fury 47 a flood 48 
 wrath 49 envy 50 - 
 
 10 
 
74 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 EXERCISE 63. 
 
 In the place of 1 greats men 2 do not stands. The house 
 of 4 the righteous shall stand. The fatherless 5 and the 
 widow 6 do (in. pi.) not oppress 7 - And 8 Pharaoh 9 heard 1 
 this thing and 8 h$ sought 11 to slay 12 Moses 13 - Thou shalt 
 not oppress 14 a hired 14 servant 15 , do (f. s.) not take 16 to 
 pledge 16 the raiment 17 of a widow. My heart 18 trusted 1 ^ 
 in the Lord and I am helped 20 and my heart rejoiceth 21 - 
 The Lord said unto these wicked : as 22 you have forsaken 23 
 me, thus 24 I will forsake you, as you have plowed 25 wick 
 edness 26 ) thus you shall reap 27 iniquity 28 , and 8 I will cause 
 you to eat 2 - 9 the fruit 30 of falsehoods 1 - Let be put to si 
 lence 32 the lying lips 33 , which speak 34 against 35 the right 
 eous arrogancy 36 - O 37 sword 38 ! put thyself 3 ^ into^ thy 
 scabbard 41 and rest 42 - 
 
 . 4JT3 104, 2- siro;* 
 
 - "T : |r 
 
 12JHH Pi- H p3 [Fut. A] 10yn# 9 rl;n3 Sconnect and with the verb. 
 
 Fut. 21lSl? Nif. 20-iiy 3withl9nD3 18m. 2 1 ? , 3*7 17 1 JD 16^)1 15,14T^ 
 -<r --^ _ T .... _ T <T 
 
 a 25 7, 5] 29 SDX 28 nnSij; 27iy wyti 25Bhn 24 3 w^y 22 3 
 
 35 Sj? Part. 34*131 [f.] 33 1j5Kr- r\)^ Jussiv Nif. 32 oSx Pause 
 
 ;Nif. 42 ^jn 41 ^r) 4o ?^ Nif. 39tjpx [f.J SS^in 37 "IH 36pny 
 
 41. VERBS AYIN GUTTURAL. 
 
 1. These verbs are subject to the same variations as the 
 verbs Pe Guttural, taking Sh va comp. in all those forms 
 where the second radical has Sh va: as Hprn to go far 
 away, for HfJITJ.; tpfl&f n to slaughter, for P^J1, 
 
 2. The fut. and imp. in these verbs are regularly A : 
 
 as prrv. 
 
 3. Pi. Pu. and Hitli., which require the characteristic 
 doubling of the second radical, lengthen the vowel under 
 the first to compensate for the omitted Dag. : as T]")3 
 for Tj , rpM for Tp39, r|*O!9 for Tj^Dlp, 
 
 Before H > II and y the preceding vowel very often re 
 mains short: as *1JJ to destroy, pTO to mock, ""inspp to 
 cleanse. 
 
41. VERBS AYIX GUTTURAL. 75 
 
 4. In Pi. and Hithp. the Tsere of the last syllable is 
 shortened to Seghol by throwing back the accent, which 
 
 > 
 
 often occurs after Yav Conv.: as CJHJM anc ^ ^ e drove away, 
 
 > > . > 
 
 for &T"U* , rntin and he ministered, for rr\W*> or when a 
 
 monosyllabic word or one with the tone on the penult 
 
 > * > * 
 
 follows : as ^ pD^ to m ock me, DE> JTJ$7 to minister 
 there. ( 14, Shortening c.). 
 
 EXERCISE 64. 
 
 JN DiN" 19 p j 
 
 T v: T T I v 
 
 garment 1 training, instruction 2 not 3 to mock 4 to grow old 5 to boast one s 
 selfs to hew 7 to bless 8 to cast out 9 shall go 10 to flee 11 to continue 12 early 13 
 105, 6. a curse 14 to refuse 15 to comfort, console one s selfrs to hide 17 to 
 ask 18 son of 19 to purify, to clean 20 to change 21 garments 22 to deny, deal 
 falsely 23 to lie 24 fellow-man 25 deceit, fraud 26 to abhor 27 - 
 
 EXERCISE 65. 
 
 Serve 1 (p. m.) the Lord in truth 2 , and if (it be) evils i n your 
 eyes4 to serve the Lord, choose you 5 this days whom you will 
 serve, whether^ the gods, which your fathers^ serveds orio 
 the gods of i 1 the Amorites 12 > in whose landis you dwell; 
 I and my house 14 , we will serve the Lord. And is the 
 people said 15 ; God forbid 1 ** that we should forsake 11 ? the 
 
70 PART 1. EXERCISES, 
 
 Lord, to serve other 18 gods; for the Lord drove 
 from before us 20 all the people 21 ; also we will serve the 
 Lord, for he is our God. Do not deny 22 your (pi. m.) 
 God. The Lord trieth 23 the righteous. They cried 24 unto 
 God and were delivered 25 - Truth (f.) does not spring up26 
 until 2 ? the Iie 2 9 is rooted out 2 - We bless 30 you in the 
 name of the Lord. Arid he drove out the man. How 
 long 31 refuse 32 ye to keep my commandments? Haste 
 tliee 33 (fern, s.) escape 34 (f. s.) thither 35 - How long will 
 ye despise 36 intelligence 3 ^ will ye regard 38 it as 39 an ad 
 versary^ whilst* 1 it loves 42 you, seeks-* 3 your welfare 44 , to 
 lead 4 ^ you in the way of 46 integrity 4 ?. 
 
 8 verb before the noun 7 DX 6 QVTI 5Dat. 4 DDT#3 3 .jn [f.J2nON 
 15 -ntf"! u r\*2 [ 23, 4. 96, 2.] 13 DY>X3 12 "TOWl H "TlSN 10 OKI 
 
 [the adj. after the noun g 90, 2.] 18 D^HK 17 transl. from forsaking [ 30,;- 1.] 16 HjS 
 . .. _. T 
 
 24pm Fut. 23JH3 Pi. Jussive with 3 22#H3 21 Q"3 y 20.1J J3D Pi. 
 
 I ~T I - T - T "* T 
 
 "11? Pi. pret. 301p3 m 293T3 Pu 28t^^t^ 2?TT Fut 26no Pause! 
 
 *~ -r TT -T - -T 
 
 36VN3 35H^^ Nif. 34 fio Pi. 33 ^HD Pi. pret. 32 J 
 
 T: I-T TT -T -T 1 
 
 trans, seeking 43 #Tl transl. it [f] is loving 42 3HN 41) Part. act. f 403 K 
 
 - T -T; -T 
 
 : 47 Q DD 46 }"n Pi the vowel short ! 45 
 
 T I V V 
 
 - 
 
 42. VERBS LAMED GUTTURAL. 
 
 1. To this class belong only verbs with H> y and Jl (il 
 with Mappik 7) as the third radical. 
 
 2. Their peculiarities are: 
 
 a. These gutturals when final require the A sound before 
 them, hence every other mutable vowel is changed into 
 Patach; the Inf., Imp. and Fut. therefore have A: as 
 n 1 ?^ to send, (T^ , 
 
 b. The gutturals preceded by the immutable vowels 1, J|, 
 > , T take Patach furtive ( 6.): as.rTD^ JlOB> 
 
 frStf b> nn, 
 
 3. The forms with Tsere before the final guttural either 
 retain the Tsere and then Pat. furt. must follow, or Tsere 
 is chaned into Patach: as 
 
42. VERBS LAMED GUTTURAL. 77 
 
 NOTE. The form with Tsere and Pat. furt. is found more frequently 
 at the end of a period (with distinctive accent): as JHT Lev. 11, 37, 
 
 but jnr* NE. 1. 14. nns Job 12, is, but nnsTjob 30. n. 
 
 f _,.. - .. . 
 
 4. In the second sing. f. of the pret., which ends with 
 two vowelless consonants, the guttural takes Patach instead 
 of Sh va: as J1#D#. for flJflDB ; the sing. f. form of the 
 participles, take two Patachs instead of two Seghols : as 
 
 > for nj?Dfc> . 
 
 EXERCISE 66. 
 
 pn rji 
 :n-rn 
 
 
 nirr wrx nin xi^ ^D^ : VDN na^ noon 
 
 to withhold 1 to anoint 2 97, 2. 3 to pardon 4 iniquity of 5 to cease 6 midst 
 of 7 therefore 8 to open 9 dumb 10 hell 11 destruction 12 the eyes of 13 in 14 to 
 slay 15 for ever 16 to cheer, to gladden 17 the heart oft the God of 19 to cause 
 or make to prosper 20 to justify 21 to condemn 22 abomination of2 3 n. p. f. 24 
 door 25 85, 4. b. rebuke oft 6 other 27 - 
 
 EXERCISE 67. 
 
 Behold upon the mountains 1 (are) the feet of2 him that 
 hringeth good tidings-% that published peaces. Dost thou 
 (f. sing.) not knows whither*? the men 8 did go? I flee^ 
 from the face of Saraiu. And he rose up 12 to flee 
 unto 13 Tarshish 1 ^ And David said: arise^ and let us 
 But 1 " 7 to the king of Judah 18 , which sent 1 ^ you to 
 
r.-uiT I. EXERCISES. 
 
 O f the Lord, thu2i shall ye say22 to him : be- 
 cause23 thine hearta* (is) tender^ and* thou hast hum 
 bled thyself^ before2T the Lord and* hast rentes thy 
 clothes29, i a i so 
 
 God will speak. Againso (there) shall be heard in 
 place the voice of joy32. The house ofss the wicked shall 
 be overthrown34, but^ the tent35 O f the nprightse shall 
 flourish37. He that trustees i n his own heart, is a 
 but whoso walketh^o wisely4i he shall be delivered^. 
 
 4part. Hi. of yv& 3 part. Pi. of -|fr| the bringer of (him that br.) g. tidings 2^.H 1 
 10;J3D Iart. f. s. rO3 8 the noun after the verb ( 107, 4.) 7 HJX 6pret.j;T 
 
 171 16 fut. pamg. in pause 15 .^:p 14^^ 13( 19, 6.) 12Qp l 11 nfer 
 ^ 23 pll 22nOK n 21713 20 with ace. ffn 19 part, w.tii article 
 31(f94,2) 30^ 29TJHja 28;nD 27 ^fip 26Ni. ^3 * Vav cov. 
 38 part, with 3 ,HD3 37 Hi. H^3 36 D^^ 35^^ 34Ni. 155^ 33n-3 
 
 .42oV)3 41 (in wisdom) riDDH 40 part. -tSn 
 ~ 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 THE SUFFIXES OF THE VEE13. 
 42. IN GENERAL. 
 
 1. The suffixes of the verb are: 
 Person: 1. 2. 3 
 
 Sing. com. J I" 3 " in 
 
 * t. n (n ) 
 
 T>1 ni. DD m. D 
 
 f. p f . ? 
 
 NOTE. 10 , poetically used for D : as 10 D3 it covered them. 
 
 2. The suff. are annexed to the verbal forms by vowels, 
 called: Union vowels; to the pret. by the A. vowel ( 
 or ), to the future by the E. vowel ( or ). The union 
 vowel is only applied to the verbal forms, ending with a 
 
42. Ix GENERAL. * 79 
 
 consonant: as Dp ^??Pp ne killed me; whilst with all 
 the forms ending with a vowel the suffixes are connected 
 immediately: as 1*7pb ^wftp they k. in. 
 
 43. THE PRETERITE WITH SUFFIXES. 
 
 1. The lengthening of the word hy the suffixes causes 
 the dropping of the pretonic Kamets. Hence the pret. 
 undergoes the following changes: 
 
 Person. Person. Person. 
 
 1. , 2. 3. 
 
 A?p into 0?ttp (J3? 
 
 into ^riSrrs T (before^) 
 
 p. gjp T 
 
 2. Verbs middle E retain this vowel before the suffixes: 
 as ^pHK to love, D^ ? 1 ? to put on a garment. In Pi. and 
 other forms with final , this changes before the suf 
 fixes Tj D5 p into Seghol ; before the other suff. it falls 
 away entirely : as S^Dp , ^tDp > D?^p O^p . 
 
 3. The form fVptOp sometimes undergoes a contraction : 
 in for 1(iri ; nri for n^l , as inSp^ she weaned him, 
 1. Sam. 1, 24. rUTtf?^ (fear) "has laid hold on her, Jer. 49, 24. 
 
 EXERCISE 68. 
 
 : : - 
 
 ijrNV) :ri: 
 
 TJIOD 
 
 before rave suft*. 
 
80 * PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 ji :njnp 14 
 nru* : 
 
 to prove 1 my servants fear 3 to strengthen 1 my righteousness 5 to clothe 6 
 (with two ace. $ 85, 2, 6.) garments of? salvation 8 the robe oft why 10 to be 
 willing 11 to repay 12 thanksgiving 13 to deliver 14 straw 15 chaff 16 to carry 
 off 17 a hurricane 18 - 
 
 EXERCISE 69. 
 
 She didi him good and not evil all the days of 2 her 
 For 4 a -shorts moment^ I have forsaken thee (s. f.), 
 with 4 everlastings kindness^ I will have mercy on^o 
 thee (s. f.). Thineii (are) (the) heavens also^ Thine (is) 
 (the) earth, Thou hast founded^ them. Sarah*-* has 
 driven^ me out of her house 1 ^. No 1 * fear ofis God (is) 
 in this place arid they will kill 1 ^ me. Very22 refmed20 
 (is) Thy saying2i, and Thy servants Ioveth2 4 it. Dost 
 thou (s. f.) know25 the men that have asked 2 ^ thee (s. f.) 
 for2* my name 2 ? I do not know29 them. Who has 
 killed him? her? them? We have touch edso thee, (s. m.) 
 thee, (s. f.) her, him. Thou (s. f.) hast touched her, him, 
 us, them (p. f.). Why hast thou (s. f.) forsaken us? 
 her? me? him? They have forsaken them, you. Why 
 has she persecuted 31 him? us? you? (p. f.) thee? (s. f.) 
 her? He has gathered them, you, thee, us. 
 
 9DSlU 8tDn 71 6V3p 5T>JH 43 3 with pi. suff. D Tl 2"H 1 with ace. S^J* 
 T * vv I IT * - : ._ ... _ T 
 
 ,fV3 15 Pi. tin j 14rp!# 1 31D 1 i2nx H^lS 10 Pi. with ace. to have m. on: nrp 
 
 -T TT -T \- \; - 
 
 221XD 21(f.)nniDX 20 part. pass, spy 19 JJ1H 18 nNT 17 r 16 with suff. n"3 
 
 . i . T . . 1 _ T - T _ . . i .. 
 
 31 crn 30TTJJ 29pret. 28 with suff. ntf ,Q# 27 ^ 26 SNl^ 26 WT 24 3HN* 
 I-T -T : - T -T T 
 
 44. THE FUTURE WITH SUFFIXES. 
 
 1. The Cholem of fut, Kal, -before Tj> 63 and J3 changes 
 into Kamets-Chatuph ; before the other suff. it drops : as 
 
 2. The verbs with the fut. A. (including the verbs Ay in 
 arid Lamed Guttural) not only retain their A sound 
 (Patach), but even lengthen it into Kamets, the syllable 
 
44. THE FUTURE WITH SUFFIXES. 81 
 
 becoming an open one : as 3CO7? he will clothe me ; 
 irn^J^P they pollute him. 
 
 3. PL loses or shortens its Tsere, like Kal its Cholem : as 
 Tj <f3jT he will gather thee, D3p_ 
 
 4* The plur. fern, forms, 2. and 3. person (in j"0) are 
 changed into the corresponding masc. forms (in 1) before 
 connection with suffixes : as \33Ttn IP TlHDN my maids 
 count me for a stranger. Job 19, 15. 
 
 5. In pause, there is occasionally inserted instead of the 
 union vowel a union syllable f , f , called: Nun epenthetic, 
 
 as in^-n^. 
 
 3 epenthetic is usually assimilated to the first letter of the 
 suffix and expressed by Dag. forte. These suffixes are : 
 Person. Person. Person. 
 
 1. 2, 3. 
 
 Sing. c. ^- and ^ *] , (HD ) m. ^ f. nj) 
 
 Plur. 13 and -l^ 
 
 EXERCISE TO. 
 
 n:q njp nogn ^n 
 ??^ run DI 
 
 HIPP :DJ 
 
 buy, acquire 1 to embrace 2 to be attentive 3 to sustain 4 the bed of 5 sick 
 ness 6 pride, arrogance 7 deed, act 8 to bring- near 9 to put far away, remove 10 
 stranger, foreigner 11 lips 12 to bind 13 correction 14 h;ul died 15 to pronounce 
 happy 16 U> make inferior 17 to crown 18 ( 85. 2. b.) our fathers 1 ^ to compare 20 - 
 
 11 
 
82 PART 1. EXERCISES, 
 
 EXERCISE 71. 
 
 The Lord will requite 1 me according to2 my righteous- 
 ness^. The name of 4 God will set thee on high^, will send 
 thee help 6 from the sanctuary? and sustains thee out of 
 Zion. From the extremity of9 tjie heaven, thy God jpll 
 gatherio thee. Now 11 I shall gather them, thee (s. f.), 
 you (p. f.), her. When 1 2 my brother 14 will meet thee 13 
 and ask 15 thee: whose 16 (art) thou ? Thou wilt meet him, 
 she will meet you. Thou (s. f.) wilt meet her. Why 
 dost thou ask me (tut.). They (pi. f.) will ask us. They 
 (pi. mas.) will ask you. Who will honor 17 him, that 
 dishonoreth 18 his life 1 ^ ? Now will love^o me my hus~ 
 band2i. Thou (s. f.) wilt love* him. They (pi. f.) will 
 love her. You (pi. in.) will love us. 
 
 7Hp 6( 93, 6.) thee help 5p_Tj; 5 set on high, Pi. 3Jjjp 4 D# 3 piy 23 1 ^DJ 
 (usually StfJtf) Stftf 14TIK 13 ^J3 12*3 11 HPV 1 Pi. V3D S^D 8 fut. A. ITC> 
 
 -T-T T -T T - "I: -f 
 
 20 Alt. A. 3HX 191^33 18 HTl S 17 Pi.133 16 to whom l&with Vav couv. fut. A. 
 
 45. THE INFINITIVE WITH SUFFIXES. 
 
 1. The infin. Kal when connected with suffixes appears 
 in the form ?DD and according to its signification receives 
 either the verbal suffixes or the nominal suffixes : as 07t?p 
 to kill me ; ^tpp my killing. 
 
 2. With the suffixes ^j, D2> J3 a form sometimes occurs 
 with Kamets under the second radical : as ^T^DN thy 
 
 J 
 
 eating. 
 
 3. The infin. 7ftp assumes with suff. the form ^DD : as 
 i 
 
 to hinder him. 
 
 EXERCISE 72. 
 
 nin? 
 9 onty 
 

 4fi. THE IMPERATIVE WITH SUFFIXFES. 
 
 nfiD>DT?ri 13 Dip5 : 12 
 no niiT n; njn CDITI run Ww? TT 
 
 T run no pjst o 18 ^i 17 
 
 give 1 the sons, children of 2 to sell 3 Greeks 4 in order that 5 away from, from 6 
 territory 7 keep holy 8 to surround 9 to seize, capture 10 to open 11 your eyes 12 
 when rise 13 become many, multiply 14 see 15 the skirt oft6 to kill 1 know 18 - 
 
 EXERCISE T3. 
 
 He suffered 1 no 2 man to do them wrong-**- And* the 
 manna 6 left off 5 from the morrow 7 after they had eaten& of 
 the produce^ of the land. David has sent comfortersio unto 
 thee to searchn the city, ( 57, 5. 3 ) to spy it out 2 and 
 to overthrow! 3 it. Arid* Kuth 15 said 14 entreat^ me not 
 ( 104, 2.) to leave 17 thee (s. f.). Hamanis has devised^ 
 againstzo the Jews2i to destroy 22 them. Preserve 23 , my 
 son, the law of 24 thy mother 25 ; when thou goest 26 , it 
 shall Iead27 thee, when thou sleepest 2 ^, it shall keep 
 
 4Vav Conv. Sp^n 2 no y (before the verb) 1 fl SH 
 - T I - T 
 
 1 2Pi- Sjl Hln 10 part. IM. DHJ 91^ 8 transl. in their eating 
 
 231V: 22 pi. i3x 21 
 
 28 inf. with 3 . 3327 2?nnjn 26 transl. in thy going, "jn Hithp. 25?JJ3X 2 
 
 .29 with pi. suff. 
 
 46. THE IMPERATIVE WITH SUFFIXES. 
 
 1. The form ?bp changes before its annexion to suff. 
 into 7fcpp T > as the infinitive. The form >7pp and 17C5P re 
 main unchanged ; Jl^tOp takes the form of ^ Stpp * 
 
 2. In verbs Ayin and Lamed Guttural, the A vowel of 
 the final syllable is retained and lengthened into Kamets : 
 as 3rP* send me; ^?NC* afs k me. 
 
84 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 EXERCISE 74. 
 
 rrn ob& tr p.3 : n plV3 nirv 
 :rnrv ^350 ^wvrj^ nrw* >3 4 T! ?^ 
 
 :^j^| rnrr ^ij;p : 7 >$n rnrr 
 : vm^D Dpj jnt^t imS^D nin; 10 tfy. 
 
 pr nin? nj;T rinx :y^ n TO 
 
 according to my rio-teousness 1 to lead 2 in Thy truth 3 to teach 4 my sal- 
 ration 5 to deliver 6 to redeem 7 to cleanse, purify 8 to be or become clean, 
 pun 9 ye that fear thy throat 11 the table 12 thy heart 13 to enter 14 to 
 avoid 15 to revenge 16 persecutor 17 - 
 
 EXERCISE 75. 
 
 Hear me (pi. m.) and entreat 1 for2 me to 1 the king. 
 Kemember me, prays, and strengthen 4 me, pray, only 5 this 
 once6> that? I may be avengeds on my enemies^. Gather^ 
 them from among 11 the people^ (pi.). Fearis the Lord 
 and love Him. If 14 iniquity is (be) in thy hand, put it 
 far away 1 ^ andi7 letis not 17 wrong 1 ^ dwellis in thy tents20. 
 And he said : draw2i thy sword22, and thrust me through 28 
 therewith24, lest 25 these uncircumcised27 come26 and* thrust 
 me through and* abuse28 me. Hear (s. f.) us. Hear 
 (pi. f.) me. Help29 (pi. f.) me. Help (pi. m.) him. 
 Bury 30 (pi. f.) her, for she is a king s daughter. 
 
 8Ni. optat.with D,DpJ 71 8ig 94, 3.) f. DJ?3 ^K 4Pi. pm 3 W 2 S 1 with J #}Q 
 
 17 SKI 16 HI. prn WJIK UDN is XT i2nu;u njp ion. pp 9 TN 
 B^JJI 22T ]3"|n aisjS^ 20 T^^ 19n i?!^ i8io4, 2. HI. |^ 
 
 29 ni^ *Vav. Conv. 28 with 3, Hith. hhtf 27 D" 1 ?^, 26^3^ 25 |3 
 
 47. THE PARTICIPLE WITH SUFFIXES. 
 The participles of Kal and Pi. lose their final Tsere and 
 like the infin. according to their signification, receive either 
 the nominal or verbal suffixes: as ^HP^ ne wno keeps me, 
 my keeper. 
 
49. THE PARTICIPLE WITH SUFFIXES. s 
 
 EXERCISE 76. 
 
 nirr 
 
 HIPP :DD JOHN rrsriiN "0^3 16 W n??nn 
 
 nin 
 
 nin 
 
 to gird 1 ( 85, 2, b.) strength 2 (that which is) holy, consecrated to God3 to 
 be or become guilty 4 to swear 5 by his right (hand) 6 if? ( 108, 4.) I give 8 
 corn 9 enemies 10 drink 11 the alien 12 new wine, must 13 to gather 1 * to store up 15 
 to teach 16 her, its children 17 shade 18 to clothe 19 adversaries 20 confusion 21 as 
 the cold of 29 snow 23 messenger 84 faithful 2 ^ a ruler 26 to hearken 27 word of28 
 servant 29 say 30 continually 31 to be great 32 salvation 33 to curse 34 I will curse, 
 devote to destruction 35 shall inherit 36 to be destroyed 37 - 
 
 EXERCISE 77. 
 
 These (are) our judges* that judge us. The lands shall not 
 be expiated 3 of4 the blood that is sheds therein^, but 7 by 8 
 the blood of him that shed^ it. For I was ashamed* to ask 
 of the king a force n to help us against 12 the enemy is in 
 the way: because 14 we had spokenis unto the king, say 
 ing, The hand ofi? our God (is) upon* all them that 
 seekis Him for goodi9; butso His power 21 and His wrath22 
 (is) against* all them that forsake Him23. They that curse24 
 thee shall be cursed, and they that bless 2 ^ thee shall be 
 blessed. Lord, who is like unto 2 6 Thee, who deliverest27 
 the poor28 and the needy29 from him that robbethso him. 
 
 83 7DN""3 6 3 5Pu. ija# 4^7 3Pu. 133 2Dative=to the land (f,) 1 part. DJ# 
 *S 17 T leibKj? 15 -^ 14 3 13TTX 12 D H^Tt 103 9 part. 
 
86 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 25 Pi. part. rpa 24 part. ^N 23 part. 22 f3K 21 foj, 20) 19 mtoS 18 Pi - P art - 
 ; 30 part, ^n 29J1>3K 28-Jj 27 S .^ 26 (before gravr Buff. fo3) 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 48. VERBS N"2 . 
 
 1. The verbs of which the first radical is ft partake of 
 all the peculiarities of the verbs Pe Guttural. In some 
 of them, however, the N is quiescent in either Cholem or 
 Tsere, hence they are called; tf Ttf = quiescent the 
 i, e. the first radical K, 
 
 2. In the fut. Kal the five following verbs: "ON to 
 perish, PDN to be willing, S^K to eat, "1QN to say and 
 i"T)N to bake, have the N quiescent in Cholem : as ^3tft\ 
 thou wilt eat, 12W he will perish. In the first person 
 the N drops: as "j^K I shall say." The verbs N1N to take 
 hold, f|pK to collect, have beside the regular form tHNS 
 ^]D{J> the form of the N": rtTN ^0*1 2. Sam. 6, 1. 
 
 3. The final syllable has generally Patach, Tsere is for 
 the most part used in syllables with a distinctive accent: 
 
 Job 3, 3. "pK Job 20, 7. S^Ntfl 1. Mos, 3, 14, 
 1. Mos. 2, 16. 
 
 4. With Vav Conv. the accent is thrown back: 
 ; hut with a distinctive accent, Mi Ira : ^jtfJ, 
 
 5. The inf. Kal of 1DX with S> is n DNSi for 
 ( 12, 6. B. 3.). 
 
 6. In the verbs TfX to go away, *)(1N to tarry, to delay, 
 nHK to come, the N quiesces in Tsere: as StNSfor ^WN 
 
 for nr>stv> inx^for nn^\v (cf. 12, r>. B. 3.). 
 
49. VERBS N"7. 87 
 
 EXERCISE 78. 
 
 : 4 mpn *nxn yssh DIN 3 niEQ : 
 
 T| : t T T T : 
 
 10 #5:1 9 w?n xSi 8 n#5 S^^n 7 D"}n : e 
 
 13 973 nnpw "v?wi SN : 12 n^ "1^5 nj;i. tr^-p n D?Di : 
 
 nrrx mm* 16 ^D toTvi :^sr D 16 vo# ^DIID^ nin o 
 
 : : : - T ; T T T 
 
 VT 
 
 witness 1 lie, falsehood 2 82/5. and $ 83, 6; when dies 3 expectation, (sup 
 ply /iis) 4 fig tree 5 fruit 6 sword 7 flesh, body 8 meet, reach unto 9 soul 10 lie, 
 falsehood 11 ruins, destroys 12 my way 13 hight of 14 his heaven 15 sons of 16 
 p. n. m. 17 to cut off 18 thumbs, great toes 19 feet 20 weak 21 fool 22 wise, prudent 23 
 in proportion, according to 24 dough 25 cakes 26 ( 85, 3) unleavened 27 leav 
 ened 28 drive out 29 I have sojourned 30 now 31 - 
 
 EXERCISE 79. 
 
 Say ye to the righteous (man), because 1 (he is) good, 
 that 2 he shall eat the fruit of 3 his doings4. Not shall es- 
 cape^ the wicked, and the patience of 6 the righteous shall 
 not he in vain 7 - Ands the children of Israel 9 said: who 
 shall give 10 us flesh 11 to eat 10 ? We remember (pret.) the 
 fish^, which we did eat in Egypt 13 freely 1 ^ Eat thou 
 not the bread of an evil eye 15 (i. e. an envious, malig 
 nant person), for eat, saith 16 he to thee, but 17 his heart 18 
 is not 19 with 20 thee. The children of Israel are not will 
 in to hearken to thee. And the asses 21 of 22 Kish 23 were 
 
 SVavConv. 7T3X 6 fern, nipn 5 Ni. DH 4 ^n 3 n3 2 3 1 "3 
 171 Wfut. 15 rn jn 14 Di)n ISD^XD 12 HJT lllifS 10 Hi. SDX (give to eat) 
 
 ].<- - T -: TT TT 
 
 23 ^p 22 ( 80, 10) S "WK or ^ 21 (fern.) m jinN 20 D;> 19 ^73 18 fa"? 
 
 49. VERBS N" 1 ? . 
 1. In verbs of which the third radical is Nthe tf qui- 
 
88 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 esces whenever the final syllable has A or E, and length 
 ens final Patach into Kamets: as NVO, for N^? ( 14. 
 Lengthening, 3.); N^D to be full. 
 
 2. Before the consonantal afformatives (fiO) N quiesces 
 in the pret. Kal in Kamets: HKD> in the pret. of all 
 the other conjugations in Tsere : jlNVD^j in the imp. and 
 fut. of all the conjugations in Seghol: as rUN^? rUN^Etf , 
 
 3. The verbs middle E, like K*V to fear, retain Tsere 
 throughout the rest of the forms : as fiN*y > *fiN*7D I have 
 filled. 
 
 4. The part. fern, is commonly formed by contraction 
 
 ntfmfor n$yb ( 12, 6. B. 3.). 
 
 NOTE. The Infinitive sometimes has the termination F\tf or j"T), 
 as naOt? Prov. 8, IB. nN?|H Zech. 13, 4. niEtT Ez. 36, 3. 
 
 EXERCISE 80, 
 
 njn jiro nx J 19 svpp "own 
 
 nj; 
 
 nin n 
 
 father 1 one 2 to all of us 3 to create 1 why 5 to deal treacherously 6 against his 
 brother 7 to profane 8 our fathers 9 clean 10 right 11 renew 12 within me 13 to 
 cast 14 bread 15 upon (the surface) 16 multitude of = after many 17 days 18 to 
 find 19 to heal, cure 20 to hate 21 congregation of 22 evil doers 23 agreeable, 
 swee t24 afterwards 25 to fill 26 his mouth 27 gravel - stones 28 ( 85, 2. a.) 
 friends of 2 9 to be envious 30 men oft 1 ( 83, 6 ) crown 32 gray hair 33 to 
 wound, to injure 34 to bind up35 to split, to dush^G unrighteousness37 n. p. m.38 
 s"ui39 ($ -25, 7)40 thy hcart ll- 
 

 50: VERBS f"j. 89 
 
 EXERCISE 81. 
 
 I said, Lord heal 1 my soul 2 - for I have sinned 3 against* 
 Thee.. And Moses said unto the people: ye have sinned 
 a great 6 sin 5 - And? (there) remained 8 two of9 (the) men 
 in the campio? the name of the one 1 * was Eldad 12 and 
 the name of the other 13 Medad 14 and? they prophesied 15 in 
 the camp, and? (there) said a young man 16 to Moses: 
 Eldad and Medad do prophesy in the camp. And 7 Joshua 17 
 said: my lord 18 Moses forbid 19 them. And Moses said unto 
 him, enviest20 thou for my sake 21 ? would22 G-od22 that22 
 all the Lord s people (were) prophets 2 3. The ear 25 is not 
 filled24 with26 hearing. In the lips 27 of the intelligent 
 (man) 28 wisdom isfound 2 ^- And 7 Jehosheba 30 stole Joash 31 
 and hid 32 him from* Athalia 33 , and he was 34 hid 35 in the 
 house of the Lord six years. 
 
 9 rtf 8Ni. IXtf TVavConv. 
 
 25 [fern.] fTX 24fut. Ni. j 23 D N 3J 22?^-^ 21 20 part Pi. KJp 193 
 
 U- TT 
 
 32 m. fut. nr\o SI^ST SO^T^IH; 29 NL fut. 2p3j - 7 ri3^ 26:3 
 
 .* J3D 37 D":^ 1 36 35 part. Hith. K3H 34 "TH 
 
 50. VERBS f i). 
 
 1. The verbs, of which the first radical is % , lose }, when 
 ever it should take Sh va, by assimilation, hence the sec 
 ond radical is doubled, i. e. receives Dag. forte: as*>, 
 for C^JV t&^jn.fbr CT ^n ( 12, 4.). Before a gtitt. the 
 assimilation does not take place: as pX^> ^I^JT! (ibid.). 
 In the infin. and imp., i drops without compensation, the 
 following letter commencing the word: as * } (Dag. lene); 
 before Makkef "^, with pargog. tl> H W * The regular 
 form of the imp. is found occasionally: as C*ftJ leave, VHJ 
 vow ye. (See 3 of this .) 
 
 2. With these verbs, in order to make the infin. dissylla 
 bic, it takes the fern, nominal" ending H ,or fi when 
 the second or third radical is a guttural: as H^ Mjy to 
 
 .touch. (See 3 of this .) 
 
 3. In most cases, these verbs have a fut. and imp. 0, 
 
90 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 many A: as ^JD> to fall, fcty. The imp. and infin. of verbs 
 with "fut. 0, are regular : as *?b} inf. ^535 * 
 
 4. The verb JfO to give, has besides the irregularities of 
 the verbs } ) the peculiarity, that it also assimilates its 
 
 final 3 before the aiformatives Jl and 3 : as DH^ for 
 for UjrU; infin. flfi, for rWl (2) ; with" D^ 
 10*? J riflD; imp, fjl, \Jtf-J, ^H, with parag. 
 
 
 
 5. In njT7 to take, the ^ is analogous to the 3 of 
 the verbs j"fi. Fut. llpUbr Hp^ inf. nHpj with D^M- 
 
 nnp_3 % nnp_^ nnpp; imp. np_, ^np, ^np, n^np* Ho.np;- 
 
 for Hp^ ( 14, Short, b.); but Ni. always 
 
 EXERCISE 82. 
 
 12 on ^ 
 ^3 
 
 $& xp jr.K 17 y:)D 
 
 nin? nn? jt] np 40 : 
 :nnir npn 
 
 to dig 1 a pit 2 to fall 3 to break down 4 a fence 5 to l>ite 6 serpent 7 to despise, 
 contemn 8 all,every thing 9 for., in behalf of 10 soul, life 11 to revenge 12 to keep, 
 retain sc. anger 13 to make a vow 14 to pay, perform 15 to Iooki6 to plant 17 to 
 form, make 18 the mouth of 19 to pour forth, utter 20 to turn an~ay 21 backward 22 
 afar off 23 knowledge 24 my son- 5 thy heart 26 my ways 27 to observe 28 to put 
 off 29 shoes 30 from 31 feet 32 to step near 33 to kiss 34 root out, pluck up35 the 
 chaff 36 to drive away 37 a wind 38 iron 39 earth 40 persons 41 (coll,) substance, 
 properly 42 - 
 
51. Verbs " 3* 91 
 
 EXERCISE 83, 
 
 Put forth*. thine hand and touch 2 his flesh 3 - He made-t 
 a pits, and digged^ it, and is fallen into the ditch?, (which) 
 he made 8 - Keep 9 thy tongue 10 from evil and thy lips 11 
 from speaking! 2 guileis. And!-* she vowed 15 a vow 1 *? and 
 said : Lord of Hosts* 7 ? if 18 Thou wilt remember me and 
 wilt give to thine handmaid 19 a man-child20, thensi I will 
 give him to the Lord all the days of22 his life. And 
 he dreamed23, and behold24, a ladder 25 set up 26 on* the 
 earth, and the top of it 2 ? reached^ 8 to29 heaven. .Right- 
 eousnessso deliverethsi from death32. To take away 33 my 
 life 3 * they devised-^ 5 - Lord give us Thy help^e. Thou 
 shalt not inherit 3 ? in our father s house 88 - This woman 
 said to me: give (s. f.) thy son 89 and we will eat him 
 to day40 and I will give* my son to-morrow*!- 
 lorpitfS 9fut. o. nyj 8^3 rnn^ ensn 5 -via 47153 s infra ajjj 
 is DK irnnoy 16TU isnit. OITJ i4Couv.i i3nD"ip 12 PI. nan 
 
 26 part. Ho. a* J 25 D;?p 24 rm. 23oSn 22-^ 211 20 D^JX ^n? 
 31 Hi. fut. StfJ 30 fern. Hn 29 ( 19, 6,) local H 28 part. Hi. pU 
 
 4innn 4ooi n 39^33 san-a ^Sn^ sen;^- SSDJST 34-^33 
 
 T T - T -.: 
 
 .($ 85, 4, 6.) 
 
 T : 
 
 51. VERB? >" , 
 1. The verbs of which the first radical is are divided 
 
 into three classes : 
 
 a. The first class comprises those, in which * is used as 3 
 in the verbs 3", i. e. is assimilated and indicated by 
 Dagesh in the next letter. In this class are four verbs, 
 which all have as the second radical: fi* (Ni. flV-J Hi. 
 jTyn) to set on fire, to kindle, JW to spread down, to 
 strew, py to pour, pour out, "1^ to form. 
 
 ?>. The second class is but slightly irregular. The weak 
 letter * quiesces in the preceding vowel in fut. Kal and 
 all forms of Hi. The fut. Kal retains Chirek : as 1W\ 
 from DD J Hi. changes the Chirek into Tsere: as^tp, 
 for D^YCPatach + = a + i - e, 12, T. b. 2.). To 
 
PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 this class belong six verbs: T (fut. W and T apoc, 
 T>> and T0 IB* to be straight, right, 3fc to be good, 
 pr to suck, V? T > to wail? lament, ^H to awake. 
 c. The other verbs "5 belong to the third class. The verbs 
 of this class are properly V ), but the 1 is changed at 
 the beginning of the word into >: as H^Mbr iVl, Dg*, 
 for Din ( 12, 7. a,). In those conjugations, which have 
 a characteristic letter at the beginning (Ni., Hi., Ho) 
 the original 1, being now in the middle of the word, re 
 
 turns: Ni. pret. nVu, to. -J^N, Hi. y?in,Ho. nVin, 
 
 In Hithp. the 1 in a few verbs only is restored: asyi fnn, 
 from J?T, to know. 
 
 The preformatives , have not the usual vowel, but one 
 homogeneous to V TT&for "T^U , T^llTfor T^H, -?Wl> 
 for -l^H (12, 7. b. 2 T .). 
 
 2. In fut, Kal the drops. The preformatives now form 
 ing open syllables, lengthen the Oliirek into Tsere: aslV, 
 for I 1 ?" . With conv. V- 1^; i n Hiphil with conv V 
 171*1 
 
 3. About half these verbs have the future E. The 
 others with future A retain quiescent in Chirek : as ^> 
 to take possession of, to inherit. 
 
 4. The infin. const, is formed as with y, i. e. the t 
 drops and the segholate ending H ( G6.) (with Gutt. 
 ft- ) is appended: as jfTJ^, with" D^DD: H"}^, rClS?, 
 
 ^niTO. Occasionally, it has the fern/ termination 
 *like H"]? to bear, ril-j to go down. 
 
 5. The imp. "P> DC^with H parag. POp , 
 
 6. The fut. Kal of the Verbs LTT to take possession of, 
 to be or become dry, ^ to labor, toil, is formed like 
 
 the second class: n, B^** JW ( 3 ) but in Ni., Hi., Ho. 
 they are inflected like the third class: as 
 
 , 
 
 7. The verb Tj> to go, belongs to >"5, taking its irregular 
 forms from "jD : iut, Kal T]^, imp. Tp, infin. HjS Hi 
 
50. VERBS v 2 . 
 
 In all cases, however, where the verbs v are regular 
 it is inflected as from Tj^H : pret. Kal TJ7J1, part. Kal 
 
 EXERCISE 84. 
 
 rny? rot : trNrrns rq^ 
 
 ^p i7 N j D JWQ^ is^pin nin 
 J^nnn 
 
 nj; 
 
 ^i nin 
 
 niir 
 
 i ll \h] 
 
 42 41 40 >39 
 
 jn 
 r^^-i *i\SW 13 
 
 statute, law 1 sons 2 the fear of 3 slander, Vin "-jSn to slander 4 to sit down 5 
 both of them 6 together 7 the father of 8 the damsel 9 to consent* and lodge all 
 night 11 to be good, merry 12 Levite 13 to bear, bring forth 14 to add, increase 15 
 days 16 a drunkard 17 squanderer, prodigal 18 to become poor 19 to put, place 20 
 before thee 21 to be pleased to do anything 2 2 to make good 23 your ways 24 to 
 kindle 25 to burn 26 to help, succor 27 praise, object of praise 28 to be wearied 29 
 to be fatigued 30 whither 31 from thy presence 32 (prop. f. thy face) to ascend 33 
 there 34 to spread down, make one s bed 35 grave 36 together, at one time 37 
 to sleep 38 alone 39 to make dwell 40 to weary, be troublesome 41 words 42 
 in what 43 every one 44 thaf doeth 45 to make rare 46 thy foot 47 to be satiated, 
 weary 48 bitter 49 - 
 
^4 PART 1. 
 
 EXERCISE 85. 
 
 Kebuke 1 not a scorner 2 > lests lie hate 4 thee ; rebuke a 
 wise man 5 ; and he will love thee. Give (instruction) to a 
 wise man, and he will be yet 7 wisei-6 ; teach 8 a just man 
 and he will increase 9 in learning 10 - (It is) good to go to 
 the house of mourning 1 1- Go, eat with 12 joy is thy bread^. 
 And* the king put forth 15 his hand, saying 1 ^ lay hold 17 
 on him. And* his hand dried up. When 18 your children 20 
 shall ask 19 their fathers 21 in time to come 22 ; saying, what 
 (mean) these stones 23 ? Then 24 ye shall let know25 your 
 children, saying, Israel came over 26 this Jordan 2 ? on 28 
 dry Iand 2 9. Forso the Lord your God dried up 81 the wa 
 ters of 32 Jordan from before you 83 , until 34 ye were passed 
 over 35 - That 3 ^ all the people of 38 the earth might know 37 
 the hand of the Lord. Labor 39 not to be rich 40 - Know 
 thou the God of thy father and serve 41 Him. Boast 42 not 
 thyself of 43 to-morrow 44 ; for thou knoweft 45 not what a 
 day 47 may bring forth 4 ^. We will do thee good 48 - 
 
 71HT 6 fut, A. (to be wiser) DDQ 5 DDtlS 4KJJ# 3 J3 2 V 1 ) 1 Hi. Juss. HIT 
 
 T T .- -[ I . I 
 
 15 nS^ HrjnnS isnnpfr 123 u 1 ?:^ 1Q npS 9 HI. with ace. ep- SHI. JT 
 
 22 in t. t. come inn 21 DP13X wStfltf 20 D3\D 18-2) 17 with ace. 5^3^ 16lbS 
 31 Hi. 30-)5J? k X SOHti^r 283 27 pT 26 to come over 13_J? 25 Hi. pret. 241 23D J3X 
 37 inf. (connect 36 and 37) 36 j^S 35 inf. = your passing over 341^ 33 DD J3^ 32 ^ 
 D DV 433 42Hith. Juss. SSn 4113J; 40 Hi. inf. with S 39Juss. ^^ 38 T3J? 
 .*Vav Conv. 48 to do good 2E3" Hi. 47 Qf 46fut. lS" 45 tut. 
 
 5-2. A r ERBs yy , 
 
 The verbs belonging to this class are contracted, the 
 second radical having been repeated in the root, as D^D 
 now DO > hence termed JTJ? , 
 
 Irregularities : 
 
 . 1. The repeated letter is generally written but once, 
 with a Dag., which is, however, omitted at the end of the 
 word : as DQ, for 3D but !QD (12, 4, Note). 
 
 2. The resulting monosyllabic word from this contraction 
 is vocalized similarlv to the regular verbs, but differs in 
 

 52. VERBS yy . 95 
 
 this particular : the vowel of the second radical in the 
 regular verb recedes to the first radical of the verb J?"J? .: 
 as imp. DD.- for !Dp, like SfafJ? fut. DD>> for !Dp, like 
 SbfJV (comp. 3), (14, Kising III.). 
 
 NOTE I. Infin. and fut. Ni. excepted, which have Patach in 
 stead of Tsere. 
 
 3. The preformative forming an open syllable, which 
 requires long vowels, has the pretonic Kamets : fut. Kal 
 DD>> for DDp>> fut. Hi. 2D*> for Mp!; hence this Kamets 
 drops, when the tone is thrown forward : as n^PJI ( ^. 
 Keject. 1.)- 
 
 4. When the aiformative begins with a consonant (f) , 
 fl ; T)< ^ f"U) a helping vowel is used: !) to avoid the 
 meetin^ of three consonants with but one vowel : as 
 f"QD "* rO2D 5 2) to render more perceptible the doubling 
 of the radical. This helping vowel is Cholem in the pret. 
 (written fully or defectively) : as H13D or fOD > and in 
 the future : as M^3P^ . 
 
 5. This helping vowel receiving the tone, shortens the 
 vowel in Hi., and in the forms with J"U in the imp. and 
 fut. Kal: as rvtopn* H^P . 
 
 6. In Pi., Pu. and Hith., which require Dag, in the 
 second radical, in order to avoid the meeting of three 
 similar consonants, as ]D5P = 235P> a long vowel (invariably 
 Cholem) enters instead of Dag. Thus the forms Poel, 
 Poal, Hithpoel, arise, which are regularly inflected : as 
 
 DDiD :niD> niinpn* 
 
 7. With convers. 1 the Cholem of the fut. Kal is short 
 ened into Kamets-Chatuph, and the Tsere of the fut. Hi. into 
 Seghol: as DCn> DOT ( 33, 4.). 
 
 S. Before suffixes the same change takes place, for the 
 
96 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 same reason ( 14, Short, c.): as IIT may He be gracious 
 
 > 
 to us ; Jinjnf) ye shall solemnize it ; or Kubbuts is chosen 
 
 instead: as JtS^* Hiph. >J3p?, Tsere into Chirek (the 
 strong sharpening) ( 14, Short, b.) 
 
 9. The accent is not here thrown forward upon the 
 afformatives n } as with regular verbs: as POD* 
 
 NOTE II. In Kal are found examples of middle (according 
 to Vd* 29, 1.) : as !Qh they shoot arrows. Gen. 49, 23. ^ 
 they are lifted up. Job 24, 24. The fut. A. of these verbs has 
 Tsere under the preformatives : as *")* it is bitter, Is. 24, 9. ^p JO 
 and I am despised, G-en. 16, 5. OH* it is hot, De. 19, 6. 
 
 NOTE III. Ni. in the final syllable has Tsere occasionally: as 
 DD3 > DOT > ^p.3 fi?P^ sometimes Cliolem p") j he is broken, 
 Eze 29, 7. VD3 they are spoiled, Am. 3, 11. 
 
 NOTE IV. Hi. sometimes takes Patach in the final syllable, 
 especially with gutturals: *1DH be has embittered, Job 27, 2. 
 
 rnn he cuts off, is. is, 5. in , 
 
 NOTE V. In many of these verbs the vowel of the preforma 
 tives in Kal, Ni., Hi. and Ho. is short and Dag. forte follows. 
 This Dagesh compensates for the one omitted in the second radi 
 cal, as it occurs generally with this class of verbs in Chaldee : 
 fut. Kal 3D* and 3CV; DT (fr- DD1)> Dfc* ? shall be astonished, 
 1. Ki. 9, 8. -fp> to bow the head; Hi. Dp! Jud. 18, 23. 1 
 Ex. 23, 21. 
 
 EXERCISE 86. 
 
 or? rnrr 
 
 n * lo - nri 
 
 19 D^nS-S ^inn Dt^ Snr 18 Sis nin 17 
 
53. VERBS V tf AND ^y . 97 
 
 mn mix ^Ofi^ rS&n?* ^S 21! &jii 
 27 rb ;infc unn M >i?3#n cnn? 25 rm>3 DW 
 
 Di*n 29 wi-n 28 narrow rnrr 
 
 t? nin? : 
 
 nprn^ N* n^n mn >? : 4( 7l.n 
 44 j ^S wx*n nS :jm^ 43 Sr?D 
 nsrr : 
 
 adverb 1 (24, 3.) to be many2 works 3 to roll, to commit 4 my outcry, cry 
 fur help 5 to be languid, weakened 6 then 7 ( 101, II, b.) 8 Joshua^ Arnoritelo 
 sun 11 Gibeon 12 to stay, stand still 13 moon 14 valley 15 Ajalon 16 cause thun 
 der 17 thunder 18 (prop, voice, sound) Philistines 19 to confound 20 to defeat 21 
 to celebrate22 festival 23 seven 24 year 25 seventh? 6 so, thus 27 to break, make 
 void 28 my covenant with 29 as 30 the host of 31 to measure 32 I will increase/" 3 
 door 34 to turn 35 hine 36 his bed 37 to inscribe laws, to rule 38 to save 39 to do 
 evil 40 my name 41 ( 96, 2.) 42 to open, begin 43 n. p. f. (my sweetness) 44 the 
 Almighty 45 to embitter 46 (sc. life,) to be terrified, dismayed 47 to recede 48 to 
 beat down 49 to be astonished, confounded 50 - 
 
 EXERCISE ST. 
 
 Three 1 times 2 tliou slialt keep a feasts to me in the year. 
 And he rolled* the stone 5 from 6 the mouth of 7 the wells. 
 The Lord of Hosts^ will defend!" Jerusalem u. The soul 
 of 12 the wicked desireth 13 evil, his neighbor is not fa 
 vored i* in his eyes 15 - This day will I begin 16 to mag 
 nify thee!7 in the sight of!8 all Israel. And I will de- 
 fendi this city, to save 20 it. . And the Lord discomfited 2 ! 
 Sisera 22 - Hills 23 melted 2 -* like 25 wax 26 - He that trusteth27 
 the Lord, mercy 2 ^ shall compass 30 him about 30 - Bc- 
 I pray you, God, that 32 He will be gracious 33 unto 
 us. Hazael 34 ? king of Syria 35 ? oppressed 3 ** Israel. And 
 the Lord was graciuus37 to them and had compassion-^ on 
 them. (He) whom thou blesseth^a (j s ) blessed 40 : and (he) 
 
 13 
 
98 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 whom thou curseth-u is cursed-12. Why 13 art them cast 
 downH my soul 45 ? hope^e thou in-*7 Q d ! 
 
 e^D 5 pK 4 Hi. fut. with Vav Conv. y?J 3 to keep a feast JUfl 2 D S 
 VV 
 
 14 HO. fut. pn isnniK ia#3j no S^iT iom. fut. m orn joyrn rr 
 
 -T : T : T : : 
 
 20 Hi. yty 19 pret. with Vav Conv. pj Wy% 17 Pi. inf. Si J 16 Hi. ^n 15 TJ"^ 
 
 27part.nD| 26JJ1T 253 24 Ni. ODD 23 Qnn 22&OCTp 21 tut. with Conv. 1, DDH 
 
 se ^nS 35 D^N 34 ^?n 33 pn 321 subn SOPL fut. DDD 2 9npn 233 
 
 40 Pu. part. 39 Pi. fut. "p3 38 Pi. fat. with Vav Conv. with ace. QrH 37 fut. with Vav Conr. 
 :47 i ? 46IIJ. Sn 1 45 (f.) -B SJ 44 Hith. fut. nn# 43 HD 42 Ho. fut. 41 fut. 
 
 53. VERBS yy AND iy t 
 
 To the y a y the verbs ^y are nearly related. To this 
 class belong those verbs of which the second radical is V 
 which are best compared with the preceding yy, whereby the 
 points of similarity or difference can be rendered most 
 conspicuous. 
 
 In common with y ty- 
 
 1. The stem is monosyllabic. 
 
 2. The preformatives have long vowels: in fut. Kal and 
 in the pret. Ni. Kamets (Tsere in rare cases), 
 
 3. The forms Poel, Poal, Hithpoel. 
 
 4. The insertion of the helping (union) vowel Cholem before 
 the consonantal afformatives, but only in Ni. and Hi. not 
 in Kal and Ho. 
 
 5. These peculiarities originate from the principle, that 
 the weak letter 1 cannot retain its consonantal power be 
 tween two vowels; (not even between a following vowel 
 and a preceding vocal Sh va,) the 1 either drops or qui- 
 esces, and as with y^y its vowel recedes to the first radi 
 cal: pret. Dj"5> instead of Dlp T 5 inf. Dip > for Dp; fut. D^pN 
 for Dip? ( 1 T 2, 6. B. 3) f Hi. D jTT, for D lbn ( ibid. 
 12, 7; a.); Ho. Dfmfor DJpH ( 12, 6, B., 3.) (Kamets- 
 Chat. now in an open syllable becomes 1 ( 14, Length. 1.). 
 
 6. These verbs diflor from J7"J> in the following points : 
 
53. VERBS V y AND 
 
 99 
 
 a. The vowel in Vtf is longer: 1 in Kal, > in Hi., a 
 vowel-letter quiescing in it. 
 
 b. The NL has a final Cholcm DlpJ for D^5 fut. DlpV 
 for Dip; (the 1 becoming \ 12/7. b. 2.) , after remov 
 ing the mutable Patach in pret., and Tsere and the 
 pretonic Kamets in fut. 
 
 7. Intransitive verbs occur with middle E. and 0: 
 
 nnp, ns (for runs 12, 6. B.). Part, no? inf. nto; 
 
 NOTE. In some verbs, the 1 of the inf., imper. and fut, is al 
 ways quiescent in Cholera : as TUX to be light, tf13 to come, 
 t^ 13 to be ashamed, XlD* 1 ! and he came. 
 
 8. The apocopated Fut. is Dp*> with Vav Couv. DJT1* 
 with gutturals 1D*1 
 
 9. The usual form of 2. and 3. pers. pi. fern, is given 
 in the paradigm: HMplpp; a form like jrjfc jtl is sometimes 
 met with. 
 
 10. Several verbs Vj; in common with y"y ( 52 Note 5.) 
 double the first radical : as iTpfT for JTpn . Some thus 
 modify the signification: as IT^H to cause to rest, (T^H to 
 permit, suffer; J^H to pass the night, J^H to complain, 
 murmur. 
 
 11. Verbs "J?, Verbs having for their second radical a 
 quiescent > have a twofold inflection in Kal ; they are par 
 tially inflected like the Kal of VJN partially like its Hiphil, 
 after having removed the characteristic syllable of Hiphil 
 (H and H). Several verbs occur only in this form, others 
 possess both forms of VJ7 and *y : as J^ and J^ 
 
 NOTE. The fut. of Hiphil can be distinguished from that of 
 Kal, by the signification only: as J^ he understands (Kal), DTDn 
 he gives them understanding, Job 32, 8 (Tliphil). 
 
 NOTE II. Not seldom Kal and Hi. agree in sense in these 
 veVbs (Vy and v #) : ^U to rejoice, Kal and Hi. 2T\ to quar 
 rel, Kal and Hi. D1&* to set, put, Kal and Hi. etc, 
 
100 PAKT 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 EXERCISE 88. 
 
 5 Din 
 
 IK o DIB>;~D IO IK DHN* 9 n? S D& >p :;pr 
 nnn njri 14 3T 5 :nipp ^x K^r? 13 iy? IK 12 npt? 
 raiS 18 Dnpc> 17 nrn : 16 irv39 njn I5 pton K 1 ? 
 pK 23 iD> noDra niir : 22 1KDD 21 pn DVJ^ nin* wy 
 
 | v T - T T : T : T : : 1 - T *- T : T ^" 
 
 n-Sx IK 25 Sba : 
 
 43 
 
 vn^ Nn 42 
 
 JJQD nn . . 
 nin? ^3 : DysTi S 
 
 y 61 niKn 
 
 to despise 1 ( 107, 4.) void of 2 ( 84, 7.) before 3 gray hair 4 to rise up 5 to 
 honor 6 the face of 7 to make 8 mouth 9 or 10 deaf 11 open-eyed 12 blind 13 to re 
 turn 14 ( 107, 4.) to depart 15 his house 16 to tell 17 lies 18 to be firm, estab 
 lished 19 before 20 to establish 21 his throne 22 to found, to lay the foundation 
 (of a building) 23 to set up, fix 24 3 bef. inf. const. 25 ( 106, 2.) to exult, re 
 joice 26 answer 27 soft 28 to turn .away 29 wrath 30 to rest 31 to wait 32 to totter, 
 to shake 33 to raise 34 vineyards 35 to shout, sing 36 to shout with joy 37 to re 
 move, put away 38 anger, grief 39 to set 40 (prop, to come) stones of 41 to put, 
 set, lay 42 n#K"VD (from C r JO) place of the head, hence: at his head 43 first 44 
 to raise 45 pretend .to be rich 46 26, 6. preten,d to be poor 47 to mark, attend 48 
 meditation, prayer 49 to be ashamed, disappointed 50 desire, lust of 51 to kill 52 
 horse 53 to be prepared, ready 54 war 55 help, victory 56 deed, act 57 to bring, lead 58 - 
 
 EXERCISE 89. 
 
 And the Lord spake 1 to Moses, saying : Sends men, 
 that 3 they may search 4 the land of Canaan. And tin? men 
 
went up 5 and came 6 into the land and searched it. And 
 they returned? from searching of the land after forty9 
 days. And they came to Moses and brought back" 
 wordis to himi2 and said : we came to the land whither** 
 thou sentest us and surelyis it is very good. Neverthe 
 less^ the people be strong^ that dwell in the land. 
 And they murmared20 against2i Moses and said : Would 
 God that22 we had diedas in the land of Egypt. And 
 wherefore hath the Lord brought 24 us to this land, to 
 fal!25 by26 the sword. And they said one to another 2 ?, 
 Let us raake28 a captain29, and let us return into Egypt. 
 And David besoughtso God foi-si the childsa, and he fast- 
 ed33 and went in (pret.) and stayed all nights* and Iay35 
 upon the earthse. And the elders^? of his house arose^s 
 (and went) to him39, to raise 4 ** him up from the earth: 
 but he would not**- And it came to pass 42 on the sev- 
 enth*s clay that 44 the child died. And David saw 4 ^ that 
 his servants 4 ** whispered 4 ? and he perceived 4 ^ that the 
 child*9 was dead. Thenso he arose from the earth and 
 washed^ 1 and anointed^ (himself52) and came into the house 
 of God; thenso he returned into his (own) house and (when) 
 he asked, they putss bread before him and he did eat. 
 
 4 ( 101, 3. n.) -Vr\ 31 2 ( 84, 2) 1 Pi. with Vav Conv. -(31 
 11 Hi. 3^ lOsing. ( 92, 3) 9 
 
 21^ 20 Ni. T-l 1 ? IQpartic. with the article ( 96. 8) 18 ( 90, 2) T^ I 7 "3 D_2S^ 
 ~Sx tf X 26 3 25 ^3 J 24 part. Hi. ^13 23 pret. n^ 22 ( 116, a) would God that : H 
 32 nj? J 31 nj3 30 Pi. with Vav Conv. t^D3 29 Bffcn 28 pam?. fut. |J}3 27 ( 97, 4) VHX 
 
 38 with Vav Conv Q-lD 37 npT 36H^1^ 35pret. 33^ 34 pret. to stay all night nS 
 I -I: T :- -T 
 
 4>n3y 45KT1 44 Vav Conv. 43^3 ^ 42 ^\ 41 H3N! 40 Hi, CD^p 
 SS^QVlC 52Hi. ^D 51 Vn^ 50 Vav Conv. 49 Pause ! lS" 48 Hi. ?-13 47 Hithp. part. #H 7 
 
 I - T 
 
 54. VERBS ,>S 
 
 1. The third radical of these verbs was originally V of 
 some few 1, 
 
 2. All forms ending with the third radical, change t into 
 
102 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 tl- as H^, for ty ( 12, 7. a,), excepting the pass. part. 
 Kal, which is regular ^JU 
 
 3. To all those forms ending with a consonantal afform- 
 ative, (fi, f\, fl> Ij, fO) the original * returns. This > 
 quiesces in the pret. Kal in Chirek: as IV^ > in the pret. 
 of the other active conjugations, promiscuously in Tsere 
 and Chirek: as ftty and JT^, in the pret. of the Passives, 
 only in Tsere; as fVtyj in the imperative and future in 
 
 Sehoi: as 
 
 4. In the 3. pers. fern. sing, pret,, fl is commuted into 
 n > in order to avoid the repetition of ft : as HD^Jl , for 
 
 nrfo, 
 
 5. Before the vocal afformatives p|, * ) the fi drops : as 
 17^ TOfb for ^jYUprop. ^|, ^n ( 12, 6. B. 3.). 
 
 6. The ,1 quiesces 
 
 in all the pret. forms in Kamets: as H^ > JlS^ > H^ etc. ; 
 in all the imperat. f. in Tsere: as fl^f. 11703 ^ etc.; 
 in all the fut. and part. f. in Seghoi: as nSjlK 
 
 etc, 
 
 7. The inf. const, ends in all the conjugations with flV 
 
 as titty, ni^n, ni?^ etc. 
 
 8. The apocopated future is formed by throwing off 
 the H with the preceding Seghoi, whence in Kal and 
 Hiphil forms would arise, having three consonants and but 
 one vowel: as 7^, from rv?#, ^y_, from Jl^Jp, which to 
 avoid a helping Seghoi is used: as % Kal, htf Hi. (formed 
 like the Segholates 66.). With a guttural the helping 
 vowel is Patach : as y& let him look, ( 14, Rising IV.) 
 with Pe Guttural, &y\ and he made, ( 66, 10.). 
 
 NOTE I. Sometimes the first syllable is not affected by the 
 guttural: as *\rV\ and it was kindled, IITI and he rejoiced, 
 fD !l an ^ ^ ie encamped. 
 
 NOTE II. The preformatives of the apocopated Future, forming 
 an open syllable sometimes has Tsere : as |)^ and we turned : 
 and she wandered. 
 
54. VERBS fth t 103 
 
 NOTE III. The helping vowel can be omitted in case the first 
 radical is softer in sound than the second, (a liquid before a mute): 
 as 3^*1 and he took captive, f^\ and he gave to drink. 
 
 9. In the verb HiSn to see, the apocop. fut. has two 
 forms: N T and with Yav Conv. NTK 
 
 10. rW to be. pret. 2. pers. pi. DfTO with V DfVTTl; 
 inf. const nVH > with prefixes DVH3> ^V? ; im P- "T.0 ; 
 fut. rViT fut apocop. VT> in pause IT, with Yav Conv. 
 
 11. JIT! to live. 2. pers. pi. pret. Kal DJl"rj> inf. Dl^rt 
 imp. JTrT. with V nTty fut. HW fut. apoc. TT), in pause 
 *fT Hiphil pret. nTJil> inf. WQili 
 
 12. nnty (original IHJfO to bow down. Hithp. nirj^^n. 
 
 fut. niqn^ , fut. apoc. Ynnt^ (for inn0 ( n. Btog iv.) 
 
 13. The annexing of suffixes, occasions various changes : 
 the termination H with the preceding vowel drops before 
 the suffix: as >^J (from !"ttj) he answered me, ^V (f rom 
 nV^) he has commanded thee. Piel ^j 1 ??^ (from H7i), 
 for ^75^ Hiph. ^yn. In the third person fern. sing. 
 pret., the suffix is attached invariably to the form H7^ : 
 as *1"^J he has made me, Piel *40?3 (shaine) has cov 
 ered me, 44, 16, in7Dl it shall consume it, for i 
 
 EXERCISE 90. 
 
 rush 
 
 n nj; 23 njn 22 
 
104 PART 1. EXERCISES, 
 
 rnrv w> :D*D 3o np&rn ^NE^-ONI nnS 
 
 T : : v 7 
 
 N 34 nis:3 - 33 irrn jrrirr 82 w rttflt? 4 ? 
 
 6 n^p no 
 
 to build 1 to buy 2 to make or do much, increase 3 words 4 clouds 5 to be 
 weighed 6 for thn g-old of? Ophir 8 to drink 9 death 10 secret of 11 another per- 
 son 12 to disclose, reveal 13 to wait 14 to stop 15 his ear 16 the cry of 17 to an 
 swer 18 lame 19 to be equal- to break down 21 to weep 22 to laugh 23 to keep 
 silence 24 to do 25 a declaration of 26 breath of, rnind of 27 enemy 28 thirsty 2U 
 to give to drink 30 help 31 wait for,, hope in 32 to hold fast, adhere to 33 instruc 
 tion, correction 34 to let go 35 to associate 36 possessor, owner, lord 37 anger 
 *}% vj.^3 a possessor of anger = an angry man 38 89, 4. perhaps 39 enemy 40 
 sun-dial (literally: the shadow of the degrees) 41 to turn 42 to stop from, to 
 desist 43 help, assistance 44 to want,, to be without 45 to possess 46 . 
 
 EXERCISE 91. 
 
 If ye walk 2 in my statutes 1 ; and keep4 my coramandmentss 
 and do 5 them, thenG I will turn? graciously 1 ? unto you, 
 and make you fruitfuls and multiply 9 you, and establish 10 
 my covenant withn you. Ye shall not afflict^ a father 
 less child. If thou afflict 13 him and he cry 14 at alli5 unto 
 me, I will surely 16 hear his cry 1 ?- And the Lord spake 
 to Joshua, saying: As 18 I was with 1 ^ Moses, (so) I will 
 be with thee: I will not fail20 thee, nor 21 forsake thee. 
 Only 22 he thou strong 23 and very courageous 24 , that 2 ^ 
 thou mayest observe 26 to do according to all the law, 
 which Moses, my servant 2 * 7 * commanded 28 thee: turn 2 ^ -not 
 from it to 3 the right hand 31 or 32 to the left 33 - This 34 
 book35 of the law shall not 1 depart^ out of thy mouth 3 T, 
 but 38 thou shalt meditate 3 ^ therein day and night 4 ^, that 41 
 thou mayest observe 42 to do according to all that is writ 
 ten therein. If thou return to 43 the Almighty 14 * thmi 
 
55. VERBS DOUBLY ANOMALOUS. 105 
 
 shalt be built up4S- From the confined space46 I called47 
 upon the Lord 48 ; the Lord answered4o me in the large 
 spaceso. The Lord is on my side 51 : what can ( 101, III. 1.) 
 do52 unto me man? (It is) betted to trust 54 in55 the 
 Lord, thanSG to put confidence 5 ^ in man. Thou hast 
 thrustss sore59 at me thatso I might fall; butci the Lord 
 helped me. Be2<3 not wise^s in thine (own) eves. And 
 he despised64 the birthrightes. My well-belovedes hath<n 
 a vineyard^. And he fenced69 it and clearedit of stones 
 and built "71 a tower 2 in the midst of it, and he looked^ 
 that? 4 it should bring forth? 5 grapes^, and it brought 
 forth wild grapes??- 
 
 Hi. H"3 7HJ3 6Conv. 1 5 prot. H^ 4fut. S-jSlXD 2Kal. fut. IjSn 1 nipH 
 
 T T T T T T 
 
 12 Pi. HJ.T 11 r\X 10 Hi. with Vav Conv. Q.1p 9 Hi. with Vav Conv. HJ T. 8 with Vav Conv. 
 18^X3 17irpj;V 16inf. abs. ( 105, 1) 15infin. abs. ($ 105, 1) 14fut. p^Jf 13 ftit. 
 25infin. with 1 ? 24 (fut. A.) yDN 23 (fut. A.) pm 22 p^_ 21^1 20111. nS^ 19 D^ 
 SsbKD^ 321 Slprp 1 30 ace. ( 85, 4) 291^0 28 Pi. HI* 27 H3J^ 26 ^ 
 
 41 IVDS 40n l 7 |l 71DDr 39H:n 38 Conv. 1 S7,T3^ 36 ^D 35^30 34 ( 83, 9) 
 l< : T:TT T TT 
 
 50 arm 4onjjr 48 n 1 47 with acc , x-jp^ 46^5 4onj3 44^ 43^ 42iut. 
 
 56(91, 1)D 553 54HDH 533113 52 H^ 51 on my side = to me 
 i DS 64 with Vav Conv. HT3 63 DDH 62 rTH 61 1 60 with inf. ^ 59 inf. abs. (g 105 1) 
 
 73 Pi. HIP 72VUD 71HJ3 70 Pi. SpD 69 Pi. pT> 68 TT 67 hath = was to 66D^3 
 - -T 
 
 76 DJJ 75 T^ 74 with inf> 
 
 55. VERBS DOUBLY ANOMALOUS. 
 
 Doubly anomalous verbs have two radicals, both sub 
 ject to the anomalies of the different irregular verbs: as 
 XVI to bear, carry, belong to J" and tf"7> HDN to be will 
 ing" to N"3 and H" 1 ? . 
 
 Verbs of the most frequent occurrence of this kind are : 
 
 a, fT S and N"D> H5K to bake, fut, Kal H^ . 
 
 6. H"S and K), HD^ to smite, pret. tli. HDH- part. H^D , 
 
 fut. n? > with Vav Conv. T|*V imp. H3H , apocop. t|H, 
 
 inf. nlDPI particip. Ho. H?p5 HDJ to bow, incline, 
 
 14 
 
106 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 fut. Kal H^.with Vav Conv. tO?V tut. Hi, i"l{,with 
 Vav Conv. D>1, 
 
 c. > and X<h> NEty flit. Kal N&, inf. ntttf and fi^ty , 
 imper. N* 3 and ft&% 
 
 d. X"S and >"2, N* to go out, fut. Kal Ntf , imp. NJf, inf. 
 
 > Hi ret/K ^ fut. NW 
 
 26 
 
 e. |T^ and *", HI* to throw, Hi. to confess, to give 
 thanks. Piel fut. VT_1 and they cast, (for !pTl ( 12, 
 Eeject. B. 3.), Hi. fut. iT^iS with suff. ^"|1kX, pret, 
 
 n*jin, part, niio* 
 
 /. yy and ^wS Nl3 T to come, Kal pret ND^HND, fut. 
 lSt* Hi. to cause to come, lead, "bring., pret. NOrT* 
 
 EXERCISE 92. 
 
 i^*^^ 
 
 nni^ jD Sj; nirr itrn DID to?? DW. 
 
 "in 
 
 7 niiTTi^ : 43 n k xr nn^j; nw-n! ^ tg 
 
 in N 
 
5f>. Ix GENERAL. 10T 
 
 the wid, remoteness of 1 to go up 2 the mountain of 3 to teach 4 ways 5 paths 6 
 to go forth 7 the word of 8 to give thanks, to praise 9 to fear, be afraid 10 to 
 bear 11 the yoke 12 youth 13 to vex, to be extortionate 14 to oppress 15 out of the 
 bosom 16 subject of the sentence 17 to pervert 18 the ways of 19 to incline 20 the 
 words of 21 wise men 22 to set, direct, turn 23 to withhold 24 to beat 25 to die 26 
 to cover 27 to prosper 28 to confess 29 to obtain mercy 30 to incline 31 the right 
 hand 32 the left hand 33 ( 85, 4.) to sit, abide 34 to go out 35 to come 36 to ask, in 
 terrogate 37 the beasts 38 to tell 39 to speak 40 to declare 41 the fishes of 42 ($ 81 . 1 .) 43 
 to serve 44 - 
 
 EXERCISE 93. 
 
 My son, fear 1 them the Lord and the king. Jerusalem 
 bear 2 thy shame 3 - Peradventure 4 there be 5 fifty 6 right 
 eous within? the city : wilt thou also 8 destroy 9 and not 
 spare 10 the place for 11 the fifty righteous that are therein 12 ? 
 Thou shalt not bear a false 14 report 13 ? neither 15 shalt thou 
 answer 16 in 1 ? a quarrel 18 to incline 19 after 20 many to 
 wrest 21 (judgment). Trust 22 in the Lord, and He shall 
 bring forth 23 thy righteousness 24 as the light. Who 
 would not fear 2 5 Thee, King of nations 26 ? Arise 27 
 get thee out 28 from this land 29 and return 3 to the land 
 of thy kindred 3 !- I (am) a little 33 lad 32 : I know 34 not 
 (how) to go out 35 or come in 36 - Thou coiriest to me with 3 ? 
 a sword and with a spear 38 ? but 39 I come to thee in the 
 name of the Lord of Hosts 40 - This day will the Lord 
 deliver 41 thee into 42 my hand, and I will smite 43 thee and 
 take 44 thine head from thee 4 "*, that 46 all the earth may 
 know 4 ? that 48 there is 49 a God in Israel. Go and I will 
 be with 50 thy mouth, and teach 51 thee what thou shalt 
 say 52. Amiss Jehu 54 came to Jezreel 55 and Jezebel 56 heard 
 (of it): and 53 she puts? paint 58 (on) her eyes and 53 tired 59 
 her head and 53 glanced 60 out at 61 the window 62 - And 
 Jehu came in at 63 the gate 64 , and 53 he lifted up 65 his 
 face 66 to the window, and said : Who (is) on my side 6 ?, 
 who? And 53 there glanced out on 68 him two 69 (or) three 70 
 eunuchs? 1 - And he said, Throw? 2 her down. So 53 they 
 threw her down: and 53 (some) of her blood spirted 73 on 
 the wall 74 - and on the horses: and he trod her under 
 foot?3- 
 
108 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 7}lf\3 BD Bfon 5^ 4^S K 3 }rra^ 2 Jerusalem fern, (g 57, 5 3) tffrj 
 ir^| 16njy 15 and not Utf)# 13j?Dtf 12,13^3 
 
 24> l|Tp? 23 Hi - P ret - with c. i , xr 22HD3 aim. 
 
 33jbj} 32 lj 3irjrnSlD SOmtf 29fem. 28 tfr 27 Dip 26 D\U 25fut. K 
 42J 41Pi. 1JD 40nW!JX 391 38 ^jn 373 36 inf. gl 3 35 inf. r 34fut. J 
 48^ 47fut. yV 461 45Syp 44 Hi. pret. with C. % -| 1D 43 Hi. pret. with C. 1, rD 
 65 [ 19. 6J SN|np 54N>n;. 53Conv. 1 52 Pi. 13T 51 Hi. pret. with C. 1, HT 50 D# 49 
 59 Hi. fut. 3D 58 [transl. she made with (3) paint her eyes] ^3 57 Hi. fnt 
 67 ^X 66D J3 65 fut. N^j 64 Pause ! Y^ 633 62jftn 61^3 60 Hi. fut. 
 74-|^ 73 fut. with C. 1, nrj 720^> 71 iHTO^D 70 H^ 69 D J# 6 
 
 .75 fut. with C. ], 
 
 CHAPTER X: 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 56. IN GENERAL. 
 FORMATION AND INFLECTION. 
 
 1. The nouns are: a) Primitives, b) Derivatives. The 
 more numerous derivatives are for the most part derived 
 from verbs; Verbal nouns; as HJnD a gift, from |DJ to 
 give; njTT knowledge, from JH tcTknow. Nouns derived 
 from other nouns are called: Denominatives: as HD p archer, 
 from rw n bow. 
 
 2. The derivation is effected in the same manner as 
 with verbs: 
 
 a. By Vocalization, or the modification of vowels: as TlSp 
 king, from Tj^O to reign. 
 
 I. By .Reduplication, or the doubling of one radical, gen 
 erally the second, or of two of the radicals: as 33 j 
 thief, from DJJ to steal, f]p9D rabble, (people gathered 
 together from all quarters) from fptf to gather. 
 
 c. By Augmentation, i. e. the prefixing or postfixing of one 
 or more of the formative letters VfOENrT (nomina he- 
 
50. IN GENERAL. 109 
 
 emantica) : as Dlpp place, from Dip to stand, pS"!p 
 eastern, from D"1p to be, come before, in front. 
 
 3. a. By Vocalization : 
 
 StOp > this class contains as many adjectives as substan 
 tives", T which, being of the old participial form (cf. act. 
 part, in verbs Vtf : Dp = DNp . for D1p>> express either the 
 attribute, or the attribute and subject together: as Dpfl 
 wise, or wise man, DHJ gold (the glittering, sc. metal). 
 Frequently the proMuciTor result of an action is signified: 
 as -6l child, prop, he that is born, natus ; 3\T\ an object 
 seized with rottenness, (from Dp"! to rot). 
 
 Stpp> these nouns are intransitive, but when derived 
 from transitive verbs, passive : as ^DN mourning, NDD un 
 clean, fp| old, 7^5 cooked, done. 
 
 VitOp (partic. of verbs mid. 0) intransitive and passive 
 adjectives, & few only in use as substantives : as 7l"!j great, 
 DV")p near, Dlb^ peace. 
 
 Stpip* StDp > (regular act. partic.) (cf. 35). 
 
 7lDp (reg. pass, part.) passive and intransitive adjec 
 tives : as nifc^D anointed, D1l? strong. 
 
 I - T T 
 
 ^^tpp (Chaldaizing) (pass, part.) 1. passive substantives: 
 as TDK prisoner, captive, from ^IDK to bind, to fetter, (it 
 is distinguished from SltOp by being always used as a 
 noun, while the latter is a participle only). 2. Names of 
 dignity are often thus formed : as TPp^ a sovereign, ruler, 
 Tp5 an officer, TJ13 overseer, j^p a judge, prince. 3. The 
 season or time in which the action of the verb is perform 
 ed: as Tp harvest (prop, time o/ cutting, reaping) 
 time of plowing. 
 
 T LDp (for b Ktpp > hence the Kamets 
 ALDO hence the Tsere immutable). 
 
 " | : i v 
 
 mostly inf. forms of abstract meaning: 2H5 a writing, 
 a howling, plPlV laughter, 3^) a military post, 
 border, 
 
 cf. 00. 
 
110 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 3. b. .By Reduplication : 
 
 ^9p (Kamets immutable), a) adjectives intensifying the 
 sense : Vf very weak, K|[5 jealous, b) nouns of habitual 
 occupation : TOtt cook, qjj thief, Bhn (for #in) smith. 
 
 7t?p> adjectives, denoting a permanent bodily defect: 
 *T)# blind, D^N dumb, Bnn (for Bnn) deaf. 
 
 7l3p> a small class, adjectives and substantives: ""1123 
 strong, substantively : a strong one, hero, Ti3t? adj. and 
 subst. drunk, intoxicated, a drunkard, *Yisy a bird, prop. 
 the chirping, twittering, from *) (Arab.) to twitter, to 
 pipe. 
 
 7l3p> passive and intransitive: TOJ^ bereaved, f^ll com 
 passionate, pnn (for plH) a diligent one. 
 
 Vtp[5 > adjectives and substantives: pH righteous, *VDX 
 fettered. Instruments of action : V& i an axe, a hoe. 
 
 77tpp. nouns in which the third radical is doubled: 
 nrp$ a young brood, knaves ; JJgg? quit, undisturbed; Mjn 
 green, fresh. 
 
 I StoStOp nouns * n which the last two radicals are dotib- 
 
 1 Sb^^ led : D ^ 1> - red dish, nnnn^ blackish, denot- 
 
 ^ = -R ing colors, i. e. an inclination to the color 
 
 specified (English: ish). Many nouns of this class, compensate 
 
 for the reduplication of the radical by doubling or length 
 
 ening the vowel : DD13 star, for rD5?> from 33 (Arab?) to 
 
 shine, to glitter; fj^ljp, for *]&$& a band, a fillet, from 
 
 ]CD (Arab.) to bind about; S^f/for ^3^5, Aram, to con 
 
 fuse, Hebr, 
 
 3. c. /??/ Augmentation : 
 
 N- Prefixed: 
 
 I. as a preformative occurs frequently, it comes either 
 from p , np> to give the idea of an objective : who, what., 
 somewhat, or it is related by its labial character to the prepo 
 sition 3"-= in, %, on. Accordingly, nouns of this class de 
 note something, somewhat, 1) in which, 2) by which, 3) at 
 
56. IN GENERAL. Ill 
 
 which, or on which the action expressed by the root is 
 performed: 
 
 1) r?3tp an altar, (from POt to sacrifice) i e. on which sac 
 rifices are offered ; Hjnp pasture, (from tlV*\ to feed) i. e. 
 where there is feeding, IHND an ambush, (fr. 3*")X to 
 lurk) where there is lurking ; Dlpft place, (fr. Dip to 
 stand) where one stands. 
 
 2) finOD key, (from nfl5 to open) an instrument by 
 which one opens a lock; &Tp a mortar, (fr. TO to beat 
 to pieces, to pound) a vessel for pulverizing. 
 
 3) Jllp^/J booty, (fr. HpS to take) = what is taken; 
 li/t^p a possession, (fr. rhtif to stretch forth the hand) 
 object to which one stretches his hand. 
 
 II. H generally abstract substant., hence for the most part 
 with f. formation: Jljpfl the hope, (fr. Hip to hope); jl>>$ri 
 prayer, (fr. ^ to pray) PO^II a return, a reply, (fr. 
 3W to return) ; JOTl m. the south, (fi\ JO* to be on the 
 right hand). 
 
 III. N > is a prepositive, a) usually to give easy pro 
 nunciation, when the first of the two initial consonants is 
 a sibilant : bOl# and -Sb^) yesterday ; PnjJVf? and i"n# V 
 bracelet: J^hf^ and JHf arm; b) to intensify the action: 
 3J3^ drying up (properly deceiving, lying, from 3ft to 
 lie), IftK bold, daring. (Aktal, the regular Arabic form 
 of the comparative and superlative). 
 
 IV. *> > often in proper names: as pHV! Isaac, DpJ^ Jacob, 
 Some are formed from the future, the 3. p. m. s. having 
 been converted into a substantive : as *"iny* oil, (properly : 
 it shines, gives light, from Tl to shine , lighten) ; 3H* 
 adversary, enemy, (prop, he strives, from 31") Hi. to strive)^ 
 Dip*?! a bag (prop, it gathers, from tDp^ to gather, to col 
 lect) ; Qlp^ an existing, living thing (prop, it is, stands, 
 from Dip to be, stand). 
 
112 .PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 D , Affixed: 
 
 1. The most important is j"f (to which jl or H cor 
 responds) : tins, besides indicating the lem. gender (57.) 
 is appended : a) to the infinitive, to give it a substantive 
 sense: njfi?(# the hearing ; fljn knowledge, b) to convey 
 an abstract meaning ; n& jTQ a request, HKDfl sin. H^IN 
 foolishness, fiTIJJ. blindness, Hrttp (fr. Hip "to burn) the 
 burning or heat of fever. 
 
 2. D1> D > p, 07 > f * (the last not so often, the 
 Kaniets frequently immutable). These terminations form : 
 a. Adjectives : p jTH outer, exterior ; p")r?N binder, latter. 
 6. Concrete and abstract nouns : f^3 a building, pDJH 
 
 hunger, scarcity. 
 
 c. Diminutives : p{?>tf (from # N) little man (of the eye), 
 pupil ; p"ny (from -)} or ^NW) neck. 
 
 d. D1 occurs many times as an adverbial termination : 
 DNrUP suddenly, DlB^ and Dfe^ the day before 
 
 - yesterday. 
 
 e. D > an old accusative ending, the words that have re 
 tained it, are mostly adverbs: D3H in vain, DpH emp 
 tily, vainly, DmTO to-morrow. 
 
 3. * , this termination forms a) adjectives from nouns: 
 ^1V northern, from p^ the north, >nf7j-) lower, from 
 rilir) the under part, b) Gentile nouns and patronymics : 
 ^Vnty an Israelite, n.3J? a Hebrew, HVV a Jew, nVO an 
 Egyptian. The feminine is either JT or IT J HHVQ an 
 Egyptian woman, JlHDi^ a Hebrew woman. 
 
 4. fV- H1 form abstract nouns: rV^N"") the beginning, 
 f^b?5 kingship, rule. 
 
 4* Compound words are for the most part proper nouns: 
 as ^N D^O (El is King), T|^^N (Ab is King). Com 
 pound appellatives are rare : jT^jpNO horrible, frightful 
 darkness (the appended PP God, intensifies the idea 91, d.). 
 
 5* The primitive as well as the derivative nouns are 
 inflected, to indicate : 
 
57. THE GENDEII. 113 
 
 . the grammatical conditions of gender and number ; 
 b. the attributive relations of the noun. These latter are 
 twofold : 
 
 1. A noun in the genitive or possessive case follows as 
 an attribute, with which the preceding word is joined or 
 put in the Const, state ( 11), 5.): T]^PT "0*1 the king s 
 word. i 
 
 2. Suffixes are appended to the noun : H!fJ my word. 
 
 57. THE GENDER, 
 
 1 . The genders are two : masculine and feminine ; a neu 
 ter gender in Hebrew is wanting. 
 
 2. The gender can be ascertained : a) from the signifi 
 cation of the noun, b) from its termination. 
 
 3. Masculine by signification : 
 
 a. The names of men and males in general : as DN father, 
 7]^5 king. 
 
 b. The common and proper nouns of nations, rivers, mount 
 ains and months: as DJ^ people, ^H3 river, "in mount 
 ain, CHI! month, jJ/^5 Canaan, |TV the Jordan, WQ 
 Sinai, Jp^ Nisan, the first month of the Hebrew yean 
 
 t 1 . The names of seasons : as D DX Spring. 
 d. The names of metals : as DHJ gold ; except D^fl} cop 
 per, and rndj? lead, which are fern. 
 
 4. Masculine by termination : 
 
 5$) The masc. has no characteristic termination, hence 
 nouns ending with original radical letters can most fre 
 quently be considered masculine: as "UljJ.a garment. 
 
 3) Nouns ending with i"l> preceded by Seghol: as Tib 
 a field. 
 
 j) Most of those nouns ending with * , D1 > D~ > ] or 
 |__: as v\yy a Hebrew, D1H.3 a ransom, |5")p. a sacrifice, 
 p&>N the pupil of the eye. 
 
 5. Feminine by significations 
 
 15 
 

 114 PART I. EXERCISES, 
 
 a. Names of women and females in general : H*N woman, 
 "O^p queen, IT3J a female gazelle. 
 
 b. Common and proper nouns of countries, cities, towns : 
 as 1*J7 city, fltf land, country, 1UTX Assyria, DvHT 
 Jerusalem. 
 
 NOTE. In case the names of countries or cities represent the 
 people or nation living in them, they are masculine; as HI^H 
 (applied to the people) Jews. Compare: 7i33 ni^H* Iw, 3, 8. and 
 
 iirip^ rnirr nrrn PS. 114, onyp i^ T . 19, 10. 
 
 c. Names of the members of the body, which are in pairs : 
 as 1* hand, 731 foot. 
 
 6. Feminine by termination : 
 
 I. Nouns with the accented final syllable H as HODI"! 
 
 T T : T 
 
 wisdom. 
 
 II. Nouns with the unaccented final syllable fl arid 
 after gutturals fi : as nipJ7 crown, nj^ll^D acquaintance, 
 and with the accented ending JV > H^ fl : as JlHIlK the 
 
 T -: - 
 
 end, J"VO*7 kingdom, HIIlD the morrow. 
 
 7. Many nouns are used in both genders : as fin wind, 
 K fire, Tpl way. 
 
 EXERCISE 94. 
 
 onyo 
 
 nin 
 
 o^ ^i in NV 
 
 ni. nx? 29 n :~r? nb y nin^ ^ 27 nrn nir 
 
57, THE GRXDER. 115 
 
 n 37 njn 36 [# 
 
 Aramaea, Syria 1 Damascus 2 Ephraim (the kingdom of Israel) 3 Samaria 4 
 a leaf 5 to sprout, blossom 6 with 7 inhabitant of* n. p. of a city 9 take pos 
 session of 10 to dispossess, drive out 11 ( 83, 6.) 12 spear 13 javelin 14 *yv* 
 (H of Hi. retained) ( 117) 15 preeminence, excellence 16 more than 1 ? ( 91, 2.) 
 follyis ( 12, 6. B. 3.) 19 Tyre2<> fortress2i ( 97, 2.)22 to heap up23 fine 
 gold 24 the mire of 25 street 26 to be high, lofty 27 strength, Vn nfrj? to do 
 valiantlyss (96, 4) 29 nnp\ const, st. of HHp obedience, respect^ mother 31 
 to pick out 32 ravens of 33 the valley 34 young eagles 3 - 1 * tooth, masc. 36 Hjn 
 (part m. from ]?}Q> with accentless H ) to be broken, to be rotten 37 (for 
 rnj,Vpp ], 37, 5 Note I) to be made to waver 38 trust in 39 ( 88, 4.) an 
 unfaithful man. 40 
 
 EXERCISE 95. 
 
 By reason of 1 (the) cold 2 (the) sluggards will not plow 4 ? 
 therefore 5 shall he beg 6 in harvest, and have nothing 7 - 
 The ravens^ brought^ to Elijah 1 bread and flesh in the 
 morning, and bread and flesh in the evening. Tyre 11 wan 
 a mart of 12 nations. Beprobate 1 ^ ( 90, 2.) silver they call 
 them, because the Lord hath rejected 14 them. Their land ir > 
 is full 15 of silver and gold 1 "- The silver and the gold was 
 weighed in the house of God by the hand of 18 the priest 1 - - 
 Lo, the winter 2 o is past 21 ) the rain 22 is over 23 (and) gone 24 ; 
 the fig tree 25 putteth forth 26 her green 27 figs 2 * 7 - When 2 
 a wicked.29 man dieth, (his) expectation 31 shall perish^: 
 and the hope 32 of unjust 33 (men) perisheth. Weepiiig 3 ^ 
 may endure 35 for a night 34 ) but 37 joy 3 (cometh) in 38 the 
 morning. The realm 41 of Jehoshaphat 42 was quiet 40 ; 
 and his God gave him rest 43 round about 44 - When 4 **, 
 pride 46 cometh 4 ^ then 47 cometh shame 48 - The end 4 ^ of 
 the wicked shall be cut off 50 - A river went out to water^i 
 the land. Gihon 52 coinpasseth^s the whole land of Ethi 
 opia^. 8inai r >5 and Tabor- are 57 mountains. SivW i s r7 
 Hie second 59 month. HebronGO \^7 th e city of graves 6 *- 
 The eye > 2 sees 63 , the ear hears. 
 
 7 to have nulling K, Pause! 6S 5 Cnv. 1 4^^n 3 Sy> 2 rSp 1 By roawju of n 
 
MO PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 ISpart. Ni. OXD 12 ^Hp 11 12f lOirrx 9 part. Hi. Ni3 SQ SS;? 
 20 vnO 19 jrU) 18 T_ Sj? 17 3ri7 M DV"IN 15 Ni. fut. with Conv. 1, with ace. ( 85, 2 a) 
 
 28 inf. with 3 ( 106, 2) 27 rVJ3 26 gjn 25 rUiXJl 24 ( 84, 2) }Sn 23 n^p 22 D#3 21 13 Tt 
 T v- ~T T : I*- T I- T v v * -T 
 
 38 ^ 371 36 33 35 pS 34 31;3 SSQ jiX 32nSnifi 3013K 31 mpn 29tBh 
 
 VT VV - T Tl: T -T 
 
 to give rest n-1J Hi. 42 DS^l lT 4iroS]0 40 to bo quiet JOpr, with Conv. 1 39nj1 
 
 50Ni. part. r\"O 4gr\ "nX 48-n Sp 47 Con v. 1 46 nil 45 part. 44 3 3DD 43 with Conv 1 
 ~T ""r-IlT IT T 
 
 69 ^ 58 H 57f77,3j 56 113^ 65 J D 54*^3 53 part. 33D 52 pp J 51 Fli. HDiT 
 
 ITT 
 
 _r>8. THE PLURAL AND DUAL. 
 
 1. Masculine nouns form their plural by adding D 
 feminine by adding j"V) to the singular: as D D1D> from DID 
 horse, rVTUS 5 , from IN? a well. 
 
 NOTE I. The mnsc. plural sometimes is p : as p^*J Job 18, 2. 
 Prov. 31, 3. Micha 3, 1*2. More seldom ^ : as ^"\ Cant, 8, 2. 
 *jp Ps. 45, 9. In later Hebrew (Mishna) the ending p is the 
 common pne: as fHIp > pp^DSD PpJ^ D 5 sometimes ^ithout the ? : 
 asHTDO. nU> ^H. A few add after the Syriac: HCS 
 and thus ^"iX Lord ( 82, 4. b.). 
 
 2. Nouns ending with ^ ,take D only: as DH^ ^ 1 0111 
 H!)J^orthe final ^ of the noun is omitted and indicated by 
 Dagesh : as D V? from ^ , 
 
 3. Nouns ending in !"T drop this syllable when form 
 
 ing the plural: as DUfT from rijtl (part, act, from H^n 
 to encamp.) 
 
 4. Fern, nouns in H D > HI change these termina 
 tions into HV as rTTiri law, pi. rinlH; rnrJD a crown, 
 
 pi. nlinb ( 72.) nnj; a precept, pi. nny.. 
 
 5. The fern, ending j"V is to be considered as a contrac 
 tion from JT ; hence the plural (fl being changed into 
 Hi) HV-: as H^3P pattern, model, pi. nWJfl 
 
 Nouns with two fern, terminations in JT and IT form 
 the plural from the latter, thus nVJirtfl the lowest parts, 
 the depths: DlH^i* Hebrew women, f. HHDJ* and 
 
5$. PU KAL AND Dl AL. 117 
 
 NOTE II. Some nouns form the plural irregularly : as 
 kingdom, pi. nl^P *"^P and rfiJOO from ^39 a P art , por 
 tion; fiiTOX* for fiiftN/from H/pN a maid 4 servant, D N^t? 
 for D Stt, from nStO a lamb, HINDOO > for flTOP* fr m HTDP 
 
 . T . T : : : T : 
 
 a fold. Such, or similar plural terminations by prefixing S X or Jl, 
 are very common in the language of the Mishna: as HinDX* 
 from QX mother ; niTV)N fr m H1N letter ; fTfap D , from | p 
 *in; hifrOlt^ from JTVT^ back-bone, spine. 
 
 T : v T : v 
 
 Of. Geigcr, Lelirlnch znr Spraclie der Misclma. P. 49, 8. 
 
 6. Nouns used in both genders ( 57, 7.), in the plural 
 often terminate both in D* and HI : as D^ f 5^J and nlt^S)^ 
 
 7. Nouns (both masc. and fern.) representing objects, con 
 sisting naturally or artificially of two parts or in pairs 
 (especially the members of human or animal bodies) term 
 inate in D called the Dual ending: as D^"l feet, DH* 
 hands : D dpVj (m.) tongs, snuffers. 
 
 8. In a few instances the dual denotes not a pair, hut- 
 simply the number two: as D)OV two days, DT^ti^ two 
 years. 
 
 NOTE III. In the dual ending the tone rests on the penult ( ), 
 the Chirek being only a helping vowel, which drops, when the 
 word is lengthened. 
 
 9. Many nouns occur only in the form of a plural : as 
 D\J) lace, D"fl life, DUIpt old age. 
 
 10. A considerable number of rnasc. nouns form their 
 plural in HI : as DiSt father, pi. rVOK; IVIN treasure, pi. 
 j"TnViN ; ")X3 or 112 cistern ; JJ roof, PO^P altar ; D l /H 
 dream; JV-iH vision; ND3 s at, throne; ITi^ tablet; ^ 
 night; Titfb light; 1DO rain; DlpO place; ^pD staff , stick; 
 p^ P habitation; "U lamp: *T\y skin; "tojMust-, D1V a fast, 
 fasting; ^ip voice; Dip encounter, battle; *")} < it^ trumpet, 
 curved horn ; JH^ a table ; DL^ name, etc., and vice versa 
 many fern, nouns in D*~ : as !"U^ y^ar, pi. D\?l 
 woman, pi. DW; \*3$ stone, D JDX; H^5 egg ; 
 
 cake of dried figs ; ni iD l a bee f h"1 law ; H^fl wheat , 
 ] darkness ; Jl^V dove : n^D^ brick or tile ; Jl^D word; 
 
IKS P.UIT L EXKKCTSKS. 
 
 O,} ant: TJ,* city, pi. DHJ/*; HfC S flax: rnj fc harloy: 
 fi-tree etc. 
 
 EXERCISE 96. 
 
 D MnS tfS D nnS^n atos 
 
 T3 
 
 j? 07^ 
 
 i? 
 
 ^ccj : 36 nio/p - 35 ^3>x 34 npj; 33 p T -rp j^ 
 
 41 n.jp T 3 40 ni^ 39 D^r 38 r5 nani njn 
 jn :n?rr 
 
 n. p. 1 light, swift 2 one of 3 roebucks 4 Samson 5 to bore through, put 
 out 6 to bring down 7 " to Gaza 8 to land 9 fetters of copper 10 to grind 11 
 ( # 107, 8.) captives, prisoners 1 2 a running, race 18 men of understanding 14 
 men of skilU 5 favor 16 chance 17 to happen 18 tongue 19 tribe of- priesthood, 
 oiHce of the priest 21 possession, estate of-- the tectli- 3 the srnoke - 4 de- 
 lijrht 25 burnt offering 26 sacrifice 27 hear, obey 28 decay, rottenness 29 bone :i() 
 jealousy, envy 11 gent, noun fern, pi. 32 p. n. of a son of Japhet (Gen. 10, 
 ( L 4) the founder of the Greeks, Ionian^ 3 stand up. arise- 14 four 15 king 
 dom 30 to dream 37 seven 38 ears of corn 39 come up 40 stalk, cane 41 full 42 
 souls 43 a drop of 44 a bucket 45 the small dust 46 a balance 47 to count 48 - 
 
 EXERCISE D7. 
 
 The Lord hearethi the poor 2 - And 3 AbsalonH pre 
 pared 5 him horses and men to run 6 before 7 him. There 
 is no 8 God, are the thoughts 9 of the wicked. Clod know- 
 ethio the secrets 11 of the heart. J wl^mcutsis are pre- 
 

 59. THE CONSTRUCT STATE. 119 
 
 pared 12 for scorners, and stripes 14 for the back 15 of fools. 
 And 16 Uzziah 17 built towers in Jerusalem and in the des 
 ert and digged 18 many wells 19 * for lie had 20 much cattle 21 > 
 husbandmen 22 (also) and vine-dressers 23 in the mountains 
 and in Carmel 24 : for he loved husbandry 25 - There are 27 
 six**? (things), which 28 the Eternal liateth 29 : yea^o, sevens 1 
 (are) an abomination 32 unto Him 33 : lofty 34 eyes, a lying 
 tongue 35 ? and hands that shed innocent blood 36 ? a heart 
 that 28 devisetli37 thoughts 38 of iniquity, feet that2S are 
 swift 39 in running 40 to mischief 41 ; a false witness 42 (that) 
 breatheth 43 lies 44 and (he that) soweth 45 discord 46 among 47 
 brethren. Many sorrows 48 (shall be) to the wicked. 
 Job 49 was a father to the poor, eyes to the blind 50 and 
 feet to the lame 51 - God (is) father of the orphans 52 and 
 judge of the widows. 
 
 7<J3S with stiff.. 3)S Cpart.VO 5 nfe 1 ^ 4 QiSfc SK Sc-onv. 1 2 |V3N 1 part. 
 - T : ...... T T T : - I : v 
 
 12 Ni. pret. TJG lin^Sl D 10 part. 9711310 8 there is no Vtf, before n noun Vtf [ 108. 1J 
 T " *:"" T : I 
 
 183n 171JTTJ? IGconv. 1 15 1J MJTDSrp 13 [9J# before the pi. ending:] [33$ 
 24 SD^ 23 [the Tsere drops] 0*12 22-3K 21 HJprp 20 to him [was] 19 113 
 32n3j,in 31 y?^ 3 1 29Nri 28[g96,4J 2771271 26^ SSnrDIN, part, he waa loving 
 
 37p:irt. ^ "\n 36 pJ-D"T 861DB^ tf^S 34 D"l 33 [an abomination of his soul] T^DJ 
 - T I T T I v T I : T : - 
 
 inf. fr. V-n 39 Pi. purl. "1J1D 38[beforo the genitive the pretonic Kamete drops] rOttfTIE 
 
 44[1p*^ bef. the pi. ending] ^p^r 43 Hi. fut. n-13 42 Ip uJ. 1^ 41 n> 1 40 to run, 
 
 
 I P33 501?t 493VX- 48318OD 47 "3 46 only in plural pS 45 Pi. part. 
 - .. . ..*. . _ I T . 
 
 .[the prctouic Kainets drops] 
 
 59. THE CONSTRUCT STATE. 
 
 The word standing in the construct state ( 19, 5.) 
 suffers an alteration of its form: 
 
 a. Nouns, in ,1 change it into H : as ("UpD camp, 
 \>n" n3Pjg Israel s camp. 
 
 b. Nouns in ^ change it into t> as *H living, life, 
 rijTlS ^11 by the life of Pharaoli ! 
 
 c. Feminine nouns with final jr change it into fl : as 
 
120 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 d. The plural arid dual terminations D ~ and D* arc 
 changed into : as DID the horses of, *JT# the eyes of, 
 NOTE I. The vowel changes, which the word in const, state 
 undergoes will be shown in the following . 
 
 NOTE IT. In poetry the const, st. sometimes is found with pa- 
 ragogic 1 or-> : as 1^ 4. Mos. 23, 18, tyjflg Ps. 114, 8. 
 1. Mos. 49, 11. tt 2. Mos. 15, 6. fy 5. Mos. 33, 16. 
 
 EXERCISE 98. 
 
 ran 
 
 n^r nn^nri n ^ Sb i7! irrNirii 
 
 nrir 
 
 : 26 npin ^90 ^^5 25 pyvv f? 
 nin? 30 n^7 ; D?S 
 l^ jn 
 -pa 
 
 _ . 
 
 hedge, fence 1 (a species of) thorn 2 wickedness 3 p. n. m. 4 to carry captive 5 
 the force 6 engraver, artificer 7 smith 8 to remain 9 save 10 poverty, hence the 
 poorest sort 11 p. n. 12 to kill, (animals) to slay (persons) 13 Elijah 14 Baal, the 
 tutelary god of the Phenicians 15 idols 16 to give ear, to listen 1 ? fathers 18 my 
 land 19 mightySO number 21 lion 22 the appearance23 horseman, rider 2 * to run 2 5 
 a wall, rampart 26 stone, weight 27 an Ephah, (a corn measure) 28 a Hin, (a 
 liquid measure) 29 the fear 30 to imagine 31 to counsel 32 to morrow 33 the camp 34 - 
 
 EXERCISE 99. 
 
 The wisdom 1 of a man maketh his iace^ to shine2- The 
 Lord smote-* the first-born 5 of Egypt. The inhabitants^ 
 
60. INFLECTION OF MASCULINE NOUNS. 121 
 
 of Jebus 7 said to David, Thou slialt not come hither 8 - 
 Nevertheless 9 David took 10 the castle 11 of Zion 12 > which is 
 the city of David. The Lord is far 13 ( 79, 3. a.) from 
 the wicked: but 27 HehearethJS the prayer 14 of the righteous. 
 All Israel saw that the wisdom of God was m 1 ^ Solo 
 mon, to do judgment 17 - The queen 18 of Sheba 19 heard 
 (of) the fame 20 of Solomon and she came to prove 21 him 
 with hard 22 questions2 2 - Of the Lord (are) the goings 23 of 
 man 24 - Man s 25 are the projects 26 of the heart, but 27 from 
 the Lord (comes) the answer 28 to the tongue s (request) 
 (transl.) : the answer of the tongue. Abel 29 was a keeper 30 
 of sheep 31 and, Cain 32 was a tiller 33 of the ground 34 - And 
 the man Moses was very great in the land of Egypt, in 
 the eyes of Pharaoh, and in the eyes of the people. 
 
 9Conv. 1 Spun 7DW 63 ^ 5 TG3 * Hi. HDJ 3 D"J3 2 -\-\X Hi. fut. 
 
 13 pirn i2?rjr nrroa io-dS 
 
 T : - T : vv : T : IT T \ : - T 
 
 271 ifrnn) 25D1K 1 ? 24 "Oil 23i;*tfD 22 HTH 21 HDJ W. 
 T-:- TT ; vv T : T 
 
 *(T) drops -34n:rm ss-iiy 32 pp SIJK^ son^ i 
 
 60. RULES FOR THE INFLECTION OF MASCULINE NOUNS. 
 
 1. The formation of the Feminine, Plural, Dual, Con 
 struct state, and the connection of the noun with suffixes, in 
 addition to the changes mentioned in the preceding para 
 graphs, cause considerable vowel changes. 
 
 2. These changes are principally effected by the tone, 
 which moves forward one or more syllables, producing 
 greater or less modifications in the form of the word. 
 
 3. Generally the two last vowels only of the word are 
 changed by the inflection, the third from the end being 
 very seldom affected. 
 
 4. The penultimate vowel, being mutable, may be re 
 jected, the ultimate either rejected or shortened. 
 
 5. Two grades occur in the change of vowels, which 
 are represented by the two forms of the construct state: 
 the const, state in the singular : "Q*! and the construct st. 
 
 16 
 
122 Run 1. EXERCISES, 
 
 in the plural: n^ , The comparison of these two forms 
 shows : 
 
 a. In the construct st. sing, the vowel in penult is re 
 jected and that of the ultimate is retained, but short 
 
 ened: "im, fr. 
 
 b. In the construct st. plur. both vowels of the penult as 
 well as of the ultimate are rejected: HITI, properly it 
 is H^TT* the Chirek under 1 being only a helping vowel. 
 
 6. In the vowel changes therefore are distinguished two 
 classes: a lower grade, corresponding to the const, state 
 sing., and a higher grade, corresponding to the const, state 
 plural. 
 
 7. The following forms are inflected according to the 
 lower grade: the singular forms with suffixes, the femi 
 nine form, the plural in the absolute state, and the plural 
 forms with light suffixes. According to the higher grade : 
 the plural forms with the grave suffixes: as DDfT const, st. 
 sing. D?rf> const, st. pi. gjfi (prop. Dpp), fern. HEOq , 
 pi. D>DDf> with light stiff, sing, and plur. >/Mp* /MP : 
 with grave suff. pi. Dp^/P^p , 
 
 NOTE I. For Segholate forms, (which are not included in the 
 above rules) see 66. 
 
 NOTE II. Feminine nouns having no distinctive feminine termi 
 nation : as *)N5 a well, are inflected like the masculine, except 
 ing that they regularly form their plural in ffi, which form re 
 mains unchanged before suffixes and in the construct state. 
 
 61. DECLENSION OF MASCULINE NOUNS, 
 
 1, With reference to the vowel changes exhibited in the 
 foregoing paragraph, the nouns are classed as follows: 
 CLASS I. Nouns with immutable vowels. 
 CLASS II. Nouns with a mutable vowel in the ultimate. 
 CLASS III. Nouns with a mutable vowel in the penult. 
 CLASS IV. Nouns with mutable vowels in both syllables : 
 
 the ultimate and penult. 
 CLASS V. The Segholate forms. 
 
02. FIRST DECLENSION. 1 2:> 
 
 2. This division is observed in the Paradigms. For the 
 sake of brevity we will use the terms : first, second, third, 
 fourth and fifth declensions.* 
 
 62. FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 1. To this "belong all nouns, of which the vowels are 
 immutable, ( 14, 1.*) : as Ttf city, *7ip voice, B*Q*J gar 
 ment, *TQ3 hero, JTpCJ to destroyer. 
 
 2. Some difficulty arises with Kamets and Tsere, as these 
 vowels are sometimes mutable and sometimes immutable. 
 In forms similar to Dp and ^, Kamets and Tsere are im 
 mutable, being derived from D^p and 1^ and standing for 
 OXp r > TJ1 ( 3, 6. Note 4.). In forms like ^tpp_, ^j^the 
 Kamets is immutable, standing for ^Nt3p_> ^Npp (56, 3/a.b.): 
 p3J thief, POD executioner, DH? writing. To the form 
 Spp_ belong fc*n<D rider, for ^ *1) , ^H engraver, artificer, 
 for ty*5D . 
 
 EXERCISE 100. 
 
 ^j; ND 
 
 * nin 
 
 run 
 
124 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 beginning 1 small- to increase 3 contention, quarrel 4 hastily 5 for fear that 6 to 
 put, to shame 7 to harness 8 to go up 9 ($ 80. 5.) 10 to put on 11 coats ofmail^ 
 to flee 13 escape 14 a spoiler^ to conquer 16 the recompense 17 ( 91, 2.) 18 
 ( 118)19 the hosts 20 control near** ($ 96, 3.) 2a turn back, return^ to be 
 high 2 - 5 ( 96, 4.) to give, to wm/ce - 6 fortification, hence : a fortified city- 7 
 ( 83, 6.) a column 28 copper 29 to give light, illuminate- 50 
 
 EXERCISE 101. 
 
 Hear counsel, and receive! instruction-: that 3 thou may- 
 est 4 be wise in thy (latter) end. And 5 David ran, and 
 stood upon 6 the Philistine and slew him8 and cut off9 
 his head. And when 1 the Philistines saw their cham 
 pion 11 was dead, they fled 12 - And David took 13 the head 
 of the Philistine and brought 14 it to Jerusalem. And 
 Hainan took the apparel 15 of the king arid the liorse of 
 the king and arrayed 16 Mordecai 1 ^ and brought him on 
 horseback 18 through l ^ the street2o of the city, and pro- 
 claimedsi before him, Thus 22 shall it be done unto the 
 man whom the king delighteth to honor 23 . Her lamp 24 
 goeth not out 25 by 26 night. And 5 Delilah 2 "? said to 
 Samson 28 ? Tell 29 me, I pray thee, wherein 3 *) thy great 
 strength (lieth), and wherewith 31 thou mightest be bound 32 
 to afflict thee? Then 5 Samuel 33 took a vial 34 of oil 35 , 
 and poured 36 it upon his head, and kissed 3 *? him, and 
 said, Is it not because 38 the Lord hath anointed 39 thee to 
 (be) captain 40 over His inheritance 41 ? And 5 the king of 
 Babylon 43 slew42 all the princes 44 of JudalH 5 j n 
 
 8Pi. TUB 7 P#S3 fi^N 5Conv. 1 4 tut. [101,111. a)] 
 
 14 Hi. X13 !3np 12 D : J ntransl: that ( 3) their champion -n 33 10 Conv. 1 QfpJD 
 
 I-T - T 
 
 21JOP 2031JTP 193 18 to bring on horseback 331 Hi. J7OT1D 16 Hi. ^/^ 15 V-.l*! 
 T| T : - : : T - T ; 
 
 transl. in whose honor the king is delighting, delighting in 3 VSI") > honor ID" 1 22 DIG 
 
 : I T IT: T T 
 
 29 Fli. parag. imp. ( 34, 4. 104, 1) 1JJ 28 jl^plfir 27 nV 1 ?"! 26 3 25 nD.2) 24 1J 23 (g 96, 2) 
 36 ( 51, 1. a) pr 35 >fiV 34^3 33Sx-,D^ 32Ni.fut.npK 31 H^2 3 n .3 
 
 44D"V!P plur. *] $; 43 S^3 42t3nJt* 41 1 ^Sn: 40 1" JJ 39H^rD 38 "3 
 T; *T v T -T T-:- -T -T 
 
 . nrS31 here with par. fl, 71^31 
 T T ; T : 
 
 68. SECOND DECLENSION. 
 1. Under this are included all nouns having a mutable 
 
C3. SECOND DECLENSION. . 125 
 
 vowel in the final syllable ; they are either monosyllabic, 
 or their preceding vowels are immutable* 
 
 Ad I. (in the Paradigm.) Monosyllabic words with a 
 mutable A sound (Kamets or Patach). 
 
 a. Nouns with Kamets: as M roof, T hand CTV> D3"T) 
 D1 blood (D3?TT) 
 
 b. Nouns with Kamets, doubling the final consonant, when 
 the word is lengthened at the end: as D r sea, pi. DW 
 JDr time, D|P| . The Kamets is shortened ( 14, 
 Short, c.). T 
 
 c. Nouns with Patach: 12^ > dual DH&* breasts, *Q son, 
 
 H5 mv son - 
 
 d. Nouns with Patach, which double the final radical 
 (derivates from J?"Jf) : as 1H mountain, (with article 
 
 nnrt) piur. Dnr?(for DHD)>Dy_ people, pi. D>py. T? 
 
 living, pi. D TT/lfc chief, prince, pi. OHC (for DHfc>) . 
 
 Ad If. Polysyllabic nouns with final Kamets .or Patach : 
 as OS^ p judgment, 33113 star. Several nouns double the 
 last radical: a) D^IN vestibule, porch, D p^N; JplN a 
 wheel, D^1N; TjCTTp darkness, dark place, D^r?5 J l^W 
 gift, D^3r*^ f|^^ a( ^j quiet, subst. wantonness, pride, 
 1*^% a liiy, p^l^ . b) ^"TiQ threshing-sledge, 
 |7l wheel, B*$fy. 
 
 Ad III. Monosyllabic nouns with mutable Tsere. Chirek 
 in "Hpt^ is the helping vowel. Other nouns of this kijid, 
 drop the Tsere only in the construct state plural, hence 
 also with the grave plur. suffixes: as W tree, ^#, ^|Vi?. 
 DV3?. VJ? : ^.. DyVt : 13 1)ack > ^. ^. i n knowledge, 
 ^jn, J^l companion, friend, JH , IJ^I , 
 
 ^4c? /F. 1) Several nouns of this class in the const, 
 st. have final Patach: as liDPP lamentation, ISpp; HJtp 
 altar, TOfp; pip couching place, IJJ^p tithe. 2) Be 
 fore the suffixes Tl , D5 * J3 some of these take Seghol : as 
 DD /pP your staff; DJnii/D your sign, wonder. 3) Some 
 nouns retain the Tsere in the plural absolute: as 
 
126 PART I. EXERCISES, 
 
 descendant of the third generation, D *S&* 4) Several 
 double the last consonant: as TD.5P palm-branch, 
 cultivated plain-orchard, 1 
 
 Ad V. Nouns with Cholem, changing it into Kubbuts 
 before the doubled final radical: as D""Hp an 
 
 in sacred writer, person skilled in hieroglyphics D^ 0""|D 
 JS margin, border, D Sp^S; p^ hight, summit, D JEtf . 
 To these also belong the derived nouns in * , which oi ten 
 double the *, when, the word is lengthened: as HD3 a stranger, 
 nn^Ji HIPP a Jew, D HIPP and DHIIT. 
 
 Ad VI. Participles Kal, Piel and Hithpael, with the 
 exception of JT 7 Observe here that the forms with the suf 
 fixes Tj, D5> f? are fourfold: 1) ^yCpp in Pause ^??p . 
 2) With Ayin guttural T]51kX , 3) With Lamed guttural 
 3$& . 4) rj5\X (on account of the ) . 
 
 Ad VII. Participles and other derivatives from verbs 
 n"b* which terminate in H as r\$T\ seer, HVp. enc ^ 
 change H in fl in the const, state and drop H en 
 tirely before any of the afformatives: as HKI : const, state 
 nXT with suff. ^l.plur. D\\h, with local r\~- as HDD 
 downwards, from HtSD H7J^D upwards, from H 1 ?]/*? 
 
 In a few instances the original termination * ( 13, 7. a.) 
 is restored. Thus with stiff. ?TMQ ( s ^ n ff-) thy covering 
 (as from ^DD); ^pp (sing.) Is! ~30, 23, TjtJHD (sing.) 
 (erroneously taken for the plural). Ca. 2, 14. VtTJ? his 
 Creator Ps. 149, 2. 
 
 EXERCISE 102. 
 
 l?^ nin? noN-ri^ :nin? rj^n-i raj]; N 1 ? 
 
63. SECOND DECLENSION. 127 
 
 crj : rnrr n, 
 
 -try nrw* nint :npN ninptps^o : 12 ^prtnp "^s^ 
 
 T 
 
 supply: my desire 1 kingdom 2 to wait on 3 ( 18. Note) 4 to be ashamed 5 
 compassion, pity6 (^ 97, 4,) 7 to strike 8 to become a surety, to pledge 9 debt 10 
 couch, bed 11 ( 75, 7.) 12 lamentation 13 dance 14 to loosen, untie 15 sackcloth 16 
 to gird 1 ? (85, 1. b.) iniquity 18 in the power of niD with suff.20 (g 66, 14.) 
 to. be or become little, few 21 to envy 22 a torch 23 intoxicated, drunk 24 do 
 minion, rule 25 wicked, foolish 26 friend 2 ? to help, assist 28 without 29 to go out, 
 be extinguished 30 - 
 
 
 
 EXERCISE 103. 
 
 And 1 the scribes2 of the king were called at 3 that time 4 ? 
 and it was written according to all that Morclecai com 
 manded to the Jews and to the rulers 5 of the provinces 6 - 
 Keceive 7 my instruction, the fathers instruction, our in 
 struction. The angels of the Lord encampeths roundabout 
 the just and delivereth 10 them. And 1 the Philistines 
 gathered 11 their camps together 11 to fight* 2 with 13 Israel. 
 The Lord thy God walkethi* in the midst of thy camp, 
 to deliver 15 thee and to give up 16 thine enemies 17 before 
 thee; therefore 1 shall is thy camp be 1 ^ holy i. And 1 Jethro2o, 
 the priest of Midian 21 . Moses father-in-law^ 2 , heard (of) all 
 that God had done for 23 Moses, and for Israel, his people, 
 and he said: I, thy father-in-law, am come 24 to thee* 
 Blessed ^5 (be) the Lord, my strength 26 , which teacheth 27 
 my hands to war 2 ^. My refuge^, my deliverer 30 and (He) 
 
128 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 in whom 31 I trust 8 -*; who subdueth 33 my people under 
 me 34 - The Lord is thy keepers : the Lord is thy shades^. 
 The Lord upholdeth 3 ? all that fallss. My son meftdle*9 
 not with rebels 40 - Whoso moeketh 41 the poor reproach- 
 eth-*2 his Maker 43 - He that trusteth 44 i n his (own) hearths 
 is a fool. Deceit (is) in the heart of them that imagine 46 
 evil: but to the counselors 47 of peace (is) joy. 
 STINTS s part. run fnpS enyn snip 4fem. r\y 33 2120 iconv. i 
 
 IT:- *r -r ]~r T : 
 
 17 TX 16 mj 15Hi. bvj 14 Hit. part. -j^H 13 3 12Ni. QnS UpP 10 Pi. vSn 
 
 l--r - T I -|T I -T 
 
 26 IIV 25part. Kal. -p3 24 part. 23 ^ 22 m n 21 pi 3 SOn/V 59IJT1P 18 rm 
 
 IT : : IT TT 
 
 3113 30 Pi part. CoS3 29 (doubles the last cons.) 3 jti/D 28 S^p 27 Pi part (6 96, 8) "]^S 
 - T T : T | .- 
 
 (doubles the last ^V 35 part. nDU> 34 ( 75, 7) ^DHH 33 part. (6 96. 8) T\^ 32 pret. HDH 
 
 - T T ; ~ T T 
 
 41 with S, P af t- tyh 40npty 39 HitO^p 38 part ( 96, 8J 37 part, ^OD 36 cone.) 
 45 [doubles the last cons.] lh 44 with 3, part. HD3 43 part, nfrj? 42 Pi. pret. 
 
 .47 part. " 46 part, 
 
 64. THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 1. This declension comprises all nouns with an immuta 
 ble vowel in the final syllable and mutable Kamets or 
 Tsere in the penult: as Vj-U great; pN faithfulness^ truth; 
 fi t "Ot remembrance. 
 
 2. The Kamets or Tscre of the penult is dropped in the 
 const, state and invariably when the word is lengthened. 
 In forms like pl^N Dagesh of the middle radical is like 
 wise dropped : as f1*"l?t Words as pHS ruler, leader, 
 with suff. fainS (Chirek helping vowel) ; p3]n famine, 
 with suff. pDjn, for pDJH ( 14, Rising I. b. B.). 
 
 3. Some nouns of the form p^3t when inflected, take 
 Seghol instead of Chirek. Thus p tH vision, const, state 
 jVtll, plur. n^Vrtl; \\*W?y. a tenth part (dry measure), plur. 
 
 4. A few nouns of this class retain the Kamets : as C?vC-* 
 a measure, (prob. the third part of an Ephah), and a peculiar 
 class of soldiers. H^ refuge, fortress njJO ; po shield 
 week PL DD and ni3 const. 
 
64. THIRD DECLENSION. 129 
 
 5. In tliis class are comprehended several nouns, which 
 double the last radical: as Dl"lJ^ naked, D E*1#; ^TlPf net- 
 
 T . ~: T 
 
 tie, D *7*")n 
 
 6. In several nouns of the form DlpD place, especially 
 those derived from verbs ]"y , 1 is changed into *) : as DUE 
 flight, with suff. pUp; flUp rest, pi. D fTUp; pJ^E hahita- 
 tion, pi. D\WE; HUE fear, pi. DHUEJ *T)VE fortress, with 
 
 T A T 
 
 sufF. r|"11VE; plnE sweetness, pi. Q p 
 
 . EXERCISE 104. 
 
 sn nS :np"ip nrip sjjte^ "hq : 2 0*9133 ^p) nirr 
 nijoy mrr & np trnp srnp : l^Kb{?S 
 
 T : T : IT 1 T I T 
 
 16 
 
 "inn 
 
 nirr :iDipaD 
 
 T : | : 
 
 -Sist : H73 ni^i^ nin^ 22 jn 91073 21 njp 
 
 34 ^ : 33 
 
 iN* 
 
 to raise 1 to bend, bow down 2 the fullness of 3 glory, majesty* (supply : is 
 = His majesty fills the whole earth) remembrance 5 ( 83, 6) 6 wantonness 7 
 ignominy 8 with 9 lowlyio faithful 11 weight 12 perfect 13 delight, acceptance 14 
 proverb 15 to conceal 16 to search out 17 to wander 18 nest 19 mighty 20 word 21 
 behold 2 3 to touch 23 the anointed (applied to priests, kings,) 24 old, aged man 25 
 healing 26 a dream 27 to fly away, vanish 28 ( 76, 2. c.)- J Hi. to chase away30 
 vision3l foundation, basis 32 1% perpetuity, eternity, "l.l D^J^ eternity 
 and eternity == forever and ever 33 , avaricious, hard hearted 34 riches 35 but 36 - 
 
 17 
 
130 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 EXERCISE 105. 
 
 Our Redeemer 1 * the Lord of Hosts (is) His name, the 
 Holy One of Israel. The multitudes of all the nations 3 
 that fight 4 against 5 Israel and that distress^ them shall 
 he as a dream of a night vision 7 (of the vision of night). 
 The uprights shall inherits (what is) good. A son 10 hon- 
 oreth 11 (his) father, and a servant his master^.- if then 13 
 I (he) a father, where 14 (is) mine honor 15 ? and if I (he) 
 a master 16 ; where is my fear 17 ? saith the Lord of Hosts 
 unto you, O 18 priests, that despise 19 my name. As 20 a 
 dew 21 upon the grass (is) the favor 22 of a king. God still- 
 eth 23 the noise 24 of the scas 25 the noise of their waves 2 ** 
 and the tumult 27 of the people 28 - The Lord reigneth^, 
 clouds 30 and darknesssi (are) round about Him32: right 
 eousness and judgment (are) the habitation 83 of His throne 34 - 
 He that walketh 35 uprightly 36 and worketh 37 righteous 
 ness 38 * and speaketh 39 truth in his heart 40 - He (that) 
 hackhiteth 41 not with 42 his tongue, nor doeth evil to his 
 fellow 43 ? nor taketh up 45 a reproach 44 against his neigh 
 bor^; He that doeth 47 these (tilings) shall never 49 totter 48 - 
 God stands^ at 51 the right hand of the poor. 
 
 8 D DFl 7 mn 6 Hi. part, with S, p? 5 Stf 4 part, (g 96, 8) JOV 3 "U 2 PDH 1 Stf JI 
 
 T I T - T T IT 
 
 16 (g 82, 4 b.) D-jnK 15 1O3 14 JTN 13 DK1 12 ri"IX 11 tut. ( 101, I. c.) 10 n 9 ^HJ 
 -. T . . T I .. _ T 
 
 24 jmar 23 Hi. part, n^^ 22 p i 1 21^ 20J 19 part. HT3 18 (80, 5) 17KTb 
 
 T -T I T TT T 
 
 plur., doubles Q^S 27 JIIDH 26 (doubles the last cons.) S.3 25 (doubles the last cons.) Q" 1 
 29 pret. Pause ! ^D 28 [strong shortening of the vowel g 14, IF. Shortening c)] the last cons. 
 36Q Jpfi 35 part. Kal 341KD3 33JOO 32 with plur. suff. T3D 31 S3*1J, 30^ing. 
 44n2"|Pl 4a;n ^y_ tipret. Sjl 40^3S 39 part. Kal. 13H 38 p^ 37 part. Sj S 
 
 .51 S 50iut. |9 DSl vS 48 Ni. fut LD1D 47 part, in const, state 46 311 p 45 prct Nt 3 
 r : IT T T 
 
 65. FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 1. To this belong nouns of two syllables either with 
 mutable Kamets in both, or with Kamets in the second 
 and Tsere in the first, or with Kamets in the first and 
 in the last: as "CTJ word, DD^ heart, JPlJ old 
 

 09. FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 131 
 
 2. Vowel changes in this declension ; 
 
 a, Kamets or Tsere in the first syllable always drop: 
 
 nrj, pr^ jpr. 
 
 b. Kamets and Tsere in the last syllable, are changed in 
 the const, state sing, and before the suffixes Dp> |p in 
 sing, into Patacli: as 1T1 \\X.> 33 " 
 
 c. In the plural and before the light suffixes sing, and pi. 
 final Kamets and Tsere are retained: as 
 
 tZ. In the const, state plur. and before the grave suffixes 
 
 plur. final Kamets and Tsere drop: as Hpl, Dp^pP 
 
 but >Dpn> HJW ^ the helping vowel is Patacli on 
 
 account of the guttural. 
 
 3 In fp3 wing, 2% tail, J?7V ri b, the helping vowel in 
 
 the .plural is Patacli instead of Clrirek: as 
 
 4. In a few. nouns of the form ^pp and 7DD the 
 Segholate form ( 00.) is used in the const, st. and before 
 suffixes: as Jtjj smoke, const, state J^and JtTp_; t]JJ 
 l>ranch, with "sirff. D?5^; y^V rib, const, st. J^V and 
 J Sjr , with suffixes ^^V 
 
 5. Borne nouns of the form ^tpp take the Segholate form 
 in the const, st. e. g. J"|rO shoulder, const, st. t]r\5 ; ^14 
 wall, const, st. T^J T|T hip, const, st. T]T.; ^M robbery, 
 const, st. ^; Tj^N long, const, st. Tp5<; lii) heavy, once 
 const, st. "1DD; 7*JJ^ uncircumcised, const, st. ^j; and *T3JJ 
 
 0. Some nouns of the form ^Op retain Tsere in the plur. 
 const, st. e. g. Jg^ sleeping, const, y ; ^DK mourning, 
 ^DN*; DDtr joyful , T ^TO^ (but also ?{?) H?^ forgetful, 
 ^ i fin delighting, ^)H . 
 
 EXERCISE 100. 
 
 2 rnr tDdjTjS orjS jn^ nin*. :nr^ : nin? 
 :nn 3 *3D"S rSnp nin* :bn 
 
132 PART 1. EXERCISES. 
 
 7 p5 n S pgn : 8 no nS C 
 S mrr 
 
 T : T : V 
 
 nan 1 
 
 I7 
 
 p?n 
 
 29 
 
 : H33 
 
 the summit 1 to break forth 2 wing 3 lightning 4 flesh, body 5 quietness, soft 
 ness 6 to fold 7 counsel 8 four 9 little 10 ($ 83, 7.) Pual : to he made wise, hence: 
 exceeding wise 11 strong 12 to prepare 13 the coney 14 rock 15 locust ($ 82, I.) 16 
 division 17 (by bands) a spider* 8 to catch 19 ($ 76, 2. d.) ornament 20 circle 21 
 locust (a peculiar species, small and edible) 22 upright one 23 conjointly 24 
 worthlessnes8 ; lowness 25 (# 89, 4.) an assembly 26 to rejoice, to play, dance 
 (Pi.) 97 to laugh, rejoice, dance 28 a circle, an assembly 29 - 1 
 
 EXERCISE 107. 
 
 The Word of our God shall stand 1 forever. And 2 the 
 Lord had rained down 3 manna 4 upon the Israelites to eat, 
 and had given them (of) the corn 5 of heaven. The Lord 
 is far from the wicked. Two6 (things) have I required? 
 of TheeS, deny9 me (them) not before" I die 12! Remove 
 far 13 from me vanity 13 and lies (transl. the word of lie)* 4 : 
 give me not poverty 16 nor 17 riches 18 - Lest I be full 1 9, 
 and deny (Thee) 20, and say, Who is the Lord? or lest I 
 be poor 21 and steal 22 * and.take 2 ^ the name of my Grod (in 
 vain). Fear the Lord, (ye) his saints 24 : for there is no 2 ^ 
 want26 to them that fear 27 Him. If ye hearken 28 to 
 these judgments and keep2 and do 2 9 them, the Lord thy 
 God shall keep29 unto thee His covenant. And He will 
 Iove29 thee and bless 2 9 thee and multiply 29 thee: he will 
 bless 29 thy corn, thy wine 30 ; thine oil sl > thy flocks 32 and 
 thy herds 33 - Speak ye to 34 the heart of Jerusalem, and 
 
C>6. FIFTH DECLENSION. 133 
 
 call unto 35 her, that her warfare 36 is accomplished 37 , that 
 her iniquity 39 is pardonedss, for she hath received^ of 
 the hand of the l^ord, double*! foH2 all her sins* 3 - 
 
 transl. from 9pm 8 IjntfS 7^W& 6 D jTtf 5j;n 4 |D 3 Hi. "IB D 2 C.I 
 
 19 fut. y3& Wffy 171 i6$jo io Hi. pro 14313 isxr# 12 rut. 
 
 25 pK there is no : 24 imp 23pret. ferflfl 22pret. 3JJ 21 Ni. fut. #T 20 Pi. pret. 
 
 I IT - T -T 
 
 31"in]T 30-i#VVn 29 pret. with C. 1 28 with ace. J/ Ettf 27 to his fearers = XT 
 
 (generally masc. 3^ 35 with pi. suff. SN 34^ 33 ( 82, 1.) ^D3 32 ( 82, 1.) jtfi 
 
 T T V I T T 
 
 41D Si)3 40nS 39 (gen. masc., here fern.) ^ 38 Ni. pret. Hi "! 37 xSo 36 Acre /cm.) 
 
 66. FIFTH DECLENSION. 
 
 1. In this are embraced the large class of nouns called 
 Seglwlates, which had originally three consonants, with 
 but one vowel, following the first one. In order to 
 make them dissyllabic, a helping vowel has been added, 
 regularly Seghol, hence the term: Segholate forms. The 
 original vowel was: short a, i, or o ( , , ) as TJ7? 
 ")9P ^ "Ij^* By t^ e addition of the helping Seghol under 
 the second consonant, the short vowel being now in an 
 open syllable is lengthened. The Chirek becomes Tsere, 
 the Kamets-Chatuph, Cholem, the Patach, however, ir 
 regularly changes into Seghol, in pause only does it 
 lengthen regularly into Kamets ; thus the original TPO 
 ^3p , l?np become rj^Q > in pause T]Sb , 1$P , 8r"jp . 
 
 2. Tlie second vowel being only a helping vowel, all 
 words of this declension are Milel.. 
 
 3. On the lengthening of the word the original form is 
 resumed: as if 
 
 NOTE I. Hence He local ( 19, 6.) appended to a Segholate, 
 
 > 
 requires the original form : as n^""!^ to the land (T^lNt 
 
134 PART I. EXERCISES, 
 
 N); HJV3 to the house (JTp, orig. JV^) , When the 
 original vowel in the segholate form is o, If is accented: as 
 
 4. In the const, state sing, the forms T]S/9> 1p> CH 
 remain unaltered. 
 
 NOTE II. jnt seed, *nn an apartment, room, ^ftp gain, profit, 
 plantation, plant, J a breath, a vain thing, in const, st. : 
 
 5. A kindred form of this class, embraces all those 
 words of three consonants with but one vowel after the 
 second one : as B>3^ honey ; "O| and "U^ man ; D^ 
 shoulder ; Ig^ moisture ; 1H ink ; DjX marsh, marshy 
 place, and the infinitives of Kal, of the form ">Dp > 
 They agree with the Segholates in inflection: as 
 
 6. From this form (5. vowel under the second consonant) 
 are taken the plural absolute and the plural forms with 
 light suffixes: as D^^Dnp, DgHj? : 5^9 > ^.)p . 
 
 7. From the regular (Tj p/p etc .) are formed the plural con 
 struct state and the plural with grave suffixes: as 
 
 NOTE II L When the final radical is one of the 
 the aspirated pronunciation of the plural absolute is retained in 
 the const, st. and before the grave suffixes; as *2*7 2 DrTp^O> 
 but in sing, p pg, DJP^O 
 
 8. In the form of two Seghols, as ^Q, the first gene 
 rally stands for the original Patach (?f?b) But a consid- 
 ei-able number had Cfrirek originally; as "J^p garment,, 
 (1D3 trust, confidence, Tj^p knee, D^ rain, hp? remem 
 brance etc., with suffixes: ^IJpj Hp? , 
 
 9. In the forms with two Seghols (Tto) and Tsere witli 
 Seghol ("lipp) ? some (most of which are Pe gutt.) have 
 Seghol as the original short vowel: as "OK pinion, with 
 

 66. FIFTH DECLENSION. 135 
 
 f rq^, r^n fat, p^n part, pgr? delight, h$, caif, i# 
 
 help, Tty* valuation, i^ before, over against, (IIJ^Gen. 
 2, 18, 20. as over against him, i. e. the counterpart of him), 
 *|JJ># ten etc. 
 
 10. When the third radical is a guttural, the helping- 
 vowel under the second radical is Patach : as JHJ seed, 
 y& salvation, rHK way. When the second radical is a 
 guttural, both vowels of the forms ^tpp and Sfcpp are Patach; 
 as *}#} boy, lad, -)] wood, forest. 
 
 12. The form ^tjp has in a few instances Kubbuts in 
 the inflection before suffixes: as Tj^D thicket, lD3p; ^"1J| 
 greatness, iS^ (also lS"|^) ; fpp handful, V^/pp , 
 
 12. The form ^tpp with middle letter guttural takes 
 Kamets before the suffixes ^| , D5 * p : as ^^?K tnv tent 3 
 TlS^3 thy deed, work (Inf. with stiff. 45). 
 
 13. The form 7iDp vocalizes the plural absolute : 
 
 1) D v]3 actions, DHip5 cypress-flowers, D^nQH s]>ears. 
 
 2) with Pe gutt.: DHpJ^ gazelles, nlH^X ways, but also 
 without guttural: D^HpH (thus always with the article). 
 
 3) The two nouns tHb* root, and Hp holiness, have 
 D BntP and D^ "Jp . The noun SllN tent, has ])1. D^^TIK , 
 whence vS liSV ^riK, but also ^HK> D^SnN*; HIN* 
 
 T T | V T " T: T V " T: T 
 
 way, makes WtTlN > DrinnX 
 
 14. With T J7 and v ]^ the segholate form is only distin 
 guishable in the sing, absolute. With 1 the form ^pp 
 lengthens the Patach before 1 into Kamets: as DVJ death, 
 before * the Patach remains unchanged: as JT? olive. In 
 all the other forms the 1 and > lose their consonantal power 
 and are contracted with the preceding vowel into a diph 
 thong: a + V=1 ; a + * = r ( 12, 7. b. 2.) ; hence 
 
 rVt P.** adversity, with suff. ^1N; Tjiri midst, const. t 
 with suff. *3in;fV3 house, const. D^j, with suff. 
 
 15. I. -The Scgholates of the verb H"S exhibit the 
 
136 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 three original forms as follows: H fruit, C*"^) VD l^a-lf, 
 0>T])> vH sickness, Cvll)j hence H in pause H$> suiF. 
 >nS; Vt|> Vn suff. yfT, ^P in pause >Vn suif. Sn . 
 
 II. From such nouns of JT 7 the third radical of which 
 was originally 1 , arise mt^ from IfU^ , ^jin , 1PQ from 
 inn, IPO (12, 7,1). 3.) 
 
 EXERCISE 108. 
 
 4 phi vyy$ 3 T 
 
 nin :nin ninn 
 
 ? rru mn : n ii^ 
 
 I T : : \ 
 
 rrn 
 
 - 
 
 ; 2 
 n n T> itr now nio 
 
 26 
 
 nip an>n N 
 ^ vfc sp SD Sj; nin! ^orn p SbS 
 
 the path 1 brightness, splendor 2 purt. 3 to weigh 4 shield 5 to plant 6 rill 7 
 fruit 8 to wither 9 intelligence 10 greatness 11 food 12 wickedness 13 possessor, 
 person given or addicted to a thing 14 the wall 15 stone 16 to break, pull 
 down 17 ( 93, 7.) magnificence 18 the deed* 9 sacrifice ( 83, 4.) 20 to flatted 1 
 

 66. FIFTH DECLENSION, 137 
 
 to spread 22 step, footstep 23 to seek early, diligently 24 ($ 93, 3. = seeks early 
 it, the correction) to devise 25 to direct, prepare 26 step 27 poor, afflicted - 28 
 fr. JJ7 affliction, misery 29 wisdom 30 company 31 scorner, scoffer 32 to testify, 
 bear witness 33 hard, vehement 34 flame, burning 35 the flame of Jah, i. e. 
 kindled by God 36 - 
 
 EXERCISE 109. 
 
 Bless the Lord my soul 1 , and my innermost 2 (bless) 
 His holy 3 name. I will lift up 4 mine eyes to the hills 5, 
 from whence 6 cometh my help 7 - My help (cometli) from 8 
 the Lord, who made 9 heaven and earth. He will not 
 suffer- thy foot 12 to totter 11 - The earth is Mil* of the 
 goodness 13 of the Lord. Say not, I will do so 16 to him 
 as 15 he has done to me: I will render 17 to the man ac 
 cording to his work 18 - And 19 Hiram 20 sent to Solomon, 
 saying, I have heard what 21 thou sentest to me for 21 : 
 (and) I2 2 will do all thy desire 23 concerning 24 cedar-trees 
 (trees of cedars) 25 ? and concerning fir 26 -trees. My servants 
 shall bring 27 (them) down2 7 from Lebanon 28 unto 29 the 
 sea, and thou 30 shalt do my desire in 31 giving bread for 
 my household (bread of my house). Saul 32 and Jona 
 than 33 ; lovely 34 and pleasant 35 in their lives, also 36 in 
 their death were not parted 37 , they were swifter 40 than 38 
 eagles 39 ? they were stronger 42 than lions 41 - Arise, walk 
 through 43 the land in 44 the length 45 of it and in the 
 breadth 46 of it; for I will give it unto thee. My flesh 48 
 and my heart 49 faileth 47 , (but) God (is) the strength 50 of 
 my heart, and rny portion 51 for ever. 
 
 5 (with the art. inn 5 in plur. 17, 1) "IH 4 xfrj 3 ( 83, 6. b.) 2 plur. ^ 1 fern, #3 J 
 12(subst. with art.) BID H hy) 1 jflJ 9 = the maker of (part. H^J7) 8 D#D 7 ")?#. 6 j KD 
 2QDTT1 19Conv. 1 18^3 17 Hi. 3^ 16 j 3 15"1#N3 14 ( 85, 2.) fc^D 
 27 Hi. TV 262Tha 25pK 24^ 23} 3n 22 [ 93, Note] -JN 21 ( 111, 2.) 
 33tnjV 32^^^ 31 with inf. S 30 [ 93, Note] HP K 29 [19, 6.] 28 [ 80, 3.J 
 
 ITT T 
 
 38 i 91, 1. 2.] 37Ni. Y13 36 } 35with art. Q^J 34 Part. Ni. with art. 
 
 4 "7 43 ^ 42 [naa naj pi.] i3i 41 pi, rn, 
 
 .51pSn 50 1 493n"7 
 I . T 
 
 18 
 
138 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 67. THE FORMATION OF FEMININES. 
 1. The feminine termination Jl is appended to the 
 masc. noun, affecting it in the same manner as the light 
 suffixes. L DID, fern. JlCttD; NttO, HNVlO; II. Decl. 
 
 . rnpio; rn.K nrnfc; nrn.fem. run, in. Deci. 
 , nSn|; D ptj nppJ?; iv. i)eci. DDR, 
 v. Deci. ^p, ns^Qj D*?JN np^Jti 
 
 (TV!*. 
 
 2. The toneless fern, ending ft, modifies a) the ante 
 penult like H : as rn."U wall, from TTU; b) the penult 
 like the Seghol in Tj^b* for T|^5 v ^ z - ^7 ^ ne Seghol of 
 H the preceding vowel, with a few exceptions, be 
 comes like it in sound: Patach and Kamets become 
 Seghol: as JlfTfi, fijll^D; rTTV^ FT$yj Tsere becomes 
 Seghol: m Hj; C hirek 0) becomes Seghol: TD 
 
 When n is appended to the nouns in ^ and *| (Deriva 
 tives from r\"^), i-et and u-et are contracted into JT and 
 
 m . w rvyp (for np^ ) nni^ (for rvpt?). 
 
 68. DECLENSION OF FEMININES. 
 
 In inflection feminine nouns undergo less change than 
 masculine ones, and are classed as follows : 
 
 CLASS I. Nouns with immutable vowels before the fem 
 inine termination Jl : as jlTTtJI > H7bp > HpH statute, law. 
 
 T T : T : T |T \ 
 
 CLASS II. Nouns with mutable Kamets or Tsere before 
 the fern, termination H : as jlV# counsel, rDJ^In abomi 
 nation, njTiy righteousness. 
 
 CLASS III. Nouns derived from the segholate form of 
 the masculine: as rQ^D* from TPO; rnj3 a young wo 
 man, from *)J^; rrnpX word, saying, from T)pN; Hptfl 
 strength, from ptfl 
 
 CLASS IV. Nouns properly Segholates, terminating in 
 
69. FIP^T DECLENSION OF FEM. NOUNS. 139 
 
 ft- (with gutturals fi) ft > ft- : as ftT}^ mis 
 tress; flg tf wife: njrO coat. 
 
 69. FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 In this declension the ending only undergoes changes 
 in the const, st. : H is commuted into ft: as HpH const. 
 
 Before light suffixes the Patach of ft being in an open 
 syllable becomes Kamets : as TlpID > but D3fiD ; lD The 
 
 plural JTiDID remains unchanged in all forms. 
 
 > 
 He local (H ) changes the fern, termination ft into 
 
 > T > T 
 
 ft as J"irn!p> from PPO n. p. (bitter fountain). 
 EXERCISE 110. 
 
 jfc :nirr nsrp. HMH z rbn$ :nS ^ioSn ^T rnrr 
 
 nnin 
 
 nir nisi : 13 nmo np^ i^i^i 22 v$ np^ : 
 
 secreti t h e beginnings perfects (g g3, 7:) (g 90, 8.) 4 bridegroom 5 bridal- 
 chamber 6 to rejoice 7 the end, extremity 8 a going out, a rising 9 circuit 10 to 
 hide, conceal 11 the heat 12 only 13 silent resignation 14 (i. e. perfectly resigned) 
 to deliver, rescue 15 path 16 far off, remote 17 near 18 to utter 19 righteousness 20 
 praise 21 * his mouth 22 push, thrust down 23 unless 24 delight 95 searching, 
 ^ ^ unsearchable 26 . 4$ 108, 1.)* 
 
140 PART I. EXERCISES, 
 
 EXERCISE 111. 
 
 My soul, waits thou only 1 upon2 God; for my hope 4 
 (is) from Him. He only (is) my rock 5 and my salva- 
 vationG: He (is) my defence?* I shall not totters. As 9 
 the man (is), (so is) his might 10. Thou shatterest the 
 ships 11 of Tarshish with 12 an east 14 wind 13 - According 
 to Thy name God, so (is) Thy praise 15 unto 1 ^ the ends 1 ? 
 of the earth. The fear is of the Lord (is) clean 1 *), endur- 
 ing2o forever. My son 21 , walk 22 not thou in the way of 
 wicked; refrain 23 thy foot from their path 24 - And Re- 
 chah 25 and Baanah 2 6 came into 2 ? the midst 2 ^ of the house, 
 and the king Iay 2 9 on 3 his bed 31 in his bed 3 _ 2 chamber 33 , 
 (in the chamber of h. b.) and they smote him, and slew 34 
 him. Behold, we (were) binding 35 sheaves 3 ^ in the field, 
 and, Jo, my sheaf arose, and also 3 ? stood upright^ ; and 
 behold, your sheaves surrounded 39 ? and prostrated tliem- 
 selves 4 o to my sheaf. Go and cry 4 ! unto the gods, which 
 ye have chosen; let them save 42 you 43 in the time 44 of 
 your distress 4 ^ And ye have this day scorned 4 ^ your 
 God, who himself 4 ? saved 48 you out of all your evils 4 ^ 
 and your troubles 50 - 
 
 8Ni. DID 7 [doubles the last cons.] ;ui#p 6nj^t# 5 "N3f 4 mpjl 3 QD^ 2 1 ? l^jfl 
 
 isnn 123 n rrjx lomoj 93 
 
 22 Kal 21 |3 20[part.] ^DJ* 
 35 Pi. D?^ 34 Hi. n-1D 33 33^D 32 IIH 31 HtSD 30 ^y 29 part. 33^ 28 " 
 
 40Hith. with C. 1, nn^ 39 fut. 3^0 38Ni. Pause! 3^J 37 QJ SOfplur. D and JT)], H^x 
 
 - T * T T \ ~; 
 
 48 part. 47 f^PI 46DKD totTW 44 n 43 dative 42 Hi. fut. y& 41 n 
 
 70. SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 1. The words of this declension drop the Kamets and 
 Tsere in the inflection, excepting in the plural absolute: 
 as rut? year, rOfcT, 7W, but Hl^ 
 
 2. When 8h va precedes the termination H --, H 
 (as in paradigm) a helping vowel is used: as 
 
 from npny. 
 
70. SECOND DECLENSION OF FEM. NOUNS. 141 
 
 3. In the following words Kamets and Tsere are 
 immutable, hence all these words belong to the first 
 declension: nt^ 3? (the feminine of ^p 62, 2.) dry land; 
 iTDJ^n (for i*"O*tJTj) darkness ; nj^ pS request ; nVJO re 
 proach ; n^HS (for n^*15) exposition ; ni^N memorial ; 
 pfen deliverance; 11*1311 a knowing; ,11 (fr. 11V> Kamets 
 to comp. the Dagesh), HJH evil, (fr. Jfjn) 5 ni3 pure, (fr. 
 TO); ni3 rumination, (TU); niNp curse, (UN) ; 
 
 a saw, (fr! TU); nit strange, (fr. itf); ,103 hight; 
 witness ; ilNVp foil ; ilNptD unclean ; 71*13^ something 
 lost ; n /M robber v , n^?bX darkness ; Jl. Dl^ pool ; i*l!3^Jl 
 
 T * ^ T T M ^| T " 
 
 something stolen ; Hllp gall ; 1i3l^ burning ; n^NII fig ; 
 nD^np overthrow; nfiJJO plague etc. 
 
 4. Several nouns take in the const, st. and before suff. 
 ^the Segholate form H or f] : as 
 
 np^Pp kingdom, const, jlp/pp^ with suff. 
 nnBJ^p family, n jlfliD^pj " 
 
 n^N^D work, i 
 
 T T : 
 
 n^DlD chariot. " 
 
 T T : v 
 
 government, HytTpP 
 
 war 
 
 ornament, 
 
 norj3 cattle, with suff. ^PD?^ W^D? 5 ^^ crown 
 const. n*)tpj?.5 rn lljl mistress, const. 
 const. nDH 1 ? . 
 
 EXERCISE 112. 
 
 nin 
 
 : n p?p 
 nin 
 
142 PART 1. EXERCISES, 
 
 : 23 pn 22 2l 20 
 
 38 37 36 35 
 
 sweet 1 sleep 2 laborer 3 to be exalted 4 a city 5 snare, gin 6 righteous acts 7 
 to search 8 form, imagination 9 thought 10 to understand 11 the breath, spirit 12 
 to search 13 chamber, inward part 14 abomination 15 high, proud ( 83, 7.) 16 
 messenger 17 the multitude 18 the honor 19 the want 20 people 21 destruction, 
 ruin 22 prince 23 to know, regard 24 the life 25 beast 26 ground 27 to be satisfied 28 
 throughout all ages ($ 91, 3. b.) 29 above, more than all 30 a watching, guard-" 
 ing 31 issue, result 32 slumber 33 folding 3 * one that travels 35 poverty 36 want 37 
 a man of a shield = armed with a shield 38 to stand 39 * 
 
 EXERCISE 113* 
 
 The Lord will render 1 to every 2 man 2 his righteousness 3 
 and his faithfulness 4 - The lips-5 of a fool enter 6 into 7 con 
 tention 8 - How 9 shall we sing 10 the Lord s song 11 in a 
 strangeis land 12 (in the land of a. st. 83, 6. b.). My 
 sighs 15 (are) many 14 - Andie if 16 there be (fut.) in a man 
 a sin 17 (deserving) the judgment of death, and he be put 18 
 to death 18 , and thou hang 19 him on20 a tree; his body 22 
 shall not remain 21 all night 21 upon the tree, for he that 
 is hanged 24 is a curse 23 of God, that 25 thou defile 26 not 
 the land, which the Lord thy God giveth thee (for) an 
 inheritance 27 - And he said, Thy brother came with 28 
 subtlety 29 and hath taken 30 thy blessing 31 - Whoso stop- 
 peth 32 his ear at 33 the cry 34 of (the) poor, he also shall 
 cry 35 (himself) but 36 shall not be answered. Jealousy 37 
 (is) the rage 38 of a man 39 ? therefore 40 he will not spare 41 
 in the day of vengeance 42 - The sacrifice- of wicked ones 
 (is) an abomination to the Lord: but 3 6 the prayer of up 
 right ones (is) His delight 43 - My rigteousness I hold 
 
71. TflnlP DECLENSION OF FEM. NOUNS. 143 
 
 fast-H and will not let it go 45 all-is the while 4 6 my breath.-*? 
 (is) in me. 
 
 lOHi.-Utf 9TK 8 3 -"I 73 6fut. K13 5H3^ irWEX SHpIV 2BTK 1 Hi. 3^ 
 
 T T T v: I TT : 
 
 18 Hophal pret. ma l^X^H 16 Ol ISnfUK 14pret. 33*1 13 "OJ 12riO1K H Ttf 
 
 ... . . T T _. _ T T .. T T~: 
 
 26 Pi. KDD 251 24 part. pass. 23nSSp 22pS3J 21 Hi. p 1 ? 20^ 19prot. flSfi 
 
 T T I .- T : T T 
 
 S3 part. DDK 31HD12 30Conv. 1, HpS 29HOnn 283 27 
 T T : T : 
 
 401 39 ^3J 36 HDH 37,lKJp 361 
 vv T T : | 
 
 a 45m. HSJI 44m. pre t. with 3, 
 
 T T 
 
 71. THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 The nouns of this class, having already been changed 
 in form by the addition of the feminine ending, remain 
 unaltered, with the exception of the plural absolute, 
 which is formed like that of the masculine Segholates in 
 as rVD^-p queens, from HD^D > like D D^D^ from T 
 king, but const, st. niD?> and so with suffixes 
 
 EXERCISE 114. 
 
 x^S DSITDX ^ nh^nvhi n$h p 
 
 inns np) np.^i ipp nin;nin>x-^ : 0.^x03 23 nijn:n 
 annri rn^S nirr ^piniN : 24 vnij;i 
 nyfyp nn^i ^to^ ^S Tjnxp npni nr 
 
 reins, kidneys 1 ( 94, 2,) 2 to exult 3 right things 4 the saying 5 furnace 6 
 ( 83, 10.) 7 to refine 8 seven-fold ($ 92, 4.) 9 to comfortio ru i n ii Edeni2 the 
 plain 13 a fox 14 to measure 15 the palm of his hand 16 the span 17 to mete out 1 
 to comprehend 19 a measure (prob. a third part of an Ephah)- to weigh2l 
 the scales 22 the hill 23 testimony 2 - 1 to give way^ to depart 25 - 
 
144 PART 1. 
 
 EXERCISE 115. 
 
 The land of Canaan (is) a land of mountains and val~ 
 Jeys 1 * (and) drinketh 4 water of 2 the rain 3 of heaven. And 
 the inhabitants of Gibeon 5 took worn**" shoes 6 upon their feet 
 and worn outer 8 garments 8 upon them. My belovedio is like^ 
 to a gazelle 11 ; behold, he 12 cometh leaping 13 over 14 the 
 mountains, bounding 15 over the hills 16 - Ye, mountains of 
 Israel, ye shall shoot forth 18 your branches 1 ^ and bear20 
 your fruitio for2i my people of Israel. For, behold, 122 
 (am) for23 you, and 24 I will turn 25 unto you, and24 the cities 26 
 shall be inhabited 2 ^ and the ruins 28 shall be built, and24 I 
 will settle^ you afterso your formers 1 state 31 - Thou hast 
 said in thy heart I will go up 33 into 32 the heaven ; I will 
 sit upon the mount of appointment 34 ; in the two sides 35 
 (the remotest parts) of the north 36 ; yet 3 ? thou shalt be 
 brought down 39 to the grave 38 ; to the two sides of the pit. 
 They went up the ascent 40 to the city and found damsels 41 ; 
 going out. to draw water. 
 
 SnoSfr 7 nb3 fern. r63 6 fern. S^J 5 Tty3J 4 nn# 3 IBB 2*7 1 Hj?p3 
 
 TT V T T" T T T T I : * 
 
 17 sing. W 16njJ3jJ 15Pi. 1 Sp 14 S# 13 Pi. jS"! 12 HI u ^ l<Hn 9 part. 
 27Ni.3^ 26DnV 25HJ2 24Conv. 1 23 W 22 (75, 3.) 21 "7 20 N^J 19 nS 18 
 
 - T -( TT V T T : 
 
 3") s 34^10 33 rhp 32 (55,4) 31 P iur. nn"ip_ 303 29 m. 3^ 
 
 40 c. st. (g 83, 4) nS^D 39 Ho. HT wSl KB 37 !|K 36 ^ flV 35 Dual. c. st. 
 
 72. FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 1. The nouns of this class generally agree with the mas 
 culine Segholates. The const, st. sing, remains unchanged, 
 and before suffixes the original short vowel (>>) re 
 appears: as rn.5^ P> with suff. JTlOKto. In the pi. ab 
 solute the following is peculiar to nouns of this class, that 
 the vowel preceding the plural termination (which in the 
 masc. Segholates is Kamets: D 57?) drops: as fil^lD^p; 
 in the form fi a trace of the (o) is preserved in : 
 as n% plur. iSfy^ftflT^f^ plur. nl^3 const, state 
 
 ; but ft|?ife> : . pi. hwi; nSn/?, pi. 
 
72. * FOURTH DECLENSION OF FEM. NOUNS. 145 
 
 NOTE. There are several nouns- of this class in whose plural 
 absolute, Kamets and Tsere appear in the penult : fnrO chapi 
 ter, pi. nvunis; H?31$o knife, pi. rrtSjHffii nroin reproof, 
 pi. nwjwl njftib rin g P L rnj^tD; nj;Spp> pi. niySpp 
 
 carved work, ilpJPD nurse, pi. Hlp^D ( as if from Hp^ p); 
 -np plowshare, pfdr. nifchDO J fiT^ Astarte, plur. 
 
 rn> 3 draught, pi. niTj?3 . 
 
 2. As ^tpp in general, the form in fi takes before 
 suffixes either Patach or Chirek : Patach, if the masc. 
 terminates in A ( or ) ; Chirek, if the masc. termin 
 ates, in Tsere or Chirek : fTtpp O , with suff. ^O^b > 
 from the masc. IDlTb; D!?^ (infinites,) W^ , from the 
 masc. 2#; ^|?.^5 nurse, ihpTO.from the masc. p^D . 
 
 3. Before the suffix ^ Seghol occasionally occurs : as 
 Ttfl^ i* thy wife, otherwise ^ri!^ N , H^ (Inf, from ^H) 
 has : Seghol with all the suffixes fl? 1 ?* ^4^2 ^?*? 
 
 4. The form M~ - is inflected in certain words (espe 
 cially when the masculine has }) with Kubbuts : as 
 ngtlj (masc. trin^), with suff. frW m , n^3i^3 wages, 
 njDriD measure, np.^DO division. 
 
 5. In many words the two forms H and H exis^ 
 either by the use of both* in the absolute, or of the form 
 H in the absolute only. In both cases the form in H 
 is most frequently used in the const, state: as PnVJf as 
 sembly and rr$y_> const, nn^; rnfe # and rrj&%> fCy&BQ 
 
 thought and rij^pO* HDxSp work, HD jpO kingdom" do 
 
 minion. 
 
 EXERCISE 116. 
 
 : 5 nin 
 
 p 
 
 . 19 
 
146 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 HIP 
 
 onrnn 
 
 |S wpr nirr ION rb 
 22 ni:n j 
 
 to blossom 1 the lily 2 sucker, sprout 3 the olive tree 4 beauty 5 the crown 6 
 glory, honor 7 the dog 8 to return 9 the vomit 10 to repeat 11 master, lord 12 fe 
 male servant, handmaid 13 mistress 14 dominion 15 vain 16 profit 17 the charge. 
 law 18 a kingdom 19 kindness 20 boyhood 21 to increase 22 fall, ruin 23 - 
 
 EXERCISE 117. 
 
 Beforetime 1 in Israel, when a man went (transl. in his 
 Agoing) to inquires (of) God, thus he spake, corned let us 
 go to the seer 4 - The hope 5 of righteous ones (shall be) 
 gladness 6 hut the expectation^ of wicked ones shall perish. 
 And 8 Hezekiahs wrote letters 1 ** ton all Israel, thati2 they 
 should come to the House of the Lord at Jerusalem. Arid** 
 the Lord made garments 13 for the skin 14 (of the skin 
 82, 4.) to Adam 15 and his wife 16 and clothed them. And 
 ^e shall keep mine ordinance 1 ^ Ands he took the crown 1 
 of their king from off 1 ^ his head; Though^ thou should- 
 est bray 21 the foo! 2 2 j n the mortar 23 among^ 4 the ground- 
 corn25 with the pestle 26 ^ (yet) will not his foolishness 28 de 
 part 2 ? from him 1 ^ Thy kingdom^ (is) an everlastingso 
 kingdom, and Thy dominion 31 (endureth) throughout 32 all 33 
 generations. And 8 a certain 34 woman cast 35 an upper 3 ? 
 millstone 36 upon Ahimelech s 38 head, and shivered39 his 
 skull 4 ^. And it shall he, when 41 he sitteth (about (the 
 time of) his sitting) upon the throne 42 of his kingdom 43 , 
 that 44 he shall write him a copy 45 of this law in 46 a book. 
 so. i 7rnn ennnfr BnSnfrt -crnih 3 imp. pi. bn 2 with ace. 
 
 15D"1S 14 ll; ISnj n 12 with inf. 
 
71. IRREGULAR XOUNS. 147 
 
 30 (of all eternity M, 6 j DVplJ -.a aQjToa 28 nlK 271?D 26 
 36(331 lit. the rider, hence : the upper) nS:3 37 23? 35 Hi. IjV^ 34finX 33 ( 88, c.) 32 3 
 .40 SjJ 45rJ^D 44Conv.i 43 rpSaa 42 ND3 41 with inf. D 40nSjSj 39 ^V*J 38 ^D 3N 
 
 73. IRREGULAR NOUNS. 
 
 A. Derivatives of H"y * 
 
 1. 2X father, const, st. >5N (like a Segholate form from 
 n"% with light suffixes: ON, ^3^< with S rave suffixes 
 
 Q3 3tf> Drp38 i )lur - ntiK const st. nin^ 
 
 2. HK. brother, const TUX, with suiF. : TINS but DJTHg 
 plural D nN , const, TUX, with sufT.: HX VrttsV- ?| t?N . 
 
 3. nlflX sister, const. nlfUX, with sutf.: ^111^ (pi. abs. 
 and const, does not occur), plur. with suff.: T)iTTX> also 
 THin>?. (The ending jll in the singular niPfN is not the 
 plural ending, but contracted from nTTN* cf. HlO* c. st. 
 from HID) 
 
 4. DH stepfather, with suif. 
 
 5. DlOn stepmother, with sutf. 
 
 6. J3 son (for H^^ from nj3 to build), const, st. p, 
 before Makkcph -f^j seldom p; once ^5>arid 1^3 Num. 24, 
 3, Gen. 49, 11. With suffixes *&, T]^3; ])lural b^3, const. 
 st. ^3, with suff. J3 etc. 
 
 7. J13 daughter (for n.53 iein. from J3^ const, st. H3 
 with suff.: H3 (for ^3) i plur. n^3, const, st. niJ3 
 
 8. JV? house (supposed to be derived from |"l!D to build), 
 const, st. rV3* with suff. W3; plur. DTO* const, st. TO 
 with suff. ^3. 
 
 9. iTDN maid-servant, const, st, n?iS% with suff. \1D^ ; 
 plur, niTON*, const, st. nlHDN. 
 
 10. ^3 vessel", plur. D^3- 
 
 11. H5 mouth (prop, for HKD^ const, st, ^ with suff. 
 S? my mouth, V? and VT$; plural D ? (from D w fl) 
 (Prov. 5, 4.) and HV3 (Jud. 3, 16.). 
 
 B. Derivatives from Vei bs ^"J^ 
 
 1. ^N man (from tTJN) , const, st, C ^, with suff. 
 
US PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 In plur. the original form reappears, D u^X (probably at 
 first D^ i^> fr. the sing. &}$$) (seldom oV W const < st - 
 ^N% with suff.: mx> D3 g>JN. 
 
 2. rt*K woman (for H^NX const, st. H^K* witl1 
 
 C. Derivatives from Y Jf and v ]/ 
 
 1. DV day, with suff.: *plS dual D^pV plur. D*P*> c. st. 
 *P> > with local (Jl ) HOW 
 
 2. TJ/f city, pi. DHJf (once DHJJ7 Ju. 10, 4.) c. st. HJ. 
 
 D. A derivative from N"J^ is J^K") head, (for ^K^ 
 Segholate form) plur. D^ N^ (for D^N^ ( 14, Rising III.) 
 const, st. *$NT\ , with suff. ^N*) once with suif. Vt^N^ 
 
 T - T T 
 
 E. D P water, c. st. *p and *P*P> w. suff. ^p? ^P^P 
 
 EXERCISE 118. 
 
 : 2 nWf p ntsto nin^pi ninx x nSffl pni 
 nninn np trto^S JD^D t^NnS 4 jn 
 .^33 r^Soj 5 P^O- D ^8 ^iri3 ^3^ f p nnj; 
 
 IN* n 
 
 ^ijS k x nin* ^ :N :rjS jri^ ^ijSef 
 
 the inheritance 1 prudent 2 wreath 3 grace ( 89, 2-) 4 divide, have part 5 
 bird-cage 6 judge, defender 7 apparel 8 garment 9 chance to be 10 the young of 
 birds, a brood 11 egg 12 to crouch 13 jealous 14 - ( 83, 9.)* 
 
 EXERCISE 119. 
 
 Who can 2 find a virtuous 1 woman (a. w. of virtue 1) ? 
 her price 5 (is) far3 above 4 rubies. The heart of her bus- 
 
74, THE NUMERALS. 14y 
 
 band does trusts i n her. Her children arise up? and call 
 her blessed 8 - Many daughters have done virtuouslyij butt* 
 thoui excellestn jhem all^ 2 - And^ Isaac^ abode^ i n ie 
 Gerar^. And 13 the men of the place asked (him) of 18 
 his wife ; and he said, She isi9 my sister: for he feared 
 to say, She is my wife ; lest (said he), the men of the 
 place should slay 20 me 01-21 R e bekah22. These (are) the 
 words of the letter 23 , that Jeremiah 2 -*, the prophet, sent 
 from Jerusalem to the children of Israel, whom Nebuchad- 
 ne?zar26 had carried into exile25 to Babylon : Thus saith 
 the Lord: Build ye houses and abide (in them); and plant 2 ? 
 gardens 28 , and eat the fruit of them; Take29 ye wives, and 
 begetso y0 ns and daughters ; and take wives for your sons 
 and give your daughters to husbands 31 , that they may 
 bear 32 sons and daughters. And seek 33 the peace of the 
 cities, whither 3 ^ I have caused you to be carried into exile 35 - 
 
 7pret. D^p 6 pret. with 3, HD3 5 IDD 4 (g 91) Q 3 pfpp 2 fut. [ 101 III, a)] 1 Vn 
 11 pret. with following l jy j rhtf 10 (g 93 Note.) 91 8 to call blessed : Y^X PL > with Conv< 1 
 
 19 (6 77, 3) 18 S 17 "nj 16 3 15 pn^ 14 3W 13 Conv. 1 12(witli suff. 1^3, ))3 etc.) S*3 
 T; IT: -T T \ 
 
 25 to carry into exile nSi Hi. 24n"DT 1 23 ^SD ^2np^"1 21^ 20 fut. (g 108, 2) J^n 
 TT T : : v " IT : -T 
 
 31 ^X 30 Hi. iV 29HpS 28 com. (doubles the last cons.) jj 27 ^DJ 2 
 
 .35 to cause to be c. i. e. nSj Hi. 34nr3^-*l^ ; X 33!hl 32 
 
 74. THE NUMERALS. 
 
 1. The numerals are either cardinal or ordinal. The 
 cardinals must be considered as nouns, having two gen 
 ders and the const, state. 
 
 2. CARDINALS. 
 
 Feminine. Masculine. 
 
 CONST. ABSOL. CONST. ABSOL. 
 
 nntf nrrtf "iru* "in^ L N 
 
 2. 3 
 
 3. 3 
 
 4. 1 
 
150 
 
 FART i. EXERCISES. 
 
 Feminine. 
 CONST. AUSOL. 
 
 trton 
 
 yyy 
 
 nnx 
 rnety fifty 
 
 40. 
 
 K ) 
 
 Masculine. 
 CONST. ABSOL. 
 
 iltfon 5. n 
 
 7. r 
 
 8- n 
 
 9. 
 10.* * 
 
 1 1 N* 
 
 12. 3* 
 
 13. ^ 
 
 14. *p 
 I 
 
 15. 1J3 
 
 16. V 
 
 17. p 
 
 is. rr 
 
 19. ^ 
 
 20. ^ 
 
 n"x 
 
 iK n^ 
 
 21. J 
 
 30 - 
 
 - y ,D^ ^ 60 - D D^ PD 50 - 
 
 c. st. ,/1Np 10 - p : Hundreds and Thousands .D^pTl 90 - 
 
 300. j^ ,[( 13, 6. B. 3.) D?HNp for J D1J1NO 20(J - 
 
 500. pn ,niN HHN 40() - n .- 
 
 3000. j ^g^ 2000. 3 ,fj^ 1000. ^ or 
 (myriads niD^plur.) 13-1 ,nD!in 10000. ,0^X^3^4000. - 
 
 T : T T : T -.- ~- - : - 
 
 ,(E Z . 45, i 
 
74. THE NUMERALS. 151 
 
 ,CNeh. 7, 7-2. N121 *fjij? Ps. 68. 18. DTn3"]) *$* DnJ?. 20000. 
 1000000. 100000. etc. k X D 30000, 
 
 NOTE 1. From 13 to 19 incl. the units with the masculine, 
 stand in the absolute state ; with the feminine in the const, st, 
 
 NOTE II. The numerals are denoted by letters. The Unit," : 
 from X to 5 the Tens : from to 5 the Hundreds: from p to f} 
 and the final letters P* ] [ > D , T| 7j = 500, Q == GOO,. J = 700, 
 | = 800, V = 900; but more usually pfi = 500; iri= MO etc. 
 The connection of a decimal and a unit is seen in the table above . 
 For 15 is employed V D an d not H"* this last being the abbre 
 viation for HirP ( 18. Note)^^For the thousands and the higher 
 numbers the dotted alphabet^ used: as X (or {O= 1000 ; 
 5=2000, 3 = 3000 etc. 
 
 NOTE III. The termination (}"?) of the numerals with masc. 
 
 T 
 
 nouns is the adverbial-ending ( 75, 1. Note). Before feni. nouns 
 (H ) is dropped, lest it ba considered as the feni. ending (J"| ) 
 ( 57, 6, I). 
 
 3. ORDINALS. 
 
 FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. 
 
 / 6th 
 
 7th 
 
 sth wt 
 
 9th rvyin ^3^1 4th 
 
 From the eleventh, the cardinals with the article are 
 used instead of the ordinals, and follow the noun; when 
 without the article, they are found both before and after it, 
 especially in the numbering of years, months and days: as 
 01* T^ T njj&?3 Gen. 8, 4. and H^3*1J*! DH^R.DVS Hag. 1, W. 
 
 4. Syntactical rules see 92. 
 
 EXERCISE 120. 
 
 rrrr 
 
152 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 :nirv 
 5 npg 
 nin^S 6 ni^?n ^n njn nS DV 
 
 Kin 15 Dn$5n DI* njn 
 D^jr 
 18? )n:jt n 
 
 ,j"p pr?y>. 
 
 how 1 put to flight 2 appointed festival 3 between the two evenings, twilight* 
 the passover 5 unleavened bread 6 week 7 the sickle 8 standing corn 9 strict rest 10 
 a memorial 11 a sound of a trumpet 12 a convocation 13 only, but 14 expiation 15 
 to make an expiation 16 to afflict, humble 17 to celebrate, to keep 18 booth, tab 
 ernacle 19 creation 20 world 21 a measure for dry goods 22 - 
 
 EXERCISE 121. 
 
 We (are) all one man s sons. We (are) twelve breth 
 ren, sons of our father, one (is) not*, and the little one is 
 this day with 2 our father in the land of Canaan. The 
 whole congregation together 3 (was) forty and two thousand 
 three hundred and three score,, beside 4 their man-servants 
 and their maid-servants, of whom 5 (there were) seven thou 
 sand three hundred thirty and seven: and they hads two 
 hundred forty and five singing-men 7 and singing-women 7 - 
 Their horses, seven hundred thirty and six: their mules 8 
 two hundred forty and five: (Their) camel s9 four hundred 
 
75. IN GENERAL. 153 
 
 thirty and five: six thousand seven hundred and twenty 
 asses. Two women went out. Ifio thou buyii a He 
 brew^ servant, six years 1 ^ he shall serve: and in the sev 
 enth he shall go" out free 4, for nothing^- Seven abomina 
 tions (are) in the heart of the wicked. Whenie I break" 
 the staff 18 of your bread, ten women shall bake 19 your 
 bread in one oven20 ancl2i ye shall eat, and not be satis- 
 fied22. Eve 23 was the first woman. And the Lord spake 
 to Moses on 24 the first 25 (day) of 26 the second month, in 2 ? 
 the second year aftei-28 they were come 29 out of the land 
 of Egypt. 
 
 6 to them (were) 5 of whom H;7N 4 "^P 3 "^n3 2f\K 1 ( 75, 3.) with suff. j K 
 limp 10 3 9 (doubles the last cons.) Stt-l 8TJ3 7 part. Pi. masc. and fem. pi. 
 17 (in my breaking) "130 16 with inf. 3 15 DJH U^flH 13 ( 58, 10.) HJK 12 
 25-IHX 243 23n-in 22t3fr 21 Conv. 1 20 V-ifl 19pret. with Conv. ) 
 
 TV T- "-t 
 
 .29 XV 28 with inf. and suff. (after their coming out) *? 273 26 ( 83, 10.) 
 
 CHAPTER XL 
 
 PARTICLES. 
 75. IN GENERAL. 
 
 1. The particles which comprise adverbs, prepositions, 
 conjunctions and interjections are divided into inseparable 
 and separable. The inseparable are prefixed or postfixed 
 syllables, of the most of them we have already treated, as 
 D^M 18, 19, local Jl 19, 6. 
 
 2. The separable consisting of entire words are partly 
 
 I. primitive: as (a) the negations 7^^ ^ and the poetic 
 
 > 
 ^3 not ; (b) local and temporal terms : as D2>> nt> (with 
 
 local i"D there, HD here, ># where? tN then; (c) expressing 
 
 the manner and mode of actions: as HD thus, #} a par- 
 
 20 
 
154 PART I. EXERCISES. 
 
 tide of entreaty ; partly II derivative : as JT3P within, 
 VTfT together, ^?p circuit, fi^fi (Inf. Hi.) much, the in 
 terrogative adverbs fitzfr why, J^IID (compounded of the in- 
 terrog. HO and JftT (p. pass, perceived, seen) why = what 
 hast thou seen? of/ Gen. 20, 10. 
 
 NOTE. Fern, forms are frequently converted into adverbs, e. g. 
 fTh& &nS sooner, rUllflN!} later, Jl^nO quickly, fifty now 
 (fr. fij; time, prop, at the time), j"|73 wholly, completely" rtiJ?K 
 truly. On adverbs in D >see ( 56 3, 2. e ) Nouns in the 
 accus. are often adverbs, e.g. fift 1 }*) haughtily, HiD3 safely, HND 
 a hundred-fold, a hundred-times" Prov. 17, 10. Cf. ( 85, 4.). 
 On Adverbs formed by S (see 84, 3). 
 
 3. Some of the derivative adverbs, which include the 
 signification of the verb or noun from which they are de 
 rived, are connected with suffixes: as fi}fi behold ! lo! 
 with suffixes : v^Pl, ^fi and ^fi behold I, (properly : be 
 hold me) ^H, Tprj beiiold thou, tyft behold he, etc. 
 Ity yet, as yet, still, w. suff.: ^^Jly, ^y, ZTlty, ^*!l^> fltty 
 I am, thou art, he, she is as yet or still ; iiJD, "ij;3 while, 
 while yet : H^3 while yet I am ; ntyjp since: H1])0 since 
 I am. 
 
 \i#, const, st. PN not, with suff. ^^\X I am or was not, I 
 
 there is, there are, with suff.: T]^ thou art, 1 
 he is, DD^ ye are. 
 
 ^N*, const, st. ^ where, H^K where art thou? 1\V where 
 is he? D\X where are they? The force of the substantive 
 verb to be is conveyed by all these adverbs. 
 
 4. Prepositions. The greater number of prepositions are 
 nouns in the accusative or const, st.: as ^VK (subst, the 
 side) by, near, f J (^3 separation, interval) "between, and 
 they can be connected with other prepositions: as nnjTO from 
 under, from beneath, rU\*D from with, i. e. from, or they 
 appear abbreviated as prefixes : thus D"7 JD"3 
 
 5. The prepositions being nouns can take suffixes (the 
 
% 75. IN GENERAL. 155 
 
 nominal suif., seldom the verbal snff.): as rUlfi under, with 
 suff.: Vinr); fiX with, is distinguished from HX the accu 
 sative particle, that the former with |uffixes is commuted 
 into flX> the latter into DX (filX): as V1X with me; T)X me. 
 
 6. Several prepositions were originally plural nouns, ac 
 cordingly they receive only plural suffixes. To these he- 
 long: *inX> HP1X behind, after, HPlX behind me, TjHHX 
 behind thee, VinX behind him etc. 
 
 ^ (^ poet.) towards, to: ^X to me, ^X, vSx, D3^?N , 
 j>3 between, with suff. ^3, T]^ but also with pi. inasc. 
 and plur. fern. suff. ^3, Dp^i^ntt 1 ? Dfiti 3* 
 1# as far as, unto, (H^.poet.) with suffixes: HJJ, ^"U> 
 
 upon, over o# poet.) w. suff. 
 under, below, beneath, fiflfl, 
 i (with the sing, only, ^Hfiri (verb, suff.) 
 
 7. Conjunctions. The conjunctions are unchangeable. 
 On the conjunction 1 and its vocalization, see ( 12, 7. b.), 
 
 8. Interjections. HH, HpS HNV- ttl< ^H , nj1 IX, \\* 
 ah ! ^X woe ! alas f 
 
 Other parts of speech used as interjections : ^ (it is sup 
 posed to be contracted from #3 entreaty) I pray : always 
 with ^ "1X ^ "ISf my Lord. 
 
 Poll and ^H (Imp. of HIT to give) come! come on! go to! 
 
 DH hist! hush! pi. 1DH (Imp. Piel of HDJl to be silent.) 
 
 tTyhfi (fr. 7^fl to violate, break a covenant) profane! fie ! 
 far be it! followed by ^ of the person and inf. with JD : 
 as nifcVJp ^ nV^H far be it from thee to do. 
 
 XJ I pray ; used: I. with the imp. opt. and fut. II. with 
 particles : X^ HX say, I pray thee, X|"ni)SN let me go, 
 I pray the, Vo~Sx nay, or not so, I pray thee ; XJP1X woe 
 now! alas! At x the beginning of a sentence: X|X (written 
 also H3X) contracted from XmX oh now! I pray. 
 
156 PART I. EXERCISES, 
 
 EXERCISE 122. 
 
 -ox) *h n^n ^i^T) k \* n^} npri w&y D^-DN nnjn 
 rnrr :S 
 
 ptr :n"jiM n/ppn i 
 
 on? vrra ni ^75 : :rh 
 
 nSnr 
 
 - - - 
 
 nx wio ninD 
 
 T : T T T : - 
 
 to turn one s self 1 to walk, live 2 angel 3 to remain over night* wages 5 hire 
 ling, hired laborer 6 supplication, prayer 7 to, unto 8 to roll 9 to act wickedly, 
 to be guiltyio y e tii diligently consider 12 ( 97, 2.) 18 p. n. m. 14 the Jezreelite 15 
 herbs 16 (91, I.) 17 money 1 the price 19 - 
 
 EXERCISE 123. 
 
 Inquire 1 (after) good, and not 2 evil, that 3 ye may 4 live: 
 ands so 6 the Lord, the God of Hosts, shall be with 7 you, 
 as 8 ye have said. How9 do ye sayio we (are) wise, and 
 the law of the Lord (is) with 7 us ? Lo, certainly n irii2 
 vain 13 made he (it), the pen 14 of the Scribes 15 (is) in 
 vain. Deborah 16 abode under 17 the palm-tree 18 of De 
 borah, between 19 Bamah 20 and between Beth-el 20 in mount 
 Ephraim 21 ; and 22 the children of Israel came up to her 
 for 12 judgment. Hezekiah trusted in the Lord God of 
 Israel; so that 23 after 24 him was none25 Hke2 him 
 
75. THE SUBJECT. 157 
 
 all the kings of Judah. To the hired servant, at his day 
 thou shalt give his hire 28 ; neither shall the sun go down 29 
 upon 30 it; for he is poor 31 * and setteth his heart upon it., 
 (and to it he beareth 32 his soul) lest 33 he call 34 against 
 thee unto the Lord, and it be 35 sin unto 36 thee. 
 
 6 P 5 to connect with the verb 4fut. Sn 1 ? 2^ 1 with ace. 
 
 15130 14 BJ? 13 ">p.^ 12 with the art. ( 84, 3.) ^ 11 |DX lOfut. 
 22Conv. 1 2lDn3K 20^-^3 20( 80, 3.) HD1 19 pa 18 ID 
 
 2813 ^ 273 26 before light suff. )D3, 103 25^ 24 plur. const. ^IlK, 1HX 231 
 .363 35 pret. with Conv. 1 34fut 33 x Sl 32 part. NJPJ 31 "3 j? 30 S^ 
 
 PART II. 
 
 S T N T . A X . 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 THE ESSENTIAL PARTS OF A SENTENCE. 
 76. THE SUBJECT 
 
 1. The subject of a proposition appears either in the 
 form of a substantive or in that of an adjective, const, in 
 finitive or pronoun, supplying the place of the substantive. 
 
 2. When the sentence is without a definite subject, the 
 impersonal construction is employed. The subject is then 
 indicated : 
 
 a. By the third person of the passive conjugations (Ni. Pu. 
 
 Ho.), e. g. il& N fcTir^ fiNt*7 it is called to this woman = 
 
 she is called woman. Gen. 2. 23. 
 h. By the third person of the sing, active, e. g. IDI^ N*J 
 
 he (some one) called his name. Gen. 11, 9. 
 
 c. By the third person of the plural active: as VT^A and 
 they told, i. e. certain men told. 1. Sam. 19, 21. 
 
 d. By the second person of the future: as 
 
158 PART II. SYNTAX. 
 
 there shall no one go thither. Isa. 7, 25, or by the in- 
 fin. with the suff. of the second person ; with regard to 
 the latter a phrase of frequent occurrence is: ruSft "f^ 
 till thy coining = till one comes. 
 
 3. The third pers. sing, often has for a subject it under 
 stood: as VT1 and it happened ; ^ Dfl it was warm to me. 
 
 4. The impersonal construction expressed by the 3. pers. 
 passive, is often found with a following accusative: as 
 ng OVlN D^-V1 it was brought back Moses (ace.) = some 
 one brought back Moses. 
 
 NOTE. A noun often is made prominent as subject at the be 
 ginning of a sentence or clause by fitf, -fitf, or flN is used for the 
 purpose of emphasizing the subject in a passive or intransitive 
 connection, e. g. Gen. 4, 18, Ex. 10, 8, 21, 28. Nu. 32, 5. 
 
 5. When the active subject can be conjectured from the 
 action itself, the participle of the same verb is used as sub 
 ject: as TjTlH TpT K^ the treader (some one) shall not 
 tread. 
 
 77. THE COPULA. 
 
 1. The copula is generally not expressed, the relation of 
 the subject and predicate being shown by placing them to 
 gether : as "Nn ^Il| the man is great ; fTifT DliO God is 
 good. 
 
 2. The verb JTH to be, is used to exactly define the time: 
 as Dnj? rrn B>rrin the serpent was crafty; ^^ rV?T pfJN 
 Aaron shall be thy prophet, or to convey the proper con 
 ception of the verb : the existence or non-existence of the 
 subject, which may be still more forcibly rendered by * 
 or Jig ( 75, 3.) : as JV^S* Tj3 PITT ^ no needy shall be 
 among you, Deut. 15/4. J\X"DN ttTJp? HIIT t^H Is the 
 Lord among us or not, Ex. 17, 7. 
 
 3. The third person of the pers. pron. N1J1 N*n> DH > 
 n?D(> fn"n|ilidropping the pronominal idea entirely and 
 expressing only the verb to be, is employed to avoid 
 ambiguity and to distinctly point out the noun or 
 adjective standing in the predicate : as "l^ll tOJl TTT Da- 
 
78. THE PREDICATE AND ITS AGREEMENT &c. 159 
 
 vid is the king, whereas TtDH TPf could be taken as : 
 the king David ; or it is used, when the preceding 
 subject is more remote from the predicate than usual : as 
 
 inSrrj Kin Danes ? *rib$ nirr n#N the fire-offerings (coi- 
 
 lectively) of the Lord, the God of Israel, are their inherit 
 ance, Jos. 13, 14. Even when the subject is of the first or 
 second person, Nin can be used as the copula: as JiriK 
 DTfal* Kin Thou art God; HEPf Dfltf ye are. Zepli. 2, 12. 
 
 4. This use of the 3. pers. pron. as copula, particularly 
 comes forth in union with the demonstr. pronoun, e. g. 
 DH n^N these are, Gen. 25, 16. -H^N !"Tjn HD what are 
 these? Gen. 21, 29. H?. Nlft >> who is this? Esth. 7. 5. 
 
 78. THE PREDICATE AND ITS AGREEMENT WITH 
 THE SUBJECT. 
 
 1. The predicate appears either in the form of a verb, sub 
 stantive, adjective, adj. pron., or even in that of a derivative 
 adverb: as tl3T\jl much, BJ#p little, Itf 
 
 thy reward (shall be) very great, Gen. 15, 1. 
 DJfl? the men within it (were) few. Eccl. 9, 14. 
 
 2. When the predicate is an adjective, adj. pronoun, 
 participle or noun, it has no article (excepting the adject 
 ive in superlative [ 91, 3.]), and by this it is distinguished 
 from the subject, in case the latter is defined by the arti 
 cle or otherwise : JlVyil POID X^> the counsel is not good, 
 2. Sam. 17, 7 ^TpN* SlirO for thy father is a hero, ibi. 10. 
 
 3. The predicate generally agrees with the subject, when 
 a verb, in gender, number and person : JlJttJlp ^ $3 tltyl 
 my soul melteth for sadness, Ps. 119, 28., when an ad 
 jective, participle or adj. pronoun, in gender and lyimber : 
 
 tne worcl OI> tne Lord is upright, Ps. 33, 4. 
 tft this (is) the* woman, and this (is) her 
 son, II. Kings 8, 5. Nevertheless the Hebrew allows more 
 freedom in this respect than other languages, using a 
 construction correspondent to the sense more than to the 
 external form. 
 
160 PART. II. SYNTAX, 
 
 4. Exceptions. 
 
 a. When the predicate commences the sentence, the third 
 person masc. sing, is occasionally used impersonally : as 
 D p D fc^Sf I 1 ? *nn an(i he had thirty sons. 
 
 b. Nouns of multitude frequently take a plural verb : as 
 DJ^n W*l^ and the people saw, and vice versa substan 
 tives used in the plural form ( 82, 4.) are often joined 
 with a verb singular: as D Ji^N N""D G-od created. 
 
 v: T T 
 
 c. The predicate does not agree with the subject, but with 
 the genitive belonging to it, in case the genitive is the 
 
 more important word: as D pJT^ ^H^ 91 1p tne v i ce 
 of thy brothers blood cries (Gen. 4, 10.), the predicate 
 is governed by jp^ the drops of blood. NB^ DHJ5PI trW) 
 n31N!TfiK and the east wind brought the locusts, 
 Ex. 10, 13. nn feminine, but NBtf refers to DHp r * In 
 the same manner with D l : FlD^T tyHV D W 2H the 
 multitude of years teach wisdom, Job 32, 7. and nearly 
 always with ^3 , D"JK W~^>3 VJT5 and all the days of 
 Adam were. 
 
 d. A verb singular joined with the subject in plural and 
 vice versa, often has a distributive signification : as 
 )T\yjT\ rnfc niil3 the beasts (i. e. each of the beasts) 
 of the" fieldl "shall cry, Joel 1, 20. J^n *]TrjW : ^DJ the 
 wicked (every wicked man) flee, although no one pur- 
 sueth. Prov. 25, 1. 
 
 5. When the predicate belongs to several nouns or pro 
 nouns, the following rules must be observed: a) It gen 
 erally takes the plural: as D NtpH PlbS^ Vy\ W I and 
 my sorfrSolomon are sinners, I. Kings I, 21. b) When they 
 are of different genders, the masculine is preferred to the 
 feminine: as D 1 ??^ VHl^ *^? n ^ s sons anc ^ n ^ s daughters 
 (were) eating, Job 1, 13. c) When they are of different 
 persons, the predicate follows the most important, i. e. the 
 first person rather than the second, and the second in pref 
 erence, to the third ; HfttO W JTO HiTCM let us make a 
 
VERBAL ARRANGEMENT. 161 
 
 covenant, I and tliou, Gen. 31, 44.: as 
 ri3~iy I and the lad will go yonder, Gen. 22, 5. d) Some 
 times, especially when the predicate precedes the subject, 
 it agrees only with one of the nouns, most frequently with 
 the nearest, being understood for the others : as rp K^l 
 1D&W V$y\ and Noah came in, and his sons and his wife 
 (came m) ; "pHK ] DHQ ^31^1 and Miriam spoke and Aaron 
 (spoke) . 
 
 79. VERBAL ARRANGEMENT. 
 
 1. As a leading principle, the word upon which the 
 most stress is to be laid, always begins the sentence: as 
 D rfjN JO3 fV2J>&O.3 -fn the beginning God created, fWiTgJ 
 as the most important word taking the lead; hence every 
 word to be emphatic, precedes the rest. 
 
 2. In a simple and independent normal sentence, the 
 words are in the natural succession of Subject, Predicate 
 and Object: as f D7W : D^?X ^3 thy sons were eating 
 and drinking wjje, Job 1, 18. 
 
 3. The predicate precedes the subject: 
 
 a. When it is an adjective: as >j|j; THJl my iniquity is 
 great; Gen. 4, 13. r6pJ3 Dtf nMnVoitO wisdom is 
 good with an inheritance, Eccl. 7, 11. 
 
 b. When it is a verb connected with Conversive Vav ; with 
 out this connection with *) the succession is regular: as 
 
 O^ and Isaac came, but N3 pHV^ and I- came, 
 Tt*1 and the man was, but JTH ^^H1 * 
 
 * ; ~ T T . * T ; 
 
 c. When *\$$> an adverb of negation K7 etc., an inter 
 rogative pronoun or prefix, and particles like *D ? ^X 
 stand before the predicate : as N^ H^ N* in^N^/p ^3 
 D^ri^K all his work which God had created, Gen, 2, 3. 
 p*V"Vi) *")fTb tfb there was not left any green thin 
 rJN TIN nOty rj am I my brother s keeper? 
 
 for T ! languish ; H^PPJ D^pHafD D^l?n 
 peradventure there shall lack five of the fifty righteous. 
 
 d. When a verb stands in jussive or the construction is 
 
 21 
 
162 PART II. SYNTAX. 
 
 impersonal: as D H 11|^ the waters shall be drawn to 
 gether, rhtfp VT let there be luminaries. 
 4. When the subject follows the predicate, the object 
 Jakes its place after the subject: as 
 
 5. The object connected with an interrogative pronoun 
 or prefix, stands before the verb: as VinD 1 ? ^I^TlN 
 ^Hp. 1 ? 1 P *"VJD5 whose ox have I taken? or whose ass have 
 I taken? 1. Sam. 12, 3. 
 
 6. Of two accusatives, the one of a person, the other of 
 a thing, the former precedes; and the same rule obtains 
 when besides the accusative of a thing the person stands 
 in indirect relation to the verb : as D^HTlN S rpf) HfiK 3 
 f"\NrrriN nfn for unto this people shalt thou divide for 
 an inheritance the land Jos. 1,6. nipiTfiN ^ n&y JOM 
 
 VnjJil he has done us this great evil, ij Sam/6, 9. 
 pO l^ rtipyw that I may do the mercy of God 
 unto him, 2. Sam, 9, 3. 
 
 NOTE. Many exceptions are to be found tdfthe foregoing rules, 
 but as by giving them, we would only confuse the mind of the 
 student, they are omitted. 
 
 CHAPTER IL 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE PAKTS OF SPEECH.* 
 80 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 1. The article is omitted, when the noun is defined by 
 a suffix, or a following genitive, or if it is a proper name: 
 as T]St?n JT5 t^ 6 house of the king; 7V3 my house; DH^DN 
 Abraham. 
 
 * The dependence of the several parts of compound sentences cannot 
 be understood, until the student has become acquainted with the syntax of 
 the parts of speech and the influence which they mutually exert in a 
 proposition. 
 
80. THE ARTICLE. 103 
 
 2. The adjective or the demonstrative pronoun attribu 
 tively employed requires the article, when they belong to a 
 determined substantive: as ^"UPf VV3 mv large -house ; 
 Vn^n Tl^P j"V3 the large house of the king. 
 
 3. Proper names originally appellative, take the article: 
 as pttD^n the Lebanon (the white mountain), Jl-p^H Kamah 
 (the Hight, the high city). 
 
 4. The article has occasionally demonstrative power: as 
 D1*PT this day; DJ/*)n this time; H^ H this year. 
 
 5. The vocative case often takes the article: as T 
 king ! 
 
 NOTE. Except when the article could not have been joined to 
 the nominative : not "1 Yin David ! 
 
 6. The indefinite article is indicated by the omission of 
 the H : as JT.3 a house, ^K a man ; though sometimes ex 
 pressed by the numeral 1fl5< : as 1HK tf DJ a prophet, or 
 C"X in the sense of person indefinitely used, standing before 
 nouns or adjectives, particularly before gentile names: 
 
 ajust(man), TilJ tTN a hero, HIIT WX a Jew, 
 a Hebrew. 
 
 T. Tjn HgX. D^raisn nb> 13J?, inniOrp may mean 
 the baker, or a baker of the king; the servant, or a servant 
 of the officer of the executioners ; the song, or a song of 
 David; to avoid Ambiguity a circumlocution O N> 7) is 
 used: as ^N ^^ ^5^ I am a baker of the king; H^H 
 Tib?? 1 ? nt^ ^the baker of the king ; TH^ *11D|0 a song of 
 David; D TOtOn ^W^ "!3J^ a servant of the officer of the 
 executioners. 
 
 8. The article must be repeated before several nouns follow 
 ing one another, even when of the same gender or number: as 
 
 nprnn -pro D nfibm nhfcm ^yy. wn n^ s riVn^n niogn 
 
 | T T - : ~ T - : T : | / 
 
 : H^tO^n ]7^?ni the great trials which thine eyes saw, and 
 the signs, and the wonders, and the strong hand, and the 
 stretched-out arm. 
 
 9. On the article used as a relative pronoun, see ( 96, 8.). 
 
104 PART II. SVXTAX. 
 
 THE NOUN. 
 
 81. GENDER. 
 
 1. For the neuter the masculine is sometimes used : as 
 DHIp^rrSjf -Diyrr^ UJT nj this (hoc) they shall give 
 every one that passeth among them that are mustered, 
 the feminine, however, most frequently : as JlftO J?lDt^ *p 
 who has heard such a thing? (*O*1 res, negotiurn, a thing, 
 must be considered here as omitted, and the part of speech 
 agreeing with it, is employed most commonly in the fem 
 inine, as in German : triefeS, for bicfe <ad)C, and in Latin: 
 factum, for res fact a). Hence a verh being the predicate 
 of an antecedent sentence either expressed or understood, 
 takes the feminine form : as /JOb^3 ph *nfJ1 and it was 
 
 T : : I : -- 
 
 a custom in Israel, Jtul. 11, 39. (ph masc.) for *JT1 
 
 ph njn wrr; ruxr nrvn rnrr HNO from God was this, 
 
 for fijn "O^il irn; nNO ^Kfc> nntf one (thing) have 
 I desired of the Lord, for %^7Kt2> "infcs* ^*J. Comp. 
 
 nxr n^j; ^ i. MOS. s, 14. and njn ^n-n^ n^j; D 
 
 1. Mos. 20, 10. 
 
 Adjectives with the feminine ending either in singular or 
 plural, are often.; considered as abstract nouns, conveying a 
 neuter sense: Hflb^ righteousness; ilWr nlN^HI nlV^H 
 the great and fearful things (magna et timenda). 
 
 2. When the abstract stands for the concrete, the signi 
 fication often determines the gender : as W?V , , W2J! ant l 
 the exile = the exiles shall possess. Obad. 1, 20. 
 
 82. NUMBER. 
 
 1. The singular is often used in a collective sense: as 
 "IpD cattle; JK small cattle, flock; tjp3 silver; H^H wheat, 
 
 2. When these collectives occur in plural, their meaning 
 is modified : as D^DH grains of wheat, D ^DD money pieces. 
 
82. NUMBER. 165 
 
 3. The singular of patronymics with the article, very 
 often has a plural signification : as ^p^H the Jebusites. 
 
 4. The plural in some instances is employed to express 
 dignity or majesty, hence it is called : Plural of Majesty. 
 
 To this helong: 
 
 . D ri/J* God, when meaning the true God most frequent 
 ly takes a singular verb : as D li^Jjf *O3 fV^aO? In 
 the beginning God created. Sometimes the verb stands 
 in plural JD ?f?$,TViN Wftn 1gftf3 when God caused 
 me to* wander, Gen. 20, 13. At a later period, how 
 ever, the construction with the plural was avoided as 
 polytheistic. 
 
 N (antiquated form of plural), the regular form is 
 const, st. jnat fr m tne s ^ n &- P"^ master, lord. 
 In addressing the Supreme Deity the form ^ "1^ is em 
 ployed; in accosting a person of rank fltil (with Patach) 
 Gentlemen ! instead of U"IN Sir ! 
 
 c. **T& the Almighty, ancient plural of *Jg> (Arab. T"UP 
 strong, vehement). 
 
 d. D^ ilP the Holiest, plur. of fcTnp holy. 
 
 e. bj7? Lord, master, superior, when connected with suff. 
 the plural commonly occurs: as V^J5 0^^? ^ S) ^ ier 
 master, but ^Jj} my husband. 
 
 With the plural of majesty the verbs stand in the 
 singular, the adjectives and appositions either in the 
 singular or plural. 
 
 5. Words with a plural form and singular signification 
 occasionally occur : as fiiftj"^ = DfJ^ or nOfDJ vengeance. 
 The poets frequently take advantage of this license, to add 
 power to their language, or to give a period a more musical 
 termination, 58, 9. 
 
 6. The plural of. a compound expression conveying one 
 idea (a noun in the const, state followed by a genitive) is 
 formed by giving the first noun the plural termination : 
 as ^nC>> >33 Israelites, the children of Israel. 
 
PART II. SYNTAX. 
 
 THE CASES. 
 83. CONSTRUCT STATE AND THE GENITIVE. 
 
 1. The genitive having no proper form is only recog 
 nised by the preceding construct state: as fjpV >J)5 Joseph s 
 sons. 
 
 2. Nouns in the const, state cannot be connected by *); 
 the cattle and horses of the king cannot be translated 
 ^H D1D1 1p_3>but ID^DI Tj^gn ")p_5; not Tj^p PTgK) np#P 
 
 onyp, but n$fcrn cpnyp ^o np#p Gen. 4Q, i. or 
 onyp TJ7P7 ^$x/h$xr\i ri\)$&n. Tb.~5. Nouns in the 
 
 genitive may be connected : as j^NI O*pt^ POp possessor 
 of heaven and earth, or more usually the word in the con 
 struct state is repeated : as f"lNPT pfriO D!P#H pftjtf * 
 
 3 . Several words in construction may follow each other : 
 as pNPTDl? WIT! th the heart of the chiefs of the people 
 of a land, DPHDN "PT^ W Jl^NI and these (are) the 
 
 T T : - : : v : 
 
 days of the years of the life of Abraham. The predicate must 
 agree with the first as the principal noun; in case the first is 
 of less importance, the predicate is governed by the follow 
 ing noun: as in connection with 73 all, Dl multitude, *")f"pp 
 choice, best, especially with ^D and following participle: as 
 IX^O Tj pDJ/^ IPpp thy choicest valleys are full, prop, the 
 choice of thy valleys is full. 
 
 4. The genitive is sometimes to be understood objectively: 
 as HIPP nK-V the fear of the Lord; DHVP ^JTJ the Wa 7 to 
 Egypt; DVH n^t^ PP the ruler of the day = which rules the 
 day; DIP fipy.t the cry of Sodom = against Sodom. 
 
 5. The const, st. is often used when nouns are in appo 
 sition, especially when the genus is to be defined by the 
 species: rn$ ^iPtt the river Euphrates: ril^D fiHp the city 
 Chutzoth; PI^PP h? PlVin? the virgin, fhe daughter Judah. 
 
 6. The Hebrew being deficient in adjectives a) the ma 
 terial is expressed by a substantive in genitive: as 
 
83. CONSTRUCT STATE AND THE; GENITIVE. 167 
 
 a dish of silver, i. e. a silver dish; PO v3 vessels of. iron, 
 i. e. iron vessels; b) other adjective conceptions: as^^Hp^j-f 
 the mountain of thy holiness, for thy holy mountain ; 
 *\fi$ V?9fc> lips of a lie, for lying lips; ^Jfi? *N a man of 
 understanding, for a prudent man. 
 
 7. Participles or adjectives to be more nearly limited or 
 defined by a following substantive stand in the const, st.: 
 as nyjTl ^ITJ great in counsel.; ^N*j"l il& masc., ^Nfi fig* 
 fem. beautiful of form; pTif *t1 the pursuers of right 
 eousness; 3 1 ? H^^ * ne broken of heart = the broken-heart 
 ed. Infinitives being considered as substantives and even 
 adverbs with a subtantive meaning can stand in the const. 
 st.: D flN fO?? tne Dwelling of brethren; F|p5 3j?Jp a little 
 silver, literally : the smallness or fewness of silver. 
 
 8. The word in the genitive may be any word capable 
 of defining the preceding const. st.r W pronoun, interro 
 gative or demonstrative: D3 whose daughter? 
 
 who does these (prop, doing of these); an adjective: 
 (Song of Sol. 7, 10.) good wine ; a numeral: 
 one judgment, JTj$nft MJ^ S in the fourth year; a noun 
 preceded by a preposition: TV3 Mnpt^ip as joy of in har 
 vest = as joy of (a man) in h. ; j}^J5 HH mountains of 
 the Gilboa; a whole, sentence: T!#T i^S n^ (cf. 9.). 
 
 9. The noun following the const, st. is sometimes omit 
 ted and must be supplied. Often the relative ,> follows: 
 TO"^ ^ ^ty a lan guage (of a man) which I inow not, 
 
 PS. si, 6. h^n-T? KjiW EX. 4, is. r^D^^nzTN 
 
 Ps. 137 8. cfr. 96^ 45 T . 
 
 10. No third word can be interposed between the const. 
 st. and its genitive : hence the adjective or demonstrative 
 qualifying the const, st. must follow the genitive: the 
 good hand of God JlDIDh D fl 1 ?^ T; this book of the law, 
 
 ; the little children of the king ^iSp >JD 
 Occasionally intervene: a) prepositions (8) : 
 b) the local H : as n*]t^ n^0KTl into the tent of Sarah ; 
 into the land of Canaan. 
 
168 PART II. SYNTAX. 
 
 c) Tjy yet, still, after Sb , >? TIDPU "MjH?| all the wliile 
 my breath is in me. 
 
 11. The genitive is also indicated by 7 ")gJK (which be 
 long to): as ^N^.n^ D Jpn the herdsmen of Saul, or 
 by ^ alone : as Tpj? "ilbfp a psalm of David ; the latter 
 especially occurring (a) in enumerations: as DHb^l njftt? ? 
 CH.n 4 ? Dl* on the twenty-seventh day of the month, (b) when 
 many genitives follow one another : as ^D^D 1 ? DWH HITT 
 ^7^! the books of the Chronicles (literally : the words 
 of the days) of* the kings of Israel, (cf. 80, 7.); ( c ) when 
 the governing noun is separated from the governed by 
 words inserted: pff^S fi^iTjl T# a great city of God, 
 Jon. 1, 3. T|*7{p7 DTI?? rtf^ 3 in the second year of the 
 king, (d) to avoid ambiguity, cf. 80, 7. 
 
 84. DATIVE. 
 
 1. The common sign for the dative is 7N or 7, its abbre 
 viation. The verb jTil to be, when followed by ^ has the 
 meaning of to become: as in$< ^^1 VH1 an d tne J ^ e ~ 
 come one flesh. 
 
 2. 7 with a suffix of the same person as that of the verb 
 is often used pleonastically after verbs of motion, rest, 
 going, coming, sending etc. especially, with imp. and fu 
 ture: as ^-rj 1 ? go; > t r?|7# I will go ; rtfl DJ^Qt? abide 
 ye here. It is a dativus commodi, indicating that the action 
 is done for the benefit of the subject performing it. 
 
 3. By 7 are formed adverbs, which express a becoming 
 of what the noun says, e. g. J^ (Ez. 12, 12.) to the eye, 
 i. e. plainly; HD^S (Job 11, 18.) to safety, i. e. safe; y-fy 
 (2. Chr. 20, 25.) "to a multitude, i, e. much. 
 
 85. ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 1. The accusative is employed for the nearer object (with 
 or without DK 19, 4.) after transitive verbs. 
 
 2. The accusative stands to indicate the remoter object: 
 a) After verbs denoting abundance or want : }OO to be , 
 
85. . ACCUSATIVE. 169 
 
 full, to fill; y_y& to be satiated; JH&* to swarm with; 
 J^9*T. to creep; C"|tb^ and ^JH to .drop, distill. Kindred 
 conceptions are: TTD to bless; 7|7il in the sense of over 
 flow: njpn rur^fi niJDjn the hills shall flow with milk; 
 *)pn to want; ^"111 to cease, leave off (with fjp, rarely 
 with an ace.); 7bt^ to lose (children). 
 
 b) After verbs which signify to cover, in which- are em 
 braced all those denoting : to clothe or unclothe, to 
 gird, to crown, to plant, to sow: HDD to cover; VJ^h 
 and Vfyj to put on a garment, t^J^n Hi. with two 
 accus.; f\Qy to cover, to clothe; D^ B to strip or put off 
 a garment; il ljf to put on, sc. an ornament; 7J^3 to tie 
 or latch the sandals for any one; "Un to gird; ^DJ? to 
 crown; y} to plant; JH| to sow. 
 
 c) After the verbs of teaching, commanding, questioning 
 and answering : "15*7 to learn ; "1/3^7 to teach ; ^Vfitn to 
 enlighten, to teach, to warn; Jl^V ^ command; ^NC* to 
 ask, question; r\^y to answer. 
 
 d) After the verbs to do good or evil to any one, to reward 
 or to punish: ^D| to retribute, to recompense ; D 1 ?^ to 
 requite, recompense; pn to be gracious, merciful, com- 
 .passionate to any one ; 5OJ to punish. 
 
 3. The accusative stands in apposition with the nearer 
 object after the verbs which signify to make, to form, to 
 build : as pQ?p DVQKPrnj* HJM and with the stones he 
 built an altar; Tj^ nn HV 1 ? DV he makes the day dark with 
 night. The verbs D^ to set, constitute/ jrO to give, con 
 stitute, make, H^J to make, are more usually constructed 
 with ^ to express the making or converting of an object in 
 to any special thing. 
 
 4. The accusative is also used adverbially and then an 
 swers : a) the questions of place: Whither? after the verbs 
 of motion : as H^H Bfth I^JJ they went up to the top of 
 the hill ; H^H D^H NJH the" people went out into the 
 field. Where? SrJKrrnn9 D^V {Oil 1 ) and he sat in the 
 entrance of the tent, b) the questions of time: How long? 
 
 22 
 
170 PART. II. SYNTAX. 
 
 ; DVl^ twelve years they served. When? 
 ^j fining DIpN nS 9 rm rr at midnight I will rise to give 
 thanks unto Thee"; DJWT! ^T# Ex> 16 > 6 c ) the <l uestions 
 of mood: How? Dj^ljjt BhJ> B "U H^ Ex. 11, 1. he shall, 
 thrust you out entirely ((1*73 completion). D^Hb 53 ""I3PP 
 Ex. 16, 16. according to the number of your persons. 
 
 NOTE J. The above questions are more frequently answered by pre 
 positions: as D^HfrO DB^-fl and we abode in tents. >33 ?>S" D^ID 
 
 T T: T - T V T 
 
 Ps. 30, 6. 
 
 NOTE II. How old? is commonly expressed by ?5 or Jl5 with 
 the addition of the year: as rtfB> D Jpp l D JB^ B^fTf J D"ON 
 J pn/tp 1HNV5 Abrain was seventy and five years old, when he 
 went out from Haran. 
 
 d) To define the extent of the action expressed by the 
 verb, or to indicate the part to which this action applies 
 (concerning, in relation to, as to): V^TTIK Jl^H he was 
 diseased (concerning) his feet; ^Q ^H-3^ N92D (as to) the 
 throne will I be greater than thou. 
 
 NOTE III. This is the Greek ace. synecdochical. 
 5. The accusative sometimes expresses the means or in 
 struments : as J3^ Ifiitf ^-jn ^ ne y overwhelmed him with 
 stones; ^D^H i""tn ye shall be devoured with the sword. 
 
 86. THE ABSOLUTE CASE. 
 
 1. A noun beginning a proposition, which forming a 
 clause by itself is not connected with what follows, is said 
 to be in the absolute case, and is usually explained by sup 
 plying: as to, concerning, etc. 
 
 2. This case is used to give emphasis or prominence to 
 a word. 
 
 3. It stands a) for the nominative : as HDI135 T&jl B^S 
 a lion, the strongest among the beasts; b) for the dative: 
 as *f*M7 "fr VT\\ &*$ ^ ie man f power, to him belongs 
 the earth; c) for the accusative: as DJTW HnX ^PIT) pp 
 as to summer and winter, thou hast made them ; d) for 
 the ablative: f-H TjlH? "l^ yj;r|-n$p1 but of the fruit 
 of the tree which is in the midst of the garden, God hath 
 said, ye shall not eat of it. 
 
87. APPOSITION. 171 
 
 87. APPOSITION. 
 
 1. Nouns are often found in apposition in Hebrew, where 
 in other languages, an adjective or another noun in the 
 genitive would be employed, especially in the determina 
 tion of number, measure, weight and time: as DHlJ^ H)*X 
 an ephah of barley, n&TUn "1p3n the oxen, the brass, i. e. 
 the brazen oxen. 
 
 2. When the first noun in accus. has fiK the second 
 noun can take or omit it : as ^HT^ VflNTl^ his brother 
 Abel, 0*1$ 3$ TO^Tfi^ Kemuel, the father of Aram. 
 Thus it is with the prepositions : as ^HJSt *Tin^7 to thy 
 brother Nahor. The repetition takes place, when the sec 
 ond noun is not only an attribute to the first, but is employed 
 to give a more complete and correct idea than the first : 
 as 01^3 t^ 8? f ny$ ! !! and they pressed sore upon the man, 
 upon Lot; &$*? *fttib to my Lord, Esau; TT1E3 Hnb 3 
 in the field, in the desert. Jos. 8, 24. 
 
 3. The noun which limits or qualifies the other, takes 
 the second place, except TI^L! w hi cn stands regularly be 
 fore: |"ib /Cy n/Sn the king Solomon. 
 
 88. DUPLICATION OF NOUNS. 
 
 The immediate repetition of the same noun indicates : 
 a) a strengthening of the original meaning, or an empha 
 sis: as f"lX P*)jK flK earth, earth, earth, hear the word 
 of the Lord ! ?\1~\fi p"!^ p"$ justice, justice thou shalt 
 follow; b) a great number : as hpfl "11^83 ni*)N3 the vale 
 of Shiddim was pits, pits of slime i. e. full of slime pits ; 
 c) a distributive sense, expressed in English by: each, by: 
 as 1p33 1p33 in the morning, in the morning i. e. every 
 morning, DV Dl* day by day; d) a diversity or variety, in 
 which case they are connected by V as \2W P^ thou shalt 
 
 I *." V T I V V . * 
 
 not have stone and stone, i. e. diverse weights; HS V D7J D?3 
 with heart and heart they speak, i. e. with different hearts, 
 with duplicity. 
 
 $ 89. SUBSTANTIVES USED IN THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 
 1. A deficiency in adjectives is partially supplied by 
 
172 PART II. SYNTAX. 
 
 verbs: as TU to be great; N70 to be full, partially by sub 
 stantives in the genitive or in apposition. 
 
 2. Abstract nouns in the relation of a genitive, take the 
 place of adjectives: as 73 the whole of, expressive of total 
 ity, stands for the whole (adj.) : as j^NIT^S the whole 
 earth, or for all: D UT^? a11 nations; TOH continuance, 
 permanence, for continual : as TDfi *}} a continual light, 
 lamp ; TDJFlil fi^ty continual, i. e. daily burnt-offering, 
 ^ p holiness, for holy: as & "1pn H.JQ the holy garments; 
 DTlJf eternity, for eternal : as DViJ? fi^H generations for 
 ever (prop, generations of eternity). 
 
 3. Substantives are used for adjectives of material ( 83, 
 6.) : fl^n? 11} a serpent of copper. 
 
 4. Personal qualities are expressed by a circumlocution 
 with the nouns fc>>tf, ^#3 lord, possessor, f^: as tiyty fc"N 
 an old man (a man of gray hair); Dlbbpil *7JD the dream 
 er ; 7*(T|3 a warrior (son of strength) ; H^J^ p a perverse 
 man (son of perverseness). 
 
 NOTE. A kind of adjectives are formed poetically by PN^?3 
 V17? before the noun, corresponding to the English in, less: as 
 ^ J N strengthless, "Ipjl f^N unsearchable, &^ ^3 un 
 clothed. 
 
 90. ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. The adjectives agree with their substantives in gender,, 
 number and definition by the article ( 80, 2.). 
 
 2. When following the noun, they represent the attribute: 
 as rnniil TJ?n the great city; when preceding, the predi 
 cate: yyn nVh| the city is great. 
 
 NOTE I Sometimes the adjective as predicate follows the noun, 
 viz: when several words follow, which limit more nearly the sig 
 nification of the adjective : as r\12W D)? ^?"" I P fiNtr? ^^H 
 this city is near to flee unto; t]DKn hj? tik *7l"!^ bT <l (l 11^ fil 
 rijpfin L> it is yet high day, it is not yet time for the cattle 
 to be gathered. 
 
 91. COMPARISON. 
 1. The comparative having no proper form is expressed 
 
92. NUMERALS. 173 
 
 by the simple adjective with Jp of, from y which precedes 
 the object compared: as t^D^P P^? sweeter than honey. 
 
 2. Hence this form of the comparative is also employed 
 after verbs and nouns of quality: as D5P rwp* *Wi* "l^lfl 
 the cause that is too hard for you ; ^gQ Tt4# NDSJl p^ 
 only in the throne will I be greater than thou. Before 
 the infinitive, this fp is translated: than that : as *$\y ^1"!^l 
 Kiby? m y iniquity is greater than that it can be forgiven, 
 
 3. Superlative. The superlative also possessing no proper 
 form is indicated: a) by the article before the adjective: 
 as JCpjijn JOT "in David was the youngest. 
 
 N*irrnD w^n ^noixn by 
 
 v T - T T -: T *-: 
 
 ^ njn 
 
 ,onnt< 7i r^ man 
 
 jj .. -; .. ; . | _ - 
 
 precious 1 bitter 2 poverty 3 good fortune 4 (modern Hebrew) hard, 
 difficult 5 value 6 blemish, defect 7 - * 
 
 b) By doubling the adjective or noun, so that the latter 
 stands in the genitive plural: as DHDK.^S]?. servant of 
 servants, i. e. the lowest servant ; Q CHpn CHp holy of 
 holies, i. e. the most holy place. 
 
 c) In poetry the words D^yjf 7K HIIT* HID convey a 
 superlative meaning : as ^N ^TID mountains of God, i.e. 
 the highest mountains; D^H^N N^4 a P r i n ce of God, i. e. 
 an eminent prince ; niJT npl.in a deep sleep from the 
 Lord = the deepest sleep] JTlD ndlilp a tumult of death, i. e. 
 a most fearful tumult. 
 
 92. NUMERALS. 
 
 1. The numerals can either follow or precede the sub 
 stantive, with the exception of "1HN which invariably fol 
 lows it. 
 
 2. In combinations of higher numbers either the higher 
 or the lower takes the lead connected by 1 : as 
 
 tr jDri rotr onfc>jn nyy HNP Gen. 23, i. 
 
174 PART II. SYNTAX. 
 
 runp ntfoi Estu. 1,1. m# 075^1 &) 
 
 : plIlD VW5RI G-en. 12, 4. T 
 
 3. The nouns to which are joined the cardinals 2 10 
 are invariably plural. In higher numbers the singular is 
 frequently found, as with DV day, D1> *")& J HW 16 days, 
 ny? night, Gen. 7, 4. rOB> year, N man," f||? thou 
 sand, TON a cubit (prop.: the fore-arm), etc. but the plur. 
 is used, when they precede the numeral: as *\&y nJO^ D^P 
 18 clays, pyb?*l D 1D*]K DHJf forty-eight cities, Jos. 21, 40., 
 but T# n^D^l D JEHK NunT. 35, 6, 7. 
 
 4. To the numerals suffixes may be appended: as D<T3* 
 they two, or both of them; D3fi^ you three. With the 
 dual ending, they indicate multiplication: as DTlJfaty sev 
 en-fold ; for which purpose ^JH >. DJ^ time (properly foot, 
 tread or step) are often employed: as D^-in wTNt -* VfoW 
 D^DJ^5 three times. 
 
 5. The feminine of the ordinals also signifies a part of 
 a unit, hence it expresses the fractional numbers: as JV& J^ 
 the sixth part of = J, fyj^yi the fourth part of = J. 
 
 6. The distributive numerals are expressed by the doub 
 ling of the cardinals: as D.^ D?3tp> two by two. 
 
 7. When something is summed up, 3 before numbers is 
 used, in which case it is to be translated consisting of: 
 
 consisting of seventy, Deut, 10, 22. Job 23, 13. 
 
 PKONOUNS. 
 92. PERSONAL PRONOUN. 
 
 1 . In the separate personal pronoun may be contained both 
 the subject and substantive verb: as DrtJjK pJHD DIl^ f^D 
 whence are ye? of Haran we are. 
 
 2. To give emphasis to a noun or a suffix (verbal or 
 nominal), a separate pronoun of the san gender, number 
 and person is added pleonastically: TlJlX TV*")? ^3H ^ 
 Gen. 17, 4.; the separate pronoun being often preceded by 
 D^ : as *DK ^N D3 ^5 I>ICBS me, even me (Hebr. even I), 
 
94. DEMONSTRATIVE. 175 
 
 Gen. 27, 38. }3 1 tflfl DJ HB and to Seth, to him also 
 (Hebr. he) there was born a son, Gen. 4, 26. 
 
 3. Vice versa, the noun sometimes occurs, after it has been 
 indicated by a verbal or nominal suffix: as 
 
 she saw it the child, Exod. 2, 6. HlIT 
 
 he shall bring her (it), the offering of the Lord, Exoci 35 , 5. 
 
 t^NH 1KM when he came, the man, Ex. 10. 3. 
 
 4. The verbal suffix conveys the meaning of an accusa 
 tive, in rare instances, as with jfi^ to give, of a dative: 
 3fjn3 thou hast given to me (Josh. 15, 19.); ^pJJH and 
 they cried to Thee (Neb. 9, 28.). 
 
 5. When the verb has a double pronominal accusative, 
 the former is connected with the verb, the latter with HN : 
 as inirnNyinX ^N^rn and he will show me both it and 
 his abode, 2. Sam. 15, 25. 
 
 6. The nominal suffix is often objective in sense : as 
 in^7 fear before Him; D^HI Dp^nlDI and the fear of 
 you and the dread of you. Gen, 9, 2. 
 
 7. When a noun in the const, st. conveys with its fol 
 lowing genitive one conception, the suffix is attached to 
 the genitive: as Ifiprte ^5 ^ ls instruments of war (prop 
 erly: the instrument of his war); JJHJ2 ^H my holy mount 
 ain (prop.: the mountain of my holiness). 
 
 NOTE I. The personal pronouns are implied in the preforma- 
 tives and afformatives of the verb, and are expressed only, when 
 they denote emphasis or opposition: as 
 thou hast said in thy heart, Isa. 14,13. y 
 
 Ds^n^ W CDWS9 Dftott .M cq^p Nnn thus 
 
 saith the Lord : I, I brought up Israel out of Egypt and ye, ye 
 have scorned your God; tfnn BJO ^B HkX *}# *ftQ&] I, 
 I will set my face against that man* 
 
 94. DEMONSTRATIVE. 
 
 1 . The personal pronoun of the third person is used de 
 monstratively : as fcOnn 01*3 in that day, pointing out the 
 more remote object. 22, 2. 
 
176 PART II. SYNTAX. 
 
 2. The demonstrative when standing "before the noun must 
 be considered as the predicate of a clause: as *|gft* TPlpn fit 
 na# #) this is thy kindness, which thou shalt do unto 
 me; M ,, DPI ^pfl 1 ? fij this is our bread, we took it hot for 
 our provision; fi& Nfi fiNt this is the woman; "Nfi N^lJl 
 that is the man. 
 
 3. The demonstrative when following the noun is consid 
 ered an attribute, and usually has the article: as fi-ffi fi^fi 
 this house; fi|?tffi D B^gfi these men. 
 
 NOTE L \$\T\ is used to make the subject very prominent and 
 distinguish it from other things, and so it may be rendered self: 
 as Num, 18, 22., hence frOn may be joined to the first or sec 
 
 ond pers. pronoun, e. g. Nlfi *m$ I myself, Isa. 43, 55. $<!}fi fifitf 
 thou thyself, Jer. 49, 12. 
 
 NOTE II. frOi"!, Wtl before a noun with a following demon 
 strative makes the meaning stronger: fiffi fiV?n N1H this 
 same night, Ex. 12, 42. 
 
 NOTE III. fi^K in connection with numbers is always placed 
 after them: Gen. 9, 19; 22, 23; Ex. 21, 11. 
 
 4. WJien a demonstrative and an adjective are both at 
 tributes, the adjective is second in order, the demonstrative 
 third: as fijfi VhJfi "Ififi this high mountain. If the ad 
 jective follows the demonstrative, the sense will be altered: 
 as Vi"J JIH iltJl inil this mountain (which is) the high. 
 
 5. The feminine DX? ivhen separate has a neuter mean 
 ing: as Wy : fM Gen. 45. 17. HND) DXD thus and thus, 
 so and so ; JlNf JWJJ ^M 1 ? DH? in the integrity of thy 
 heart thou didst this^thing). Gen. 20, 6. 81, 1. 
 
 6. ill; is occasionally used relatively: as JTTDJ Jl.f Dlpp 
 H^ the place which thou hast founded. 
 
 NOTE. Ht i n connection with interrogative particles or appended 
 to words of exclamation makes the question more animated and gives 
 emphasis: Ht *P who there ? H? *J$ who ? nt llO what then ? 
 Ht Hjn see there ! Relating to time it is equivalent to the 
 German fcfyon, English now: D*QJ^iD H? now twice, cf. Gen, 31, 
 38, 43, 10. 
 
95. INTERROGATIVE. 177 
 
 95. INTERROGATIVE. 
 
 1. Theinterrog. ^D relates to both genders and numbers, 
 usually it refers to persons, rarely to things: as TOgHp 
 what is thy name? Jud. 13, 17. HO* "HD what? of things, 
 in questions either direct or indirect, Num. 13, 18. 
 
 NOTE I, Sometimes *p and esp. J1D are used in a prohibitory, 
 denying, blaming sense: JID^JTHO why tempt ye? Ex. 17, 2. 
 pDHfrnO what do ye strive about? ib. so that it forms the 
 transition to a negation; sometimes it is quite negative: 1. Kings, 
 12, 16. Job 6, 25. Num. 23, 10. Is. 53, 1. 
 
 2. rr in a direct interrogation : DVX n^jf^t ^S FttptPrj 
 hast thou considered my servant Job ? In an indirect inter 
 rogation, whether: niJT fltf D ?DN D?P*D to know wheth 
 er ye love the Lord. 
 
 3. In disjunctive questions ft is used in the first, DN in 
 the second clause: ^H ^7 EN rifltf ^bll art thou for us or 
 for our adversaries? 
 
 NOTE II. *ft and flft followed by a relative, become also rela- 
 
 T i 
 tive in signification: *"Ju7 "H^N ^P he who learned; rpnt!/ J1D 
 
 that which was. 
 
 96. RELATIVE. 
 
 1. The particle ^t^jSt gives to pronouns, substantives, ad 
 verbs and even to a whole sentence a relative signification. 
 
 Kelating to a preceding noun that expresses plate, time 
 and manner, it can denote with respect to place where, with 
 respect to time then, ivhen, with respect to manner that, 
 wherefore. 
 
 2. The verb or other part of speech that governs the 
 word belonging to *^N (which as relative begins the clause), 
 is interposed between them: as 1HK *fllV?i# 
 
 the messenger (angel) whom I have sent, not 
 
 3. *")C^ often appears with prefixes, in which case that, 
 the personal pronoun, or another antecedent, that has been 
 omitted must be supplied: as fOr? 1^3 D 9Jfl95 
 
 23 " 
 
178 PART II. SYNTAX. 
 
 f 
 
 make unto me savory meat, as which I love (i. e. such 
 as that); Dfi? Nlfl H^ N 3 for God has heard the voice of 
 the lad in which he is there, (i. e. in the place in which): 
 ^7 to that person or thing, who or which; 
 him who, that which; 
 fro m or of that which; 
 5 as that, according to etc. 
 is often omitted, not only as the relative in 
 English, when governed by the verb or by a particle, but 
 also when governing the verb itself: as (Isa. 42, 16.) I 
 will cause the blind to go in a way -I^T ^ (which) they 
 know not, (Exod. 6, 28.). And it was in the day fTlJT ""0*1 
 (in which) the Lord spake to Moses. 
 
 5. When an entire sentence is the object of the princi 
 pal sentence, ^C/K DK precedes the sentence in the objective: 
 
 as rpotr >D"n# nin* c"5in^ N* rux ujw we have 
 
 heard how the Lord dried up the water of the Bed Sea. 
 
 6. 7 "|^ another form of the genitive, see 83, 10. 
 
 7. Sometimes, especially before participles, the article ?1 
 (Il n) stands for the relative: as ^VD^Jl that are found, 
 L Chron. 29, 17. HliT H Tin? D 5*?rin who walk in the 
 law of the Lord, Ps" Il9, 1. 
 
 97. REFLEXIVE AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. Tlje reflexive pronoun signifying the accusative, is ex 
 pressed by the reflexive conjugations Niphal and Hithpael 
 or in case these cannot be employed, by IflX* PlDKetc.: 
 Do they provoke Me to anger? DHN tflSn (do they) not 
 (provoke) themselves to the confusion of their own faces? 
 Jer. 7, 19. Woe be to the shepherds of Israel VH ")^ 
 DnlN D JH that do feed themselves! Ez. 34, 2, 8, 10. 
 
 2. Denoting the remoter object i. e. the dative or the 
 case governed by a preposition, it is expressed by the suff. 
 of the third person: as (Jud. 8. 33.) and made Baal-berith 
 God D!lb to them (themselves) (Geri. 46, 7.). His sons, 
 his daughters and all his seed IflK N^H brought he with 
 himself (him) into Egypt. 
 
98. OTHER PRONOUNS. 179 
 
 on 
 
 to chastise, to instruct 1 disgrace 2 to be like 3 physician 4 ( 83, 6.) 5 - 
 
 3. By certain substantives with suffixes, conveying simi 
 lar ideas to the following: C^pJ soul. ^ heart, TD3 honor, 
 D")p inward part, DV# hone, [J eye, (fyj? I myself, Joh 
 19, "27. *y# "J.J30 before me, Isa. 1, 16.), or: my flesh, my 
 name, etc.: as }^b3 *")DN he hath said in his heart = to 
 himself, Ps. 10; 6. And Sarah laughed niZHp? within her 
 self, Gen. 18, 12. DV# commonly used in this sense in 
 modern Hebrew (Mishna): 10VJ77 ^ himself. Comp. Job 
 2, 5. 10VJ? he himself; PV# I myself, Job 30, 30. 
 
 4. The reciprocals: the one, the other, one another, are 
 expressed by VPTiJ t^tf the man his brother; HrilH^ H^ N 
 tlie woman his sister; inj/^) ^N the man his neighbor; 
 
 the woman her companion. 
 
 98. OTHER PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. t^ *N or DIN used indefinitely, signify some one, any 
 one. *O1> ^3* ID^l bD without the article, something, any 
 thing. N 1 ? or pN connected with the foregoing: ^3 pt<, 
 *Q1 T^ HDINtD N*S (HOWO for HOI HO i. e. whatever) 
 
 IT!" T : T : T T 
 
 not anything = nothing. 
 
 2. For eac/i, e^er?/ when substantive, tT^ nt N are em 
 ployed, sometimes in repetition: aB-fift$ &ft$ t^W ; ^N 
 
 To convey the sense of an adjective, the noun is either 
 doubled, or 72 is used : as *lpi3 *O33 every morning ; 
 D1N/3 (without the article) every man. 73 with the ar 
 ticle after it, expresses all, the tvhole: D"TNI1 ^3 all men, 
 *14TT/? tlle whole nation, D?lJpH?? all nations. Thus Sb 
 with suffixes: DD^ ^ e a ^ ^^?? *hey all. 
 
 3. The same, himself, with persons Nin> N^n (Num. 18. 
 23. Ps. 50, 6,); the meaning appears stronger, when NVf 
 or N*n precedes the noun, and ntPl HXtri follows it: 
 
 this same night, Ex. 12, 42,; 94, Note II. 
 
 I 
 
180 PART II. SYNTAX. 
 
 with things by DV# same, selfsame : ftyP? Di*il D#3 in 
 the selfsame day. 
 
 4. No, nobody, no one is expressed by J tf following : 
 PN D"1K and pjtf preceding or following: D jT7$ fiN*V f X 
 the fear of God is not ; by ^, or by D)?<: QipO-D# "!# 
 till (there was) no place. 
 
 5. Whoever: >0; whosoever: "I^N >0; whatever, anything, 
 something: H0> HO or HDIN? following the const, st. in 
 the genitive" HO "Q"] Num 23, 3. H01KP DN&D Deut. 
 24, 10. TOo* wAt cft: ht$$ HO, # no"" 
 
 6. Some, several of, by jp: DJ/*H JO several of the people, 
 Ex. 16, 27. D^O some of the blood, Ex. 12, 7. 
 
 THE VERB. 
 99. IN GENERAL. 
 
 1. The Preterite and the Future, properly the only 
 tenses, convey in different ways almost all the conceptions 
 of time. 
 
 2. Their primary inherent meanings are however: Pre 
 terite what is past or completed; Future what is in 
 complete, what still continues, and what is to come. 
 
 100, THE PRETERITE. 
 The preterite denotes: 
 I. The Past. 
 
 a) The absolutely past: as ^ T#T *9 who told thee? 
 
 b) The historical tense (Aorist) : as "IKfrrisD nfVJl SlT} 
 Rachel was of beautiful form. 
 
 c. The Pluperfect: as Sb? DnTO$"fM$ *p5 HllTI and the 
 Lord had blessed Abraham in all things, 1. Mos. 24, 1., 
 especially 1) in relative or dependent sentences and clauses, 
 which define the principal action and in the point of time 
 precede it: as rnPT VTjy "Mg ijj Sb? Hi fe>J! and Noah 
 did according to all that the Lord had commanded him; 
 2) when it is connected in the same sentence with an 
 other past tense : as HX3 ^^ H PH. and the sun had 
 gone down. 
 
 * 
 
 * 
 
100. THE PRETERITE. 181 
 
 II. The Present: 
 
 a) In verbs of quality, as DDH to be or become wise, 7"lJ 
 to be or become great, JtOp to be little, small: Tl^tDj") 
 DHDnil 730 I am unworthy (prop, little) of all the 
 mercies, *- 
 
 b) In verbs of habit or frequency: ntjfiDN/N W^?^3* jW 
 my G-od I trust in Thee, let me not be ashamed, Ps* 25, 2. 
 
 c) In verbs of state or condition: TJ^fi V7$3 f"T$7\T|7 PHIl fi&7 
 wherefore art thou wrath ? and wherefore is thy face 
 fallen ? 
 
 d) Of a state or condition commenced in the past, and yet 
 continuing: ^"O VH rtlpP flWtf thy servants are cat 
 tle-keepers (men of cattle). 
 
 III. The Future: 
 
 a) In predictions, prophesies and assurances, which are re 
 garded as certain, as though already fulfilled: Isa. 9, 1, 
 11, 8. 
 
 If) When indicating the consequence of an action in the 
 present or past, or when connected with a sentence ex 
 pressing a result : JNVrrS:) VT3D1 "Hi!* DV DIpiTp and 
 if (men) should overdrive them one day, all the flocks 
 will die, 1. Mos. 33, 13. 
 
 c) Connected with a sentence standing in the future, when 
 it has conversive Vav: HOJO lijn.3 05*7 $*lp! 5 TC^ 
 D3^y?D"nO and it shall come to pass, when Pharaoh 
 shall call you and say, what is your occupation? 
 
 d) Or with a sentence containing a future condition, when 
 it is either itself conditional or expresses the result of 
 
 the condition : DfnDtiH ^p2 
 
 tt ^H?"nK ow, therefore, if ye will obey my 
 voice indeed and keep my covenant, then ye shall be 
 
 IV. The Subjunctive: 
 
 When joined to such a sentence: as TO1 Hjn 
 lest some evil cleave unto me, and I die, 1. Mos. 19. 19. 
 
182 PART II. SYNTAX. 
 
 V. The Imperative and Optative: 
 
 1) By connection with a similar sentence : 
 
 0?7!?$ OT9! W^! M|?rfl# go and gather the elders of 
 Israel together and say unto them. 
 
 2) After a conditional sentence: as inK fflprjl tflH f? DN* 
 JTm X H rQ ONI if it be a son, then ye shall put him to 
 death, but if it be a daughter, then she shall live, 2. Mos. 
 1, 16. 
 
 VL The Future perfect: as Tp^H IDIil MJ?D from the 
 time that the continual (sacrifice) will be taken away, 
 Dan. 12, 11. fl irntt? HK DN 7"!$ {TTyDK when the 
 Lord shall have washed away the filth of the daughters 
 of Zion, Isa. 4, 4. 
 
 101. THE FUTURE. 
 The Future expresses: 
 
 I. a) The future absolute: as DINiTTltf UTON I will blot 
 
 f * TT T V V : V 
 
 out the man, 1. Mos. 6, 7. 
 
 b) The future perfect: as "OJ^S JTiT. ^ ^Jf^.^ 8 he 
 with whom it shall have been found, shall be my 
 servant, L Mos. 44, 10. 
 
 c) The present, especially when conveying the ideas of 
 quality, permanence, iteration or frequency, or in gen 
 eral and moral truths: VJ IJ? IJJII D{J "I??* J? a son 
 honoreth (his) father, and a servant his lord, Mai. 1, 6, 
 
 II. The Past. 
 
 K) In all states or actions continuing in the past, and in 
 those, which were often repeated in the past : 1{O T 1& tf 
 which (often) came; \r\\ PD thus Solomon gave to Hiram 
 year by year, or 13) when the past is expressly indicated 
 by an external sign. Such are 1) adverbs of time fN then, 
 D*\D not yet; 2) conversive Vav. 
 ///. The following Moods : 
 
 a) The subjunctive and the auxiliaries may, can, might, 
 would, should etc.: SjXn SbX J$l j># Ssp Gen, 2, 16. 
 
 mb-S? rrm ib. 4, 14. 
 
102. THE CONVBRSIVE VAV. 183 
 
 b) The imperative , a) in prohibitions, the imp. never being 
 used negatively: t?>N TtyWp ^ ^tOJTK^) tobtfl fcfe 
 ifVDJD ^ ev - 19? 11 b) after a preceding imperative: 
 
 urn "b^n Sjnfc" ri3 s$ -131 EX. u, 2. 
 
 NOTE. The third person of the imperative, which is wanting, is 
 always expressed by the future (Jussive): *)ij$ VT be there light. 
 
 c) For the optative, especially with the particle frO : frO "1DJ* 
 Oh, let come to an end, Ps. 7, 10. 
 
 102. THE CONVERSIVE VAV. 
 
 1. The conception of time, contained in the principal sen 
 tence of an argument or narration, affects the following 
 sentences, determining their respective tenses. 
 
 2. This influence, however, is only exerted when the 
 verb begins the sentence, but is entirely neutralized when 
 the sentence commences with any other word. 
 
 3. The converted tenses (preterite and future with conv. 
 Vav) substituted for the simple tenses, are the same in sig 
 nification. 
 
 4. The preterite with convers. 1 must be preceded by a 
 future, an imperative, or by some word or phrase expressing 
 futurity: as DrVJOl "Ipi tomorrow, and you will see; TJJJ 
 
 ^fJP 1 ! ^#P y et a little? an( l tnev would stone me. Vice 
 versa the future with convers. 1 must follow a preterite 
 with its original signification or another word or phrase re 
 ferring to past time : n?OJO tfVIJ? T]^H nlO"nj{?3 In 
 the year of the death of the Idng Uzziah. I saw... Isa. 6, 1. 
 
 5. The converted tenses are only employed when the verb 
 commences the clause, so that the copulative force con 
 veyed by the convers. 1 relates also to the time of the 
 preceding sentence (which may be either expressed or under 
 stood). But if any other word commences , the clause, the 
 simple tense must be used: as "DX1 ^?b01 ^ ^JTDN 
 r^N N^ *&y *3*7n *6 If thou wilt go Vith nic, then I 
 will go, but if thou wilt not go with me, then I will not go. 
 
184 PART II. SYNTAX. 
 
 (The converted tense TD /HI is used, because it commences 
 
 * ; . T : * 
 
 the clause, the simple THX* because K7 precedes). 
 
 6. The converted future, following a preterite with the 
 pluperfect signification, must often be translated as pluper 
 fect : as tog nn "i#g D?@n flhKj-rn* "ism pny ngfrj 
 
 DTKjftS DttaflpVvSK DPI?** And Isaac di gged a gain the 
 wells of water, which they had digged in the days of 
 Abraham, his father; and the Philistines had stopped them. 
 
 7. The connecting influence of the convers. 1 is not con 
 fined to the time, but also extends to the mood, so that a 
 preterite with convers. 1 takes the meaning of the subjunc 
 tive or imperative, if the preceding verb is used in either 
 signification: ft fWJtt ... liltf fcO fl ^N fear him not ... and 
 thou shalt do him ... 4. Mos. 21, 34.; DJ H^Vl IT fftl2* }Q 
 D^fin fJ$J lest he put forth his hand, and take also of the 
 tree of life; D jaftjf DN ^3iTl Ni2Tf| lest he will come 
 and smite me, the mother with the children. 
 
 NOTE. Books and chapters commence witli a converted future, 
 (H/pK^ fT1[ frequently occur) past time being presumed and the 
 books being considered as continuations of a preceding narration, 
 
 103. PARAGOOIC AND APOCOPATED FUTURE. 
 
 1. The future lengthened by Jl usually occurs in the 
 first person ( 32). It has the signification of exciting or 
 urging one s self to action. It also expresses wish or pur 
 pose, when connected by 1 with the antecedent, which ^ 
 may be translated in order that: H^Nl ft nK Drn bring 
 it to me in order that I may eat, Gen. 27, 4. 
 
 NOTE. The apocopated future, in Hiphil only possesses a proper 
 distinctive form, with the exception of jlft in which it is found 
 in all conjugations. It supplies the third person in the imperative 
 (wanting), and in the second person, when expressing a command 
 has a less forcible signification. 
 
 104. THE IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1. The imperative commands or encourages. In the 
 latter sense the particle Nl denoting respectful entreaty or 
 exhortation is added: as fcO HQN say, I pray thee. 
 
105. INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE, 185 
 
 2. Prohibition and dissuasion is expressed by the future 
 (jussive) with *7N or K^: &^N JW *7K let no man go out. 
 ^ chiefly precedes the preterite,, and if the future, it de 
 notes a distinct command : nV^fi ^N kill not ! n"^\f\ tib 
 tJwu shalt not kill! 
 
 3. The imperative following the future, is sometimes trans 
 lated by the future : as ^?N"| D5^ \D$ I w iU gi ye to you 
 and ye shall eat. 
 
 4. Two imperatives following each other, stand in the 
 relation of cause and effect: VH1 ^J flNt this do, that ye 
 may live, (prop, and live) JH ^V^ W? rtfr ty_ CD3TO 
 write them upon the table of thy heart, so shalt thou 
 find favor, (prop, and find favor) Prov. 3, 3. 
 
 105. INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 1 . The infinitive absolute being for the most part used 
 adverbially, and either preceding or following the finite 
 verb, denotes increased intensity of action, certainty or con 
 firmation: as ^j^TOS Tpyi? I will greatly bless thee ; 
 ?|jnrn# n^N nijnrn and I will exceedingly multiply 
 thy seed. 
 
 2. The inf. abs. is employed for the finite verb, when 
 several actions of the same person are spoken of success 
 ively. The first verb is then found in the requisite finite 
 form, the following verbs taking the form of abstract nouns in 
 the infin. abs.: as Gen. 41, 43.; 1. Sam. 2, 28.; Jer. 14, 5. 
 
 3. The infin. abs. occasionally begins the sentence in 
 an animated style, which resembles the case absolute of 
 nouns. The context determines the translation: as jhn 
 
 rooj nro *D Wi StoN p ninn ~\&z SbN raft ohn ipi 
 
 TTT- T : T] T: TT T| T;|TT 
 
 slaying oxen and slaughtering sheep, eating flush and 
 drinking wine, let us eat and drink, for to-morrow we 
 shall die, Isa. 22, 13. 
 
 4. Most frequently, the infin. absolute has the sense of 
 a very emphatic imperative : as HN IDI HI^H Go and call 
 Jer. 2, 2. Ittf pJ? fOtfn DV H^ ntof /Remember the sab 
 bath day to sanctify it, 2. Mos, 20, 9. 
 
 24 
 
186 PART II. SYNTAX. 
 
 5. To give more emphasis, the infin. absol. is often used 
 in expressions, where we would expect the inf. construct: 
 as DBn 110*7 learn to do well, Isa. 1, 17. VyTp toN X^> 
 Tjl7n they would not walk in His ways, Isa. 42, 24. 
 
 6. The infinitive absolute is sometimes employed as a 
 mere adverb : as p*]?l JlJJfJDp fipn& l and thou shalt rub 
 (some) of it very small, (from Dpi Inf. Hi. to beat small, 
 break in pieces). 
 
 7. An inf. absol. immediately following the same verb, 
 and appearing to convey one idea, adds to its signification 
 completeness and duration. This infinitive is translated 
 by: always, further, continually, totally, utterly etc.: as 
 
 jfon =1^ he is ^ ie ne ^"J ^T # 10{ ? WQV heai< ye 
 
 indeed, and see ye indeed. When two infinitives of this 
 kind (one of the same, the other of another verb) follow 
 the verb, the expression receives additional force : as 
 
 i* went out to and fro (going and returning) 
 
 8 * 
 
 i31$l and I s i )ake lmto y u > n 
 
 up early and speaking, Jer. 7. 13. Tj^Jl is most fre 
 quently used in this manner. By its infinitive HlS*! the 
 continuance or the gradual progress of an action is indi 
 cated: as *T)Drn Til 7J1 Vn D!?rn and the waters decreased 
 continually (were going and decreasing). Sometimes by 
 the participle: D1BJ ^"f^ *fin nH ^jill and the lad 
 became greater and better (went and grew and was good). 
 
 106. INFINITIVE CONSTRUCT. 
 
 1. The infinitive constructs are considered as verbal nouns 
 (the English: ing) and occur in all cases, with suffixes 
 and prepositions: as DD 1 ??^ DV3 i n the day of your eating. 
 
 2. The abbreviated D"S:Q ( 30, 1.) are joined with the 
 infin. constituting gerunds : as 1D IJ/JlM ^ n n ^ s light 
 ening upon him, i. e. when he alighted. Subordinate 
 clauses conveying the idea of time, are most frequently 
 denoted by the infinitive with % and D, When the action 
 is understood as of prior occurrence D is used (most gener- 
 
106. INFINITIVE CONSTRUCT. 187 
 
 erally, giving the infinitive the meaning of the pluperfect), 
 but $ when taking place at the same time: "N TEi^Tl 
 
 vnN"^N ^ipv jninn? ifitf and tliere Ktood no man with 
 
 himj while Joseph made himself known unto his brethren, 
 
 i. MOS. 45, 2. U^N i:n : nnrn itr aj mv iraq -^ that 
 
 we saw the distress of his soul, when he implored us, 
 
 i. MOS. 42, 21. m*opS pjn3ipK?.y5^>* i? 1 ? ypvi wi 
 
 when Laban had heard the report of Jacob, he ran to 
 wards him, i. MOS. 29, is. oj;p^3 rrj&rrjP NO ipJ K 
 
 and the sons of Jacob came from the field, when they had 
 heard. ..1. Mos. 43, 7. ^ maybe variously rendered: to, till, 
 that, so that, because, ivhen, about: "D"! 1 ? H 1 ?? he finished 
 to speak. When a noun as regens precedes, it expresses 
 the genitive of the infinitive noun or the Latin gerund, 
 e. g. rr^S n# Eccles. 3, 2. 
 
 The infinit. with is used as a noun in the ablative: 
 |-)Xn 1in.p ID^l and they returned from searching of the 
 land. T Often it includes negation: Hlpipp from visiting, i. e. 
 that he may not visit; ^3*19 that thou speakest not, Gen. 
 31, 29,; "O#p that they not pass over, Num. 32, 7. 
 
 NOTE. D before the inf. const, denotes comparison of the two 
 actions with one another. ^ must be considered as the shortened 
 PJ?3 DV? > which sometimes is still retained: as J^i*n DP?! fij3 
 Gen! 31, 10., for DH^nn^; ft T^H H]?.? Chro. II. 28, 2~2., for 
 
 ib T*7O, Thus ^pb D?)?N* DV? Gen - 3 5) for W 1 ??^ 
 ^J5P (it cannot be taken literally: at the day, because Adam lived 
 after having eaten of the forbidden fruit 900 years). 
 
 3. The inf. const, can be (a) the subject of a science: 
 Vb DltO better (were it) for us to return, Num. 14, 3.; 
 
 pl IT! Jer. 2, 19.; (b) the object: JND 
 4. T Mos. 22, 14.; (c) the attribute of a 
 noun: llp^ nj?l 115D HJ?. Eccl. 3, 4. 
 
 4. The infinitive of a transit, verb takes the accusative 
 of the object and the genitive of the subject; the genitive 
 immediately succeeding the infin., and the accus. taking 
 the third place: UJIN* nliT HN^? I)eut - l > 2 ^ 
 
188 PART. II. SYNTAX, 
 
 5. The infinitive partaking of the properties of both noun 
 and verb, uses a verbal suffix, if the suffix denotes an ob 
 ject, a nominal suffix, if it expresses a subject: as \Jjnn 1 ? 
 to slay me, 2. Mos. 2, 14. >Slp OnrQ as I lifted up my 
 voice (prop, my lifting up). 
 
 6. The infinitive, when representing a finite verb, 
 commences the sentence : as D^S^/T^lD J^bt^ 3 *JT1 J s - 
 9, 1. As subject it takes its proper place: riVH DID K^ 
 IID 1 ? Cn^O i* * s not gd> tnat man should be alone (prop, 
 the being of man). As object it follows the verb : as 
 
 iJTDr! B>j23>i 2. MOS. 4, 24. rvrfo nriN NTDK Jud. 7, 10. 
 
 7. The verb JTH to be, the particles W and f K (inclu 
 ding the verb to be), with ^ and the inf. const, express: 
 
 1) to be about to do something, to be on the point of 
 doing: as NlD^ W12$r\ iTI and the sun was about to go down; 
 
 2) it is to be done, must be accomplished: as *p rWJ^7 TO 
 what is to be done unto thec? Tj^gn \^ t]S"^3*lS" ^H 
 wouldst thou be spoken for to the king, 2. KL 4, 13. 
 
 8. The verb JJ1J[ to give, with S and the inf. const, and 
 the accusative of person, expresses to allow, to permit: as 
 TjSrn Dpr^ ]W tih he will not let you go, 2. Mos, 3. 19. 
 
 9. 4 A peculiar construction is, that the inf. with or with 
 out ^, following the finite form of the verbs: v1p>> jV?5> 
 in> y\& ^^IH etc. expresses the principal idea, the 
 finite verb being rendered adverbially: as Hhj^ nfrOPQ H/^^ 
 wherefore didst thou flee secretly? (prop.: wherefore hast 
 thou Ridden thyself to flee?); Tip V*7N ^tr HDp^V^ and 
 it returned not a^/m (prop.: it added not again to return), 
 "ftfj? 1 ? ^^ n^5 H^DJl ^ thou shalt not M?Ao% reap the 
 corner of thy field (prop.: thou shalt not complete to reap 
 the...). 
 
 Sometimes the verbs are both finite, either connected 
 by lor without!: n^l ?Cn 2. Kings 1, 11. rppiN* 
 IIP &>|33*f Prov. 23, 35. rjSK S\Xin he walked willingly 
 (he was willing, walked), Hos. 5, 1L 
 
107. THE PARTICIPLE. 189 
 
 107. THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 1. The participle associating in itself the nature of both 
 the verb and noun (substant, and adject.), as substantive 
 represents either the subject, the object, or stands in ap 
 position, being inflected precisely as a noun: as subject: 
 DpVjftifMTO l^ niy Prov, 12, 11. as object : nj?5B> 
 
 nyrh "niSj T rinj? N Gen. 37, 17., in apposition: r\$i 
 
 "D"i? ^3N~JTI# >fU?9g> Glen. 27, 6. As adjective it agrees 
 with the noun" in gender, number and definition by the 
 article. 
 
 2. The participle of a trans, verb, when substantively 
 employed, is followed by the genitive, as object: ?J$$ *3JK 
 they that love thy name ; t]DH n.9# they that keep the 
 door. 
 
 3. The participle as verb but faintly conveys the notion 
 of time: tijBbart. act. most frequently expressing present 
 time, especially when connected with the pers. pronoun: 
 Tfth >5iN I go; the part, passive past time: *>1Dp killed = 
 who has T been killed. Sometimes the latter is used for the 
 partic. pass. fut. (in Latin : ndus): as "1^13 to be born 
 (nascendus), Ps, 22, 23. &TDJ to be created (creandus), 
 Ps. 102, 19. V?n9 to be praised (laudandus), Ps. 48, 2., 
 or if formed from an intrans. verb it represents the Latin 
 deponens: rtttD3 nixus, confidens. 
 
 NOTE. The pers, pron. regularly precedes the partic., to convey 
 the notion of present, 0dom following: Tl^p 1 ? >g>#9 W ")DlK 
 Ps. 45, 2. ^X HNll Glen. 31, 5. In later Hebrew this con 
 struction is the "most common ; ^J< JHV J know 5 ^^ PHID I 
 confess; ^^ J/Ot^O I adjure. 
 
 4. The participle without pronoun and without copula, 
 is very frequently used for the present, in sentences con 
 veying truths of a practical or moral nature. This present 
 generally includes the subject and relative or the conjunc 
 tions: he who whosoever, or : as he when he, so that 
 we would render in Hebrew : he who kills by : ^tpp , 
 
 in;j;p iviy BI : rtusD vojp* rp tr ncjo ^ There 
 
190 PART II. SYNTAX. 
 
 is (one that) keepeth silence, because he hath no answer 
 in his mouth, and there is (one that) holdeth back his an 
 swer for his time. D ?J3 H31D DnS"! H^ID (He that) 
 useth many words, useth many lies. 
 
 5. The participle standing in the place of a finite verb, 
 of the past,, present or future, always adds the idea of 
 
 permanence or duration: DTl?^ JTT Q& knows ; N> ^113 
 a river goes out; JTiJOn DD^J? your eyes have seen. Often 
 the copula is expressed: rvit^ P iTn HJfail and the lad min 
 istered (was ministering), PD 1 ?"^ n*")31P N jl nTH and 
 Hannah spake in her heart, 1. Sam. 1, 13. 
 
 6. The participle according to its verbal or nominal 
 meaning, is connected with either the verbal or nominal 
 suffix ( 47.)- 
 
 7. Sometimes one participle is added to another, object 
 ively, (instead of an infinitive) to complete Ms meaning : 
 as ^)13D3 ]%y? y~i? t^ N a man knowing to play on a harp. 
 
 NOTE. The participle in a few instances is connected with 
 to express the perfect : Ttf tl$2 VT1 5 Dl lT^D Jfllj 
 In later Hebrew, this construction frequently occurs : JO 
 Tj^3 I came on the way (JTD N"fl H1D^D)J tlfl\& tltVi 
 she "did not drink n /7 V fi HtDlD) HDlK fTH TJ3 thus he 
 spoke Q"0 T fi DV) 
 
 The future of JTH being also employed to express future time: 
 
 piDN vnn ("T?3 T n"D nioinn) 
 
 P ARTICLED 
 108. PARTICLES OF NEGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 1. ^7; ?N : N7 expressing the direct and real negation, 
 is used before verbs in the preterite and future, ^X the 
 desired, intended or supposed negation is used only before 
 verbs in the future; both regularly precede the verb. NT" 
 f NS ^3 VI 1 ??: tib and ^3 (the latter chiefly used in po 
 etry) deny the predicate, J NS J^N the subject: fJ^JK K^ 
 I have not eaten; pK ^ T 1 ) J|Dj? ^3 they dV not 
 rise nor possess the land; Dtft 1^13*73 ^ "13DN the 
 
108. PARTICLES OF NEGATIVE SENTENCES. 191 
 
 base man saith in his heart, there is no God. TV75 chiefly 
 found before an infinitive (where K7 never stands): 7!3N7 
 to eat, SbkNt W?? 1 ? = Sb^ *fh% not to eat - 
 
 pX (absol. st.) closes a member of the sentence: ptf D TKI 
 Gen. 2, 5. pX (const, st.) appears before the noun, inf. or 
 partic. ^liDpD pSt without number, Gen. 41, 49. 
 
 NOTE I. The partic. mostly representing the noun is preceded 
 by ptf, more rarely by tf 1 ? J ng>3 ^ ^V"^ Zc P h > 3 5 " 
 In the Mislma ^^ is often used, when standing immediately before 
 the participle, pfr$ when a pronoun intervenes: X*71 T^DIN N7 
 
 PTW (.TO N" 
 
 nptrto ^:N rx ( 
 
 L 
 NOTE II. X7 and 7^ may be best compared with the Latin 
 
 non and ne 
 
 2. | es, indicating a prevention of what follows, is with 
 but few exceptions, connected with the future: 
 
 lest ye die. 
 
 3. The preposition |p, ,/p conveying the notion of 
 from, is occasionally used as a negation: TJ^/tpp ^DN 
 DH^y Sam. 8, 7. ...that I should not reign over them; 
 Ttppnb J1;|VK DOJjn *?# Isa. 5, 6. ...that they reign not. 
 106^ 2. 
 
 4. The conjunction Di< in swearing is properly condi 
 tional: ?/, provided: as in Sam. 3, 17. God do so to thee, 
 and more so, "O"! ^?P ^HDri DK if thou hide anything 
 from me; but when the form of imprecation is omitted, 
 it is best rendered by a negative: not, and the phrase 
 tfr DJ^ by an affirmative: pXH H^ }N"V. DX if they shall 
 see the land = they shall not see, 4. Mos. 14, 23. K7 DN 
 D5^ ng^JJj^ p if I will not do so unto you = I will do, 
 4. Mos. 14, 28. 
 
 5. Two negations in the same sentence do not affirm, as 
 in English, but give more emphasis to the negation: as 
 D&T15 ^ |P3 J N silver was nothing accounted of (in the 
 days of Solomon), 1. Ki. 10, 21. 
 
192 PART II. SYNTAX. 
 
 109. PARTICLES OF INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 
 1-L> N^D ( 24 > 4 -)- *& is al s used elliptically for a 
 
 whole sentence: D tpfi DN NH is it not so? Gen. 4, 7. 
 
 2 Dtf /, is an interrogative particle in indirect questions: 
 as }}jin nm5~DK JlN^U let us see if the vine flourish: or 
 
 I Y Y - T : T : 
 
 in indirect disjunctive questions before the second member: 
 as K^ DN 1&# *J3 HJ MflNn whether thou be my son 
 Esau or not. 
 
 NOTE. The second member is but seldom introduced by Itf : 
 (TIT D3lin JHV >P Eccl. 2, 19. or by H repeated: as 
 JOri b?nn whether they are strong or weak, 4. Mos. 13, 18. 
 
 3. Sometimes the interrogative particle is wanting, and 
 the question indicated by the collocation of the words, or 
 by the tone of the voice: nt HflK art thou? DID pnrjQ ?p : iJ7 
 wilt thou hold them still? 
 
 4. The answer ,,yes" is regularly expressed by a repeti 
 tion of the word to be affirmed or denied : as "O1 t^Jl 
 
 r T - : 
 
 W* "IDK*! ""fyT ^^?9 i g there any word from the Lord? 
 And he said, There is, Jer. 37, 17. 
 
 110, PARTICLES OF OPTATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 1. J|S (negatively $bh or >W?) if ! that! utinam I 
 It is coupled with the future : as rTIT Sw.D^ *h 
 1, Mos. 17, 18., with the jussive: ?|^5"J3 W ^""d that 
 it might be according to thy word, 1. Mos. 30, 34., with 
 the imperative : ^#0^ ^S njpN"DN T|N if thou wouldst 
 only hear me! 1. Mos. 23, 18., with the elliptic participle: 
 ^ yiytf *1$y_ ^ that my people would hearken unto me, 
 Ps. 81, 13. if the wish refer to the future. If referring to 
 the past, to what should have happened, but has not, the 
 perfect is employed, where we would use the pluperfect: 
 as ^JID ^ that we had been dead! si mortui essemus! 
 Sometimes DN is used as an optative particle : as ^NH^ 
 ^ ynUffi DK Israel, if thou wilt hearken unto me, Ps.81^ 9. 
 
 2. A wish is often expressed in the form of a question: 
 as DlIO UN*V">0 DHON D 3! many say, who will show us 
 
111. PARTICLES OF OBJECTIVE SENTENCES. 193 
 
 any good, Ps. 4, 7. A peculiar formula of wishing, for 
 that! is: JJT P who will give, with following accusative: 
 :n# fJV >P would it were even! 5. Mos. 28, 67.; with fol 
 lowing infinitive: as ^fVlD Jfi?"*9 would that we had died, 
 
 2. Mos. 16, 3.; with following finite verb with or without 
 1 : as DPI 1 ? r? DM*? iTm tJT >P that there were such an 
 heart in them! S/Mos^S, 26.; T)tfT T JJT >P that I knew ! 
 Job 23, 3. 
 
 111. PARTICLES OF OBJECTIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 1. After the verbs of seeing, knowing, saying, hearing, 
 believing etc. the sentence employed as the, object is in 
 troduced by >5 or less frequently by *)>$ "D 1 ? ? IfrO they 
 saw that they had conquered, Jos. S, 21.; >? ^ TJH >p 
 iiriK Di")# who told thee that thou wast naked? Gen. 3, 11. 
 After verbs denoting the operations of the senses, the sub 
 ject of the dependent clause becomes the object of the 
 principal sentence, and is followed by the dependent clause 
 with its introductory particle: D1CO >? TiNiTn$ D lf?,* N T! 
 instead of: nlNH !l1tD ^5 I D^rJ7N N"in_ (almost the Latin 
 Accusat. before the Infin.) 
 
 2. "1^: nin^H^ -|g% that ye may know, that the 
 Lord distinguishes, Ex. ll , 7. or I^X HN cf. ( 96, 5 .) 
 
 112. PARTICLES OF FINAL SENTENCES. 
 Dependent sentences in which intention or purpose is 
 expressed, take the particle: (a) ~\$X : ^ 3D" "WJK that 
 it may be well with thee, Deut. 6. 3., or the more precise 
 JK! 1$?^ *tt2J?3 with or without *) & ; as prepositions, 
 they are connected with the infinitive, as conjunctions 
 with the future: njfT K*7 1^ K [^ that he may not see. 
 Ez. 12, 12.; HIV* ^ 8 fj^p 1 ? Gen." 18, 19.; ^jl f^p 1 ? ib.; 
 
 rny^ ^-i^.nn 11^3 Gen. 22. so.; ^ns-nj? ^niinn nbj;3 
 
 Ex. 9. IH." (b) S with the infinitive: HlX^ "ID Ex. 
 
 3, 4. Ez. 12, 2. (c) V and bring your youngest brother unto 
 me njnNl that I know, Gen. 42, 34. 7f? W >v ) Hli"^ HlfJ 
 Prov T 20, 22. (d) J$, ^D 1 ? lest: IT H^V ! I? Gen. 3, 2i 
 
 ib. 3/il/ 
 
 25 
 
194 PART II, SYNTAX. 
 
 113. PARTICLES OF INFERENTIAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Inferential sentences are usually introduced in English 
 by that. In Hebrew that is expressed by : a) V as God 
 is not a man DJ3*1 that he lies, b) *7 with infinitive: 
 ^!?2~riK riiTTiY? (thou hast magnified Thy mercy) in keep 
 ing alive my soul, 1. Mos. 19, 19. c) "l^Sp HIIT HD? 
 #E~$h ^y\rr$h *\$$ the Lord will smite" thee, that thou 
 canst not be healed, Deut, 28, 27. d) *3 after interroga- 
 tives: as ^ITN >D ^flD H^ what is my strength, that I should 
 hope. Job 6, 11. 
 
 114. PARTICLES OF TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 
 
 a) The introductory *?T1 is of especial importance, as it 
 occurs with the greatest frequency in adverbial sentences 
 relating to time; b) the prefixes 3 and 3 with the infini 
 tive ( 106, 2.); e) 1 connected with the finite verb or par 
 ticiple: as, the angel came to the woman D^V N7p while 
 she was sitting; d) the conjunctions: t >3 : fipHnn 3 when 
 I kept silence, my bones withered, Ps. 32, 3. ^l^ND- 
 :np T ^83 VT1 2. Mos. 32, 19. DNJ TV? H 1 ?? DK when 
 the vintage is finished, Isa. 24, 13. D*ltD> DH1D3J D"")Q 
 ^WT 1^33 ?p : !W Jer. 1, 5. tKD: *W^tO since I came 
 to Pharaoh, Ex. X 23. 1J, O ij;, T^ "lV_ Jos- 2, 16. 
 2. Sam. 23, 10. Deut. 2, 14. 
 
 NOTE. Sometimes conjunctions denoting time are omitted : 
 
 so toiSi Nn-Sj; x tr / n oen. 19, 23. 
 
 115. PARTICLES OF CAUSAL SENTENCES. 
 
 a) >? because: HNt Jl^lJ 3 Gen. 3, 14, 17. b) fj be 
 cause, n^ J37, 3 f^. T : Num. 20, 12. Gen. 22, 16. Num. 
 
 11, 20. n^ N alone: ^ OiH "l^ K for the Lord dried up the 
 waters of the Jordan, Jos. 2, 23. c) Dp#, >D l&y, 1^ V K DpJT 
 because, because that: Num. 14, 24.; Gen. 22, 18.; 2. Sam. 
 
 12, 10. d) p- 1 ?^ 3: Gen. 38, 26. e) V N^HI DJH 1*7 niTiX* 
 B^JJ Whose is the sea, ibr He made it, Ps. 95, 5. 
 
 116; PARTICLES OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 1. a) For conditional sentences the two particles DN arid 
 
116. PARTICLES OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 195 
 
 1 are used, or their negations: DN and 
 DX in case the condition and consequence are real, fftl when 
 they are only presumed : , # yfytTOQ ^H N^ DN1 
 if thou wilt go with me, then I will go, but if thou wilt not 
 go with me, (then) I will not go, Jud. 4, 8. HllT j^tDfl H 
 t. Orvpn^ if the Lord were pleased to put us to death... 
 Jud. 13, 23. Frequently the expression is elliptical, the 
 subordinate sentence, expressing the consequence, being 
 omitted, whereby ^ gives an optative signification to the 
 verb: DHVP f"!^5 "OJIP"^ would that we had died in the 
 land of Egypt, Num. 14, 2. ^3*7 ITIT ^KgOtf ! ^ that 
 Ishmael might live before Thee, Gen. 17, 18. 
 
 DX with the preterite immediately folio-wing gives t the 
 latter the signification of the future perfect: ^pl TlPl^ DX 
 Tib 3PP if I shall have been shaven, then my strength 
 will depart from me, Jud. 16, IT. 
 
 b) D if, supposed that: njtf "q# H^H 3 Ex. 21, 2. 
 
 NOTE I. D^s is purely conditional, in 3 the conditional idea is 
 often incorporated with the clause of time. Compare Ex. 21, 2. 
 3, 5, 14, 18. 
 
 c) nC* $: "M.IJWTl "W 8 tlie blessing, if ye obey ... Dent. 
 11, 27. " 
 
 d) jn or mri: h irpX^S jni ; if they will not believe 
 me, Ex. 4, 1. r\\2T}$ T\\&y Hin? H^H if the Lord make 
 windows in the heaven, 2. Ki. 7, 2. 
 
 e) V VDN njjt ntlJI -= Dfe D^VGen. 44, 22. 
 
 i^-ni? - hofr oVl EX. 3/13, in^ 1 ? JNOPI = }Dp n 
 
 Ex. 4, 23. 
 
 f) 3 with the inf. const,: Gen. 44, 30, 31. \Nfc3 , 
 NOTE II. The conditional particle is frequently omitted: 
 
 if a thousand sha11 fal1 at sidc Ps - 9 
 
 2. The second member most frequently commences 1) with 
 out any particle: iO njfT ... ^NyD NfDX if now I have 
 found favor in your eyes, speak, I pray you, in,ftie ears of 
 Pharaoh, Gen. 50. 4.; 2) with V ToSrn >$# D^fl DN* 
 
PART II. SYNTAX. 
 
 3) with stronger particles: as ftf, J$ , 
 
 ?a >fr|3N rN Ps. 119, 92. int had not been the Lord, 
 
 who was for us , M Wjl 0>?fi WJ Ps. 124, 2, 3. 
 
 117. PARTICLES OF DISJUNCTIVE SENTENCES. 
 As well-as ) V- 1 pHN) nflN 1 ) 5 m- 
 both-and J Gen. 24, 25. CDJV-OJ: 
 0^08 W 1- Sam. 2, 26.; 1J^4*UTH 
 10.; Gen. 19, 11.; Gen. 910. Neither nor: 
 ftW & Tj*7-D3 ^ 0.1 1. Ki. 3, 26. Either or: ININ Ex. 
 <; DN-tJN: Ex. 19, 13.; DN1-DN: 
 Eccl. 5, 11. 
 
 118. PARTICLES OF ADVERSATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 The most frequent adversative particle is V W/?*! but 
 from the tree, Gen. 2, IT. All this is come upon us 
 ^rQJ^ N71 yet have we not forgotten Thee, Ps. 44, 18. 
 Stronger: DT- JNi D^Vbut: Gen. 28, 19. DkX 3 but: thy 
 name shall be called no more Jacob ^JO{J"DN ? but Israel, 
 Gen. 32, 29. T]N but, pN but, limiting what precedes: 
 N 1 ? T]N but not, Gen. 20, 12. Ps. 31, 23. 
 
 5"Ej although, usually at the beginning of a sentence : 
 fi^SO to^rPlp D| although you multiply prayers, Isa. 1, 15 . 
 DN although: come now and let us argue DJ^NDri VIT~DN 
 D^^3 though your sins be as scarlet, Isa. 1. is. ] although: 
 thou shalt die for the woman, whom thou hast taken 
 Hl altliough she is a man s wife, Gen. 20. 3. 
 
 v 119. INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 IN* *ln* (in* HN n^lN ^8 exclamations of grief, com 
 plaint: ah! woe! alas! for the most part with following *?: 
 DN10 ^1N Num. 21, 29.: D1^ HH Ez. 30, 2. Ez. 6, 11. 
 ^ ^N Micha. 7, 1. HH^ with b Jo. 1, 15.^ for the most 
 part with D H 1 ^ Hp^ Josh. T, 7. HNr? exclamation of joy, 
 aha! Ps. 35, 25., of terror or mockery: Vs. 40. 16. Isa. 44, 16. 
 >5 an exclamation of pressing entreaty: that! in addressing 
 God with fn? Jos. 7, 8., with \ru^ in addressing superiors; 
 1. Ki. 3, 17. 
 
PARADIGMS. 
 
 A. P ARTICLES WITH SUFFIXES. 
 
 7 to, sign of the dative 3 in. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 I.e. *n to me 
 
 S m - 7]7 m p. ^ 
 
 2 * to thee. 
 
 ]f- T] 1 ? 
 
 Cm. "j^ to him 
 
 jf. pl^toher 
 
 Ptor. 
 
 1. c. SY5 to us 
 
 2. 
 
 to you 
 
 , to them 
 
 \ m P- |i 
 
 in thee 
 
 in her 
 
 in us 
 in you 
 
 f 
 
 in them 
 
 3 as, for which 
 .also 1723, 1D3, 
 as I 
 
 03 as thou 
 
 as he 
 
 as she 
 
 as we 
 
 as ye, 
 
 seldom 
 
 2) as tliey 
 
 >oet. 3o, 
 
 from me 
 in pause 
 
 ) from thee 
 
 poet. 
 ^ 713 D, from him 
 from her 
 
 from us 
 from yo 
 
 on9 p et - 
 
 from them 
 
 i? n ^ tne accusative. J"|$ at, with. 
 
 Plur. Sing. Plur. 
 
 me us 
 
 | m - TJrlK. ln P 
 2. -I 1* thee 
 
 i 
 
 fm. "inj^ him 
 
 at, with me ^JflN with us 
 
 ,inp-^K D3flN 
 
 with thee with you 
 
 BW 
 
 , with him 
 
 with them 
 
 ( f- nn^X her 
 
 Qj; with. 
 w. me w.thce 
 
 in P- 
 
 , with her 
 
 them 
 
 w. him w. Jier w. us w. you w. them 
 
198 B. REGULAR 
 
 Kal. Ni^lwl. Fid. 
 
 Transitive, f Intransitive. 
 
 Pret. 3. m. \ *Sbp 
 
 3. f." -Irffc 
 2. m. 
 
 -iv T : r|T 
 
 2. f. 
 
 . 3. 7, 
 
 2. m. 
 
 2. f. 
 
 inf. const . *S bD abs L (l?l I3 R. ) *Sibpn ^ D p^ *Stbp ^p 
 
 ) = - | T- /L-.LJ_;_V I - 
 
 Imp. m 
 
 f. 
 PUir. m, 
 
 f. mbbp nnaa n:Scopn 
 
 T:|: T :- : T:~|T 
 
 Kut. 3. m. Sfrp 
 
 3. f. Sbpn ns^n StDpn 
 
 I : " I T 
 
 2. m. 
 
 2. f. 
 
 1. c. 
 Plur. 3. in. 
 
 3. f. J 
 
 2. m. 
 
 2. f. f 
 1. c. 
 
 The length. Fut. 
 
 (Optativ 
 Fut. apoc. ( 
 
 (Optative) T : : 
 
 c. Jussive 
 
 Part. act. 
 
 1 fi^O" in P- 2 O in p. 
 
VERB, 2939. 199 
 
 Paul. HiphiL Hoplicd. Hitlipael, 
 
 \ nSppn 
 
 rj^pn $ps/p!$ 
 
 ii%p nSi:pn nSropn n^Dnn 
 ^nSbp ^ 
 
 S^nn 
 
 wanting. ; .^R? wanting. 
 
 L L i - : 
 
 :,J ^RO 7Dpnn 
 
 S*L)pn S^cpbri S^pn 
 
200 
 
 C. VERB PE GUTTURAL, ( 40) 
 
 KoA. 
 
 Pret, 3. m. 
 3. f. 
 2. m. 
 
 2. f. 
 1. c. 
 
 Plur. 3. 
 
 2. m. 
 2. f. 
 1. c. 
 
 Inf. const. 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 f. 
 Plur. m. 
 
 f. 
 
 Niplial 
 
 Hipliil. 
 
 Hoplial. 
 
 n 7PJf T 
 
 abs. 
 
 log 
 
 noy 
 
 pm 
 
 ipm 
 
 rnpm 
 
 Fut. 3. m. 
 3. f. 
 2, m. 
 
 2. f. 
 
 1. c. 
 Plur. 3. m. 
 
 3. f. 
 
 2. m. 
 
 2. f. 
 1. c. 
 
 prnn 
 ntnn 
 
 Fut. apoc. (Jussive) 
 
 Part. act. 
 
 pass. 
 
D. VERB AYIN GUTTURAL. ( 41). 
 
 201 
 
 -. 
 
 Pret. 3. m. 
 3. f. 
 2. m. 
 2. f. 
 
 1. c. 
 Plur. 3. c. 
 
 2. m. 
 2. f. 
 1. c. 
 
 Kal. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Inf. absol. 
 
 npntr 
 
 Pid. raal. lUthpad. 
 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 f. 
 
 Plur. m. 
 f. 
 
 rutantf 
 
 Fut. 3. m. 
 3. f. 
 
 2. m. LDn^n 
 
 2. f. 
 I.e. 
 Plur. 3. m. 
 
 3.f. rupni#i 
 
 o 
 
 2. f . 
 I.e. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 Part, 
 pass. 
 
 T I 
 
202 E. VERB 
 
 Kal. Nipliol. Piel. 
 
 Pret. 3. m. 
 3. f. 
 
 2. m. 
 
 2. f. fjgg^ 
 
 Plur. 2. m. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Inf. absol. 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 Fut. 3. m. 
 3. f. 
 2. m. 
 
 2. f. 
 
 1. c. 
 Plur. 3. m. 
 
 3. f. 
 
 2. m. 
 2. f. 
 1. c. 
 
 Fut. with. Suff. 
 
 Part. act. J?9^ P ass - y^Dfc^ l^Dt^ 3 1/tDu^ O 
 
LAMED GUTTURAL. ( 42) 203 
 
 PuaL Ilipliil. ffophal. Hithpad. 
 
 wanting. : - wanting 
 
 Fut. apoc. 
 
Inf. 
 
 204 F; VEKB LAMEDII 
 
 Kal. Niplial. Pid 
 
 Pret. 3. m. 
 3. f. 
 2. m. 
 2. f. 
 
 1, c. 
 Plur. 3. c. 
 
 2. m. 
 2. f. 
 1. c. 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 f. 
 Plur. m. 
 
 f. njxD njxvr3n 
 
 TV: T v T 
 
 Fut. 3. m. 
 3. f. 
 
 2. f. 
 
 1. c. 
 Plur. 3. m. 
 
 3 - f - ruNjfpn njNVDn nixypn 
 
 2. m. 
 2. f. 
 l. .c. 
 
 : |T 
 
 Fut. apoc. (Jussive) 
 
 Fut. with Suff. 
 
 Part. act. KV/^ P ass - K1V,; 
 
ALEPH (*O), ( 49) 205 
 
 Pual. Hiphil. JIopJiaL Hitlipad. 
 
 nxvon 
 
 wanting. M , v - wanting 
 
 KRS? 
 
206 G. VERB PE ALEPH (N"fl). 48. 
 
 Kd. Niphal. Hiphil. Hophal. 
 
 Pret. 3. m. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Like the Verb Pe Guttural, in Paradigm C. 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 f. 
 Plur. m. *>* 6tG - Bating- 
 
 f. 
 
 Fut. 3. m. 
 3. f. 
 2. m. 
 
 2. f. 7 7JNFI etc - etc, etc. 
 
 1. c. 
 Plur. 3. m. 
 
 3. f. 
 
 2. m. 
 2. f. 
 1. c. 
 
 Fut. Vav Conv. 
 
 Part. act. ^fc pass. SlDN* S^N^ 
 
H. VERB J"3 ( 50). 207 
 
 Kal. NiphoH. HipJiil. Hopjial. 
 
 Pret. 3. m. 
 3. f. 
 
 2. m. etc. 
 
 2. f. 
 
 1. c. 
 Plur. 3. 
 
 2. m. 
 2. f. 
 1. c. 
 
 Inf. constr. 
 
 Imp. m. *J^j| 
 
 Plu r. 1 S *|n ,^n wantin S 
 
 f. rwj ruttfji-in 
 
 Fut. 3. m. 
 3. f. 
 2. m. 
 
 2. f. 
 
 1. c. 
 Plur. 3. m. 
 
 3. f. 
 
 2. m. 
 2. f. 
 1. c. 
 
 The length. 
 Fut. apoc. 
 
 Part. act. $%$ pass 
 
208 I. VERB PE YODTT 
 
 Kal. NiphuL 
 
 Pret. 3. nu *Dt^ 
 
 - T 
 
 3. f. TOfc 
 
 * : IT 
 
 s- . m. J"*?._j Ly 
 
 2. f. fljfc* 
 
 1. c. 
 Plur. 3. c. 
 
 2. m. 
 2. f. 
 1. c. 
 
 Inf. niW, abs. 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 Plur. m. W? 
 
 f. 
 
 Fut. 3. m. 
 3. f. 
 2. m, 
 
 2. f. 
 
 1. c. 
 Plur. 3. m. 
 
 3. f. 
 
 2. m. 
 2. f. 
 1. c. 
 
 Fut. apoc. (Jussive) 
 Fut. with Vav Conv. 
 
 Part. act. 
 
>"S <orig. Yfl) ( 51.) 
 Hipliil. 
 
 J. Verb prop. PK YODH (") 209 
 Kal. Hipliil. 
 
 regular. 
 
 DIB) 
 
 wanting. 
 
 OB 
 
 27 
 
210 K. VERB AYIN DOU- 
 
 Kal. Niphal. 
 
 Pret. 3. m. 
 
 *ap *aD3 
 
 3. f. 
 
 mD naD:) 
 
 
 T - T ~ T 
 
 2. m. 
 
 nap nap} 
 
 2. f. 
 
 nap map} 
 
 1. c. 
 
 >nap niap? 
 
 Plur. 3. c. 
 
 13D ttpj 
 
 2. m. 
 
 oniap oniap} 
 
 2. f. 
 
 jniap jni3p4 
 
 1. c. 
 
 W api 
 
 Inf. constr. 
 
 *20 abs - (ai 3 9> *DDH (31fD r i) 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 Db apn 
 
 f. 
 
 s ab s 2Dn 
 
 Plur. m. 
 
 dD 13DH 
 
 f. 
 
 nrao ^^aon 
 
 Fut. 3. m. 
 
 ab^ D D* DD^ 
 
 3. f. 
 
 non abn apn 
 
 2. m. 
 
 aon abn apn 
 
 2. f. 
 
 ^aon ^apn >apn 
 
 1. c. 
 
 abx abN apx 
 
 Plur. 3. m. 
 
 ^ao^ iaD* lao* 1 
 
 
 T I * ~ 
 
 3. f. 
 
 rwapn n^aon n^apn 
 
 2. m. 
 
 iaon ^aon ^aon 
 
 
 T 
 
 2. f. 
 
 nyapn "ii?Dn nrapn 
 
 1. c. 
 
 DDJ 3 DJ DDJ 
 
 Ft. with Vav Conv. 20*1 
 
 Fut. with Suff. 3aD> 
 
 Part. act. 
 
 3DJ 
 
BLED (#"#), ( 52). 
 
 HipJiiL Hoplml. 
 
 spin 
 
 SDH 
 
 " T 
 
 nraon 
 
 nopn ni^pin 
 
 ontoon oni^Din 
 
 Dpin 
 
 wanting. 
 
 JQSID 
 
 Df)33lD 
 
 3310 
 
 DD1D 
 
 MID 
 
 211 
 P*al. 
 
 HDD1D 
 
 ^3310 
 onmiD 
 
 wanting. 
 
 apv 
 DDin 
 
 nin 
 
 aaiop 
 
 nmion 
 
 DD1D 
 
 aaioo 
 
 aaiop 
 
2.12 
 
 Fret. 3. m. 
 3. f. 
 
 2. m. 
 
 2. f. 
 
 1, c. 
 Plur. 3. c. 
 
 2. m. 
 2. f. 
 
 1. c. 
 
 AW. 
 
 "PR 
 
 L. VERB A YIN VAV 
 
 Niphal. IRpliil. IIopJtaL 
 
 HB&tfi 
 
 rr 
 
 Inf. const. 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 f. 
 
 Plur. m. 
 f. 
 
 Fut. 3. m. 
 3. f. 
 2. m. 
 
 2. f. 
 
 1. c. 
 Plur. 3. m. 
 
 3. f. 
 
 2. m. 
 2. f. 
 1. c. 
 
 Fut. apoc. 
 eonv. 
 
 Fut. with suff. 
 Part. act. 
 
 *D1p 
 
 abs. (Di 
 
 p) 
 
 Dip 
 
 }Q:)p 
 
 runp 
 
 Din 
 
 Dn 
 
 Dipri 
 Dipn 
 
 nin 
 
 D^ 
 
 op: 
 
 wanting. 
 
 DpV 
 
 Dpjin 
 Dpin 
 ippin 
 
 njppin 
 
 D 
 
 Di 
 
(53). 
 
 M. Verb AYIN YODII 0"J?) 53. 213 
 
 Kal. Niplinl. 
 
 - *p^ 
 
 nopip 
 
 rooi 
 
 rippip 
 
 DpDOlp 
 
 t^ppip 
 ^OOID 
 
 onii 
 
 Dpip 
 
 Dpip 
 
 ^rppip 
 
 DOl 
 
 wanting. 
 
 Wr 
 
 wo* 
 
 FK 
 
 pan 
 
 as Dlpn 
 
 113 . 
 
 W 
 
214 N. VERB LAMEDH 
 
 Kal. Niphal. 
 
 Pret. 3. m. 
 3. f. 
 2. m. 
 2. f. . 
 
 1. c. 
 Plur. 3. c. 
 
 2. m. 
 2. f. 
 1. c. 
 
 Inf. constr. filSjl abs. (fiSj) (poet. l^J 
 
 Imp. m. 
 
 f. 
 
 Plur. m. 
 f. 
 
 Fut. 3. m. 
 
 3. f. 
 
 2. rn. 
 
 2. f. 
 
 1. c. 
 Plur. 3. m. 
 
 3. f. 
 
 2. m. 
 2. f. 
 1. c. 
 
 Fut. apoc. 
 
 Fut. with Suff. 
 
 Part, act, 
 
HE (IT S)* ( 54). 215 
 
 Pual. HiphH. Hophal. Hiihpad. 
 
 wanting. ^^ wanting. 
 
 in 
 
216 Q. REGULAR VERB 
 
 SUFFIXES for 1 Sing. 2 Sivy. m. 2. Sing. f. 3. Sing. m 
 
 Fret. Kal. 3. m. i<jW> ^tSp ^P 
 
 2. m. 
 
 3. c . 
 2. m. 
 
 suff. nom. 
 Inf. Kal. 
 
 suff. verb. 
 
 Imp. Kal. 
 
 Fut. Kal. 3. m. 
 
 , 
 with Nun epenthetic 
 
 Plur. 3. m. 
 
 Pret. Piel. 
 
WITH SUFFIXES. 4247. 217 
 
 3. Sing. f. 1 Plur. 2 Plur. m. 2 Plur. f. 3 Plur. m 3 Plur. f. 
 
 rnStpp 
 rnn^top 
 
 oStop) jS?pp 
 Stop f3rSop : 
 
 p^tgp oStpp }St?p 
 
 28 
 
218 P. MASCULINE 
 
 1. Declension. SECOND 
 
 i_ ii. 
 
 Sing, absol. hero *")13J? nanc *V star 3313 name 
 
 constr. -VfoJ T 3313 
 
 Light Suffixes. H13J H> ^3313 
 
 Grave Suffixes. 03*113-3 D3T 
 
 riur. absol. DH13-1 D VT T Du - OH* 0*3313 
 
 constr. H13JI T 3313 nllDt^ 
 
 Light Suffixes. H13JI *T O313 
 
 Grave Suffixes. 
 
 Fourth Declension. FIFTH 
 
 Sing, absol. word *")31 grape 3^ old Jp) 1 King T]7p ^^ 
 
 constr. ^3*1 3^J/ % fpf n/P 
 
 Light Suffixes H31 *3^ ^pt $ 3^D HtDD 
 
 Grave Suffixes 
 Plur. absol. 
 
 constr. ^yi 
 
 Light Suffixes H31 ^ty Opt *3^D H5D 
 
 Grave Suffixes 
 
 1. Declension. SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 Sing, absol. law Hptl y ear Hjl^ s ^ ee P tlM right- J" 
 
 constr. 
 Light Suffixes 
 
 Grave Suffixes 
 
 Plur. absol. Dlpl! D1^ Dl^^ nlpTV 
 
 I -. T IT; 
 
 constr. rilpfT 
 
 Light Suffixes ^jllpfl TllJt^ 
 
 Crave Suffixes 
 
NOUNS. 61 66. 219 
 
 DECLENSION. 3. Declension. 
 
 staff Sntt n*Tin enemy ^V seer 
 
 ;3 D33rpr 
 
 *J D BTjp. D^\N* D7h D 3H3 i 
 
 ^ihp ^\s* nh ^H3 
 
 B DT)|5 3>* nth | 
 
 vy 
 
 DECLENSI L ON. 
 
 fin vv v a 
 
 t^ "iD ^ ac *^I^^ power nV.!) work^t^JJ fruit ^^ death j")*lD>li ve j"Vt 
 
 nto, m 
 
 G9-72- 
 
 Third Declension. FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 queen ^Q word rTOX desert nD^ifl twig 
 
 nonn 
 
CHRESTOMATHY. 
 
 I. Abraham is commanded to offer up his child as a 
 burnt sacrifice. (Genesis 22). 
 
 no D>r6 m nn onrnn nr? >rn 
 
 nj??5 :D? 
 r Nn-nx n^ npn 1:3 prwSy ar-n nSyn 
 
 .. T v T . )-- : | T : w - v T - T T 
 
 - pny 
 
 Vtfni irn n^n 
 2 
 
 ipjn D^j;n 
 i .... .. T 
 
 rr?f s 3 : D 
 
 vSi\* Nnp?i : i^-n.x ton^S rtW nri 
 :>MH 10^1 D?*33^ onn 
 ^y? ripwp iS iriyrSN 1 
 n^ r3^n 
 
 S\x-n -in NI i n ornx Nfe -n is 
 nnn nS 
 ovn fi 
 
 : 1:3 nnn nr? in^i \xn-n^ np i 
 
ClIRESTOMATHY, 221 
 
 Lrn-pn^DrnsN-^N* nirr ri^So *npi : 7 nNT nin^ 
 
 T - I T T : v T : I - ; - T | : - / T T 
 
 njn 
 
 ojrr nzy-hz *\tf$ Sin? 1 ; Dyj^ n 3?tt3 ^ 
 i8p>s*rr ^iji Sb Tjos ^a^ni :VD\V 11;^ nx 
 
 i 87, 2. 2 84, 2 3 97, 2. 4 92, 4. 5 83, 7. 
 76, 2, a. 7 yj*y the south-western hill of Jerusalem to which 
 with Solomo s temple on it, belonged, was called HiPP ^n 
 D or . fullcr Hln* D*3 ")n (Isa. 2, 2.) the temple-mount- 
 ain. About this mountain the proverbial adage was current: 
 n^T nlrV iri^ on tnc mountain of God one is seen, i. e. is pro 
 vided for. 8 with 3 f * ne person or thing by whom one swears; 
 here God swears by Himself. 9 111, 1. 
 
 II. Birth of Moses. Hi.s flight to Midian. (Exodus 2.) 
 
 inx 
 
 hS n^p 4 n^ prno irinj? 
 
 snrp^nr^ni 
 
 *xn nni tr-nN* n^ ^N*I ^ inprm njn 
 
222 CIIRESTOMATHY. 
 
 *0p p 4 ? nV >rr\ riinsTO 1 ? injojii n^rr Snri : inp^rn 10 
 onn DW3 rn nnn^i? D on-jo o Sprint ntp o IO?MI 
 .150 nyo E*N* N*i onSp? ann vnarS N^n no 
 
 ^^-o^ mni ^trn 01*3 Njn :Sin? in:rpcp^ 
 
 HD 
 
 nSn ffrroii &$-\n TO ^^^n nyp ^ 
 
 anp-n fa nni :n^? inn 
 
 VTJ jnn?: 3 ^ri^rr ^ ION* 
 
 ono 
 
 1 The sibilants y, $ and the letters 7, p, } sometimes are doub 
 led for the sake of euphony (Dagesh euphonic). 2 The third f. s. 
 suff. often without Mappik : Jl instead of H 3 f r DVTUl! 
 cf. 12, 6, B. 3. and 14, II. 1. ^ inf. of y-p 51, 4. 6 93, 3. 
 Hi. II. of TjT^ (only in imp. fern.) regul. "Tj^lH 7 55, b. 
 
 8 n^nni - m^nfn fr. n^n . 9 o^n^n for rim vi , the 
 
 _ 
 
 masc. suffix sometimes used irregularly for the fern, thus Q3K i> for 
 \ 10 106 ? 9. 11 94. 0. Note. 
 

 :onp 
 
 12 
 
 CilKESTOMATIlY. 223 
 
 III. The Appointment of Moses. (Exodus III.) 
 
 -n$ jnyi IHO jrp urin IT? fanrntf nip rrn ntp 
 :n:rin 
 
 rypn mrn arn rtjpn pnp tr^rr 1 ?? vS# nin* 
 3 n^?r-n 
 4niN*f? np *D nin 
 : ^n ^N l n^ o n^b npN-n n^pn rjinp D^ri k v vx N*jpi 
 
 D v:i|5 n^to "inpn bpj;;. ^riNi prty? *rt D?*!}?^ *n 
 nin* 19^1 :D*rlSn-S tono N 
 
 ni "inrn *nm Ho^n ^HDi ?n oi 
 f nSn- 
 
 x3 : njn -inn Sj; p^?rrnH inp^n onypp 
 
 -vox HD IO^-HD ^xt DDN* 
 
 " " " ~ T : 
 
 ^ 
 
 t *n^ rnrr ^-i^^ 3 
 
 " ixn H 
 
2 2 1 ClIHESTOMATIl Y . 
 
 ptsrnt Dytf ^n^ npj;>_ px) pre* 
 
 i in 1 nr nn 
 
 i 107, 7. Note. 2 37, Note I. 3 94, 4. 4 In the East a 
 mark of respect and reverence. 5 83, 6. 6 const, st. part. fern, of 
 y\t , 7 I remain always the same, I am unchangeable. 8 With this 
 name the tetragrammaton HilT in the following verse is identical. 
 (See 18, I. Note.) The correct pronunciation of the latter was 
 Jahaveh or Jahveli, according to the Samaritans Jabe* 
 
 IV. The Proclamation of the Decalogue on Mount 
 Sinai. (Exodus 19. 20, 118.) 
 
 2 run ov 
 
 ? 3 inn 
 
 tow onvp? wtrj; *ig^ Dfi Nn op?? j NH^ 4 
 "D^ nni?) : ^KQt^ xiw on^j ^5 5 
 Jt-Sso rt^jp S DPVHI *nn?-nN op-joiri 
 n n^ o^rja nj^oo >Vrpp opx) : pn G 
 
 ax 
 
 JI ng>#j nin? n^-n^x S D npN^i 
 N* n^n n^ o-Sgt nirr -19^3 :ninr^ Dj^ 
 
 * 135^1 : rn o^n nnn-nNn^ D 15-11 oi^ irrj^ 10 
 
 vm n 
 
 D Dj;n-nc nS?:irn : 70 nn-Sj; Dj;n 12 
 tnv mo inn . jtitfr in 
 
ClIRESTOMATIIY. 
 
 nrn nan 5 73>n r|Wp3 rvrr 
 ttiiTO^ 
 
 #8*5 mjT v^j; 
 i9 6 prm rjin ipt^n^ip nn nxp 
 
 ti :Sip? ^^. D^riSiSin ! ^3-!^ ng^o 
 Sx nin j : *ioxS nxn 
 
 onv/p 
 
 1 ? : 7 ^ 
 
 n njpnn K :pN? nnnp 0.^3 n^i nnnp 
 
 "nin 
 
 x nin 
 
 9 : r- 12 
 
 3^1 ^331 n 
 
 p{jn-nsi DW 1 ^"^ nin* nj; o^-n^ ^ 
 oi^n^ nin? rp3 p-Sj; T3?*n 01*3 m-n D^n^N-S 
 12 ?w fon^ f j;9*p ^TiN) ^3^-n?? n?3 : intr^ 
 :rjS fro ^n ^ ninp^ non^ 
 
 D>JO 
 prnb n^jn ^1 Di;n xnn \&y r nnn-n^i i^ rr Sip nxi 
 
 29 
 
226 ClllMKrOMATHY , 
 
 an* rtnn roini D>nS#n ao D3fl$ 
 
 is 
 
 "ln the new moon, the first day on which the new moon i 
 visible. 2 On the same (the first) day. 3 The Sinai. 4 117. 
 5 ^31 !"! WO or fuller b^tl pp.3 Tj^JD (Jos. 6, 5.) to blow 
 the trumpet in protracted sounds, i. e. continually. 6 105, 7. 
 7 D>J3 face, then person generally, *J3 my person, myself. 8 Q""OJ^n 
 not Ho. but Kal = D"13J^ 9 ^ denotes here: as to, witli respect 
 to. 10 105, 4. n85, T 4. b. 12 102. 7. 13 118. 14 98, 1. 
 15 104, 2. 
 
 V. Moral Laws. (Leviticus 19, 14, 918.) 
 
 nin! ^^ trnp r ^3 vnn 
 (1*7fif nin? ^^ rto?to w 
 
 03^ ^^n xS npDD ^HJ 
 
 3 
 
 2^ ^7Vp : 
 oni* 
 
 ^313 
 
 nprny ^rix 73^ n 1 ?^ firrtib yytify ^T n ^ 14 
 0^9 n^7) S^D jnn xS njj? ^i trnn S^p_n 
 
 :nintis 
 
 :nin? ^ 
 txin v Nmx n nin 
 
 1 100, V. 1). 2 98, 1. 3 The inf. with suff. like the Seghol- 
 ate ^b sometimes has Kubbuts. cf. 45, 1. and 66, 11. 4 106, 9. 
 
GlIRESTOMATTIY. 227 
 
 5 ^y "Jpy to stan( * U P ayainst, D*1 the blood, i. c. the life, the 
 slandererer standing up against the life of the slandered (Ibn Es ra) . 
 
 6 !Dnj$ with accus. : to love in the widest sense, with 7 of the person: 
 to bestow love upon one, to be devoted to. (Fuerst. Lex.). 
 
 VI. The Priests Benediction. (Num. 6, 2227.) 
 
 DN "^ *vn "toN 1 ? n^ D-Stf nin -o-n 
 24 j se* 1 ! nirv ?"o? : onS 1 nioK Sao?>! ^?"n^ 1^511 rb 
 i3 nin* J 2 -r ? V:Q rnrv 
 
 1 105, . 2 52, 8. 
 
 Vir. Exhortation to love* the One God. (Dent, f>, 
 4-9.) 
 
 run* lyrrJK nin Vxiti* 
 
 ^33 33 
 vm 
 
 l Refers to DHDIH . 2 51, 7, 
 
 VIII. Exhortation to revere God and to observe His 
 commandments. (Deut. lO, 1222.) 
 
 n no 
 
 ^ nin? 
 
 H ^ris; nin^ jn : Tj DID? ovn TJ^P ^^ "vfi* vnpn-n^i. 
 15 ptrn ^ri3N3 pn : nrnt^-S:^ pjjn o^ n p^i own 
 
228 CIIRESTOMATIIY. 
 
 Doj;rrS:pp 035 DrinnN ojnr? ~\ny\ oniK rnq^ rnrv 
 
 2 01*3 is 
 
 tfn ^rt ron byrtj* nirr >3 nijM? 
 n> a*S) ens Nt^-N 1 ? n^ Ni T ^n 
 
 oin* 
 
 :j/n 101 -rn mi nj;n in arn 
 
 v n 1:0 ?i1 nin 
 
 1 Inf. of ^*^* cf. 30, 4. 2 as it is this day, just now. 3 81, 1. 
 4 92, 7. 5 84, 3. 
 
 IX. Appointment of Joshua to succeed Moses. (Joshua 
 1, 1-9.) 
 
 2 1 3 J^ in;-S^ rnrr np^i nirr 131?. n^ D nio nrrjst l \ 
 ;. Dip nnjri no H3U n^ o n ONb n^ 
 
 nin Djrr nnx mn 
 
 ; 1 ! 5 D>nnn p>st nnginw |D "iron 
 
 nvn n^s^rr 
 oj;ri-nN ^n nnx ^3 yow prrre 
 
 prp pi_ j 
 
 n^o 
 :rjSn np j 
 
 3 n^ni n*5o n-rn minn 
 
 
 
ClIRESTOMATHY. 229 
 
 1 102 Note. 2 73, 6. 3 86. 4 96, 2. 5 All the in 
 terior of the Phenician inland. 6 The Mediterranean Sea. 7 56, 
 2, 2. e. and 85, 4. b. 
 
 X. David slayeth the giant Goliath. (1. Sam. 17, 154.) 
 
 *!$* l rbitr ispNn npn^ Dp^no-n** D fipSs ispan 
 
 i : D^T D5t<3 n^-j^i rtDltr-pa won rnirvS 
 nnS iDnr nWn s w 
 
 np inn 
 ; n^nj J?DUI : rvri nisx tr^ in?^ rap 10^ n^ 
 
 G :vsri5 pa n^ pn^i v 
 
 7 Snj D^Sp^ niNO"^ in^p 
 
 sSjoc" rir)nj;p-S5\* N^p-n ioj?n. svjp^ ^H njyn N^I 
 
 nty*7)n DJN N*iSn nnnS^ n ^ WOT n^S onS nQN-n 
 
 : : - T -: T T : | -:~ T T v T 
 
 9 snhrh SDVDX : Stt inn ^\v D?S - n3 S^^ S DHDJ; Dpxi 
 
 11 yop n *^D nor tr^ -wri n ; n DI*O 
 
 n^p njn ^5^ ^^"13 Till : 
 ipr SiN % tr ^3 tr vm D^n rrjb 
 -nnx oSn 6 D^ n;in ^"!"^3 f 
 N^ nonSsa iD^n ntr N v nt 
 
230 (JlIRESTOMATIIY. 
 
 Kin Tin 1 : not? 
 
 :DV D tfriN D-TJTL 9 :riyrn og n *rw?$n Btyi : 8 DnS le 
 
 17 
 
 5fn-n^ tr ^n ^[533 in 05^ :a^e 
 
 ip? rji :nonss 13 unrn 
 V>];JD D sn-av -in 
 
 ^ n^ij; DOJH tr\v mni DDJ? 
 nxn on? -)T 
 
 nn n 
 
 * tr>Nn rvr 
 
 n. s x njn 1513 DJJH 
 N n-Sj* 11313 hnxi VPTN 
 
 I jNirr 17 im Nin nny w^j? no in ID^I ;nn^ 
 
 T : TT 
 
 nrn 1515 
 

 ClIKESTOMATJIY. 
 
 32 ^ra; 2 vty DIN- 
 
 35 inri 
 
 22 
 
 37 
 
 1T 
 
 231 
 
 ian : 
 
 roni nnK -#r>3 isj? Dnnp n-^n 
 34 v?^^ ?p!3j; n^n nj;.^ ^^^ n 
 
 nj?rr 
 
 HDH 
 
 :Drr D^ri nbnj;? t]iin ^3 Dr 
 TOI nrr 
 
 rrrrr 
 
 ^nj ynip fnri IHP nn-n^ 
 ? n ^ SJ;D lain-nj* nn Sji 
 
 1T 
 
 onk 
 
 Thorn 
 nn 
 
 nin? 
 njr 
 
232 CHRESTOMATHY. 
 
 rui nprten nirrS ^ niir M jw iiT rurai r 
 ^S Dnp-n rj^i p#bgi? Djr 27 *? irm :irv3 03 
 
 ")npn TH 49 
 Sj* i 
 n pjm - irnnK v^j; invo? ^n rjtpni 
 
 nrm 
 
 TPT 
 
 l 85, 4. 2 83, 10. 3 52, Note II. 4tf*y fat. 
 ceptionally WV cf. v. 24. 5 the oM men ; some read 
 D^P^ID to advance in days, years. 6 91, 3. 7 105, 7. 1 8 85^ 
 4. 9 105, 6, 7. 10 and thou shalt take a phdgc in return from 
 them, i.e. a token of their happiness. (Fucrst. Lex.) Use. V^jn 
 cf. Gen. 29, 1. 12 96, 7. IS fr. #n. -| was in this word 
 doubly pronounced. 15 ^*W}^ 16 22, Note. 17 an en 
 quiry. 18 76, 2, c, 19 D 1 ? ^ to lose heart, courage. 20 y^j? 
 refers either to Goliath, or to D1K, cf. Ps. 42 7. 142 4? 
 21 76, 4. Note or HK = with, 75, 5. 22 HTO, Hi. 
 53, 7. 23 117. . 24 83, 7. 25 rcgu i ar ^.^ " 2 6 f or 
 
 27 114, d. 28 9l f 2. 29 70, 2, d. 
 
 XI. Solomo s Wisdom. (1. Kings 3, 528.) 
 
 ?< nx-n 
 
 5 
 np 
 
p 
 
 Gil BESTOM AT1I Y . 23) 
 
 pi np#3 ^*b rjSn ig%3 Si-n npo ^ k s 
 ! njn Sn|rr nptin-n^ i^nptrni rjoj; 
 nx ^rtS^ rrjn? nngi : :n-tn 01*3 IN*D 
 bp 1 nj;^ ^NI *3^ in nnn T 
 ?$ nvDg 010? 
 
 :n-?n 
 :nrn 
 
 Sxtr 
 
 } HTD 
 
 : .* T 
 
 X ^^ nS 
 
 v v f : 
 
 ^ run ^5*13 
 
 n-in : 
 
 ^ K pan 0511 
 
 rjS *nn^ 
 
 n _ 
 
 nir D^ 
 
 nn^rn nNn N i^ ? 
 
 nn 
 
 :rv:n 
 
 npni 
 nn 
 
 npr? ^331 *nrr ^ 
 
 23 
 
 nn 
 
 n^n 
 
 30 
 
234 CHRESTOMATHY. 
 
 >3 xb rnpfc nxn nsr? ^31 Tin >^r 8 nj rnpK 
 rnrn CQ$3vr^ inp TJ^H n^i J TTPT <yy\ nan 24 
 
 n*i 
 
 nxri niypp nom *nn 
 
 ng^i rj^n jj;-n : lo n 
 ^p^_ : I^N* x^n inrvop K^ non 1 ! 28 
 
 l Inexperienced. 2 ^31 NV^ to go out and in, denotes me 
 taphorically the actions and conduct of a man. (Fuerst Lex.) 
 100, III. a) .4 101, II. 5). 5 88, 11, (c). 6 >~ para- 
 gogic rfttf . 7 An expression of humility for I. 8 94, 2. 
 9 In pause.. 10 34, 6. 
 
 XII. The happiness of the godly, the misery of the 
 wicked (Ps. 1.) 
 
 nin ming DN ^3 J ^ D^ ^31 
 
 01^ nn 
 
 :r?n 2J 
 
 p-iK 133-0$ ^ DT^n 
 
 * t T ; T 
 
 1 ^J^ N happiness; only in plur. construct in the%haracter of 
 an interjection : the happiness of the man ! 2 44, 5. 
 
 XIII. The character of a godly man. (Ps. 15.) 
 

 ClIRRSTOMATirY. 285 
 
 - 4L 
 
 TTi njn 
 
 l 83, 11, 2 107, 4. 8 Accusative, 85, 4. c) and 75, 2, 
 Note. 4 7 7^ Vp to bear slander upon his tongue, i. e. to slan 
 der. 5 The subject of the clause. 6 Inf. fr. yy~\ , supply 1^ to 
 do evil to himself, i. e. to his own hurt, cf. 3 Mos. 5, 4.: 
 
 XIV. Confidence in God s grace. (Ps. 23.) 
 
 ^tWl.niK33 :"iDru? N^ y^ nin in 
 3 ; iEC j; ? ^n 1 Dl^ $3 : ^Snr niip 
 
 nm nio rN* : 3 nn 
 
 1 To lead back, refresh (the soul). 2 Shadow of death = the 
 thickest darkness, cf. 91, c). 3 Abundance; in poetry often an 
 abstract noun takes the place of an adjective, = my cup is abun 
 dant, overflowing. 4 = ^3^>V as 1"] (Jud. 19, 11.) for -\y . 
 
 . XV. God s excellency and providence. (Ps. 113.) 
 
 rnrv DC? >n! : np^ D^ ns iS^n nin HDJ; i^^n n* iSSn 
 j? trp^mjpp tD^ijnjf! nnj;p rjnnp 
 own ^. m T n^ : DnrS?"^ D-J :niir 
 
 T ") 
 
2 3 C II R ESTOMA Til V , 
 
 1 106, 9 and page 17 Note 1. 2 I n f. with paragogic * in 
 poetry not unfrequent. 3 Barreness was considered among the He 
 brews a great .ignominy, cf. 1. Sam/ c. 1. 4 Accusative, answer 
 ing the question where ? 85, 4. or apposition to 3 = as a. 5 83, 10. 
 
 XVI. Israels exodus from Egypt. (Ps. 114.) 
 
 iiT nrvn :ryb D#Q ipj?!_JV3 DVT> <?P Sane> 
 : linx"? DD> prrn Din nan DTT : 2 vn WOD ^flfift iBnp? 3 
 
 T : .(.. ... - T - TT T - T .._ .. T . . :) T: 
 
 jo npnp onnri : iirm? son ptTD e 
 
 T V t> 
 
 vn *3|3rrn :pj rjisf ^.P p.^ n JIIN* T 
 
 1 57, Note. 2 The plural poetically, 82, 5. 3 Of. Exodus 19, 
 18, 4 Cf. Exocl 17, 6. 5 59 Note II. 
 
 XVII. Feelings of an exile in captivity. (Ps. 137.) 
 
 > SM ninn 
 
 Sn J nrnro 
 
 T T 
 
 6 ov n^ DHN* ^n nin^ n^r :>nrofe> 5 ^ 
 
 1 Refers to Babel, 2 Of the song = one of the songs. 3 Let my 
 right forget ..... to do its duty, or play on an instrument 
 
ClIRESTOMATTIY. 287 
 
 (Kimchi) 4 poetically = T]"l3tN 5 The summit = the highest 
 joy. 6 The day of downfall, misfortune. 7 Inf. Pi ; to lay bare 
 the ground TJD l - e - to destroy to the ground. 8 In poetry very 
 common, either for the city or the inhabitants. 9 Cf. 2 Kings 8, 
 12. 
 
 XVIII. The preciousness and true character of wis 
 dom. (Job 28, 12 28.) 
 
 \l&ft$ npft :nra Dipp l \ 
 
 T : - T : 
 
 15 : n^np np? ^$&\ xh] n^fin iwp jnr^ H?J? 1^ n ? kS ? 
 
 is non rci *ar 
 
 n 
 
 24 ^H O : npipp - njc j;n^ T 4 ^ni nsni pnn 3 
 
 2snn*7 nibT : S :n^n> DVJ^H-SD nnn to 
 
 20 : niVip r^rnS ^ni] ph Sp^"? intr j?:? : n^ps pn D:PI p T 
 
 gnN*^ rn Dix 10^1 rnnpn-b^ rn^n nison n*n i 
 
 28 -:! TTT : - T|T-: -: T -v: T : - : - T T T 
 
 1 94, 6 Note. 2 Supply the antecedent JO, 3 93, 6. 
 4 93, Note. 
 
 XIX. Judah is threatened for her ingratitude and 
 rebellion. (Isa. 1, 1 21.) 
 
 1 >p*3 p^ rn nnin^ rnn n^ p^-j? ^n;^ prrj 
 
 2 owm D pitf lyp^ : nnin! ^p in^prn^ rntj onv 
 s J;T pa ^^3 orn ^ppi*i) ^n 1 ?^ D 3? ^31 n ^ n : 
 
 n; xS b^ntr* v 1 ?^ DIDN niopi inp 
 
ClIRESTOMATHY. 
 
 p? DTvns p DO? D jnp jnj. pjj 1- i55 oy_ Nbn tt i 
 i t n5f^g mnx n u SNTJ^ . crnp-n^ way 
 )39 : TT a#rV?i 3 4r 0N vS? rnp 
 4 nrN il ? nntp ."opi nn^ni r^ bn/p tt-pN 
 Rnifl^ ojnj; npD? v D^V IN* : fo^ ro;n 
 :onr nD^rirjp noo^ nnx D^N onr 
 iiT Tp : nnr^ 175 ntr pp? n^Sp? 0*5?? n^p? ji vvn 9 
 
 v* rrnn 
 
 -:- : ^r: "_* : J ^ T~ 
 
 , ^..... ^. ^ 
 
 Nn nj;in 
 
 ,. U 
 
 . VK 15 
 
 D*pn DjH* y_ft& O^N n^&n ^Tn-*? 04 ogp 
 jnn ?Wi o^. "TJ.3P oj^S^p jn n^pr 
 13 iDn oirr ^5^ pon ntp N tosi^p 
 
 :v 
 
 nin? ^ 
 
 l 65, 5. 2 Upon what ? 3 Supply JTJ1 * with following *? to 
 become, 84, 1 : to become sick. 4 ^ (Kal in the form -jf) 
 5 = nl^^n^ . 6 05 = Ofi^ before me. 7 Apposition to n k \f . 
 8 Cf. 2 Kings; 4, 23. 9 Supply f)N^ to bear. 10 On the Ka- 
 mets of ^ see 18, II. 3 11 Inf. const, of Xt^lmore frequently 
 nNt^ and nNg>, 12 = 05^.5 inf. Pi., Tsere "becoming Chirek. 
 
 13 For iDrnn 39, 3. u Vio"5, 5. is su PP i y ^n. i 6 
 
 here reciprocal 26, 1. 17 85. 5. 
 
CHRESTOMATIIY. 239 
 
 XX. Description of the Messianic time. (Isa. 11. 
 1-10. 
 
 2 fin vSjf nmi :rri$> wn& T > u in 
 
 i njn nn rrvajn nv#. nn mgi ,10317 nn niir 
 ^* vry. njODS tfS i nirv 11x73 Mnnrn :nirp 
 n?iiTj D^I pnyg 05^1 : ri^v 
 vs DDtri px- 
 
 .:) : : 
 
 n^D^ni : VI^D nitt? pnj 
 
 : 05 ^i jfj ^31 wi ^npi 1^31 S^i ^7. n JJ-DJ; np 
 
 mi 
 
 : TOD inmp nn?n) ^ 17? D^IJ vv DV^J; D iby n^v *^> 
 
 1 His delight, fT^H with ^ to smell with pleasure, hence gene 
 rally to enjoy, delight in. 2 Pilpel of J?J^" 3 76, 2. c 
 4 Inf. of yT 30, 4, hence with following fUV , 5 HDD com 
 monly with ^j; , here with ^ , 6 86, 3 b. 
 
 XXI. Jeremiah s letter to the captives in Babylon. 
 (Jcr. 29, 4 14.) 
 
 ^utr^ ^xn^ Tt^x ni k sov nin? I^N* riD 
 pxi nun vips j ^^ i o^n? ^3 :n^33 pS^ n^ ^n^ 
 ^j o?^ 1 ? inpi ni^ 0^3 
 
 \ M 3p Dp IN^-N* xn^ ^ri^ nirav nin -JDN H 
 
240 CHKESTOMATIIY. 
 
 ?B>3 03*? D N9J Oil 
 
 na^D *zh ^ nin> IDN rl^D jninMo 
 
 T : - T T 
 
 i30?< 3^177 niton H^Y^ D3*fe *rioprji 03^^ 
 
 >3N n^s raparrn^ ^T N ? :njn Dip^n- k st 
 o?S nnS njnS xh\ DiW ntit^no nin : D^ oyfgj n^ n 
 
 :npn) 
 
 * Dne>p3i : 
 
 SffflaoVi4 
 
 i 49, 4, Note. 2 To be found by one i. c. to show himself 
 inclined toward one. (Fuerst Lex.) 
 
 XXII. The new convcnant. (Jer, 31, 3184.) 
 
 ^ o*N3 D<P T > nin 3l 
 S : nann nn? 
 
 SixS DnS ^n 
 
 o ^3 ninrn$ 
 ^ D^ 1 ? nbo k s* 
 
 J 96, 2. 2 1 although, 118. 3 For nSN . 4 9 ^, 4 
 
ClIRESTOMATHY. 241 
 
 XXIII. Resurrection of Israel by the reviving Spirit 
 of God. (Ezek 37, 1 14.) 
 
 rnrr rrr UNW nirr-T nrvn 
 
 rum rrnp M 
 3D-TN-J3 Stf iptf] :IN 
 
 n^n n^\*n niovj^S nin? ^ i 
 
 wSyiii DHU 03^ ^n:i :DJ-)rn nn 035-^39 
 
 ip ! nSy T it^ni DHU djg 
 9 nnrjiNt) D>x-|3 N33n nnrrS^ ND^n ^ 
 ?1 2 nnn N3 ninn ^v rnrr i 
 
 11 ipNn :iNp INP n| ^n oriT. npjn vm nnn 
 
 "n k \* nra ^gf n^n nin; : 
 DSJTO W3ni : M py o 
 13 ni?;r?i D^nnn-n nn nirv j- 
 
 i For n-JSnpn, 2 80, 5. 3 gc. H1H\ 4 77, 3. 5 Dat. 
 Commod. $j ) we are so entirely cut of. (Fucrst Lex.) 6 Ap 
 
 position to Dipnx 
 
 31 
 
VOCABULARY I. 
 
 NOTE. The numbers refer to the exercises. A num 
 ber with preceding p. indicates the number of the page. 
 
 3X 38, 35 J"l*p"TJ$ 96, 32 fX 86, 7 J-pX 38, 16 
 
 *T3tf 31, 8 p 58, 14 <7JX p- 86, 6 ;>VX 34, 21 
 
 66, 12 ty-jX 42, 18 JfX Hi. 98, 17 fi^X 120, 1 
 
 68, 11 *HK 60, 25 JfX f - 38, 11 p^X 86, 16 
 
 38, 23 3J1N 52, 1 irhfX P- HI Ptf 31, 18 
 
 "" T "* 1 V I * *" 
 
 Pi. Hit. 76, 1 pX3 44, 1 
 
 54, 28 
 X 56, 31 2JTJX \ fix 21, 7 f-j*X 98, 28 
 
 p. 109 HHK 42, 17 HHN 80, 2 J^>X 24, 6 
 
 T -: T v 
 
 104, 36 ^jnjx 40, 40 *TJffX 82, 22 ?1^>X P- H2 
 
 J5 k X 50, 9.98,27 -jx 88, 10 H1HK 29, 17 rjx HO, 13, 
 
 p. 134 *-jx 38, 22 ttlK 36, 5 120, 14 
 
 ~ T 
 
 26, 7 ^vjx 21, 2 S^h^HN* 40, 48 ^^N P- HI. HI 
 
 -: T : - 
 
 p. n. ^X 62, 15 ^f-fiV Pi - 38, 30 *lpX ib - 
 
 40, 48 ^!|X 90, 39 *]|-|X 66 27 W^?3N 62, 46 
 
 40, 11 QJp iX p. 196 npX 62, 24 ^pX 40, 16 
 
 p. 68, 6 j-j^X 44, 38 HHX 48, 23 ^JX 27, 25 
 
 * p. n. pX 44, 25 fhDK 29, 5 ^JX I 08 , 12 
 
 5 8, 9 ^Jj-JX 90, 8 nnpN 50, 31, pX 60, 17 
 
 nX 78, 17 fp-JX P- 125 54, 47 *^X 44, 20 
 
 104, 20 -)yjx p- 117 jinx 56, 51 ^X21, 9. 102, 19 
 
 31, 17 *VJX Hi. 100, 30 QftX 90, 15 D flVK 27, 9 
 
 " T v: 
 
 HO ^)1X 23, 4 *X inter J- 36, 14 ^in^SjSt 98, 14 
 
 23, 22 H1K c. p. 163 yx 76, 10 ^X 29, 7 
 
VOCAEULVRY I. 243 
 
 100, 8. ntrK ?u 4. HI. HU. 122, 12 
 
 - T 
 
 Pi. 96, 9 62, 22 -)1^ 21, 6 
 
 62, 29. Pi. ttK62, 49. 58,21 JiSp& N 94, 9 &ft 88, 50 
 
 I | : : - 
 
 76, 16 f|N conj. 31, 22 -)gf tf Pi. 70, 16. JD p. 96 
 
 P- 150 13 ^K 42, 35 74, 14 -yifQ 26, 45 
 
 50 > 19 HSK P- se, 2 nir>o n^st jra 62, 21 
 
 38, 8, 40, 8 n^gJN 54, 3 36, 21 ^fft 34, 12 
 
 N P- 147 D5N, ..3 102, 29 *]#N, ,,,3 52, 2 nD!J 36, 13 
 
 *.* : Y "*; ~~ "" T 
 
 HI. 62, 32 rh^x 118 n n^ N P- 148 n^? 62, 9 
 
 104, 11 D.np.^ 29, 29 nnK P- 86, 6 J^g 38, 36 
 50, 26, Vi N beside,by,at. SlOH^ p. 1 1 1 , III |g 52, 4 
 
 pi. es, 4 nijrv^p-injnji i^ p. 125. nyg ss, 40 
 
 26, 28 n^iX 106, 16 n^3 m > 12 
 
 v : * T 
 
 114, 5 n^ P- 195 -KO f. P . 171 n^ 21, 5 
 
 86, 10 Jto-jK 96, 35 ^ f. 56, 1 HM 90 > 22 
 
 27, 6 rm c. 62, ss ^^ so, 6 ^5 P . 190 
 
 84, 31. nX 26, 30 1J.3 64, 1 S^S? 106, 25 
 
 56, 11 nnN 98 > 22 1^5,0^84, 39 QJ^g p. n. 
 
 44, 14 T|1X Hi. 62, 45 ^-53 Hi. 58, 3 -JJ^J 29, 21 
 
 Ni. 62, 30 rp 58, 20 !|rta p. 30 ^3 p. 190 
 
 3i, 33 Q^X 94, 1 HDH3 f- 92, 38 n 29, 20 
 
 T : T ; J 
 
 52, 30 p c. 23, 2 JJJ3 f. 78, 19 HID 90, 1 
 
 96, 12 -HN 36, 17 ^13 27, 20. 88, J^3 p, 112 
 
 -T IT:- 
 
 TD5^ P- 19 &$ c. 21, 3 40. Hi. 88, 58 S^90,37. 98, 15 
 
 TDK P- no iTf K f. 29, 3 na 88, i -)j;_5 PI. p. 74, 3 
 
 14 nt^ N p. 159 na so, 10 ^v? p- 194 
 
 l14 Hi - 88 48- ^ 62 > 44 
 
244 VOCABULARY I. 
 
 pv? 78 > 2- r > n^M P- 169 4 IDJ 4 . rran 110 * 4 
 
 1p3 c. p. 164 -- p. n. 29, 31 nSlDJ f - 1> * 7 "ill 21, 12 
 
 \rr T , 
 
 -Ijp 23, 11 pyrfcl 86, 12 ^Q| 56, 5 J-||-n HO, 23 
 
 wn3 Pi. 56, 19 ^^ 21, 11 n c. 42, 24 ?n 27, 35 
 
 | - T V - I " I 
 
 nC M P- H2, ! rnDJ U6> 14 !}^H 19.68,17 jn 118, 7 
 
 T ) T - -: - T IT- 
 
 "I? p. 125 ^ p. 117 315 26. 39 ^ 44, 22 . 
 
 80, 4 Sin* 48, 30 n^P- 51,5 H^. 98, 11 
 
 > 39 SiJ 4 ! pi - my ^ f - 66 , 2G *h*i 9G 45 
 
 64, 11 56, 22. Hi. 60, 32 ^ 29, 9 SSl 86, 6 
 
 , 42 S"!H 108 ^ n ?H5 an axe tlSl P- 159 
 ?" T 
 
 xn^f- 120,20 rnT[| f. si. 520 ^ PI. 64, 9 n^ f. 86, 34 
 
 n? f. 21, 10 -n^l c. 82, 5 Q^ p. 134 Q^ 48, 21 
 
 |34G, 19-29, 1. -l-?3 108, 15 Jgf jj p. n. fip^ p. 179 
 
 Pi. 64, 8 U 27, 49 1 fi^ p. 30 II 
 
 f. p. 134 ^ people ^^ 27, 21 QQ^ 86, 13 
 
 f- 27, 3 Su ^ 26 nn^ i P- 117 HJ;OT f. 52, 5 
 
 106, 4 W3M 82 , 2 fiS^ P- H7 pfcfQ^ 94, 2 
 
 TT IT T : I v v - 
 
 3 78, 8 -)U 29, 30 p^ 44, 18 fiJH 62, 14 
 
 T T | T ft - 
 
 p. 109 tt-l 42 , 1 ")D1 88, 17. Pi. pH P. 181, III 
 
 - 
 
 44 , 33 44 > 21 34, 14 pp_-| p. 186, 6 
 
 - 147 J5 P- 1G7 8 *i;n 34, 2 -ii 21, 12 
 
 ; S^3 P- 125 #y| 42, 11 rj^ Hi. 74, 2 
 
 f - 70 - 7 H^ 90, 13. Hi. ft 36, 4 ^ 21, 1 
 
 34, 3 98, 5 ftft f. 40, 15 ^^40,36.46,13 
 
 H2, 10 filSjJ f. p. 164 9ft 76, 9 f^ Pi. 56, 44. 
 
 T ITT I- , 
 
 Pu. p. 195 3^ 94 p. 44, 1 
 
 i 21, 4 S_Sj| 86,. 4. 122, 9 I) 4 ! P- n. Jgfrj p. 44, 1 
 
 - 31, 4 DJ 26, 34 ^ 70, 6 fi-| p. 117 
 
VOCABULARY 1 . 245 
 
 n T rnr loe. ~ coin 21, 17 
 
 San 29, 8 n_3? 27, 8 jnj 44, 23 Sin Hit. 88, 32 
 
 mn no, 19 npr 96, 27 jn? 23, 12 Sm 21, is 
 
 1 23, 27 fin? 104, 7 nit 114 > 17 npin 58, 43 
 
 ^ 49 nnr 20,12 n pn 94,20. ...3 
 
 >n 88 6 Hit, "in? Ni- f - 54, 29 ^n Ni -P- 188 9 26, 31 
 
 -V - T T T 
 
 60, 24 Hi. 58, 30 ^fl 23, l4 - j1?(l 56, 33 
 
 23, 26 nn? 58, 31 108, 31 nWl 23, 32 
 
 !9 S^l? 84 I 8 p3ll H 2 34 p?n 50, 25. Pi. 
 
 vjn 42, 2 rV? 116, 4 ign Hit. 62, 37 56, 23. Hit. p. 70, 4 
 
 jin 56, 10 if 108, 3 ign 52, 17 p?n . 109, N. 
 
 nn 26, 38 -\y Hi. 34. 25 {1*131} 21, 15 K^n 80 ? 39 - 
 
 S^n 21, is -qt 27, i tygn 8 35 Hi - ib - 40 
 
 J^n 98, 29 fhD? 104, 5 ^fl 86, 23 X&n 56, 16 
 
 f 46, 7 {J^ p. 125 rjjin 106, 22 nBfl f - P- 164 
 
 26, 4, -)pr Pi- 56, 56 ^n 86, 22 ^ 23, 13 
 
 Hit. 122, 2 ^t P- 131 "Un P- I 69 , b D^PI ib - 24 
 
 ^n P"- 26, 5i. pyj 48, 29 nnn p- 102, N. i nTn f - ib - 
 
 Hit. 60, i npj;? 90, 17 nnn 23, si so 
 
 in 86, 20 nfi? f- 62, 36 ^"in 62, 33 n*n to l ive - Pi- 
 
 T V V - T T T 
 
 in a dv. 40, 27 Iffi 64, 5 pin 98, 2 to make to live 
 
 T I } *" T I 
 
 n^n 34 > 8 ip? 29, 26 *nn n2 , 14 S^n 76, 2 
 
 Tjgn 62, 2 wip? 104, i Bnn pi - so, 12 S^nn^94, 28 
 
 in 29, 28 npr 114, 8 ^in 23, ie ?i^n p- n 2 
 
 | | -T T T 
 
 ,n 72, 17 It 60, 26 Hn 21, 16 nSn Pi- 90, 14 
 
 T V T T 
 
240 
 
 VOCABULARY I. 
 
 D?n 40, 9. Hit. 
 
 60. 8. Pu. 106, 11 
 Djjfl 23, 10 
 
 np?n f - 34, 10 
 
 *7n 58, 2 
 
 21, 19 
 
 23, 18 
 P- 170, d. 
 
 ? 104, 27 
 p- so, 2 
 23, 20 
 p- ^ s 
 
 Pi- 80, 8. 
 
 Hi. 86. 43. 
 
 Sn 96, 37 
 Hi. 64, 21 
 Pi. 74, 6. 
 
 Ni. 62, 13 
 
 n us, 5. Hi. 
 
 - T 
 
 108, 21 
 
 6 7 
 
 78, 21 
 
 D 44, 40 
 DP? 34, 21 
 
 npn p- 73, 7 
 
 non 62. 47 
 
 nan 110 12 
 27, 47 
 
 30, 25 
 
 P- 96, 9. N. 
 it. p. 46, 6 
 
 78, 28 
 
 50, 2 
 
 ion P- 171 
 
 T " 
 
 -),pn 21, 20. 
 
 120, 22 
 
 jn 96, 16 
 P . 102, N. 
 p. n. 
 j f - 94, is 
 
 38, 27 
 56, 30 
 40, 33 
 31, 15 
 Pi. 70, 17 
 adj. 88, 2 
 
 T 
 
 nan f - no, 6 
 
 T \ 
 
 |>gn 36, 7. 52, 21 
 
 jn 96, 25 
 
 82, i 
 
 112, 13 
 64, 7 
 
 p- 170 
 
 23, 15 
 
 ioe. 17 
 
 80, 28 
 
 . 54, 32 nn p. 175, G 
 
 92, 16 JTJin 96, 32 
 
 p. 164, 1 fn 110 > 5 
 
 np r n f - 
 
 i nnn 86, 47. 
 
 86, 38 B 
 
 npn 02, 23 n^to P- 103, 7 
 
 I ~ T T ~ 
 
 HO, 26 ^tO 48, 10 
 
 * 26, 42 tn Ho. 58, 15 
 
 ~ T 
 
 "4, n nj;?to f - P- 145 
 - 24, 3 ^niD 8 1 
 
 T 
 
 p- 102, N. -HD pi - 74 s 
 44 ^ 26. y^ 26, 46 
 
 94, 24 rOlft f - 50, 5. 
 
 P- 109, 3 54, 24 
 
 12 0, 8 ^Q 36, 11. 62, 10 
 p. 174 ^1D P- HO, 36 
 44, 41 f|-|^ 96, 11 
 Hi. 62, 16 ft ft 94, 25 
 
 98, 7 So 21, 21 
 
 - 
 
 88, 11 H^D P- 117 
 
 nnn p- 73, s NVJ^D p- 109, 3 a 
 62, 25 ptp 54, 12 
 
 ^ n Ni. 62, 17 Qj;jj 42, 7 
 Pi. 56, 37 QlgJ 54, 30. 
 
 n^ n 90, 24 
 
 i.p. 169,3^ Hi. 84, 10 
 
 23,, 3 ^ p . 2 8, 4 
 nc*n p- n? 4o ; 35 
 
VOCABULARY I. 247 
 
 . 
 
 $y Hi. p. 178,5 1(T 106, 24. ^W P- 111,1V t^T 84, 17. Ni. 
 
 pur:)* 23, 8 "HIT 54* 46 pH^ i b - 84, 19. Hi. 94, 11 
 
 I - : . 
 
 yy 84, 30. Hi. TPP 29, 13 y^ Hi. 84, 35 7tf*^?! 26, 6 
 
 ib. 41 SlT Pi- P. 194 pVJ. P- 91 X ^n^V P- 112 
 
 -fr p, 60., 4 3 84, 12 n>>> 34, 23 ty, -#> 38, 34 
 
 -V f. 21, 22 p 38, 31 ^ 112 > 9 Dg^84,5. 27,32. 
 
 HT Hi. 92, 9. Sb> 40 > 37 ^\ Ho > 84 > 2G Hi 84 40 
 
 31, 32 -iV 29, 19 nnp! 94 > 3 nyw\ 26, 17 
 
 WT 34, 5 TlS> P- 92 ^ 7 Dip* P- 1U 1V ^^ 14, 25 
 
 *^ -T I - T I : T 
 
 PV abbreviated S^> p. 92 t*n> p. 92 ?^> 84, 38 
 
 T f - T I |-T 
 
 from H1iT 7F P- 109 > 3 a IPJ Hl 84 46 yW\ HL 29 22 
 
 D.T 58, 44 tOlp^.P- IIMV.^JT P 173 , 3 j;^> 68, 8 
 
 n^in* 21, 23 D* 26, 50 XT 68, 3 ^^ P- ^ 
 
 T : T "T 
 
 HiJT 26, 16 po* f. 76, 6 XT adj. 34, 28 ^^> 31, 16 
 
 " 
 
 T T 
 
 rmirr ) nr Hi. 92, 14 HXT 84, 3 om^ so, s 
 
 |TT =(48, 5 . T : 
 
 jn:v ^ pr P- 9 2 7j;?T 21, 29 pry 94, 10. 
 
 p. n. FID* Hi. 84, 15 -p* 42, 23 Hi. ^JO 26, 36. 
 
 | - T -T ~ T 
 
 DV 21. 24 -)D P- 179 96, 7 Hi 80, 34 
 
 - T 
 
 Q^P> p. 148 ny 84, 29 n*V P- H3 TDD 56, Ni. 8. 
 
 TV 72, 4 fiW 52, 33 HT Hi. 92, 4 Pi. 9 Hit. 60, 27 
 
 I TT I "T TT 
 
 f. p. 117 pj; 40, 47 D WVT P- n - "IDD ac J- 26, 8 
 
 116, 3 ^pj;* 48, 32 HT 86, 14 HDD 102 , 30 
 
 48, 19 rny> 43, n inn* 21, 25 -1^3 27, 43 
 
 98, 32 *inp. ^40,19 y*\> p. Ill, IV ODD Pi - 56 28 
 
 T: T ~ T 
 
 54, 18 rw 34, 21 WT f- 27, 16 -)DD Hi. 60, 34 
 
 v v T : 
 
 ^^ 26, 19. 27, 26 *ry p. 131 H3 86 27 
 
 15 W Ho, 84, 20 |TV p. 161, 3 ] 
 
248 VOCABULARY I. 
 
 96 21 *vtop p- 190 > 7 fjro p. 131 54, 13 
 
 23, 21 Jjyj p. 113 JVjfp p. 116 I? 1 ? 48, 36 
 H4, 19 *JJ3 n. Gent. nrO Ho. 86,49. HpS 46, 1. Pi. 
 
 |!)3 88. Ni. 19 Pi. C^3 f. 72, 16 ^ 74, 4 
 
 ib. 24. Hi.il>. 21 ND3 27, 34 ^, ^ 26, 1 noS nftS68, 
 
 T T T T 
 
 Ho. ib. 54 HD3 Pi- 92, 27 ft^S 48, 27 -f^ 64, 2 
 
 *#!|3 62, 3 ^D5 26, 13 DtfS 112, 21 ^ 64, 4 
 
 3D 78 > H So? 4 8> 35 S|?. 26 37 *|^ 102, 23 
 
 TO 34, 18 Sp? 60, 35 33^ 31, 19 ^jpS 27, 5 
 
 i- 64, 17 Cp") 26, 11. p^ p. n. >> 56, 20 
 
 T ", 
 
 D Pi. 64, 23 34, 11 rp Hit. 60, 21 ftf} 1 ) p. 90, 5 
 
 T I ~ T |- T 
 
 13 40,28. 40, 41 DJJ3 88, 39 n^ 1 ? f. p. 117 ^S 42, 25 
 
 T : | - T 
 
 94 fj3 f. 42, 31 p^ p. 163, 3 p^ c. 50, 11 
 
 2 104, 34 t|)3 104, 2 ^S Hi. 68, 6 f^ Hi. 58, 8. 
 36, 30 *-|2 Pu. 56, 54 ^ p. 192 
 
 ~ T J 
 
 27, 12 on^3 120, 15 rn 74, 12 -j^p 26, 9 
 
 H6, 8 n^D 31, 12 ^ p. 171, 2 HNO P- 150 
 
 78 12 D"]3 31 ^ 1 nS 84, 13 DTJXtt ib. 
 
 P. 170 rro 48, 14. so, rviS us, 3 npixp p. 179, i 
 
 S? P- 167, 118,8 20 Ni. 76, 37 K^S^S^P 192 ^INO P- 162 
 
 nvS 114, i nn?n"i-) 48,14 p^ m. se, 28 o^rxD 96, 47 
 
 58, 25 S^ 3 P- 110 ? 36 pS Pi. 108, 32 ^Ntt 27, 27 
 
 s 40 19 S^ s 40, 22. Hi. nirS f- ss 17 ?xo H. 64, 15 
 
 - T T I T 
 
 p. 47 58, 4 Df-^ c. 42, 22 DNO 42, 19 
 
 Hi. 100, 7 3H3 50, 13 Vph 92, 15 3^^ P . Ill, l 
 
 ~T |- T ~: - 
 
 76, 21 sro P- 109 s a nS>S 24, i -JTOJD p. lee, s 
 
 J3 29, 6. 27, 41 DHp 90. 7 J^>7 p. 170, 3 flp?/? 36, 23 
 
 J3 ^ 66, 8 njTO 48, 20 -gS 10, 30. 1V39 100 > 27 
 
VOCABULARY 1. 
 J10 108, 5 rm 26, 43 -qa 72, 3 rjpD 42 > 3 
 
 n|yp f. p- 141 rap p- in, i n5opp.65,N. op/p p. 95, N 
 27, si Sip P- 173, 3 ##50 p- m, 2 -rspo l02 ^ l3 
 
 26, 47 
 
 P- 182, I 
 
 Sino 102, 14 104, 3 
 
 29, 23 
 
 122, 19 
 
 f- 56, 14 
 
 86, 32 
 44, 4 
 
 8 o, 5 
 jnp ss, 24 
 
 82, 24 
 
 > no 36 > 9 njno 98 34 
 noinpf-p- 173,3 nppp 31, 24 
 r?Vno 112, 35 Diono 46, is 
 
 : - 
 
 HDiDH/P f - P- 141 niDPTO H2, 37 070 Pi-to deliver, Jj;g 
 -)HP 100, 5 tnp 80, 36 
 
 nino 5 33 ^no 98, 33 
 
 T : T T 
 
 p. n. ornno p- 33, N rjp 24, 9 
 96, 32 nntr f - 4 -> 5 nDS f. p- 
 
 112, 17 
 
 P- 141 
 
 . 39 
 f. 40, si 
 
 - 88,55 
 
 -jCj)DO 98, 21 
 
 T : 
 
 ? 94, 38 
 
 P . 129 
 102 , 21 
 
 42, 10 
 
 Ni. to escape 
 
 HI. 58, 7 
 
 f- 90, 41 
 
 GO, 22 
 
 "^72, 5 
 
 88, 27 
 
 i, 21 
 26 > 48 
 
 40, 2 
 
 nj;iio P- n4 rj^ rjp p. 125 rro^p f - 96, se *\&yg P. 125 
 i. ss, 33 nnnp us, 22 nipSp p- m, 3 n|?o f - HG, 23 
 70, 14 ntso 42, 9 o^npSo p- 117 ^30 88 
 
 V - -- |T : v : 
 
 40, 40. nt^p f- 86, 37 n^pf-nG, 19 nnipp p. in, 3 
 
 120, 3 DJftOO P- I 77 , 3 nStrb 
 
 T T : 
 
 O P- !G3, 8 
 HO. 9 
 112, G 
 P- 175, 6 
 
 88, 15 
 
 70, 15. Hi. 
 
 . p. 191,3 25 
 24, 8 
 23, 5 
 p. 37, 4 
 
 O f- 102, *> 68, 16 
 
 : v | 
 
 X^O 80, 19 
 
 T T 
 
 P- H7 JT2TO f- 78, 27 
 
 T - 
 
 31, 9 MI^PH JP! 120, 6 
 f. 58, 24 36, 6 
 
 ty o 114, 4 ^30 G G, i niyo 26 21 
 
 104, 32 
 
 98, 8 
 
 p- 
 
 94, 21 
 
250 VOCABULARY I. 
 
 DHVP f - P- n - *] 48, 18. I u. jTd:i 122, 14 |-|J 34, 21 
 
 p. 112 56, 13 ft^ Hi. 38, 15 Sptf Hi. p. 162, 6 
 
 - T ~ t 
 
 c. 23, 7 %yyft 102, 11 X 23 26, 3 SpM 98, river, 
 
 t : T - - 
 
 p. 117 f3^9 40, 46 "J^NytDSJ 98, 4 94, 34 
 
 26, 10 , ^&ft 31, 30. Hi. ^53 108, 9 J-jSpn 96, 22 
 
 120, 13 70, 20 ^ 102, 26 Qrt} Pi- H4, 10 
 
 3 84, 49. 96, 44 ^ 104, 15 H^J 56, 52 Hit. 64, 16 
 
 gp9 98, 23 il^ 9 P- HI, 3 yi} Hi. 82, 20 pnj 82 7 
 
 88, 43 ^EtT 9 H2, 31 *jjg Hi. 92, 39 n^ PO 100 > 29 
 
 p. 125 rn/JJ^ /p f. 116, -j;g I 7 88, D7ntTT3 96, 10 
 
 58, 37 18 20 H^ 27, 15. Hi. 
 
 T T 
 
 96, is nns& Df-p-i4iruJ ios, 2 92, is 
 
 p. 141 05^ p 48, 13 *|^ p. 109 j;^ 38, 10 
 
 f. 64,- 26 npt^D P- 166, 2 M} Pi. p. 190, 7 fl^JJ p. 169 
 
 3, 23 n*!^ 9 76, 29 j;^ 104, 23 ^^J 82, 13 
 
 p. Ill, 1 f|9 46, 3 y^j p. 173, 3 tfto} 31, 5 
 
 104, 26. ^np 27, 46 fjjj Ni. 86, 21 p*j p. 113 
 
 106, 6 P^P 27 29 ^3 82 33 ^?^ Hi 92 25 
 
 Hi. 86, 46 ^HD 44, 9 -J"U 40, 7. 104, Hllbj P- 14, 1 
 
 - T - T T : 
 
 52, 25 nSrO f - P- 108, 1 30 ^p} Hit. 60, 23 
 
 102, 10 pjnp 52, 22 rnj 82, 37 *)^J 76, 12 
 
 31, 7 *nj 82, 14 1*)3} 70, 11 
 
 J - T : T 
 
 98, 1 JO 48, 2 -)pU 24, 7 nSoj 40, 10 
 
 T T T T T ; 
 
 78, 23 ntiO 27, 42 p[^ P- 175, 5 J)DJ Ho. 82, 21 
 
 T V T - T 
 
 26, 5 Q^ 29, 24 f-j!fl p. 99, 10 HD^ Pi - P- 177, N 
 
 66, 2 jp^ 76, 25 Qft 100, 13. Hi. rrpj p. 109 
 
 52, 18 V^ 82, 8 120, 2 J^p^ 27, 30 
 
 10-1, 24 fOJ 31, 11 ^ij 50, 8 nnjj 84, 83 
 
VOCABULARY I. 251 
 
 4, 42 tf*{M p. 173, U nSSb f - 5o > 24 52, 28 3 58, 42 
 
 82, 30 Q>*3 50, 17 J^D 106^ 15 TJ?1DSlJ* 1 04,33 
 
 i 86, 44 T[CO 82, 6 ftSp Pi. 56, 48 -fjf 78, 1 
 
 42, 30 S^ 82, 29 *VJD 52 > 29 Ni. J-f-fj; P- 169, b. 
 
 36, 16. 44, no^ 90 27 54 > 41 rn# f- iu, 24 
 
 29 pj 82, 34 njp P- 60, 5 nj*. 114 > 12 
 
 84, 9 n^ 94, 35 H#D 70, 4 "ny 27, 24 
 
 53 31, 14 2713 110, 16 tip P- 189 > 2 *j?|y Hi. 108, 33 
 
 33 34, 22 ?n3 38, 38. 100, *t^p 42, 13 -fty 26, 4. 34, 
 
 } Ni. p. 62, 6 26 m*)D ^ ^ 1^- 46, 12 
 
 >J c. 54, 15. D ^D 44, 5. Pi. Sty* 44, 7 
 
 82, 11. 112, 25 X2D 84 > 17 92, 41 H^IJ* f - 40, 21 
 
 1, 28 :nD 86, 35 -)i]p 52, 9 n^lj? f - 96, 26 
 
 ;^ p. 109 j|?)D Ni. 86 48 JHD 100 ^ l2 50 G . 120, 21 
 
 ^ Hi. 110, 15. TJO 90, 11. 106, QnpPi.p. 184,6 pj^ 56, 55 
 
 Ni. 54, 35 8, 29 ^HD Ni - 54 , 38. ft\y 104, 28 
 
 50, 10 DID 27 > 45 Hit. 60, 18 tr\y 24, 4 
 
 60, 14 Hi31D f - C8 18 y Y^\y ^4, 21 
 
 82, 12. Ni. niD 34, 29. Hi. ^ c. 90, 5 -]y Pi. 56, 46 
 
 74, 16 88, 38 -f^J* 92, 44 -yg; 88, 13 
 
 ib. iyB p. 113 13^ 42, 36 fT};!!? P- 112 1 
 
 . |x ,j ^., 32. Pi. HDD 120 > 19 1DJ* 50 32 - 62, ty 27, 28 
 
 I - T T ; ~ T 
 
 96, 6 S^D 78 , 22 41 fj; 31, 25 
 
 ij 26, 20 ntop 94, 18 HDj* P- 112 yy *> 27 
 
 44, 2 nSo Pu - 90, 6 njJ/J 78 26 HTJ7 91 , 9 
 
 11. Pi. 58, 38 nSp 2 9, 10 iy 26, 25 ^ *]$ 52, 8 
 
 T ~ ~ T " T 
 
252 VOCABULARY I. 
 
 62, 26 70y 38, 41 y^y adj, 80, 24 y$Q 96, 17 
 
 27, 13 ^ftj; 5G > 40 !ny 102, 9 E0 Ni - 54 , 7 
 
 p. 169, b pj; 40, 4 ^y c. 23, 6 Q1H) p. 113 
 
 72, 9. Pi. ppy 86, 15 D 3*)]? 120 > 4 HB 46. 14 
 
 70, 18 *}fty a measure yiy 94, 33 >^ 78, 24 
 
 f. 80, 32 ^y Hit 60, 16 rn*)J f - 114 * 13 HD 46, 10 
 
 f. 38, 14 J-gj; 90, 18. Pi. jnjf p. 160, d H3 54 , 17 
 
 23, 19 120, 17 Q fty p. 129 ^H?) 48, 37 
 
 f. 34, 1 J-fJjj; 56, 26 Q?ny 62, 39 J^) 108, 7 
 
 92, 12 vjj; 108, 28 Q-m p. 148 nSi) 58 , 11 
 
 T T - V 
 
 27,33.50, 23 ^y ib. 29, in p. *?r\y p. 173, 3 tf} Pi. 68, 14 
 
 27, 37 ^y 56, 32 ^y p. 131 p^j 114, 22 
 
 " T V .* 
 
 r 94, 5 JJJJ 23, 28 jjnj; 70, 5 ^fc^f 86, 19 
 
 114, 3 &yy Ni. 62, 42 ^j; 23, 9 J) 54, 33 
 
 " T V " I V 
 
 ) 56, 39 W# P- 47, N H^ 3G . 8 H^3 90, 42 
 
 114, 6 ^rm 29, 10 SkVnSW 96, 1 Q^3 48, 28 
 
 T T T "I T 
 
 Elit. p.70,4 rn^y p. 113 }&y p. 192, 2 ^"Sj^ 80, 16 
 
 38, 7 W 50, 21 *V&y 23, 17 pfDiD 12 ; 5 
 
 f. 21, 27 ygy Hit. 60,30 f^n^j; the tenth Hpg 90, 19 
 
 62, 11 fli^J? Go > 33 Jjyj; 96, 24 S]/i3 34 ^ 4 
 
 c. 31, 6 n^y f- 5r >, " 4 *\&y Hi. 62, 19 ^) 1 8 , 19 
 
 51, 3 QV^ T 98, 20 Hit 60, 4 J-J7J?*? f - 122, 5, 
 
 40, 38 ^W 26, 29 ^j^ j; 52, 11 DJ? c. 108, p. 
 
 ID ... 90, 43 Q^j; f. 56, 45 ^y c. 42, 12 163, 4 
 
 38, 21 ^y p. 189, 4 nfl# 31, 31 D*PJ^3 P- I 74 4 
 
 ^ 100, 28 ^r\y 48, 12 a y^ 38, 26 
 
 p. n. *)p^ 82, 35 p|^j p. 188, 9 *)) p. 171, 2 
 
 96, 32 fhpj? 04, 9 ^jsjrj Hit. 64, 6 1p) 4~2, 5. 48, 1 
 
 64, 25, ^ 48, 38 Ufe 78, 9 Hi. 58. 16 
 

 VOCABULARY I. 
 
 DH1p2 40, 25 y 7V?y p. 47, N 
 
 np3 Ni. 72, 11 nXf-P-182>VI tfpy 90, 29 QHD P- 160, c. 
 56, 47 J^y c 27, 19 fift f. 76, 22 pQ-jp_ p, 109 
 p. 109, 3 a JOy 86, 31 yjy 104, 10 Hp Pi. 72, 8 
 
 NI. 54, 21 jTjjoy rhir *T#y 108 > 27 ^ ip 58 > i 
 rns 94, 6 100, 20 rnyy f. p- m, Snp so, 22 
 
 n} 78, 6 v^y 96, 4 III HID Pi- 90, 32. 
 
 T | T 
 
 JH3 74, 15 "qy 94, 23 pyy p. 160, c. *7jp 40, 6. 52, 19 
 
 rijn a title f pny 27, 2 p^y c. 26, 49 nip 26, 2. Hi. 
 
 the Egyptian H ^ lV 96, 32 ^j)l3y P- 112 to raise up 
 
 kings. piy 44, 13. Hi. 11^^ c - ^4, 16 ttOp 40, 32 
 V"-^ 82, 4 66, 21. Hit. 60,11 ?y 36, 12 ^p Ho. 58, 26 
 
 -H3 8G ^ 28 piy 48, 15 J7"T.1.5y P- 28, 4 pp 27, 39 
 
 \Q 98, 24. p*)iy p. 112 -py 38, 9 ^p 96, 2 
 
 100, 10 niV pi -P- 169, c. -jy f. 40, 17 p^p 104, 8 
 
 166, 5 Qiy p. 117 HTi f- 60, 19 ^?p P- 96, N. 
 
 4j p. 169,. b. ^*jy 94, 20 -)^y 60, 13 Pi. 76, 34 
 
 3 54, 44 -fly 31, 23 ft^y 60, 20 Jl77p f - a curse 
 
 52, 16. piny P. 109, 3 a p nap f. 120, 9 
 
 62, 34 pfiy Pi. 74, 3 ^p 116, 10 |p 104, 19 
 
 3 f. p. 117 p^y f. 54 ilTDp f - 34, 6 ftjp Pi. 80, 30 
 
 j-\g 50, 1 *vy 76, 24. 86, 36 ^p Pi. 56, 53 ^p 118, 14 
 
 |j p. 112 TV 34 9 |/*^p 46, 8. Pi, HiOp f- 62, 50 
 
 (5 66,9. Pi. rf? Hi. 66, 20 76, 15 J-f^p 70, 1 
 
 102, 15 oSy 24, 2 -Qp 46, 2 n,3p 96, 41 
 
 66, 25 HID/V f - 54 ? 37 Tip p. 96, N mj?p f - P- !66, 6 
 
 ^D 62, 40. ySy f. p. 131 n"lp 84, 25 
 
 : T "It 
 
VoC.ABrLAKY I. 
 
 f- HO, 8 ^ 88, 34 3JH to hunger 
 
 P- 109 3 a rttO 48, 3 Jn Pu. 88, 37 y\ adj. 42, 21 
 
 07, 40 tTtfl 21, 28. fn 98, 25 fftjn p. 112 
 
 54 > ~ 5 106 > X &*n Hit - 88 47 Hjn Hit. 90,30 
 
 Pi. 78, 18 a &\>n 4G, 9 nn P- n. HJjn 27, 18 
 
 44, 24 ^\n r 44 17, pn H2, 23 nijn. P- 179, 4 
 
 44, 39 fc jo 112, 3G ^pH 40, 23 Q^l Hi. 86, 17 
 
 50, 30. 86 pp JO 29, 4 pini 82, 23 pjn p. 47, N 
 
 to name JTgW"! r - 1() 0, 1 DH"! ?" ^2, 30 J^ p. 110, 3 b 
 
 36 10 - 92 D 9tH- 102 G WT- 94j 37 ffl 
 
 Ni. 118, 10 many ripp 58, 40. Pi. 86, 40 
 
 " T 
 
 P- 187 ^*l - r >4, 36 70, 10. Hi. 58, 19 t\y*\ p. 169, a 
 
 46, 6. Pi. 3^ 100, 4 3H 58, 23 #-\ 80, 20 
 
 70, 9 DD^SG, 2. p. 96, Qpn. P- 1]2 NiD l P- 179, 2 
 
 P- 117 9, N Tin 88, 28 H^D Hi. 90, 35 
 
 3 80, 13. JlDni. f. P- 150 D31.34, 24. 58, H^lp. 192, N 
 
 9 GG 7 nnn 72, 14 HI. 12 nvn 84, 22 
 
 P- US 86, 33 ^D1 82, 42 Jj^-) 104, 14 
 
 96, 18 p-j 52, 23 V?"J 84, 4 TOT. 66, 15 
 
 100, 22 ^ f. 23, 23 nOI f - P- 163, 3 V\n p. 96, N 
 
 V V T T ) - T 
 
 38, 37 Q>S.n P- 174, 4 ntDI f - 58, 34 ypft 44, 36 
 
 f- 62, 12 [3^ P . 170, 5 QE1 p. 96. N. yy^ 96, 29 
 
 - T - T |TT 
 
 f- H2, 5 nil 48, 16. Pi. j^OT p. 169 a. -|p^ 42, 14 
 
 I - T - T I - T 
 
 Hi. 58, 36 56, 17 nHI f - 52, 6 y^ 58, 32 
 
 tf p p. 173, 2 till 74, 17 pn Pu. 88, 36 yH 122, 10. 
 
 108, 34 3V) P- 177, N. j;-) 26, 18 Hi. 66, 22 
 
 1g> p 70, 13 n^ 82, 38. 23, njH f - 34, 16. y$-\ 29, 25 
 
 . p. 108, I 25 54, 2. 56, 18 J?H 88 
 
 12- 4. Pi. 5 t,20. I02,27rn 108, 35 
 
VOCABULARY I. 
 
 f. 54, n. n ripe? L G > 31 prtnE 120, 10 n?ttf 54 , 34 
 
 ^ nSpfc f - 64, 22 -]jp p. 125 ^B> pi - 26, 41 
 
 52, 32. 84, JVPIDJP 106, 18 TIB 56 . 2 (33^ Hi. 64, 13 
 
 48 $yp 62, 43 HB> 86, 45 OSS p. 134 
 
 i, 30 $yp 90, 28 JOB* 44, 9 pjp 40, 42 
 
 . p. 118 3?|Bf 29, 11. Hi. I-JB? 42, 4 
 
 T 
 
 58, 18 88, 14, 29 ^jp 27, 38 
 
 c. 27, 23 pB? 102, 16 *nW 1> 15 rQilW f - 108, 
 
 !|B> 36, 22. 38, 3 *)jp 38 > 4 JTlE 90, 20 36 
 
 T T 
 
 54, 26 rniP 66, 24 ftiB>* 27, 44 DlSt^ 31, 10 
 
 T T ( T 
 
 110, 7 p ^^ H4, 14 (-[^ 40, 26. Pi. 
 
 26, 35. Pi. TJNB 26, 44 1;3lB 48, 26 80, 14 
 
 - T T T 
 
 106, 27 SlN^ 66, 11 IB -JB? 42, 26 f(1^ p. 117 
 
 76, 20 \XtP 64, 18 niB 92, 23 rr^jp Hi. 58, 10 
 
 f. 80, 33 J3NB* P- 47, N. 1HB> 42, S3 Q SB Pi. 56, 3 
 
 92, 40 Itf B> Ni. 98, 9 rUl^ P- 103, 12 rhw 52, 31. 
 
 - T T T - T 
 
 38, 25 HD^ P- 103 > N - DOC 98, 13 104, 13 
 
 >8, 39 JO^Bf 27, 48. 96, S(l^ 26, 32 fTJ^Bf 58 ^ 27 
 
 122, 6 20 ppB 96, 46 ufaw 114, 20 
 
 ^3Jp Hi. 70, 3. *y*3f 86, 26 IHE Pi, 108, 24 DlE S^ P- 112 
 
 "* T : "" T ; 
 
 58, 29 D^3^ 96, 39 inill^P-HO, D^ 54, 39 
 
 108, 10 yytf Ni. 76, 5 3 b Qjp 26, 52. 34, 21 
 
 Hit. 60, 12 jftjp 12 0, 7 nng f - 31, 13 I^B* Ni.54,45 
 
 p. 159, 1 13^ 54, 9. Pi. rjt3B> 62, 48 J-JBE 46, 4 
 
 P f. 27, 14 p. 46, 2 rrVW 5 14 Sx ? lDE 58 ^ 6 
 
 T 
 
 92, 33 HIE 44, 42. 33 B> 44, 8 H^VJC f- 56, 43 
 
 44,32. Pi. 120, IS S^B P-ilO^b Q^B^ 23, 1 
 66, 17 ,-\3t! ^2, 6 -vi-W 102, 24 
 
25 fi . VOCABULARY I. 
 
 62, 18 "ip^ 44 > 1 fi^rjifl ^ i2 G O, is 
 
 38, 12 npsr HI. 90, so rpn, rpro 66, noup f. 112, 33 
 
 P- n - Opjr Hi. 58, 22 14 ^fi Pi. 64, 27 
 
 , 21 nroin f- 56, 25 njjn HI. P . 105, a 
 
 28. 56, 24 -pp Pi. 64, 24 rOJJIfi f - 66, 23 
 
 29 WVl^ 112 > 32 
 
 !69, a ^n p. 187, 2 
 c. 86, 11 Wjy p. 44, 3 H^IH f- 26, 22 ffyjpp f. 122, 7 
 
 , 5 rrw Pi. p. 75, 4 nSnp f- no, 2 t^gn K. 72, 10. 
 f 94, 36 nn^ 31 20 n|rrp D^pP Pi - 106 19 
 
 11G 3 I 1 bntT 108 . 6 56, 6 Hipp f- 78, 4 
 
 ~ T T 
 
 nr^ f. 86, 25 pn^ 44, s. nnn 52, 24. ss, n^p^f.i 10,10 
 
 DW^ P- 117 8 n 43 - P 102 12 JP? 102 8 
 
 nv^ f. 48, 39 iTNfl f - 88 51 n^nnn P- ne n3ltr 3 ypfi 
 
 ^rrr T -: - 
 
 nj;^ p. 102, 8 rnNp f. 78, 5 JQ^ P . m, n 48, 24, 26 
 , 16 ixn P- 1^7, 7 tri^n 76, is nrp^n f - P- 
 
 - 62, 6 n 108 ^ 4 - Pi - !73, c. 
 
 nn 68, 15 114, 18 TODf! f - P- 
 
 " 
 
 ^ 42, 28 nn f - 1 } - 11G on 34 ^ 27 175, 3 
 
 s 8 , 5 *irin P- so. a oh p. 176, 5 njjnp f - 
 
 50, 22. DlHp c. 38, 17 Sl^P P- 1U > HI 12 
 
 54, 22 nSnn f - 4, 23 -ran 76, si nn^n P- 
 
 T : T T 
 
 Hi. ss, 33 n^in f - P- i 59 3 o^pn IOG, 23 n 
 
 106, 14 nnin f- 27, 10 npn 42, 32. 
 
V C A B U L A R Y II. 
 
 m - 
 
 n - P- m - 
 
 m. a pool 
 fr$ Hi. to be red 
 N ^eddish 
 Hi. to enlighten 
 
 N(1 to look 
 gracous 
 m. sign 
 m. a belt, girdle 
 
 ac * v - ^ ac ^ 
 * n. p. m. 
 
 adv - 01- P re P- after 
 behind 
 
 id- 
 
 in. a ram 
 f. oak 
 
 n. p. m. 
 e U> cubit 
 a maid servant 
 f - faithfulness 
 
 n - P- m - 
 think, either 
 
 followed by ^S^- 
 
 or not 
 
 i. to gather to- 
 
 gether 
 
 ^l D5N n - P- 
 
 n- gentile 
 -.- 
 
 to weave 
 
 1^ interval (space be- 
 tween tvyo things), du. 
 
 ^ m. length 
 
 length oflife 
 P^- dunghill, 
 dirt-heap 
 
 Pi. to guide, di- 
 rect aright, to make 
 happy ^ 
 
 p N ( fr - Iw^N not 
 used, fortune) hail! 
 happy! 
 
 3 
 
 ^3 n " P- of a 
 city 
 
 Hi. cause to enter 
 J!Q Hi. to know,, to un- 
 derstand. Hit. to mark, 
 attend to something 
 l - to ^ e despised 
 
 T 
 
 interj. that, 1 pray 
 
 a champion who de- 
 cides between two 
 armies 
 
 DflS D*3 n P* of a cit Y 
 ^1^3 m. the first bom 
 
 : 
 
 /t^^J to be lord over 
 
 intr. toburn, tr. to 
 consume 
 /^ Pi- to split 
 
 valley 
 
 i - to seek demand 
 H")3 to choose, select. 
 
 Hi. to raise up, 
 make high 
 m. height 
 m. district, terri- 
 tory 
 
 $ mighty, hero 
 H m crystal 
 J Hi. to enclose 
 
 a kid 
 34 
 
258 
 
 VOCABULARY II. 
 
 a company of HI!"! to stretch out h!)|f to quake, to writhe 
 
 exiles 
 
 lin * lift U P? with 
 
 i*ltn to see, especially 
 
 T T 
 
 MJJ m. a stem 
 
 0^3 to elevate, to honor 
 
 a vision, hence to 
 
 ")fJJ to cut in pieces, 
 
 07*1 a d v - hither 
 
 prophesy 
 
 divide, Ni. to be cut off 
 
 H^n with 7 or with 
 
 ptll arrow, fil/lp (1 
 
 s$V| f. a valley 
 
 two accus. to change 
 
 thunder-flash 
 
 *y_ n - P- 
 
 IHn t conceive, to 
 
 T T 
 
 jnff^ to be strong, with 
 
 1 T 
 
 pjj m. a sinew 
 
 be pregnant. 
 
 JO to be stronger than, 
 
 T7J n - P- m - 
 
 6 
 
 i. e. to conquer, Hi. 
 
 - : T 
 
 
 
 ^OJI m * Bulrushes 
 
 3fc$f m. a wolf 
 
 to lay hold of, to seize 
 
 7}OJ1 rn - a weaned child 
 
 3^ to flow 
 
 ptn a - p?n strong, 
 
 T 
 
 
 ITT | T 
 
 3J2TU n. p. m. 
 
 n^lt anc ^ Hit ^ a harlot 
 
 violent 
 
 "|j| n. p. of a city. 
 
 "1^ intr. to be bound 
 
 NDn s i n ^ 2 ) the punish 
 
 n 
 
 about, Ni. to turn 
 
 ment of sin 
 
 "Ol rn - a thing 
 
 T T 
 
 aside 
 
 ItDn a shoot, twig 
 
 11 adj. sick, ill 
 
 |"|^3f Hit. to cleanse 
 
 f]*ft f. a living thing, 
 
 T ~ 
 
 T T 
 
 T ~ 
 
 1^1 to draw, as 
 
 one s self 
 
 animal, beast 
 
 T T 
 
 
 
 water from a well 
 
 jT^^Of f- glass, crystal 
 
 *T||1 m. the palate 
 
 )7l to pursue hotly 
 
 l^f to remember 
 
 0/n Hi. to cause to 
 
 - T 
 
 - T 
 
 ~ T 
 
 Jl espec. the pi. 0*0*1 
 
 Jpf m. the beard 
 
 dream 
 
 T T 
 
 1 | TT 
 
 
 
 blood-guiltiness 
 
 ?pf an elder, chief of a 
 
 ^>o?n m - flint 
 
 ijn ^ fr. JTP Inf - 
 
 T " 
 
 family, tribe or city 
 
 Y /n ^ ( n iy du. 
 
 ITT . 
 
 knowledge 
 
 t^*")t m< seed, children, 
 
 D^V /n) li n J hip 
 
 yn f. id. 
 
 posterity. 
 
 p7p7 adj. smooth 
 
 pi with 3 , to tread, 
 
 n 
 
 T^^On m - a violent man, 
 
 e. g. a way 
 
 n*vQn ^ stripe 
 
 a robber 
 
 
 T - 
 
 I 
 
 /l Pi. to anoint. 
 
 L^Dn to saddle, Pu. 
 
 /On to have compassion 
 
 " T 
 
 n 
 
 to be bound up 
 
 10n m - bitumen 
 
 nj"J to meditate, think, ] 
 
 &V"tn the new moon 
 
 10n to daub 
 
 with *J of the object flfj n. gent. 
 
VOCABULARY 11. 
 
 259 
 
 to Sllffer want 
 ijn adj. free, exempt 
 from taxes 
 
 the half > then the /^ Hi - to 
 
 to be content 
 
 - a hole "iN! m - a river s P e ~ 
 
 n - P- of a to P of cially the Nile 
 Sinai ^P^* n - S ent - 
 
 to a uake to Si* or SDV a he-goat, 
 
 i< to 
 
 fresh - 1 m child 
 
 bo * e - a 
 
 child 
 
 Hi. to suckle 
 
 m - 
 dation 
 
 ^ ad J- beautiful 
 > Hi. to lead out, 
 
 tremble 
 
 to be kindled, 
 with fttf the anger 
 was k. 
 
 m. a piece, a slice 
 
 pi - to upbraid, 
 to scorn 
 
 f - reproach, 
 
 hence 
 horn 
 
 to be dry 
 
 ram s - to carry out 
 
 ^ Hit. to set or 
 place one s self, to 
 
 stand firm 
 
 ^ precious, dear 
 
 *Y to throw, to shoot, 
 as an arrow, Ni. to 
 
 shame 
 
 f. side, ^H T 
 a side, i. e. bank of 
 the Nile 
 
 > to regard, to have be shot 
 respect, Hi. to cause |"|*V m - nionth 
 
 u*n to think, with 7 to know, to inform 
 to count as, to regard QV by day, 2) daily 
 
 trn to have Alight onv n - P- m - 
 
 in one, to love, with^ IH ^^ n - P- m - 
 
 g ent - 3D Hi - to do well 
 
 . father-in law to do good 
 
 ut - nn* 1 to be HID 4 Ni - to dispute 
 
 terrified, oonfounded. 
 19 
 
 with one another, Hi. 
 
 Hi. to cause to 
 sit, to dwell, to let 
 
 dwe11 
 
 \ n - P- m - 
 
 * to slee p 
 
 n P- m 
 
 f - honesty, piety 
 Ni. to remain 
 
 to determine, to re- Hi. to let remain 
 
 to sink, to penetrate prove, rebuke, 1*VV " P- rn - 
 
 dd J- ^ a r b eaut f ll l vb^ to prevail over, to -j 
 
 m. the ,)od. best overcome 
 
VOCABULARY II. 
 
 heavy, numerous to fight 
 
 "TiD^ m - honor, majesty Vffp m. oppression 
 b>33 m - a young sheep tyfy to speak unintel- 
 [ 33 m. an oven 
 I D adv. thus, |-J3^ j- 
 
 hither and thither 
 m. a helmet 
 
 Ni. to be prepared, 
 
 ligibly, in a foreign 
 
 tongue 
 
 Q^ m - lightning 
 
 Pi. to gather up, 
 to collect 
 m. a gleaning 
 
 f - Ethiopia 
 an Ethiopian 
 
 3 vessel, apparel, 
 
 instrument 
 
 Ni. to be kindled, 
 
 m. might, power 
 f - opening, hole 
 
 * a knife 
 Ni. to he despi- 
 sed , rejected 
 
 (of compassion) KlD*J m- the going 
 
 f. a wing 2) the down, setting of the 
 skirt of an upper sun, hence the west 
 g arment -1/P m - a " upper gar- 
 
 3 f. palm of the hand, ment 
 
 7*n the sole of the /I lp f- a measure 
 foot t ir?D Pi - to hasten 
 
 55 m. young lion VlO to circumcise 
 
 L f 
 
 S 71 *J P^p. before ^^ 
 
 . to be weary, over against, towards 
 
 to dislike, loathe -y| Hi. to change, to 
 - flam e alter* one s self 
 
 f> the glittering D^ lO m. a social circle 
 
 nW Pi- to kill, slay 
 Ni. to make war, ftpftQ f. the post of a 
 
 m. a song 
 m. equity, im 
 partiality 
 
 m. pain, sorrow 
 f. a stroke, a wound 
 
 m. a stumbling- 
 block 
 Sn Pi. to fill 
 
 JQ f- a night hut 
 
 f. kingdom, dominion 
 tD to number 
 
 /P * rest, ease, 
 ^ water of refresh- 
 ing; residence 
 
 ft m. a weaver s 
 
 T 
 
 beam 
 
 D f - a f"nt, cast, 
 
 ^X idols 
 
 m. a track, way 
 
 f - a round ram - 
 T - T : " 
 part 
 
 a little, 
 
 only a little, i. e. 
 almost 
 
 m. a spring 
 p (f r . n ^ } what is 
 above ^-3 above 
 
VOCABULARY IF. 
 
 upon 
 
 from above 
 
 f - ( nl y P L 
 
 f - arra y> aw a dwellin g 
 generally grassy pastures 
 
 - the forehead fifcO to commit adultery 
 
 f - a g reave npX,3 f - a complaining, 
 
 JTT: 
 
 m. staff, stick outcry 
 
 f - a field of cu- #^) Ni. to prophesy 
 cumbers "|JjJj prep, before, over 
 
 m - a si g ht with against, opposite to 
 
 V the view 
 to ^ e rebellious 
 
 to oppress, to ex- 
 act a task from any 
 
 m, a falling, espec. one 
 
 a fatted calf 
 n**"to n - P- ^ a ^ ^ 
 
 T * 
 
 in Jerusalem 
 
 TWO to draw out 
 
 n^ n to extend, to draw 
 I 
 
 m - possession 
 
 m - a bearing 
 m> second 
 
 t- a PP !)rt > 
 staff 
 
 m - weight 
 
 ra - drink - 
 a feast generally 
 
 DHD m - uninjured 
 mb ( on ly du - 
 
 I V 
 
 the loins. 
 
 to thrust, expel 
 
 a n ble, prince 
 
 to <^ r i ve (beasts) 
 
 to lead 
 m. (pi. Q^. and 
 
 river 
 
 - p anther 
 D} m - a standard > 
 
 banner 
 
 HDJ ^- to tr y> P rove 
 to breath 
 to be overspread, 
 Pi. to dash in pieces 
 Ni - to quarrel 
 to watch, guard, to 
 besiege 
 
 m. branch 
 pure, innocent 
 
 to ra ^ se U P 
 Q^f) ^ to accept the 
 person, i. e. to have a 
 friendly regard, with 
 
 . 
 
 7N to be gracious, with 
 or without following 
 to lift up the voice, 
 
 to rest, Hi. to cause to utter, speak 
 
 to rest, to set, put 
 
 down, place. 
 JJJJ n. p. m. 
 y!)^ to move to and fro, 
 
 be shaken 
 - a - 
 
 conduct 
 
 D^ to leave, (in 
 
 - T 
 
 charge of any one) 
 
 to lead astray, 
 to deceive 
 
 m> usur y interest. 
 
 i.to turn, 
 . to lead, back, to go back 
 
 D*OD m> a circuit, adv. 
 
 . T 
 
 a. prep, round about, 
 around 
 
VOCABULARY II. 
 
 m. thicket 
 
 - burden, task 
 P ure gl<l 
 fl xJD f- peculiar prop- 
 erty, treasure 
 Pi. deliver up 
 m. flags 
 
 to turn aside, draw 
 near 
 
 *J*D m - a sapphire 
 7pD to stone 
 JT1Q f - a turning away 
 (from the law, fr. God) 
 
 y 
 %y m. darkness, thick 
 
 T 
 
 doud 
 
 smoking 
 to oppress 
 m. he-goat 
 
 m - corps,; carcass 
 as soon as 
 
 Pi. to glean 
 Ni. to be hidden, 
 Hi. to hide, conceal 
 to stand 
 
 f - n - P- of a cit J 
 J-Jj]7 to testify 
 
 m. humble, meek f 3 refined gold 
 
 m. pi. wood, i. e. p\1J03 f. topaz 
 
 sticks for fuel ^ 7iD Hit. to pray 
 
 - T 
 
 m. bone f\} to turn, with S^ 
 
 festive assem- to or towards 
 bly, a feast-day b\33***i) because of 
 
 to bind 
 barren, sterile 
 
 D m - P earls 
 
 m< carved image, 
 
 to become dark, or idol 
 Hi. D"lJT a <lv. at -|p to think of, with 
 
 f - work , labor 
 with ^ pref. be- 
 
 cause of, ^IDJ^D? for 
 the purpose that 
 Hi. to cause to pass 
 f - assembly, con- 
 gregation 
 
 71J7 m - c hi l d ^ 
 boy 
 
 y to leave, desert ^ 
 n - P- of a oity 
 y Hi. to bring up, 
 to offer 
 
 evenng 
 
 m. the willow 
 
 a y" n g lul i 
 bullock 
 
 ^ 
 
 bear fruit, Hi. 
 
 tp look after 
 *}Q m. with the art. 
 H3*1J^ f - security, pledge 
 
 i - to make bare, 
 uncover 
 
 to set in order, to to make fruitful 
 array (a battle,) to 
 
 - foreskin 
 m. neck 
 to fear, tremble 
 to smoke 
 
 f - young- cow 
 
 " 8 ent - 
 
 m - a iw^/e ber- 
 ry, Vhich Jails off in 
 the vintage 
 
 3 t() stretch out. 
 iy*) to transgress, to 
 
VOCABULARY II. 
 
 sin, with *} ^D inward part, 
 
 - an adder 2 m tne midst 
 
 y^fi near, kindred 
 Hi. to make sue- Q"p to cover 
 ceed pp m - horn 
 
 m. wool H ^pb P f - the scale 
 
 f< a cry for help of a fishj of an ar " 
 
 n - P- f - mor 
 
 to hide 
 
 m - a basilisk 
 
 263 
 
 to be hard Hi 
 to harden 
 
 to be hostile to 
 adversary. 
 
 m. grave 
 adj. holy 
 in. helmet 
 
 to stand firm, en- dren 
 dure, Hi. perform, con- *^^ 
 firm 
 
 f - incense 
 
 D a -K^P m - corn 
 roasted 
 
 Pi. to sling 
 
 m. a sling 
 
 to bu 
 
 to look out, choose, 
 to perceive, Ni. to be 
 seen, to appear 
 
 f - red coral 
 great grand-chil 
 
 Hi. to cry aloud 
 
 to mn " Ho to 
 
 quickly 
 
 adj. wide, broad 
 
 to bathe 
 HL to contend > to 
 
 conduct a cause 
 
 ^]3^ T to be . tender ^ li - 
 
 mid faint 
 DO^T. to tread 
 y^\ . badness, wick- 
 
 edness 
 J^"| m. companion, 
 
 friend 
 
 to feed 
 
 ^ Hi. to cause to 
 lie down 
 
 to tread down, 
 
 * e - to s ^ ander 
 
 m - tne watering 
 trough 
 
 Hi - to smel1 with 
 
 to enjoy the odor 
 
 f - abundance 
 
 " P- m - 
 
 Hi - to do evi1 ^ to 
 act wickedly 
 
 52^*1 an earthquake 
 H^ to be loose ^ Hi - 
 to slacken, to let alone, 
 forsake 
 
 D*"T*1 n - p. of a station 
 a uilt one 
 
 "possessor, master 
 
 to divine, spoken QH to be high, Part. 
 espec. of false prophets Q^ high, Hi. to lift 
 
 n - P- of a city 
 to put, Hi. with 
 
 > bestuw 
 
 i - lo act 
 
VOCABULARY II . 
 
 to cause to prosper 
 TO^ Joyfl glad 
 f - lip* bank 
 m- one left, rem- 
 nant 
 
 to burn 
 
 to ask, demand 
 Dl WS & to ask after 
 the welfare, to salute 
 
 to carry away 
 captive 
 
 f - captivity 
 
 to turn the 
 c. i. e. to remove it 
 m. staff 
 
 m - 
 
 an ox fyyy adv. the second 
 
 Hi. to corrupt, time 
 act wickedly pgf Pi. to inculcate, 
 
 Hi. to sing teach diligently 
 
 m. a song DDt> to plunder 
 
 Hi. to cause to lie, y&yy? to amuse one s 
 to lay down self, to play 
 
 m. a gate 
 Hi. to make low 
 m. a weight 
 a coat of mail 
 
 m. vanity, false- 
 
 Hi. to cause to re- 
 turn, with ^^^ to 
 
 answer, Pi. with fctejj 
 to refresh 
 
 f - a cr y for hel P 
 
 ty to rise early, Hi. 
 D^Tt adv. in the 
 
 ; 
 
 morning 
 
 . welfare 
 wit h *|* to stretch 
 
 - T T 
 
 out 
 
 m. a table 
 
 m - peace-offering plunderer 
 to draw y^fift -\ m 
 
 grand-children JlpS 
 
 pf) to determine by 
 
 measure, to weigh 
 
 waste J-|^-j to hang up 
 
 to understand 
 n. report, rumor 
 to guard 
 scarlet color 
 
 f. an ark 
 
 m. a robber, 
 
 -\ 
 
 J f - es P ec - the 
 cocws worm 
 
 p. n. m. 
 
 ^ desolation, 
 
 f- a form, an 
 image 
 
 exchange 
 the sheath. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 OF THE ELEMENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 PAGE. 
 1. The Alphabet 1 
 
 2. Division of Letters 3 
 
 If 
 
 3. Vowel-Letters and Vow- 
 
 If 
 
 el Signs 3 
 
 4. Sh va ? 
 
 5. Composite Sh va 8 
 
 6. Patach Furtive 8 
 
 7. Dagesh and Mappik... 9 
 8. Syllables 10 
 
 9. Accents, Metheg, Mak- 
 kef 11 
 
 10. Distinction of Kamets 
 and Kamets-Chatuph . 18 
 
 11. Distinction of Vocal 
 
 and Silent Sh va 19 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 Peculiarities and Changes of 
 
 Letters and Vow eh. 
 12. Changes of Consonants 20 
 13. Peculiarities of the Gut 
 turals 23 
 
 14. Vowel Changes 23 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 15. Servile Letters 26 
 
 16. The Prefixes n^ D 27 
 
 17. The Article 28 
 
 18. The Prefixes ^->y\ ... 29 
 19. Cases of Nouns and 
 
 Pronouns 32 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Of the Pronoun. 
 20. The Personal Pronoun 34 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 21. Nominal Suffixes 36 
 
 22. Demonstrative Pronoun 38 
 
 23. The Relative 40 
 
 24. The Interrogative Pro 
 noun 41 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Of the Verb. 
 
 25. General View 44 
 
 26. Signification and Cha 
 racteristics of the Con 
 jugations 45 
 
 27. Inflection 47 
 
 28. Classes 47 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 The Regular Verb. Explanation 
 of the Second Paradigm, 
 
 29. The Preterite 48 
 
 30. The Infinitive 51 
 
 31. The Future 52 
 
 32. The Lengthened Future 
 
 or Optative 54 
 
 n 33. Vav Convorsive 55 
 
 34. The Imperative 57 
 
 ,, 35. The Participle 59 
 
 36. Niphal 61 
 
 37. Piel and Pual 64 
 
 38, Hiphil and Hophal... 67 
 39. Hithpael 70 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 Tlie Gutturals. 
 
 40. Verbs Pe Guttural.... Tl 
 41. Verbs Ayin Guttural. 74 
 35 
 
266 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 42. Verbs Lamed Guttural TO 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 The Suffixes of the Verb. 
 In General ............. 78 
 
 43. The Preterite with 
 Suffixes... ............... 79 
 
 44. The Future with Suf 
 fixes ...................... 80 
 
 45. The Infinitive with 
 Suffixes .................. 82 
 
 46. The Imperative with 
 Suffixes .................. 83 
 
 47. The Participle with 
 Suffixes .................. 84 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 Irregular Verbs. 
 
 48. Verbs #" ............. 86 
 
 40. Verbs N"^ ............. 87 
 
 50. Verbs f" ............... 89 
 
 51. Verbs V ............... 91 
 
 52. Verbs $y ............. 94 
 
 53. Verbs \ r y and vy ... 98 
 51. Verbs pV 1 ? ............ 101 
 
 55. Verbs Doubly Anom 
 
 alous ................... 105 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 46. 
 
 58. 
 59. 
 60. 
 
 61. 
 
 02. 
 
 63, 
 
 In General. Formation 
 and Inflection ......... 108 
 
 The Gender ........... 113 
 
 The l^ural and Dual 116 
 The Construct State 119 
 Rules for the Inflec 
 tion of Masculine 
 Nouns .................. 121 
 
 Declension of Mascu 
 line Nouns ............ 122 
 
 First Declension..... 123 
 
 Second Declension ... 1 24 
 
 PAGE. 
 64. Third Declension 128 
 
 65. Fourth Declension... 130 
 
 66. Fifth Declension 133 
 
 67. The Formation of 
 
 Feminine Nouns 138 
 
 68. Declension of Femi 
 nine Nouns 138 
 
 69. First Declension 139 
 
 70. Second Declension... 140 
 
 71. Third Declension 143 
 
 72. Fourth Declension... 144 
 
 73. Irregular Nouns 147 
 
 74. The Numerals 149 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 Particles. 
 75. In General 153 
 
 IP-^LH-T II. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 The Essential Parts of a Sentence. 
 
 76. The Subject 157 
 
 77. The Copula 158 
 
 78. The Predicate and its 
 Agreement with the 
 
 Subject 159 
 
 79. Verbal Arrangement 161 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Syntax of the Parts of 
 
 Speech. 
 
 80. The Article 162 
 
 The Noun. 
 
 81. Gender 164 
 
 82. Number 164 
 
 83. The Cases. Construct 
 State and the Geni 
 tive 166 
 
 , 84, Dative.. . 168 
 
CONTEXTS. 
 
 PARE. 
 
 85. Accusative 168 
 
 86. The Absolute Case.. 170 
 
 87. Apposition 171 
 
 88. Duplication of Nouns 171 
 
 89. Substantives used in 
 the place of Adjec 
 tives 171 
 
 90. Adjectives 172 
 
 91. Comparison 172 
 
 92. Numerals 173 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 93. Personal Pronoun.... 174 
 
 94. Demonstrative 175 
 
 95. Interrogative 177 
 
 96. Relative 177 
 
 97. Reflexive and Recip 
 rocal 178 
 
 98. Other Pronouns 179 
 
 The Verb. 
 99. In General 180 
 
 100. The Preterite 180 
 
 101. The Future 182 
 
 102. The Conversive Vav. 183 
 
 103. Paragogic and Apo 
 copated Future 184 
 
 104. The Imperative 184 
 
 105. Infinitive Absolute . 185 
 
 106. Infinitive Construct. 186 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 107. The Participle 189 
 
 Particles. 
 
 \ 08. Particles of Negative 
 
 Sentences 190 
 
 109. Particles of Inter 
 rogative Sentences . 192 
 
 110. Particles of Optative 
 
 Sentences 192 
 
 111. Particles of Objective 
 
 Sentences 193 
 
 112. Particles of Final 
 
 Sentences 193 
 
 113. Particles of Inferen 
 tial Sentences 194 
 
 114. Particles of Tempo 
 ral Sentences 194 
 
 115. Particles of Causal 
 
 Sentences 194 
 
 116. Particles of Condi 
 tional Sentences 194 
 
 117. Particles of Disjunc 
 tive Sentences 196 
 
 118. Particles of Adver 
 sative Sentences .... 196 
 
 119. Iiitajections 196 
 
 Paradigms 197 
 
 Chrestomathy 220 
 
 Vocabulary I. 242 
 
 Vocabulary II. 258 
 
ABBREVIATIONS AN T D CORRECTIONS. 
 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 abs. absolute 
 
 fut. -- future 
 
 pers. ? 
 
 abstr. - abstract 
 
 gen. -- genitive 
 
 > person 
 
 ace. accusative 
 
 fen. generally 
 
 part. - participle 
 
 act. -- active 
 
 li. - Hipbil 
 
 pass. - passive 
 
 adj. adjective 
 
 Ho. -- Hophal 
 
 in p. -- in pause 
 
 adv. adverb 
 
 Hit. -- Hithphael 
 
 Pi. - Piel 
 
 apocop. apocopated 
 
 i. e. -- id est 
 
 PI. } , . 
 
 art. -- article 
 
 ib. ibidem 
 
 pi. ) 
 
 const, st. > 
 > construct state 
 
 C. St. \ 
 
 imp. imperative 
 inf. infinitive 
 
 proh. probable 
 prop. properly 
 
 comm. - common 
 
 interj. interjection 
 
 Pu. -- Pual 
 
 comp. compare 
 conj. conjunction 
 e ? exempli gratia 
 " 5 for example 
 
 mas H masculine 
 m. 5 
 
 Ni. Nipbal 
 N. -- Note 
 
 reflex. - reflexive 
 sc. scilicet 
 
 sinof. > . , 
 " > singular 
 
 > feminine 
 
 n. p. -- proper name 
 obj. -- object 
 
 subst. - substantive 
 suf. suffix 
 
 fr. b. from bottom 
 
 orig. originally 
 
 tr. - transitive. 
 
 fr. t. from top 
 
 p. - page 
 
 
 CORRECTIONS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 LINE. 
 
 READ. PAGE. 
 
 LINE. READ. 
 
 7. 
 
 1, fr. b. 
 
 httv <&, 
 
 2, fr. b. VTT 
 
 
 
 v T ^: 
 
 VT : T 
 
 12, 
 
 1, fr. b. 
 
 niWflnpi 73 > 
 
 iG, fr. b. ri&nn 
 
 14, 
 
 7, fr. t. 
 
 1, 14 85, 
 
 12, fr. t, -)XK 
 
 15, 
 
 13, fr. b. 
 
 **?!?? 96 
 
 3, fr. t. ^njflfi 
 
 17, 
 
 2, 5, fr. t. 
 
 afformatives 97, 
 
 9 fr. t. miripfi 
 
 27, 
 
 13, fr. b. 
 
 T 
 
 4. fr. b. f|V-, n1^3J1 
 
 31, 
 
 3, fr. b. 
 
 njpga 119 > 
 
 o, fr. b. n^no 
 
 51, 
 
 3, fr. b. 
 
 nna* 12() 
 
 T ~; 
 
 10, fr. t. riD^DD 
 
 53, 
 
 1, fr. b. 
 
 
 4, fr. t. jTJXto*D 
 
 50, 
 
 7, fr. b. 
 
 tDN 1 ? !4i, 
 
 14, fr. t. rosno 
 
 59, 
 
 14, fr. b. 
 
 t^iDH ^^ 
 
 17; fr. t. for step-father, 
 
 , 
 
 13, fr. b. 
 
 bHjD 
 
 read : father-in law 
 
 01, 
 
 4, fr. b. 
 
 , for larger type, 
 
 18, mother-in-law 
 
 
 
 read : asterisks 107, 
 
 9, fr. b. $ 90, 4 
 
 05, 
 
 0, fr. b 
 
 r^rrin 1G9 
 
 2, fr. t. J?3?" 
 
 00,, 
 
 2, fr t. 
 
 *iy 180, 
 
 10, fr. t, ^^sti^t3 
 
 
 
 jfer OP THE ^ 
 
 ^ * 
 
 ((USI7EHSITY1) 
 
14 DAY USE 
 
 RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 
 
 LOAN DEPT. 
 
 This book is due on the last date stamped below, or 
 on the date to which renewed. 
 
 subject to immediate recall. 
 
 DOT 4 6/1-1 PM 
 
 LD 2]A-40m-ll, 63 
 (E1602slO)476B 
 
 General Library 
 
 University of California 
 
 Berkeley 
 
THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY